1263
ANGEL® 7.3 Instructor Reference Guide 6510 Telecom Drive, Suite 400 Indianapolis, IN 46278 www.angellearning.com
| Date post: | 21-Mar-2023 |
| Category: |
Documents |
| Upload: | khangminh22 |
| View: | 0 times |
| Download: | 0 times |
ANGEL® 7.3 Instructor
Reference Guide
6510 Telecom Drive, Suite 400 Indianapolis, IN 46278
www.angellearning.com
Table of Contents 2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions Used in This Manual ............................................................................................. 20
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 21
ANGEL Home ............................................................................................................................... 22
Navigation Tools ......................................................................................................................... 22
Public Resources ........................................................................................................................ 23 Search and Help ....................................................................................................................... 23
How to Log On ............................................................................................................................ 24
Personal Home............................................................................................................................. 25
System Navigation ...................................................................................................................... 25
Edit Page .................................................................................................................................... 27
Courses ....................................................................................................................................... 30 Editing the Courses Component .............................................................................................. 30 Find a Course ........................................................................................................................... 31 Create a Course ....................................................................................................................... 32
Course Data Tab ................................................................................................................... 33
Enrollment Dates Tab ............................................................................................................... 37 Standards Tab .......................................................................................................................... 38 Objectives Tab.......................................................................................................................... 38
Community Groups ..................................................................................................................... 40 Find a Group ............................................................................................................................. 41 Create a Group ......................................................................................................................... 41
Group Data ............................................................................................................................ 41
Standards tab ........................................................................................................................... 44 Objectives Tab.......................................................................................................................... 45 Community Group Settings ...................................................................................................... 46
Course Mail ................................................................................................................................. 47 Touring the Inbox ..................................................................................................................... 48
Message Window .................................................................................................................. 49
Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 50
Using the Actions Drop-down Box ........................................................................................ 51
Using the Filter Drop-down Box ............................................................................................ 52
System Folders ..................................................................................................................... 53
My Folders ............................................................................................................................ 53
Search ................................................................................................................................... 54
Preferences .............................................................................................................................. 54 Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message ................................................................... 56
Formatting Text ..................................................................................................................... 59
Table of Contents 3
Adding and Removing Attachments...................................................................................... 61
Selecting and Removing Recipients ..................................................................................... 61
Message Options .................................................................................................................. 62
Reading and Replying to a Course Mail Message ................................................................... 63 Message Window .................................................................................................................. 63
Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 63
Read Course Mail Message .................................................................................................. 65
Viewing and Saving an Attachment ...................................................................................... 65
Sending Message to a Folder ............................................................................................... 65
Deleting a Message .............................................................................................................. 66
Viewing Who has Read or not Read a Message .................................................................. 66
Sorting and Viewing Messages ................................................................................................ 67 Sorting by Column Headers .................................................................................................. 67
Selecting Messages from My Folders ................................................................................... 67
Showing Messages by Personal or Course .......................................................................... 68
Working with Inbox Folders ...................................................................................................... 68 Creating a Folder .................................................................................................................. 68
Renaming a Folder ............................................................................................................... 69
Deleting a Folder ................................................................................................................... 69
Searching a Folder ................................................................................................................ 69
Toolbox ....................................................................................................................................... 70 Bookmarks ................................................................................................................................ 70 Files .......................................................................................................................................... 71 Calendar ................................................................................................................................... 74 Personal Home Public Resources............................................................................................ 75
Preferences................................................................................................................................. 75 Personal Information ................................................................................................................ 75
Organizational Settings ......................................................................................................... 77
Contact Settings .................................................................................................................... 77
Change Password .................................................................................................................... 79 Theme Selector ........................................................................................................................ 80
General Tab .......................................................................................................................... 80
Colors Tab ............................................................................................................................. 81
Styles Tab ............................................................................................................................. 83
Other Tab .............................................................................................................................. 84
Changing the Theme ............................................................................................................ 85
Editing a Theme .................................................................................................................... 85
Create Your Own Theme ...................................................................................................... 86
System Settings........................................................................................................................ 86 User Level ............................................................................................................................. 87
Local Drive Settings .............................................................................................................. 88
Mail Settings .......................................................................................................................... 88
Table of Contents 4
Instant Messenger ...................................................................................................................... 89
Help ............................................................................................................................................. 90
Course Overview ......................................................................................................................... 91
Navigation Tabs .......................................................................................................................... 91 Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 92
Map ....................................................................................................................................... 92
What‘s New ........................................................................................................................... 93
Tasks ..................................................................................................................................... 94
Search ................................................................................................................................... 96
About ..................................................................................................................................... 97
Course Tab ................................................................................................................................... 98
Edit Page .................................................................................................................................... 98 Rearrange Items on the Course Tab ........................................................................................ 99 Add an Item to the Course Tab .............................................................................................. 100 Delete an Item from the Course Tab ...................................................................................... 101 Edit an Item on the Course Tab ............................................................................................. 102
Activity at a Glance ................................................................................................................... 102 Add an Activity Graph ............................................................................................................. 103
Grades ...................................................................................................................................... 103
Course Calendar ....................................................................................................................... 103
Course Announcements ........................................................................................................... 103
Course News ............................................................................................................................ 103
Calendar Tab .............................................................................................................................. 104
Event Settings ........................................................................................................................... 105 How to Add a Calendar Entry ................................................................................................. 106 How to Edit/Delete/Export Course Calendar Items ................................................................ 108
Calendar Views ......................................................................................................................... 108
Lessons Tab ............................................................................................................................... 110
Principles for Nesting Content .................................................................................................. 110
Add Content .............................................................................................................................. 111
Assessments ............................................................................................................................ 112 How to Create/Edit an assessment ........................................................................................ 112 How to Delete an Assessment ............................................................................................... 129 Assessment Editor Overview ................................................................................................. 130 Creating Assessment Questions ............................................................................................ 131
Overview of Assessment Question Types .......................................................................... 131
Add an Algorithmic Question .............................................................................................. 132
Add a Multiple Choice Question .......................................................................................... 140
Add a True False Question ................................................................................................. 143
Add a Multiple Select Question ........................................................................................... 145
Add an Ordering Question .................................................................................................. 148
Table of Contents 5
Add a Matching Question .................................................................................................... 150
Add a Fill-in-the-blank(s) Question ..................................................................................... 153
Add a Short Answer Question ............................................................................................. 157
Add an Offline Item ............................................................................................................. 159
Add an Essay Question ...................................................................................................... 162
Adding Questions from Other Sources .................................................................................. 164 Copy Questions from an Existing assessment ................................................................... 164
How to Add a Question Pool Item .......................................................................................... 165 Copy and Paste Questions ..................................................................................................... 168 Browse Question Bank ........................................................................................................... 170 Search Question Bank ........................................................................................................... 170 Managing Questions .............................................................................................................. 171
How to Preview an Assessment ......................................................................................... 171
How to rearrange questions ................................................................................................ 171
How to delete questions ...................................................................................................... 171
How to change point values on multiple questions ................................................................ 172 How to regrade a question ..................................................................................................... 172 Create/Edit a Question Set ..................................................................................................... 173
How to Create/Edit a Question Set ..................................................................................... 173
How to Delete a Question Set ............................................................................................. 176
At a Glance ............................................................................................................................. 176 Complete an Assessment ................................................................................................... 178
Blog ........................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating a Blog ....................................................................................................................... 180 How to Create/Edit a Blog ...................................................................................................... 181
Mapping a new objective .................................................................................................... 190
Browse for an objective ....................................................................................................... 190
Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map............................... 190
Click a checkbox next to the objective to map. ................................................................... 190
Click the Save button. ......................................................................................................... 190
Search for an Objective ...................................................................................................... 191
Click the Search Objectives tab. ......................................................................................... 191
Type a keyword and click Search. ...................................................................................... 191
Click a checkbox next to the objective to map. ................................................................... 191
Understanding the Blog Environment ................................................................................. 195
Navigating the header menu ............................................................................................... 195
Navigate to the start page ................................................................................................... 196
Create a new entry .............................................................................................................. 196
Search the blog ................................................................................................................... 196
Search help ......................................................................................................................... 197
Using the sidebar menu ......................................................................................................... 197 Understanding the content area ............................................................................................. 197
Editing an entry ................................................................................................................... 198
Table of Contents 6
Closing an entry .................................................................................................................. 199
Closing other entries ........................................................................................................... 199
Viewing references ............................................................................................................. 199
Jump to an entry ................................................................................................................. 199
Rollback to an entry ............................................................................................................ 199
Delete a blog ....................................................................................................................... 199
Using Comments .................................................................................................................... 200 Adding a comment .............................................................................................................. 200
Deleting a comment ............................................................................................................ 201
Editing a comment .............................................................................................................. 201
Responding to a comment .................................................................................................. 201
Course Syndication ................................................................................................................... 202 What is an RSS Feed? ........................................................................................................... 202 What is a Podcast? ................................................................................................................ 203 Understanding Course Syndication ........................................................................................ 203
How to Create/Edit Course Syndication ............................................................................. 203
How to add an RSS feed .................................................................................................... 211
Subscribe to an RSS feed ...................................................................................................... 239 How to add items from a Course Syndication Folder to iTunes ............................................. 241
Updating Podcasts in iTunes .............................................................................................. 241
Unsubscribing to Podcasts in iTunes .................................................................................. 241
Delete a course syndication ................................................................................................... 241
Discussion Forums ................................................................................................................... 242 Creating a Discussion ............................................................................................................ 242
Discussion Settings Overview ............................................................................................. 243
Discussion Settings: Content Tab ....................................................................................... 244
Discussion Settings: Access Tab ........................................................................................ 246
Discussion Settings: Post Permission Tab ......................................................................... 247
Discussion Settings: Interaction Tab .................................................................................. 248
Discussion Settings: Standards Tab ................................................................................... 251
Discussion Settings: Objectives Tab................................................................................... 253
Discussion Settings: Automate Tab .................................................................................... 254
Discussion Settings: Assignment Tab................................................................................. 255
Using Discussion Forums ....................................................................................................... 258 Exploring the Discussion Interface...................................................................................... 260
Viewing Discussion Messages ............................................................................................ 265
Navigating Messages .......................................................................................................... 268
Managing Messages ........................................................................................................... 277
Scoring and Grading Messages.......................................................................................... 285
Deleting a Discussion ............................................................................................................. 290
Drop boxes................................................................................................................................ 291
Table of Contents 7
Understanding Drop boxes ..................................................................................................... 291 How to Create/Edit a Drop box ............................................................................................... 293 How to Delete a Drop box ...................................................................................................... 304 Using Drop Boxes .................................................................................................................. 305
How to add a file to the drop box ........................................................................................ 305
How to grade a drop box submission ..................................................................................... 306 How to delete drop box submission ....................................................................................... 308
Files .......................................................................................................................................... 308 How to Create/Edit a File ....................................................................................................... 309 Editing Uploaded File Settings ............................................................................................... 321 Deleting a File......................................................................................................................... 321
Folder ........................................................................................................................................ 322 How to Create a Folder .......................................................................................................... 323 How to delete a folder ............................................................................................................ 335
Game ........................................................................................................................................ 335 How to Create/Edit a Game ................................................................................................... 336 How to Create a Crossword Puzzle ....................................................................................... 345 How to Edit Questions & Settings .......................................................................................... 347 How to complete a crossword ................................................................................................ 347 How to Grade a Crossword Puzzle ........................................................................................ 349 How to create/edit a quiz show .............................................................................................. 349 How to complete quiz show .................................................................................................... 352 How to Delete a Game ........................................................................................................... 354
IMS/SCORM Package .............................................................................................................. 355 How to Upload an IMS/SCORM Package .............................................................................. 355 How to Delete an IMS/SCORM Package ............................................................................... 356 Creating a Link to an IMS/SCORM Manifest ............................................................................. 356
How to Create/Edit an IMS/SCORM Link ........................................................................... 357
SCORM Assignment .............................................................................................................. 366
Links .......................................................................................................................................... 367 Understanding Links ............................................................................................................... 368 How to Create/Edit a Link ....................................................................................................... 369 Deleting a link ......................................................................................................................... 379
Page .......................................................................................................................................... 380 How to Create or Edit a Page ................................................................................................. 381
Section Heading ....................................................................................................................... 395 How to Create or Edit a Section Header ................................................................................ 395
Quizzes ..................................................................................................................................... 399 Understanding Quizzes .......................................................................................................... 399 How to Create/Edit a Quiz ...................................................................................................... 400 How to Delete a Quiz ............................................................................................................. 414 Creating Questions ................................................................................................................. 414
How to Add a Section Heading ........................................................................................... 415
Add a Multiple Choice Question .......................................................................................... 418
Add a Drop-down List Question .......................................................................................... 421
Add a Multiple Select Question ........................................................................................... 424
Add a True False Question ................................................................................................. 427
Add a Matching Question .................................................................................................... 429
Table of Contents 8
Add an Ordering Question .................................................................................................. 432
Add a Fill-in-the-blank Question .......................................................................................... 435
Add a Fill-in-multiple-blanks Question ................................................................................ 437
Add a Short Answer Question ............................................................................................. 441
Add an Essay Question ...................................................................................................... 444
Add an Off-line Item ............................................................................................................ 447
Add a Pool Item................................................................................................................... 449
Copy Questions................................................................................................................... 451
Import Questions ................................................................................................................. 452
Calculated Questions Wizard .............................................................................................. 453
To Grade a Quiz Response .................................................................................................... 457 To View Submissions ............................................................................................................. 458 To Delete a Submission ......................................................................................................... 459 Grade by Question ................................................................................................................. 459 Export Submission and Grade Data ....................................................................................... 460 Previewing Quizzes ................................................................................................................ 461 Completing Quizzes ............................................................................................................... 461
Surveys ..................................................................................................................................... 461 Creating a Survey ................................................................................................................... 461 How to Create/Edit a Survey .................................................................................................. 463 How to Delete a Survey .......................................................................................................... 478 Overview of Survey Question Types ...................................................................................... 479
How to Add a Section Heading ........................................................................................... 479
How to Add a Text Box Question ........................................................................................ 480
How to Add a Text Area Question ...................................................................................... 482
How to Add a Checkbox Question ...................................................................................... 484
How to Add a Check List Question ..................................................................................... 486
How to Add a Survey Drop-down List Question ................................................................. 489
How to Add an Option List Question ................................................................................... 491
How to Add a Likert Scale Question ................................................................................... 493
How to Copy Survey Questions ............................................................................................. 495 How to Import Questions ........................................................................................................ 495 Previewing Surveys ................................................................................................................ 497 Completing Surveys ............................................................................................................... 497
Wikis ......................................................................................................................................... 498 Creating a Wiki ....................................................................................................................... 500 How to Create/Edit a Wiki ...................................................................................................... 500 Understanding the Wiki Environment ..................................................................................... 512 Navigating the header menu .................................................................................................. 513
Navigate to the start page ................................................................................................... 513
Create a new entry .............................................................................................................. 513
Search the wiki .................................................................................................................... 514
Search help ......................................................................................................................... 514
Using the sidebar menu ......................................................................................................... 514
Table of Contents 9
Understanding the content area ............................................................................................. 515 Editing an entry ................................................................................................................... 515
Closing an entry .................................................................................................................. 516
Closing other entries ........................................................................................................... 516
Viewing references ............................................................................................................. 516
Jump to an entry ................................................................................................................. 517
Rollback to an entry ............................................................................................................ 517
Delete a wiki ........................................................................................................................... 517 Using Comments .................................................................................................................... 517
Adding a comment .............................................................................................................. 518
Deleting a comment ............................................................................................................ 519
Editing a comment .............................................................................................................. 519
Responding to a comment .................................................................................................. 519
Advanced Content Settings ...................................................................................................... 520 Advanced Settings ................................................................................................................. 520 Action Settings........................................................................................................................ 520
More Options ............................................................................................................................ 525 Copy Items ............................................................................................................................. 525 Import from Learning Object Repository ................................................................................ 525
To Import Items from a Learning Object Repository ........................................................... 526
To Import Content Using the Browse Option ...................................................................... 526
To Import Content Using the Repository Search Option .................................................... 528
Import from a Course or Group .............................................................................................. 530
Templates ................................................................................................................................. 531 Add from Template ................................................................................................................. 531 Add Content from MERLOT ................................................................................................... 532
Rearrange ................................................................................................................................. 533
Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 534 Activity Summary .................................................................................................................... 534 Activity Detail .......................................................................................................................... 535 Response Summary ............................................................................................................... 537 Item Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 538 SCORM Reports..................................................................................................................... 539
Utilities ...................................................................................................................................... 539 Associated File Manager ........................................................................................................ 539
How to Upload Associated Files ......................................................................................... 540
How to Upload a File using Drag and Drop ........................................................................ 541
How to Create a Folder as an Associated File ................................................................... 542
How to Create a File as an Associated File ........................................................................ 543
How to Link to an Associated File ....................................................................................... 543
Move Item ............................................................................................................................... 543 Export Item ............................................................................................................................. 544 View, Grade, or Delete Submissions...................................................................................... 544
To Grade a Quiz Response ................................................................................................ 544
Table of Contents 10
To View Submissions .......................................................................................................... 545
To Delete a Submission ...................................................................................................... 546
Grade by Question .............................................................................................................. 546
How to regrade a question .................................................................................................. 547
Export Submission and Grade Data ....................................................................................... 548 Pending Items......................................................................................................................... 549 Email Quiz/ Email Survey ....................................................................................................... 550 Add to Pool ............................................................................................................................. 550 View Posted Submissions ...................................................................................................... 550 Export Posted Submissions ................................................................................................... 551 Export Response Statistics .................................................................................................... 552 SCORM Assignment .............................................................................................................. 553 Re-upload File ........................................................................................................................ 554 Download Submissions .......................................................................................................... 555 Grade by Question ................................................................................................................. 557
Delete ........................................................................................................................................ 558 To Delete an Item ................................................................................................................... 558 To Delete Access Logs .......................................................................................................... 558 To Delete Associated Files ..................................................................................................... 559 To Delete Sub-items from a Folder ........................................................................................ 559 To Delete All Submissions ..................................................................................................... 560 To Delete Questions ............................................................................................................... 560 Delete Discussion Forum Posts ............................................................................................. 561
Preferences............................................................................................................................... 561 Navigation Menu..................................................................................................................... 562 Default Access Settings ......................................................................................................... 562
Tracking .............................................................................................................................. 562
Viewable By ........................................................................................................................ 562
Advanced Settings ................................................................................................................. 562 Root View ............................................................................................................................ 562
Folder View ......................................................................................................................... 563
Editor Menu ......................................................................................................................... 563
Top-level Delete Menu ........................................................................................................ 563
Print ........................................................................................................................................... 563
My Notes ................................................................................................................................... 563 Using My Notes ...................................................................................................................... 563
Previous/Next ........................................................................................................................... 564
Resources Tab ........................................................................................................................... 565
Syllabus .................................................................................................................................... 565 Creating a Syllabus ................................................................................................................ 565
Using Syllabus Files ............................................................................................................ 570
Course Resources .................................................................................................................... 571 Adding Resources .................................................................................................................. 572
Institutional Resources ............................................................................................................. 572
Communicate Tab...................................................................................................................... 573
Table of Contents 11
Course Mail ............................................................................................................................... 574 Touring the Inbox ................................................................................................................... 574
Message Window ................................................................................................................ 576
Toolbar ................................................................................................................................ 576
Using the Actions Drop-down Box ...................................................................................... 577
Using the Filter Drop-down Box .......................................................................................... 578
System Folders ................................................................................................................... 578
My Folders .......................................................................................................................... 579
Search ................................................................................................................................. 580
Preferences ............................................................................................................................ 580 Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message ................................................................. 581
Formatting Text ................................................................................................................... 584
Adding and Removing Attachments.................................................................................... 586
Selecting and Removing Recipients ................................................................................... 587
Message Options ................................................................................................................ 588
Reading and Replying to a Course Mail Message ................................................................. 589 Message Window ................................................................................................................ 589
Toolbar ................................................................................................................................ 589
Read Course Mail Message ................................................................................................ 591
Viewing and Saving an Attachment .................................................................................... 591
Sending Message to a Folder ............................................................................................. 591
Deleting a Message ............................................................................................................ 592
Viewing Who has Read or not Read a Message ................................................................ 592
Sorting and Viewing Messages .............................................................................................. 593 Sorting by Column Headers ................................................................................................ 593
Selecting Messages from My Folders ................................................................................. 593
Showing Messages by Personal or Course ........................................................................ 594
Working with Inbox Folders .................................................................................................... 594 Creating a Folder ................................................................................................................ 594
Renaming a Folder ............................................................................................................. 595
Deleting a Folder ................................................................................................................. 595
Searching a Folder .............................................................................................................. 595
Roster ....................................................................................................................................... 596 Course Roster ........................................................................................................................ 596
User Profile ......................................................................................................................... 597
Teams ................................................................................................................................. 599
Team Files ................................................................................................................................ 599 Team Projects ........................................................................................................................ 599
News and Events ...................................................................................................................... 600 Announcements...................................................................................................................... 600
Add a Course Announcement ............................................................................................. 600
Edit/Delete a Course Announcement ................................................................................. 602
Table of Contents 12
News ....................................................................................................................................... 602 Add a News Article .............................................................................................................. 602
Edit/Delete a News Article .................................................................................................. 605
Polls ........................................................................................................................................ 605 Add a Poll Question ............................................................................................................ 606
Edit/Delete a Poll Question ................................................................................................. 608
View Summary or Detailed Report...................................................................................... 608
Export a Poll Question ........................................................................................................ 608
Live Chat ................................................................................................................................... 609 Live Chats Editor .................................................................................................................... 609
Add a Live Chat Session ..................................................................................................... 610
Edit/Delete a Live Chat Session ......................................................................................... 611
View Logs ............................................................................................................................... 611 Clear Logs .............................................................................................................................. 612
Desktop Sharing ....................................................................................................................... 612 Using Desktop Sharing ........................................................................................................... 612
Desktop Sharing Set-up ...................................................................................................... 613
Desktop Presentation .......................................................................................................... 616
Whiteboard................................................................................................................................ 618 Whiteboard Tools ................................................................................................................... 618 Using the Whiteboard ............................................................................................................. 619
Live Office Hours ...................................................................................................................... 619 Add a Live Office Hours Session............................................................................................ 620 Edit a Live Office Hours Session ............................................................................................ 621 Delete a Live Office Hours Session........................................................................................ 621
Discussion Forums ................................................................................................................... 621
Communicate Links .................................................................................................................. 621 Add a Link ............................................................................................................................... 622 Edit/Delete a Communicate Link ............................................................................................ 623
Report Tab .................................................................................................................................. 624
Reports Console Tour ............................................................................................................... 624 Report Settings Tab ............................................................................................................... 624
Choose Report .................................................................................................................... 624
Configure Report ................................................................................................................. 625
Command Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 626
Saved Reports Tab ................................................................................................................ 627
Running Reports ....................................................................................................................... 628 Running the Learner Profile Report Category ........................................................................ 628
Available Learner Profile Report Data ................................................................................ 628
Using the Learner Profile Category..................................................................................... 629
Running the Grades Report Category .................................................................................... 629 Available Grades Report Data ............................................................................................ 630
Running the Milestones Report Category .............................................................................. 630 Available Milestones Report Data ....................................................................................... 630
Table of Contents 13
Running a Print Preview ......................................................................................................... 630 Sending a Report ................................................................................................................... 631 Exporting a Report ................................................................................................................. 631 Saving a Report ...................................................................................................................... 631
Viewing Saved Reports ............................................................................................................ 632
Automate Tab ............................................................................................................................. 634
Agents Console ........................................................................................................................ 634 Agent Console Fields ............................................................................................................. 634 Scheduled Agent .................................................................................................................... 635
Create a Scheduled Agent .................................................................................................. 636
Content Agent......................................................................................................................... 638 Creating a Content Agent ................................................................................................... 639
Event Agent ............................................................................................................................ 647 Create an Event Agent ........................................................................................................ 648
Actions .................................................................................................................................... 650
Manage Tab ................................................................................................................................ 656
Course Management ................................................................................................................ 656 Gradebook .............................................................................................................................. 656
Gradebook Setup Wizard .................................................................................................... 657
Gradebook Interface ........................................................................................................... 661
Gradebook Management ........................................................................................................ 682 Categories ........................................................................................................................... 682
Assignments ........................................................................................................................ 688
Macros ................................................................................................................................ 692
Grading Scale ..................................................................................................................... 693
Gradebook Tutorial ............................................................................................................. 694
Roster ..................................................................................................................................... 694 Roster Editor ....................................................................................................................... 694
Batch Enroll ......................................................................................................................... 702
Teams ..................................................................................................................................... 715 Teams Editor ....................................................................................................................... 716
Add a Team ......................................................................................................................... 716
Unassigned Users ............................................................................................................... 717
Edit an Existing Team ......................................................................................................... 718
Edit Team Settings .............................................................................................................. 719
Rename Team .................................................................................................................... 720
Delete Team ........................................................................................................................ 721
Random Team Generator ...................................................................................................... 721 Criteria Selection ................................................................................................................. 721
Attendance ............................................................................................................................. 725 Attendance Manager ........................................................................................................... 725
Preferences ......................................................................................................................... 728
Table of Contents 14
Export .................................................................................................................................. 728
Mode/Sort Views ................................................................................................................. 729
Question Bank Manager ......................................................................................................... 729 How to Create/Rename a Folder in the Question Bank Manager .......................................... 730 How to Delete a Folder in the Question Bank Manager ......................................................... 731 How to Create/Edit an Assessment using the Question Bank Manager ................................ 731 How to Delete a Question from the Question Bank Manager ................................................ 732 How to Rearrange Questions in the Question Bank Manager ............................................... 733
Environment Settings ................................................................................................................ 733 General Course Settings ........................................................................................................ 733
Course Data Tab ................................................................................................................. 733
Enrollment Dates Tab ......................................................................................................... 736
Standards Tab..................................................................................................................... 737
Objectives Tab .................................................................................................................... 738
Course Theme Selector ......................................................................................................... 740 Tab Settings ........................................................................................................................... 741 Environment Variables ........................................................................................................... 743
Course Environment Variables ........................................................................................... 743
Mail Settings ............................................................................................................................. 745
Data Management .................................................................................................................... 746 Course Files Manager ............................................................................................................ 747
Course Files ........................................................................................................................ 747
Add Content to Course Files ............................................................................................... 747
Download All ....................................................................................................................... 747
Download File ..................................................................................................................... 748
Rename File ........................................................................................................................ 748
Copy File ............................................................................................................................. 748
Move File ............................................................................................................................. 749
Zip File ................................................................................................................................ 749
Delete File ........................................................................................................................... 750
Backup/Restore ...................................................................................................................... 750 How to Backup a Course .................................................................................................... 751
How to Restore a Course .................................................................................................... 751
Import Wizard ......................................................................................................................... 752 Content Package................................................................................................................. 752
Calendar and Announcements ........................................................................................... 760
Master Course..................................................................................................................... 760
Copy Course ....................................................................................................................... 761
Export Wizard ......................................................................................................................... 762 ANGEL® 7.3 Archive .......................................................................................................... 762
IMS PACKAGE ................................................................................................................... 763
Data Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 764 Date Manager ......................................................................................................................... 765
Table of Contents 15
Setting Course Dates .......................................................................................................... 765
Question Bank Manager ......................................................................................................... 768 How to Add a Keyword to the Keyword Manager ............................................................... 768
How to Delete a Keyword from the Keyword Manager ....................................................... 768
How to View Questions Associated with a Keyword........................................................... 769
How to Import Multiple Keywords into the Keyword Manager ............................................ 769
How to Export Keywords from the Keyword Manager ........................................................ 770
Learning Outcome Management (LOM) .................................................................................. 771
Learning Outcomes Management Terminology and Approach ................................................ 771
Standards and Objectives Mapping .......................................................................................... 772 Enabling Standards and Objectives ....................................................................................... 773 Selecting Standards ............................................................................................................... 774 Adding Objectives .................................................................................................................. 775
Adding a New Folder .......................................................................................................... 776
Adding Outcomes (Objectives) ........................................................................................... 776
Renaming Outcomes Folders ............................................................................................. 777
Editing an objective ............................................................................................................. 778
Move up .............................................................................................................................. 779
Move down .......................................................................................................................... 779
Delete .................................................................................................................................. 780
Learning Object Repository (LOR) .......................................................................................... 782
LOR Tab ................................................................................................................................... 782
Repository Tab ......................................................................................................................... 782 Create a Content Template .................................................................................................... 783
Publish a Template ............................................................................................................. 784
Publish .................................................................................................................................... 785
LOR Manage Tab ..................................................................................................................... 787 Repository Access .................................................................................................................. 787
Course and Group Access .................................................................................................. 787
Appendix I .................................................................................................................................. 788
Inline HTML Editor .................................................................................................................... 788
Appendix II ................................................................................................................................. 791
Merged Roster Manager ........................................................................................................... 791 Accessing the Merged Roster Manager ................................................................................. 791 Merged Roster Manager Interface ......................................................................................... 791
Create a New Merged Course ............................................................................................ 791
Merged Course Settings ..................................................................................................... 793
Appendix III ................................................................................................................................ 796
Testing Security ........................................................................................................................ 796 User Preview and Feedback .................................................................................................. 796 Time Limit with Auto Submit ................................................................................................... 796
Table of Contents 16
User Team .............................................................................................................................. 796 Password ................................................................................................................................ 797 Display Mode .......................................................................................................................... 797 Start Date and End Date ........................................................................................................ 797 Max Questions........................................................................................................................ 797 IP Filter ................................................................................................................................... 797 Pending Items......................................................................................................................... 797
Appendix IV ................................................................................................................................ 798
Content Manager Tokens ......................................................................................................... 798 Drive Tokens .......................................................................................................................... 798 User Tokens ........................................................................................................................... 798 Course Tokens ....................................................................................................................... 799 Application Tokens ................................................................................................................. 799 Resource Tokens ................................................................................................................... 801 Event Tokens.......................................................................................................................... 801 Quiz GRADE/SUBMIT Events ................................................................................................ 803 Survey SUBMIT Events .......................................................................................................... 803 Custom Tokens ...................................................................................................................... 803
Appendix V ................................................................................................................................. 804
Gradebook Formula Tokens ..................................................................................................... 804
Appendix VI ................................................................................................................................ 807
Defined Environment Variables ................................................................................................ 807 Calendar ................................................................................................................................. 807 Content Manager .................................................................................................................... 807 Lessons/Content Only ............................................................................................................ 808 Other Content Manager Instances ......................................................................................... 812 Communicate Settings ........................................................................................................... 813 Course/Group Manage Settings ............................................................................................. 816 Course/Group Tabs ................................................................................................................ 817 Themes (Style Sheets) ........................................................................................................... 818 System Settings...................................................................................................................... 819
Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step ......................................................................................... 822
Global and Home Page Tasks .................................................................................................. 822 How to Change Personal Information .................................................................................... 822 How to Customize the Course Page ...................................................................................... 831 How to See Courses That Are Disabled ................................................................................ 838 How to Remove Courses from Course List View ................................................................... 840 How to Merge Two (or More) Course Rosters for Multiple Sections ...................................... 843 How to Set Up and Use a Master Course .............................................................................. 847
Content Management Tasks..................................................................................................... 850 How to Organize Content ....................................................................................................... 850 How to Edit a Syllabus ........................................................................................................... 857
Editing a Syllabus Using the Syllabus Template ................................................................ 857
Editing a Syllabus Uploaded as a Document ...................................................................... 861
How to Upload Files for Course Use ...................................................................................... 865 Files Used as Content Items in Lessons ............................................................................ 865
Uploading Files Linked Within an HTML (Web Page) Document ....................................... 868
How to Share Content Within a Learning Object Repository with Other Courses and Users 874
Table of Contents 17
How to Link or Copy Content from a Learning Object Repository into a Course ................... 878 How to Copy Content Items from One Course to Another ..................................................... 889 How to Upload Images in a Content Item .............................................................................. 894 How to Add Images to a Content Item: Creating an Image Gallery ....................................... 901 How to Upload a Web Page and Its Contents ........................................................................ 909 Understanding the Difference Between Assessments and Quizzes ...................................... 913
New Features in Assessments ........................................................................................... 918
Features in Quizzes and Not Assessments ........................................................................ 922
Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings; Creating an Assessment’s Content, Access, and Interaction Settings ............................................................................................ 927 Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings; Review and Assignment Settings ....... 935 How to Use Question Sets ..................................................................................................... 940 How to Use Question Banks: Definition of Question Bank and Creating a Question Bank ... 947
Adding Questions to a Question Bank Within the Question Bank ...................................... 948
How to Use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment from a Question Bank ..................... 953 Using the ―Browse‖ Option .................................................................................................. 955
Using the ―Search‖ Option .................................................................................................. 958
How to Use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment with Question Pools ........................ 967 How to Create a Secure Assessment .................................................................................... 978 How to Create a Pass/Fail Exam ........................................................................................... 986 How Students Can Reenter an Exam .................................................................................... 988 How to Grade an Essay or Short Answer Question ............................................................... 991 How to Increase the Maximum File Size for Drop Box Submissions ..................................... 994 How to Grade a Drop Box Assignment .................................................................................. 997 How to Grade Drop Box Submissions Offline ...................................................................... 1006
Windows XP ...................................................................................................................... 1008
Vista .................................................................................................................................. 1011
How to Integrate PowerPoint Presentations ........................................................................ 1021 Preparing Your PowerPoint Presentation ......................................................................... 1021
Uploading Your Presentation to ANGEL ........................................................................... 1023
How to Set Up and Use Games: Crossword Puzzles .......................................................... 1027 How to Set Up and Use Games: Quiz Shows ...................................................................... 1036 How to Set Up Teams Within a Single Discussion Forum ................................................... 1040 How to Create an RSS Feed ................................................................................................ 1044 How to Subscribe to a Course RSS Feed ............................................................................ 1048 How to Set Up the Gradebook: Preferences and Grading Scale ......................................... 1053
Points- vs. Percentage-Based System ............................................................................. 1053
Setting Up Grading Scale (Letter Grade Scale) ................................................................ 1056
How to Set Up the Gradebook: Categories and Assignments ............................................. 1059 Differences between Categories and Assignments .......................................................... 1059
Setting Up Categories ....................................................................................................... 1059
Setting Up Categories while Creating Assignments in Lessons ....................................... 1059
Setting Up Categories when Using the Gradebook Wizard .............................................. 1061
Setting Up Categories within the Gradebook .................................................................... 1063
Setting Up Assignments .................................................................................................... 1065
Setting Up Assignments Within a Content Item ................................................................ 1066
Setting Up Assignments Within the Gradebook ................................................................ 1067
Table of Contents 18
Setting Up Assignments Within the Categories Menu ...................................................... 1069
How to Rearrange Categories and Assignments in the Gradebook .................................... 1071 Rearranging Categories .................................................................................................... 1071
How to Create an Extra Credit Assignment ......................................................................... 1078 Creating an Extra Credit Category .................................................................................... 1078
Creating an Extra Credit Assignment................................................................................ 1083
How Students Can See Their Grades .................................................................................. 1087 Using the Grades Nugget ................................................................................................. 1087
Using the Reports Console ............................................................................................... 1089
Using Course Tools .......................................................................................................... 1089
How to Create a Survey ....................................................................................................... 1093 How to Create Teams .......................................................................................................... 1104
Randomly Generating Teams and Members .................................................................... 1104
Creating Teams and Assigning Team Members Manually ............................................... 1108
How to Set Up Team Projects .............................................................................................. 1113 How to Rebalance Teams .................................................................................................... 1120 How to Set Team Access Rights for Lesson Content .......................................................... 1126
Restricting a Content Item to One or More Teams ........................................................... 1126
Creating Different Settings for Different Teams ................................................................ 1127
How to Automate Sending an Email to Students Who Have Not Logged onto a Course within a Specified Time Period .......................................................................................................... 1131 How to Release Content to Students ................................................................................... 1138 How to Release Content Conditionally by Using an Agent .................................................. 1140
Releasing Content by Using the ―Unlock‖ Action .............................................................. 1140
How to Post a Grade for a Survey by Using an Automated Agent ...................................... 1150 Create the Survey Assignment ......................................................................................... 1150
Create the Automated Agent ............................................................................................ 1151
Course Management Tasks.................................................................................................... 1160 Understanding Course Rights .............................................................................................. 1160
How You Can Limit Access in a Course ........................................................................... 1160
Authenticated Guest ......................................................................................................... 1164
Student .............................................................................................................................. 1165
Team Leader ..................................................................................................................... 1165
Mentor ............................................................................................................................... 1165
Course Assistant ............................................................................................................... 1166
Course Editor .................................................................................................................... 1167
How to Customize Tabs ....................................................................................................... 1168 How to Create a FAQ (Frequently-Asked Questions) Section in a Course ......................... 1175
Create the Web Page for the FAQ Section ....................................................................... 1178
Linking the FAQ Page to the FAQ Section ....................................................................... 1184
How to Check Student Activity Within a Course .................................................................. 1188 How to Add or Remove a Student from a Course ................................................................ 1196 How to Post an Announcement ............................................................................................ 1202 How to Add Assignment Dates to the Calendar ................................................................... 1205 How to Link to Content Items from a Calendar Event .......................................................... 1209
Table of Contents 19
How to Set Up Live Chat ...................................................................................................... 1215 How to Set Mail Privileges Within a Course ......................................................................... 1218 How to Create Folders in Course Mail ................................................................................. 1221 How to Share and Edit Files Among Multiple Users ............................................................ 1226 How to Use the HTML Editor: Changing Fonts and Colors ................................................. 1232 How to Backup a Course ...................................................................................................... 1237
When Backups Should Be Done ....................................................................................... 1237
Backing Up a Course ........................................................................................................ 1237
How to Activate/Deactivate a Course ................................................................................... 1242 How to Archive and Export a Course ................................................................................... 1246
Archiving a Course ............................................................................................................ 1246
How to Populate Course Content into a New Course Shell ................................................. 1250 Importing a Saved Archive File ......................................................................................... 1250
Importing Content from a Master Course ......................................................................... 1256
How to Use the Copy Course Wizard to Copy Content from One Course to Another ......... 1260
Conventions Used in this Manual 20
Conventions Used in This Manual
Typographic Convention
Type Style Represents
Example Text Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, and pushbuttons.
Abbreviation Convention
Abbreviation Represents
N Normal view of the content item editor
A Advanced view of the content item editor
Document Icons
Icon Icon Meaning
Tip – a tip is a type of note that helps the users apply the techniques and procedures described in the test to their specific needs. A tip suggests an alternative method that may not be obvious and helps users understand the benefits and capabilities of the item.
Note – Notes call the user‘s attention to information of special importance.
Reference – Refers the user to another source of information.
Caution – Caution advises users of actions that could potentially cause problems.
Step-by-Steps -- Brief tutorials that work step-by-step through the most frequently asked questions. A full listing can be found in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step.
Introduction 21
Introduction
Welcome to the ANGEL® 7.3 Instructor Reference Manual. This manual is designed to provide instructors with a basic understanding of ANGEL® 7.3 and its primary tools.
ANGEL® 7.3 is a web-based course management and collaboration portal that enables educators to manage course materials and to communicate quickly and effectively with their students. ANGEL® 7.3 can function both as a complement to traditional courses and as a site for distance learning.
With ANGEL® 7.3, you can post documents online, such as your course syllabus; administer surveys, quizzes, and tests; send and receive course mail; establish and monitor discussion forums and chat rooms; receive and grade uploaded assignments using online drop boxes; create teams for discussion or for special projects; and more.
A significant portion of ANGEL® 7.3‘s power lies in its ability to be tailored to specific institutional needs. Please note that because your institution determines which tools are made accessible, some segments of this guide may not apply to your use of ANGEL® 7.3 Contact your institution‘s support desk for questions regarding ANGEL® 7.3 administrations.
ANGEL Home 22
ANGEL Home
The ANGEL Home page (ANGEL Home) functions primarily as the log-in screen and starting point for each ANGEL session.
Power Strip icons
The left edge of the ANGEL Home page is called the Power Strip; this area contains basic system navigation tools. Other sections of the screen enable you to log into ANGEL and access various resources.
Navigation Tools
There are three system navigation tools at the top of the Power Strip. These icons are always available on the ANGEL Home page and when you are working in a course or a group.
ANGEL Home 23
The following table explains these navigation tools.
Icon Name – Description
Home – Returns you to your home page
Help – Displays ANGEL online help, guides, and resources
Log Off – Logs you out of the ANGEL environment
Public Resources
ANGEL Home offers a variety of public resources for instructors and students. To access a resource, simply click its hyperlinked title.
All these resources may not be available at your institution. Further, your institution may offer additional customized resources.
Standard resources include the following:
Library Resources provides access your institution‘s library resources, such as electronic journals, catalogs, and databases.
Event Calendar provides access to your institution‘s public calendar, including events, significant academic or training dates, and other entries.
In the News keeps you up to date on your institution‘s latest news.
Public Surveys enables you to participate in public surveys at your institution.
Public Forums lets you join public discussions at your institution.
These resources are also available in the Toolbox section of your personal home page.
Search and Help
The Search and Help section provides search capabilities for courses and community groups. Access is provided to the online help and guided tour of ANGEL® 7.3.
Resource Name Description
Course Search Allows a user to search for courses available at your institution. Course search displays only those courses designated searchable by your institution.
Community Search Allows a user to search for groups available at your institution. Community search displays only those groups designated searchable by your institution.
People Search Allows a user to search for user profiles at your institution. Due to privacy concerns, public listing of personal information is voluntary.
ANGEL Home 24
Help Provides access to online ANGEL® 7.3 help, guides and resources. Available resources vary based on your institution‘s requirements.
Guided Tour Provides an overview of the ANGEL® 7.3 environment.
Log into ANGEL before performing this search to view a larger selection of courses, groups and profiles including those that have been made viewable only to authenticated ANGEL users.
How to Log On
To log on to ANGEL® 7.3 you need your username and password provided by your institution.
1. Type your Username and Password into the appropriate fields.
2. Click the Log On button.
Click I forgot my password hyperlink to request a reminder email or click the Request an account hyperlink to request a username and password for the system.
The password reminder and account request options are not available at all institutions. For information regarding how to request an ANGEL user account contact your institution‘s support desk.
Personal Home 25
Personal Home
When you log into ANGEL® 7.3, you are presented with your personal page – Home. Home provides you with access to all courses that you are teaching or taking, as well as to all groups that you are leading or participating in at your institution. Additionally, Home contains a variety of tools to assist you with your instructional work.
To customize the selection and appearance of tools on your personal home page, click the Edit Page link in the Home menu bar.
System Navigation
Your personal home page features a set of navigation tools, located in the Power Strip along the left edge of the screen. These icons are always available on your personal home page and whenever you are working in a course or group.
Personal Home 26
―Power Strip‖ icons
508 Accessibility & PDA mode
controls
The following table describes these navigation tools.
Icon Name - Description
Home – Returns you to your home page
Help – Displays ANGEL online help, guides, and resources
Log Off – Logs you out of the ANGEL environment
Personal Home 27
Icon Name - Description
ePortfolio – Launches ePortfolio (only appears if your institution has ePortfolio installed.)
Learning Object Repository (LOR) – Accesses your personal LOR
Personal Preferences – Provides access to your user settings, such as your personal information, password, theme selector, system settings, and PDA agent
ANGEL IM – Opens the online ANGEL instant messenger
There are two additional accessibility-related icons at the bottom of the page that function as illustrated and described below.
Icon Name – Description
508 – Allows you to create a profile that describes your particular needs for accessing course material. If necessary, you can access an ACCLIP for use with ANGEL.
The acronym ACCLIP stands for ―Accessibility for Learner Information Profile.‖ ANGEL‘s Accessibility menu allows you to creaate, save, or import ACCLIP profiles.
PDA – Allows you to activate ANGEL in PDA mode. Page layout and navigation are customized to suit your selection.
Edit Page
Located under the Home title the Edit Page hyperlink allows a user to change what is shown on Personal Home. The Edit Page tool uses drag-n-drop to move items to different locations on your Personal Home page.
Personal Home 28
Available components are displayed via the Add Components button.
To add a component to your Personal Home page:
1. Click the Add Components button found in the upper left of the screen under the course name.
Personal Home 29
2. Select item(s) from the Available Components list and click ―Add Selected‖.
3. Once the components have been added, you may rearrange them.
4. Click the Save button when finished.
The Location and State menus provide information concerning the component being added. When a component is selected, the Location list changes to indicate the default location for the selected component. You can change the default by selecting a different location from the list. The State list indicates how the component is displayed on the page, e.g. opened, closed, fixed or inline. To change the default state, select from the state list the desired affect.
To change the location:
1. To move elements, left click and drag them to their new location (your mouse
cursor will change to the move ( ) symbol when you can move the item.) While you‘re moving the element, other elements on the page will automatically move out of the way.
2. Click the Save button when finished.
Personal Home 30
Courses
The Courses component contains all the courses that you may be taking or teaching. Within the Courses component there are several controls:
Edit -- The Edit ( ) function allows you to customize additional information displayed for each course (see Course Settings below for additional information).
Find a Course – The Find a Course link takes you to a page where you can find all your courses.
Create a Course – The Create a Course link launches the Course Creation process.
Note that access to these hyperlinks may vary based on your institution‘s configuration.
Editing the Courses Component
The title bar contains an Edit button ( ) that appears when you mouse over the Courses component.
For more on this topic see “How to Remove Courses from the Course List View” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Clicking the Edit button ( ) launches the Courses Settings page (see below).
Personal Home 31
There are five options on this page:
Display Filter – select the courses you want to appear in your Courses component
Group By – By default your courses are displayed in alphabetical order. You can optionally choose to organize your courses by Semester and/or Category.
Also Display – controls which additional data elements are displayed under your course title within the Courses component.
Tasks – controls which task icons and data are displayed under your course title within the Courses component
Show Disabled – determines if disabled courses are displayed in the Display Filter section. If enabled, disabled courses in which you have access rights will appear in the list of courses where you can choose to have them displayed in the Courses component.
For more on this topic see “How to See Courses that are Disabled” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Find a Course
Search for existing courses by clicking on the Find a Course hyperlink (located below the Courses title bar). The Course Search page allows you to search existing courses by keyword, semester, campus, school, department, course or section criteria. Once you have clicked the Search button a list of available courses is displayed based on your search criteria.
Personal Home 32
Create a Course
If enabled, click the Create a Course hyperlink to create a course. The New Course editor is divided into four tabs: Course Data, Enrollment Dates, Standards, and Objectives.
Personal Home 33
Course Data Tab
The Course Data tab allows the user to set the information concerning the course. Control Code Settings, General Information and Access Settings.
When creating a course it is recommended to follow institutional guidelines for campus codes, department codes, etc. Course codes should be comprised of alpha numeric characters and may include underscore, dash, or period special characters. Other special characters should not be used. The Other button allows you to create a new semester, campus, school, or department code following the standards listed below.
Control Code Settings
Personal Home 34
Field Name Definition
Department A unique identifier for the department in which the course is taught. Field limitation is 6 characters and comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore or dash. Other special characters should not be used.
Semester A unique identifier for the semester in which the course is taught. Field limitation is 12 characters and comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore or dash. Other special characters should not be used.
School A unique identifier for the school in which the course is taught. Field limitation is 6 characters and comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore or dash. Other special characters should not be used.
Course A unique identifier for the course. Field limitation is 8 characters and comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore or dash. Other special characters should not be used.
Campus A unique identifier for the campus on which the course is taught. Field limitation is 4 characters and comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore or dash. Other special characters should not be used.
Section A unique identifier for the section. Field limitation is 8 characters and comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore or dash. Other special characters should not be used.
General Information
General Information contains the title, category, keywords and description for the course as well as when the course begins and ends. Enabling Standards and Objectives and setting the default language for the course are set in the General Information section. General Information settings can be changed at a later time using the General Course Settings tool located under the Manage tab within the course.
Personal Home 35
1. Type a name for the course in the Title field.
If there are several sections with the same name, you want to place a unique identifier for each section after the name of the course (e.g., Introduction to Engineering Technology – section B101, Introduction to Engineering Technology – section B102, etc.). This aids the instructor who may be teaching several sections of the same course and assist in differentiating between sections.
2. Select an appropriate category from the Category drop-down list.
Keywords (optional) can be added to aid the searching capabilities. Students and faculty may use these keywords to locate specific classes through the Course Search utility.
3. Provide a description in the Description field (optional) to specify additional information concerning the course and the course objectives.
4. Select a Course Begins and Course Ends date (optional) to show the dates for the class when viewed through the Course Search utility.
5. Enabling standards (optional) allows the instructor the ability to align course content to institution standards that have been added to the ANGEL® 7.3 environments by
Personal Home 36
the standards administrator. Standards may not be provided by your institution. Information for aligning standards to course content is provided in the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management (LOM).
6. Enabling objectives allows the instructor the ability to align objectives to course content. Objectives are created by the instructor at the course level and may be tied to institution standards. Information for creating and aligning objectives to standards and course content is provided in the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management (LOM).
7. Language options can be selected. Current languages available are English and Spanish.
The option for the Spanish language is determined by the ANGEL administrator at your institution.
Access Settings
Access Settings allows the user to determine who has access to the course and if the course can be seen in Find a Course searches.
Member Access determines if students or members of the course have access or if the editor only has access. Setting the Member Access to editor only provides access to the instructor but not students. This option can be used before the start of a semester, term or quarter to allow the instructor time to create course content and structure the online course. Once the course is ready for student access the instructor can change access to the course to All Members under the Manage tab > General Course Settings in the course. Additional information on how to use the General Course Settings is available in the section of this document titled Manage Tab.
Guest Access determines whether guests are allowed to access the course.
o The Anonymous setting allows users that have not logged in to the ANGEL® 7.3 environment access to the course. Once in the course the anonymous user does not have access to content or student information unless the instructor has set the Viewable By settings to Everyone. Additional information on Viewable by is available in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
o The Authenticated setting allows users that have logged in to the ANGEL® 7.3 environment access to the course. Once in the course the authenticated user does not have access to content or student information unless the instructor has set the Viewable By settings to
Personal Home 37
Authenticated Guest. Additional information on Viewable by is available in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
o The Search Engines option allows users to set if the course can be located using the Find a Course searches. No disables the search for the course and Yes enables the search for the course.
Enrollment Dates Tab
Enrollment Settings allow you to set an enrollment PIN and designate enrollment Start and End dates for the course. Enrollment Settings can be changed at a later time using the General Course Settings tool under the Manage tab within the course.
For information regarding modifying General Course Settings, refer to the section of this document titled General Course Settings.
Share the Enrollment PIN with users to allow them to use the Course Search tool to self-enroll in the course. Courses that are hidden from the Course Search tool are not available for PIN self-enrollment. The Enrollment PIN specified by ANGEL® 7.3 may be changed prior to saving the course information.
Leaving the enrollment PIN blank allows anyone to self-enroll for the course without having to be invited or added by an editor in the course.
The Enrollment Begins and Enrollment Ends fields allow course editors to specify an enrollment period for the course.
Enrollment beginning and ending dates only affect self-enrollment. Course editors are still able to add and remove users at any time. Setting the end date to a date in the past disables the PIN enrollment feature.
Personal Home 38
Standards Tab
The Standards tab provides an option for instructors to align their course to provided standards. Standards that have been published by your institution show in a list as available standards. Availability of standards is controlled by your ANGEL® 7.3 Standards Administrator.
To activate a standard for a course:
1. Click on the Standards tab.
2. Expand the desired standard by clicking on the plus sign ( ).
3. Select the standards folder checkbox to select all standards contained within the folder. Optionally, the user can expand a standards folder to select specific standards items.
4. Click the Save button when all standards have been selected.
Objectives Tab
The Objectives tab allows the instructor the opportunity to create objectives for the course at the time the course is created. This can also be done later in the course using the General Course Settings under the Manage tab.
Personal Home 39
To add a course objective:
1. Click on the Objectives tab.
2. Click the arrow ( ) next to the Course Objectives folder. The Add New Outcome and Add New Folder hyperlinks appear.
If Then
Adding a New Outcome
1. Click the Add New Outcome hyperlink.
2. Provide the Objective Outcome in the text field.
Adding a New Folder
1. Click the Add New Folder hyperlink.
2. Enter the name of the folder in the prompt.
3. Click the OK button.
Folders can be used to organize objectives into similar groups.
3. To close the window, click on the X icon ( ).
To edit, move or delete a course objective:
1. Click on the Objectives tab.
2. Click the arrow ( ) next to the created objective. The Edit, Move Up, Move Down and Delete hyperlinks appear.
Personal Home 40
3. To close the window, click on the X icon ( ).
If Then
Editing an objective
1. Click the Edit hyperlink.
2. Modify or change the text of the objective in the text field.
3. Click the Save button when complete.
Moving an objective up
1. Click the Move Up hyperlink.
2. Continue clicking the Move Up hyperlink until the objective has moved to the correct location.
Moving an objective down
1. Click the Move Down hyperlink.
2. Continue clicking the Move Down hyperlink until the objective has moved to the correct location.
Deleting an objective
1. Click the Delete hyperlink.
2. On the prompt to confirm the Delete this outcome? Click the OK button to delete. Click the Cancel button to cancel the delete of the objective,
Community Groups
Community Groups can be used as an online collaborative community for committees, user groups, etc.
Personal Home 41
Find a Group
Search for existing groups by clicking the Find a Group hyperlink (located below the Community Groups title bar). The Community Search page allows you to search existing groups by keyword, category, campus, school, or department criteria. Once you have clicked the Search button, a list of available groups displays based on your search criteria.
Create a Group
If enabled, you may click the Create a Group hyperlink to create a group. The Create a Group editor is divided into four tabs: Group Data, Enrollment Dates, Standards, and Objectives.
Group Data
The Group Data tab allows the user to set the information concerning the group using General Information and Access Settings.
General Information
General Information contains the title, category, keywords and description for the group. Enabling Standards and Objectives and setting the default language for the group are set in the General Information section. General Information settings can be changed at a later time using the General Group Settings tool located under the Manage tab within the group.
Personal Home 42
For information regarding modifying General Group Settings, refer to the section of this document titled Manage Tab.
1. Type a name for the group in the Title field.
2. Select an appropriate category from the Category drop-down list.
3. Keywords (optional) can be added to aid the searching capabilities. Students and faculty may use these keywords to locate specific groups through the Group Search utility.
4. Provide a description in the Description field (optional) to specify additional information concerning the group and the group objectives.
5. Select a Group Begins and Group Ends date (optional) to show the dates for the group when viewed through the Group Search utility.
6. Enabling standards (optional) allows the instructor the ability to align group content to institution standards that have been added to the ANGEL® 7.3 environments by the standards administrator. Standards may not be provided by your institution. Information for aligning standards to group content is provided in the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management (LOM).
Personal Home 43
7. Enabling objectives allows the instructor the ability to align objectives to group content. Objectives are created by the instructor at the group level and may be tied to institution standards. Information for creating and aligning objectives to standards and group content is provided in the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management.
8. Language options can be selected. Current languages available are English and Spanish.
The option for the Spanish language is determined by the ANGEL® 7.3 administrator at your institution.
Access Settings
Access Settings allows the user to determine who has access to the group and if the group can be seen in Find a Group searches.
Member Access determines if students or members of the group have access or if the editor only has access. Setting the Member Access to editor only provides access to the instructor but no students. This option can be used before the start of a semester, term or quarter to allow the instructor time to create group material and structure the online collaboration tools. Once the group is ready for student access the instructor can change access to the group to All Members under the Manage tab > General Group Settings in the group. Additional information on how to use the General Group Settings is available in the section of this document titled Manage Tab.
Guest Access determines whether guests are allowed to access the group.
o The Anonymous setting allows users that have not logged in to the ANGEL® 7.3 environment access to the group. Once in the group the anonymous user does not have access to content or student information unless the instructor has set the Viewable By settings to Everyone. Additional information on Viewable by is available in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
o The Authenticated setting allows users that have logged in to the ANGEL® 7.3 environment access to the group. Once in the group the authenticated user does not have access to content or student information unless the instructor has set the Viewable By settings to Authenticated Guest. Additional information on Viewable by is available in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
Personal Home 44
o The Search Engines option allows users to set if the group can be located using the Find a Group search. No disables the search for the group and Yes enables the search for the group.
Standards tab
The Standards tab provides an option for instructors to align their community group to provided standards. Standards that have been published by your institution show in a list as available standards. Availability of standards is controlled by your ANGEL® 7.3 Standards Administrator.
To activate a standard for a group:
1. Click on the Standards tab.
2. Expand the desired standard by clicking on the plus sign ( ).
3. Select the standards folder checkbox to select all standards contained within the folder. Optionally, the user can expand a standard folder to select specific standard items.
4. Click the Save button when all standards have been selected.
Personal Home 45
Objectives Tab
The Objectives tab allows the instructor the opportunity to create objectives for the community group at the time the group is created. This can also be done later in the group using the General Group Settings under the Manage tab.
To add a group objective:
1. Click on the Objectives tab.
2. Click the arrow ( ) next to the Group Objectives folder. The Add New Outcome and Add New Folder hyperlinks appear.
3. To close the window, click on the X icon ( ).
If Then
Adding a New Outcome
1. Click the Add New Outcome hyperlink.
2. Provide the Objective Outcome in the text field.
Adding a New Folder
1. Click the Add New Folder hyperlink.
2. Enter the name of the folder in the prompt.
3. Click the OK button.
Folders can be used to organize objectives into similar groups.
To edit, move or delete a group objective:
1. Click on the Objectives tab.
Personal Home 46
2. Click the arrow ( ) next to the created objective. The Edit, Move Up, Move Down and Delete hyperlinks appear.
3. To close the window, click on the X icon ( ).
If Then
Editing an objective
1. Click the Edit hyperlink.
2. Modify or change the text of the objective in the text field.
3. Click the Save button when complete.
Moving an objective up
1. Click the Move Up hyperlink.
2. Continue clicking the Move Up hyperlink until the objective has moved to the correct location.
Moving an objective down
1. Click the Move Down hyperlink.
2. Continue clicking the Move Down hyperlink until the objective has moved to the correct location.
Deleting an objective
1. Click the Delete hyperlink.
2. On the prompt to confirm the Delete this outcome? Click the OK button to delete. Click the Cancel button to cancel the delete of the objective.
Community Group Settings
Click the Edit button in the Community Groups title bar to hide specific groups or to customize the additional information displayed for each. To prevent a group from appearing under your Community Groups section, clear the checkbox next to the group prior to saving. To access a previously hidden group, select the checkbox next to the group prior to saving or simply click on the group title.
Personal Home 47
The Advanced Settings section of the Community Group Settings page allows the user to specify how the groups are displayed on the Home page. Groups can be grouped by semester and/or group category and can display user role, group category, instructor name and/or semester. The Tasks option allows you to determine what new items display under each group. By default, Ungraded, Mail, Posts, Milestones, and Tasks are checked. The Show Disabled option allows the user to view disabled groups for which they have editing rights.
Course Mail
Students and instructors can use the Course Mail tool to correspond with each other without requiring the use of Internet e-mail accounts. Users can access their Inbox to view, read, and compose messages. Optionally, users can move directly to their inbox to compose a message using the Quick Message option. ANGEL lists the number of messages in the Unread Messages area indicating a total of All messages, System messages, and Personal messages.
All indicates a total of system messages, personal messages, and course messages. Personal indicates the total number of messages that have been sent to the user from another ANGEL user. These messages have been sent outside of a course using the Course Mail nugget from the user‘s Personal Home page. System indicates messages that have been sent to the user by the ANGEL administrator. A system message may
Personal Home 48
be a broadcast message indicating weather closures or specific happenings at your institution.
Touring the Inbox
The Inbox is the focal point for Course Mail which enables a user to send, read, and store all your Mail messages in one view. There are nine main elements to the Inbox as shown in the following figure.
Number Title Description
1 Preferences Preferences provides the user the ability to select the message format (HTML or plain-text), Font Preference (Arial, Comic Sans, Courier New, Tahoma, Times New Roman or Verdana), Font Color (Black, blue or red), number of messages per page, forward to Internet e-mail option (Do not forward mail, Forward mail and keep as new, Forward mail and mark as read, and Forward mail and delete), and an area for your Email Address (Internet e-mail) to forward your course mail.
Preferences also allow the user to set up Signature Options. The user can elect to use e-mail signatures and also set up course-specific signatures.
ANGEL can automatically spell check your email before sending if this preference is selected.
Privacy Settings allows the user the ability to remove their name from public search so other users cannot search for their name and send course mail from the personal home page.
2 Search Search allows a user to search for mail messages. The search can be by subject, message text, or to whom the mail message has been sent or received.
3 Actions Actions allow the user to Delete selected items, Send to Folder selected items, Mark as Read selected items,
Personal Home 49
Number Title Description
Mark as Unread selected items, and Message Read By to see who has read the selected items.
4 Filter Allows the user to select which messages are displayed in the message window. Users can select Show All to display all messages (personal, system and/or courses), Personal to display messages that are marked as personal, System to display messages received from the ANGEL administrator or Course (contains a list of displayed courses).
5 Compose New Message button
Clicking on the Compose New Message button allows the user to create a new mail message.
6 Message area This area shows a list of mail messages. The messages displayed will depend on the Filter selected from the Filter list.
7 Source The source displays to the user from where the message was received (Personal, System or a specific course title).
8 My Folders My Folders area provides an area where a user can use folders to organize their mail messages.
9 System Folders System Folders are default folders used to display any saved Drafts, Inbox mail messages, Sent mail messages or Trashed messages.
Message Window
The message window displays the email messages for the active folder. This window contains the following components in the Message Window Menu Bar.
Field Name Icon Definition
Menu
Select messages by those that are unread, read, or with file attachments.
Icon
Designates read and unread messages
Attachment
Messages containing a file attachment
Personal Home 50
Field Name Icon Definition
Priority
Designates the urgency of a message with Low, Normal, or High classification
From
Who sent the message
Subject
What the message is about
Source
Personal or Course name (includes section ID if logged in as instructor)
Date
Date and time message sent
You can sort from ascending to descending order by each of the fields. You can also drag a column header, located in the message window, to the blue bar labeled Drag a column header and drop it here to group by that column.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains commands that can be performed within Course Mail. The toolbar commands within the Inbox Messages area include the following.
Command Definition
Compose New Message button
Compose a course mail message. See section Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message.
Search Search allows a user to search for mail messages. The search can be by subject, message text, or to whom the mail message has been sent or received.
Actions Actions allow the user to Delete selected items, Send to Folder selected items, Mark as Read selected items, Mark as Unread selected items, and Message Read By to see who has read the selected items.
Filter Allows the user to select which messages are displayed in the message window. Users can select Show All to display all messages (personal, system and/or courses), Personal to display messages that are marked as personal, System to display messages received from the ANGEL administrator or Course (contains a list of displayed courses).
Preferences Preferences provides the user the ability to select the message format (HTML or plain-text), Font Preference (Arial, Comic Sans, Courier New, Tahoma, Times New Roman or Verdana),
Personal Home 51
Command Definition
Font Color (Black, blue or red), number of messages per page, forward to Internet e-mail option (Do not forward mail, Forward mail and keep as new, Forward mail and mark as read, and Forward mail and delete), and an area for your Email Address (Internet e-mail) to forward your course mail.
Preferences also allow the user to set up Signature Options. The user can elect to use e-mail signatures and also set up course-specific signatures.
ANGEL can automatically spell check your email before sending if this preference is selected.
Privacy Settings allows the user the ability to remove their name from public search so other users cannot search for their name and send course mail from the personal home page.
Using the Actions Drop-down Box
Clicking on this drop-down box notes the following fields:
Field Name Definition
Send to Folder Send a message to a System folder or one of your folders that you created under My Folder.
Mark as Read Mark an unread message as read.
Mark as Unread Mark a read message as Unread. These messages always appear in a bold font.
Delete Delete a message. Message is moved to the Trash folder.
Message Read By Check who else has read the message. Messages sent using the Do not disclose recipients option do not display the names of recipients who have and have not read the message.
To use the Actions drop-down:
1. Click the checkbox next to the desired mail message. You may optionally select the checkbox next to the Menu to select all mail messages
2. Select the action from the Actions drop-down list.
3. Click the Go button.
Personal Home 52
Using the Filter Drop-down Box
Personal Home 53
Clicking this drop-down box gives you the following fields:
Field Name Definition
Show All Shows all personal messages, course messages, and system messages.
Personal Shows personal email only.
System Shows messages sent by the ANGEL administrator.
Course Shows a list of active courses in which the user is enrolled and gives access messages for the selected course.
To use the Filter drop-down:
1. Select the option from the Filter drop-down list.
2. Click the Go button.
System Folders
The System Folders have been created in ANGEL as the default folders for Drafts, Inbox mail, Sent mail and Trash (deleted mail). The bolded name indicates the folder that is active on your screen.
Next to each folder in parenthesis is the number of unread messages followed by total number of messages contained in that folder.
Field Name Definition
Drafts Save a draft email message that has not been sent.
Inbox All incoming email messages arrive in this folder first.
Sent Course Mail messages that have been sent are found in this folder.
Trash Messages you wish to delete are contained in the trash folder. To permanently delete, a user must go into trash folder, select messages and delete again.
My Folders
My folders you to create individual folders tailored to your specific storage needs.
Personal Home 54
Next to each folder in parenthesis is the number of unread messages followed by total number of messages contained in that folder.
The functions you can perform in My Folders include:
Field Name Definition
New Create a New Folder to store messages.
Rename Rename a folder that has been created.
Delete Delete a folder.
Deleting a folder also deletes any email messages in the folder.
Search
Field Name Definition
Search Allows a user to search by a message subject or message text.
Preferences
The Preferences hyperlink located to the right of the Inbox view allows the user to define the message view preferences, signatures, editing options and privacy settings.
Personal Home 55
The window is described in greater detail in the following table:
Field Name Definition
Message Preferences Message Format Choose Plain Text or HTML for how you want to format messages.
Font Preference Arial
Comic Sans MS
Courier New
Tahoma
Times New Roman
Verdana
No. of Messages Per Page
25, 50 or 100
Forward to Internet E-Mail
Do not forward mail
Forward mail and keep as new
Forward mail and mark as read
Forward mail and delete
Email Address Enter an Internet e-mail address where you want the mail forwarded to.
Personal Home 56
Field Name Definition
Signature Options Signatures may be customized for each course. Select Use E-Mail Signatures to begin using the signature option. By selecting Use E-Mail Signatures allows the activation of the Use Course-Specific Signatures so the user can be tailored to each individual course as desired. The Inline HTML editor provides the ability for the user to
Editing Options Check the box to automatically check your spelling before you send a message.
Privacy Settings To prevent users who do not share a course with you from sending you Course Mail, check ―Don‘t show my name in public search‖.
You can also remove users from your blocked list. See section Blocking a User for more detail.
Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message
The Compose Message section allows the user to compose and send messages to members of their courses.
Personal Home 57
To compose and send a message:
1. Log into your ANGEL course, click the Communicate tab, and click the View Inbox hyperlink. The Inbox appears.
2. Click the Compose New Message button. The compose message window opens.
The following elements makeup the Compose Message window:
Field Name Definition
Return to Inbox hyperlink
Allows the user to return to the Inbox by clicking on this hyperlink.
To: button
The To: button displays the Select Recipients list box of available recipients to send mail messages. Refer to Selecting and Removing Recipients for more information.
Remove selected recipients button
Allows the user to remove the selected recipients from the To: list.
Subject Enter a subject for the message.
Personal Home 58
Field Name Definition
Priority Select message urgency from:
Low
Normal
High
HTML Editor toolbar The HTML Editor toolbar allows you to apply formatting, add images, etc. to your message.
For information regarding how to use the HTML Editor, refer to Appendix I Inline HTML Editor.
Attachments The Attach files hyperlink allows you to add a file attachment to your message.
Message Options Send a copy to each recipient’s Internet e-mail allows you to send a duplicate message outside the ANGEL environment to the recipients' email address.
Send a copy to each recipients mentor if known sends a copy of the email to a known mentor or advisor for the recipient.
Send Button Click this button when you are ready to send the message to selected recipients.
Save Draft Button Click this button to save a draft of your message in the Draft System Folder.
Cancel Button Click this button to delete the message. You lose all information contained in the message.
3. Select the intended recipient(s) from the Select Message Recipients list box, and click the To-> button. The recipient name appears in the To field. Do the same for Cc-> and Bcc-> fields.
Hold the Control key on your keyboard (or the Apple key on a Macintosh) and click to select multiple recipients.
4. Click the OK button to exit the Select Message Recipients window.
5. Type a subject for the message in the Subject field.
6. Type the message in the Message field. Format as necessary using the inline HTML text editor.
7. Attach any files if necessary. (see Adding an Attachment section below)
8. Choose a message Priority. The default is Normal but you can select Low or High.
9. Choose from the message options, if desired. (see Selecting and Removing Recipients below)
Personal Home 59
10. Click the Send button to send the message to its recipients. Click the Save Draft button to save in the Drafts folder for future editing. Click the Cancel button to delete your message. These three buttons are located at the top and bottom of the message window.
Formatting Text
When composing messages you can use the inline HTML editor to format your message.
The components of the inline editor from left to right.
Field Name Icon Definition
Collapse Toolbar
Hides the inline editor.
Insert/Edit Macro
Insert or Edit a macro to enhance a message.
Paste
Paste text or picture into the message.
Edit Menu
Click arrow to pull down more toolbar features.
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Paste as plain text
Paste from Word
Find
Replace
Select All
Remove Format
Bold
Add bold text.
Italic
Add italics to text.
Underline
Underline text.
Insert Content Link
Attach ANGEL content such as a survey or quiz to the email.
Insert/Edit Web Link icon
Insert an Internet hyperlink in the message.
Personal Home 60
Field Name Icon Definition
Insert/Edit Image
Insert an image or picture into the message.
Insert Equation icon
Insert spreadsheet equation.
Insert Menu
Insert an additional toolbar feature for the following:
HTML Widget
Insert Equation
Special Character
Universal Keyboard
Line
Page Break
Insert/Remove Numbered List
Insert or remove a numbered list.
Insert/Remove Bulleted List
Insert or remove a bulleted list.
Font
Change type of font.
Arial
Comic Sans MS
Courier New
Tahoma
Times New Roman
Verdana
Size
Change size of text.
xx-small
x-small
small
medium
large
x-large
xx-large
Check Spelling
Check spelling in the message.
Source
Add HTML source code.
Personal Home 61
Adding and Removing Attachments
To attach a file to your course mail message:
1. Click the Attach files hyperlink. The Add Attachments upload window appears.
2. Click the Select button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
3. Locate and select your attachment file and click the Open button. Click the Add button to select more files to upload.
4. Click the Upload button to upload the files. The uploaded file(s) appears in the Attachments box of the message window.
With the Add Attachments window open, you can check the box next to a file that you have designated for upload and click the Delete button or you can click the Remove button next to the file. If you discover that you need to remove the file after uploading it to your message, you can click the remove hyperlink next to the file name.
5. Proceed with editing or sending the message.
Selecting and Removing Recipients
To select or remove recipients:
1. Within Compose Message, click the To: button. The Select Message Recipients window opens.
Personal Home 62
2. Click on the View Section: drop down box to choose All users or Users by individual course. You can also type a name in the Search form to find a user by first or last name.
3. Click on the user name to highlight it and then click the To-> or Cc-> or Bcc-> buttons to add the recipient. The name appears in its respective list box.
You can select multiple names at once by using the CTRL + Click keys. After having selected a recipient, remove the name by clicking on it to highlight it and then clicking on the Remove selected recipients button.
4. After you are satisfied with the recipients that you have selected, click the OK button. The compose message window appears and you see the names listed in the respective list boxes.
If you want to cancel the recipients, click the Cancel button and return to the Compose Message window and the To field will be blank.
Message Options
There are two options for sending messages.
Field Name Definition
Send a copy to each recipient‘s Internet e-mail
If you wish to send a copy of the Course Mail to a recipient‘s Internet e-mail address, check this box.
Send a copy to each recipient‘s mentor if known
If you wish the recipient‘s mentor to have a copy of the Course Mail, check this box.
Personal Home 63
Reading and Replying to a Course Mail Message
The Course Mail Read Message section allows the user to read and reply to messages. The Read Message elements as shown in the following figure include:
Message Window
Toolbar
Message Window
The Read Message window displays the email message.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains commands that can be performed within Read Message and includes the following elements:
The following elements makeup the Read and Reply window:
Command Definition
Compose New Message button
Compose a course mail message. See section Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message.
Actions Same as the Inbox more Actions except for the addition of the ―Create a Task‖ option detailed below.
Create a Add a personal task based on the information
Personal Home 64
Command Definition
Task contained within the mail message.
Send to Folder
Send a message to a System folder or one of your personal folders that you created under My Folder.
Mark as Unread
Mark a read message as Unread. Unread messages always appear in a bold font.
Delete Delete a message. Message is moved to the Trash folder.
Message Read By
Select the checkbox next to the message to see who has read the message.
Reply button Replies to the sender of the message.
Reply All button Replies to all recipients of the message (within the rights of the user replying – e.g. can‘t reply to an All Campus message).
Forward button Forwards message to a new recipient that you select.
<Previous Next> buttons
Previous / Next – loads the previous and next messages within the current active folder.
Print Opens the Print dialog box to select a printer.
Return to Inbox Allows the user to return to the message inbox.
Personal Home 65
Read Course Mail Message
To read a course mail message:
1. Log into your ANGEL course, click the Communicate tab, and click the View Inbox hyperlink. The Inbox appears.
2. Click the hyperlinked name of the sender or the subject of a mail message to display the full message. The mail message appears on the screen.
New/Unread messages appear in bold. Once the message has been opened, it appears non bold.
In the Inbox view, messages with attachments display a paper clip icon located to the left of the message subject.
3. Click the appropriate button to Reply, Reply All, or Forward the course mail message at which point the process is similar to composing a message.
Viewing and Saving an Attachment
To view and save a message attachment:
To view the attachment, click the name of the file attachment hyperlink and the message opens.
To save the attachment to your hard drive, right click on the attachment hyperlink and choose Save Target As. . . . The Save As dialog box opens for the user to save the attachment.
Sending Message to a Folder
To send a message to a folder:
Personal Home 66
1. After opening a message to read, go to the More Actions drop down box and choose Send to Folder. Click the Go button. You will see the following dialog box.
You can also send a message to a folder by checking the box next to the message within a folder view and choosing Send to Folder from the More Actions drop down box.
2. Using the drop down box, choose the system or personal folder that you either want to move the message to or copy the message to.
3. Click Continue. The message appears in the folder that you have chosen.
Deleting a Message
There are several ways to delete a message.
In the system or personal folder view, select the checkbox located next to the message and select the Delete action from the Actions: drop-down list.
After the user opens a message to read, delete the message selecting Delete from the Actions: drop-down box and click the Go button.
To permanently delete a message, you must be in the Trash folder view. Select the checkbox located next to the message and click on the Actions drop-down box and choose Delete. A Permanent Delete dialog box opens. Click the Delete button if you want to permanently delete the message from the Course Mail Inbox.
Viewing Who has Read or not Read a Message
Selecting the Message Read By option from the More Actions… drop-down list provides the user with a list of who has read the selected message. To view a list of who has read or not read the mail message perform the following:
1. Click the View Inbox hyperlink.
2. Select the checkbox next to the mail message you want to check.
3. Select Message Read By option from the Actions: drop-down list. Click the Go button. The Message Read By page appears.
Personal Home 67
4. Optionally select have not from the List users that drop-down list.
5. Click the Refresh button.
6. To return to course mail, click the Back to mail button.
Sorting and Viewing Messages
The Course Mail Inbox gives you a powerful tool to sort and view your messages.
Sorting by Column Headers
If you want to group Course Mail by column, you can drag a column header to the blue subject bar. A spinning Loading icon is the signal that the sorting is beginning and you have successfully moved the column into the new position.
The figure below shows the blue bar before dragging the subject column to the blue subject bar.
The figure below shows the blue bar after dragging the subject column. Note that messages are grouped by Subject.
To remove a grouping, drag the column on the blue bar, in this example Subject, from the blue bar back to one of the column headers.
Selecting Messages from My Folders
To select messages from the My Folders view, choose the folder containing the messages that you want to select.
Personal Home 68
1. Within a folder view, click the Menu drop down box and the following window opens.
2. When the user clicks on one of the three options, the active folder view shows only those messages relevant to the command selected.
Select All unread messages. Selects all Unread Messages in the currently active folder.
Select All read messages. Selects all Read messages in the current folder.
Select all With Files. Selects all messages with a file attached.
Showing Messages by Personal or Course
To further sort and group messages, click the Filter: drop down box and choose either Show All, Personal, System or course mail designated by the Course Name.
Working with Inbox Folders
The Inbox folders allow users to store Course Mail messages. Aside from the default System Folders, users can create, rename, and delete personal folders in the My Folders section.
Creating a Folder
To create a folder:
1. Click the down arrow next to My Folders. Choose New and the following window appears.
2. Type the name of the new folder and choose Save.
You can type up to 64 characters for a folder name.
3. The new folder appears under the My Folders blue bar in alphabetical order.
Personal Home 69
Renaming a Folder
To rename a folder:
1. Click the drop down arrow next to My Folders. Choose Rename. You see the following window.
2. Click the drop down arrow under Choose folder to rename: and choose the folder to rename.
3. Type the new name for the folder.
4. Click the Rename button.
5. The renamed folder appears under the My Folders blue bar.
Deleting a Folder
To delete a folder:
1. Click the drop down arrow next to My Folders. Choose Delete. You see the following window.
2. Choose the folder to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. The deleted folder is removed from My Folders.
Deleting a folder deletes all message contained within the folder.
Searching a Folder
To search a folder:
1. Choose the system or personal folder that you want to search.
2. Type the subject of the message in the Search form.
Personal Home 70
3. Click Search button.
4. The message window shows the search results.
Toolbox
The Toolbox offers several useful tools designed to increase productivity and to customize your ANGEL® 7.3 environment.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks allow you to add your favorite web page links for easy access and to sort them by category. You may set permissions on each bookmark to optionally allow others to use the bookmark as well.
Field Description
Title Provide the name of the bookmark. This title is displayed as the hyperlink to the web page.
URL A fully qualified URL for the web page.
Description Additional information concerning the bookmark and information contained on the web page.
Target A drop-down list of how the web page is displayed when the bookmark is clicked.
Category Allows you to organize your bookmarks in similar groups.
Viewable By Allows the specified user group to view your bookmark. Specifying Everyone from the drop-down menu potentially allows anyone, including unauthenticated users to view the bookmark.
To add a bookmark:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Bookmarks hyperlink.
Personal Home 71
2. Click the Add a Bookmark hyperlink (located in the upper left toolbar). The Bookmark Editor appears.
3. Type the title of the bookmark in the Title field.
4. Type the bookmark web address (fully qualified URL) in the URL field.
5. Type a description in the Description field.
6. Select a category from the Category drop-down list.
7. Select the viewing permissions from the Viewable By drop-down list.
8. Click the Save button.
Files
Create folders, files and upload images and documents to your personal file manager (Files) for storage purposes or to publish your content on the World Wide Web. The built-in HTML Editor allows you to create new web pages or to edit existing ones with an easy-to-use word processing-style interface.
To create a folder:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Files hyperlink.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar). The Add Content page appears.
Personal Home 72
3. Click the Create a Folder hyperlink. The Create a Folder page displays.
4. Type a name in the Folder Name field.
5. Click the OK button.
To create a file:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Files hyperlink.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Create a File hyperlink. The Create a File page appears.
4. Type a name in the File Name field.
When creating a web page, add the proper extension (.htm or .html) to the end of the filename (i.e., index.html) to ensure the file type is properly identified and rendered by the web browser. For best results, web page names should be comprised of alphanumeric characters with no spaces or special characters other than hyphen and underscore characters.
Personal Home 73
5. Type or paste text or HTML code in the File Contents field. Optionally use the HTML Editor to apply formatting, insert images, or create hyperlinks in an HTML file.
6. Click the OK button.
To upload a file:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Files hyperlink.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Upload Files hyperlink. The Upload a File page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears.\
For best results do not upload files that have blank spaces in the titles (e.g. Assignment Guidelines.doc). Instead rename your files prior to uploading into the ANGEL® 7.3 environment (e.g. Assignment_Guidelines.doc).
5. Locate and select the file and click the Open button.
6. Click the Upload File button, then Done or Upload Another File.
To upload a file using Drag-n-drop:
In order to use Drag-n-drop you need to have Sun‘s JVM 1.4.1 installed on your computer. If you do not have this installed you are prompted to download the JVM (Java Virtual Machine).
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Files hyperlink.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Drag-n-drop hyperlink. It may take a few seconds to load the applet for the drag-n-drop.
4. Drag one or more files or folders from your computer to the Drag-n-drop upload area. A progress bar appears as your files are uploaded. Once the upload is complete the uploaded files display in the Drag-n-drop window.
Personal Home 74
5. Click the Done button when you are finished uploading files.
Calendar
Use the Calendar tool to add and view personal calendar events, course or group events, or public institutional events. The calendar provides Format options of List or Grid to customize the view of the calendar. The List option displays calendar items as a list of appointments or events. The Grid option displays the calendar format as displayed below.
Personal Home 75
The calendar provides options to view calendar events by Day (default), Week, Month, or Year.
Previous and Next navigation options vary based on the selected view of the calendar. For example, when the calendar view is set to Day, clicking the Previous hyperlink displays events for the previous day and clicking the Next hyperlink displays events for the next day. However, when the calendar view is set to Week clicking the Previous hyperlink displays events for the previous week and clicking the Next hyperlink moves the calendar ahead one week.
Click the Today hyperlink to quickly access all events for the current day. Click the Search hyperlink to search all calendar events for specific keywords.
In Day view a small calendar appears on the right side of the displayed day. Click a hyperlinked date on the calendar to quickly access all events for the particular date. Select a different month or year from the date drop-down list (located underneath the small month calendar) to quickly view a different month and/or year. Further customize your calendar view by clicking the Public Entries, Team Entries or Personal Entries in the All Entries box located underneath the month/year drop-down lists.
For information on how to add calendar entries, see the section of this document titled Calendar Tab.
Personal Home Public Resources
The Public Resources hyperlink takes you to the ANGEL® 7.3 Home page. The ANGEL® 7.3 Home page contains Public Information hyperlinks, Search and Help hyperlinks, Public Announcements and any Top Stories for your institution. For additional information on these resources see the section of this document titled Public Resources.
Preferences
Preferences located on the left power strip ( ) allows you to personalize your personal home page and course environment, change your password (if applicable), to set system drives, and more.
Personal Information
The User Profile editor allows users to specify personal information including name, organizational information, contact information, and more with the capability of limiting who may view each type of information. The personal information editor is divided into three areas: Name Settings, Organizational Settings and Contact Settings.
For more on this topic see “How to Change Personal Information” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Personal Home 76
Name Settings
Field Description Mode
Viewable By Determines who can view the name information N
First Name First name as you want it to appear. N
Last Name Last name as you want it to appear. N
Middle Name Middle name as you want it to appear. A
Title Prefix Title such as Mr., Mrs., Dr. that you want to precede your name.
A
Honor Suffix Honor that you want to follow your name, such as Jr., Sr., PhD., etc.
A
Nickname Nickname that you want to share with other users. A
About Me Information concerning you, your interests, clubs, hobbies, etc. that you want to share with other users.
N
Personal Home 77
Organizational Settings
Field Description Mode
Viewable By Determines who can view the organizational information. N
Title Title within the organization. N
Role Role within the organization. A
Logo Logo for the organization. A
Department Department associated with the organization. A
Division Division of the organization. A
Organization Organization name. A
Contact Settings
Field Description Mode
Email Email address you want to share with others. N
Viewable By Determines who can view the information you provide. N
Homepage URL to your personal web page. N
Photo URL URL where your personal photo is stored N
Phone Settings Fields for personal phone contacts. N
Type Selection determines the type of address provided. N
P.O. Box P.O. Box address. N
Line 1 Line 1 of an address. N
Line 2 Line 2 of an address. N
Line 3 Line 3 of an address. N
City City of your address. N
State/Prov State or Provence for your address. N
Postal Code Zip code or country postal code for your address. N
Country Country of your address. N
UTC Timezone The Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) specified as a + or – from GMT.
A
Longitude Specifies the longitude coordinate of the primary address. In conjunction with the latitude coordinate, this information can be used to generate a map of the location.
A
Personal Home 78
Field Description Mode
Latitude Specifies the latitude coordinate of the primary address. In conjunction with the longitude coordinate, this information can be used to generate a map of the location.
A
To access the User Profile Editor:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3.
2. Click the Preferences icon located on the left power strip.
3. Click the Personal Information hyperlink.
In the Name Settings:
1. Select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list.
2. Type your First Name.
3. Type your Last Name.
4. Type or paste information about yourself in the About Me field.
In the Organizational Settings:
1. Select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list.
2. Type a Title within the organization.
In the Contact Settings:
1. Type your email address in the Email field.
2. Select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list of who can see your email address.
3. Type a homepage URL in the Homepage field. Select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list of who can see your personal home page.
4. Type a photo URL or click the Add button to upload a photo to your profile. Select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list of who can see your photo.
5. Select the phone settings from the Phone Settings drop-down list. Type a phone number in the Phone Settings field and select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list of who can see your phone numbers.
6. Select the Viewable By setting from the drop-down list of who can see your address information. Select the Type of address from the drop-down list.
7. If applicable, type a P.O. Box in the P.O. Box field.
8. Type address information in Line 1, Line 2, and/or Line 3.
9. Type the city information in the City field.
10. Type the state or providence information in the State/Prov field.
11. Type the postal code (zip code) in the Postal Code field.
Personal Home 79
12. Type the country in the Country field.
13. When complete, click the Save button.
Change Password
It is important to change your password periodically to maintain maximum security of your account. Some of the following guidelines can be used when creating your new password.
Do not choose a password that could be found in a dictionary.
Do not choose a password that uses public information such as your social security number, phone number, credit card, birth date, etc.
Use at least eight characters.
Use a random mixture of characters, upper and lower case, numbers, punctuation and symbols.
Use a password that you can remember so that you do not need to keep looking it up. This reduces the chance somebody discovering where you have written it down.
Choose a password that you can type quickly. This reduces the chance of somebody discovering your password by looking over your shoulder.
To change your password:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Preferences icon (located on the left power strip).
2. Click the Change Password hyperlink.
3. Type your current password in the Current Password field.
4. Type your new password in the New Password field.
5. Confirm your new password by typing it in the Confirm field.
6. Click the OK button.
You are required to use your new password the next time you log into ANGEL® 7.3.
Personal Home 80
Theme Selector
The Theme Selector allows you to select different ANGEL® 7.3 themes or even create your own theme to change how your Home page looks when your log in. Theme Editor settings are divided into tabs: General, Colors, Styles, and Other.
General Tab
The General tab contains the Theme Settings and Font Settings.
Fields Description Mode
Theme Name Provide a unique name for the theme you are creating. N
Personal Home 81
Fields Description Mode
Portal Theme Specifies the basic color theme of the Personal Home page.
N
Subject Theme Specifies subject of your theme, i.e. Art, Biology, Money, etc.
N
Nugget Icons Specifies the icons to be used for individual nuggets. N
Tab Icons Specifies the icons to be used for tabs. N
Sidebar Buttons Specifies if the buttons should be standard or transparent.
N
Face The font settings for the type of font used in the theme. N
Size Size of the font used in the theme. N
Text Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for text. Example: text-align: center
A
Link Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for links.
Example: A:link {text-decoration: none}
A
Hover Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for when the mouse is hovering over a hyperlink. Example: A:hover {background: blue; color: white}
A
Colors Tab
The Colors tab consists of the Page Colors, Portal Colors, Tab Colors and Map Colors.
Personal Home 82
Fields Description Mode
Page BG Background color for the page. N
Normal Text Display color for all non-hyperlink text. N
Link Text Display color for hyperlink text. N
Highlight Text Color to display when a hyperlink is clicked. N
Heading Text Display color for the heading on the course/group page. N
Heading BG Background color for the heading on a course/group page.
N
Note Text Text color when using Notes. N
Note BG Background color for Notes. N
Page Title Text Text color for the title on a page. Example: Lessons when the Lessons tab is active.
N
Breadcrumb Text Specifies the color of breadcrumbs. N
Banner Text Specifies the color of the title of the course on the upper right corner when in a course.
N
Banner BG Specifies the background color for the banner in a course.
N
Toolbar Text Specifies the color of the text on a toolbar. N
Toolbar BG Specifies the color of the background of a toolbar. N
Nugget Title Text Specifies the color of the Nugget title text. Example: Courses, Community Groups, Toolbox, etc.
N
Nugget Title BG Specifies the background color of the Nugget title. N
Nugget Text Specifies the color of the text in a nugget. Examples: explanations located underneath a hyperlink in a nugget.
N
Nugget BG Background color of nuggets. Example: Courses nugget background color may be different than the Page BG to make it more visible.
N
Tab Text Specifies the color of the text on tabs. N
Tab BG Background color for tabs. N
Active Text Specifies the color of the active tab. N
Active BG Background color for the active tab. N
Map Text Specifies the text color for the guide. N
Personal Home 83
Fields Description Mode
Map BG Specifies the background color for the guide. N
Footer Text Specifies the text color for the footer. This is the footer displayed on each page.
N
Footer BG Specifies the background color for the footer. N
Styles Tab
The Styles tab consists of Styles and Advanced Style Attributes.
Fields Description Mode
Banners Specifies a unique image banner to your course. N
Portal Components Specifies a unique image on your portal components. N
Toolbars Specifies specific style to the toolbars. N
Section Headings Specifies specific styles to the section headings. N
Active Tab Specifies the style of the active tab in a course/group. N
Other Tabs Specifies the style of non-active tabs in a course/group. N
Identity Bubble Specifies the color surrounding the name (identity) bubble.
N
Page Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for a page. A
Personal Home 84
Fields Description Mode
Breadcrumb Page Attributes
Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the breadcrumbs.
A
Site Banner Page Attributes
Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the site banner page. This is the image that is displayed as you enter and exit the ANGEL® 7.3 application.
A
Section Banner Page Attributes
Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the banner located in a section (course/group).
A
Toolbar Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the toolbars within a course/group.
A
Section Heading Attributes
Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the section heading of a course/group. This is the title displayed in the upper right corner in a course/group.
A
Active Tab Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the tab that is active in a course/group.
A
Other Tab Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the non-active tab in a course/group.
A
Tab Bar Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the tab bar.
A
Note Area Attributes Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the notes in a course/group.
A
Portal Component Title Attributes
Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the title of the portal components.
A
Portal Component Area Attributes
Specifies Cascading Style Sheet attributes for the area behind the portal component (background).
A
Other Tab
The Other tab provides an area to specify Imported Stylesheets and any custom Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) you want to add for your theme.
Personal Home 85
Changing the Theme
To change the theme:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Preferences icon (located on the left power strip).
2. Click the Theme Selector hyperlink. The Personal Theme Selector page appears.
3. Select a theme from the Available Themes drop-down list. The theme you select is displayed. Click on the Course tab to see the theme in a course environment.
4. Click the Apply button.
Editing a Theme
To edit a theme perform the following steps:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Preferences icon (located on the left power strip).
2. Click the Theme Selector hyperlink. The Personal Theme Selector page appears.
3. Select a theme from the Available Themes drop-down list. The theme you select is displayed.
4. Click the Edit button.
On the General tab:
1. Type a name for the theme in the Theme Name field.
2. If desired, select a portal theme from the Portal Theme drop-down list.
3. If desired, select a subject theme from the Subject Theme drop-down list.
4. Select the Nugget Icons, Tab Icons, and Sidebar Buttons from the drop-down lists.
Personal Home 86
5. Select the Font Settings from the Face and Size drop-down lists.
On the Colors tab:
1. Select the colors for the Page PG, Normal Text, Link Text, Highlight Text, Heading Text, Heading BG, Note Text, Note BG, Page Title Text and Breadcrumb Text from the drop-down lists in the Page Colors area.
2. Select the colors for the Banner Text, Banner BG, Toolbar Text, Toolbar BG, Nugget Title Text, Nugget Title BG, Nugget Text, and Nugget BG from the drop-down lists in the Portal Colors section.
3. Select the colors for the Tab Text, Tab BG, Active Text, and Active BG from the drop-down lists in the Tab Colors section.
4. Select the colors for the Map Text, Map BG, Footer Text, and Footer BG from the drop-down lists in the Map Colors section.
On the Styles tab:
1. Select the styles for the Banners, Portal Components, Toolbars, Section Headings, Active Tab, Other Tabs, and Identity Bubble from the drop-down lists in the Styles section.
2. Click the Preview button to view your choices.
3. If you are satisfied with your settings, click the Save button. Otherwise, click the Back to Editor button to return to the theme editor.
Create Your Own Theme
To create your own theme:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Preferences icon (located on the left power strip).
2. Click the Theme Selector hyperlink.
3. Click the Create a Theme hyperlink located in the upper left toolbar.
4. Follow the steps under the Editing a Theme section above.
System Settings
The System Settings allows you to customize you mail settings, configure ANGEL® 7.3 to send a copy of all course mail to an Internet email account, select your user level of expertise based on your comfort level with the ANGEL® 7.3 system, and to specify your local drive settings.
To change your system settings:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Preferences icon (located on the left power strip).
2. Click the System Settings hyperlink. The System Settings page appears.
Personal Home 87
User Level
Select the User Level which best fits your ANGEL® 7.3 expertise. By default, Unspecified is selected which provides the same information as a Beginner.
Beginner level provides helpful notes and descriptions of most links used throughout the ANGEL® 7.3 environment. This option is good if you are new to the ANGEL® 7.3 environment.
Intermediate level eliminates most of the link descriptions making the pages more compact and easy to navigate. If you are comfortable with the ANGEL® 7.3 environment, you may elect to use the intermediate level.
Advanced level provides access to advanced settings by starting editors in Advanced mode. Descriptions are removed.
Personal Home 88
Local Drive Settings
ANGEL allows instructors to create course content that relies on locally stored media e.g. links to high resolution images distributed to students on CD ROM.
The Local Drive settings allow you inform ANGEL which drives access which type of Media. If your course content relies on locally delivered media, you should map the drive types to the appropriate drive letter on your local computer.
Mail Settings
ANGEL® 7.3 has the ability to send and receive mail. By default, any mail that you send to or receive from students resides inside the course environment. However, you may alter your course mail settings to instruct ANGEL® 7.3 to forward your course mail to an Internet email account.
Forwarding your mail is a global setting, meaning that your mail for all your courses and all of your community groups is forwarded to the address you specify.
To forward your ANGEL® 7.3 course/group mail:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the Preferences icon (located on the left power strip)
2. Click the System Settings hyperlink. The System Settings page appears.
3. Locate the Mail Settings area at the bottom of the page and type in the Forwarding Address field the full email address where you want your ANGEL® 7.3 mail to be forwarded.
4. Select the Forwarding Mode from the drop-down list.
5. Click the Save button.
Personal Home 89
Instant Messenger
ANGEL® 7.3 provides an instant messenger tool that can be accessed from the Instant
Messenger icon ( ) on the left power strip. Communicate online in the modes of today‘s learners – in real time.
To access Instant Messenger, click the messenger icon . To converse with an online user, select their name from the To: drop-down list, type your message and click the Send button.
Personal Home 90
Help
Online help is available by clicking the Help icon . Online help provides a searchable Instructor Reference Manual in the form of web pages. Students are provided a searchable Student Quickstart guide as a reference.
The Guides hyperlink provides access to the Instructor Reference Manual, Instructor Quickstart Guide and Student Quickstart Guide in PDF format. These guides can be downloaded and printed as a reference.
The Resources hyperlink provides access to your institution‘s resources. Information available under Resources can be added by your institution‘s ANGEL® 7.3 Administrator
Course Overview 91
Course Overview
The course or group interface within ANGEL® 7.3 serves as the core of the ANGEL® 7.3 environments. It provides the instructor and the student with a variety of collaborative tools that enhance the instructional experience. The following sections provide detailed instructions for performing course related tasks.
Navigation Tabs
When you access a course, a set of navigation tabs appears across the top of the ANGEL window. Click a tab to view a page containing one or more specific types of information about the course. As you navigate through the tabs, the Breadcrumb frame updates to show your current location within the course-related information.
Navigation tabs
Bread crumbs
The following tabs are available for each course:
The Course tab is the ―dashboard‖ into your course. Among the options for this page are the ―At a Glance‖ object, the Grades object, Course Mail, Discussions and more than a dozen other optional items.
The Calendar tab displays events that have been assigned Milestones within the course (such as exams or assignment due dates).
The Lessons tab provides access to all the lessons that have been created and posted for the course.
The Resources tab provides a set of helpful resources made available by your institution‘s administrator. These items can include syllabi, links to Web sites related to the course, institutional resources such as library records, a Web search tool, and others.
The Communicate tab displays tools that let you communicate with others in the course via e-mail, live chat, and discussion groups. The tab also provides a course roster and displays any course related news, events, or announcements.
The Report tab‘s tools enable you to generate and save various types of reports related to the course, such as reports on student grades or course milestone achievement.
The Automate tab enables you to create and run services called ―agents,‖ which can perform specific tasks according to any schedule you set.
The Manage tab features a console of tools that allow you to configure and control various course-related items, such as a gradebook or course-related files.
Course Overview 92
These tabs and their functions are discussed in greater detail later in this guide.
Specify a custom start tab for your course by accessing the Tab Settings tool (Tools >Tab Settings > Start Tab Settings). Users are redirected to the Start tab when they click the Continue button on the Welcome page.
Guide
The Guide is another way to navigate through a course or group. The Guide provides access to the Map, What‘s New, Tasks, Search, and About functions. To change to a new guide item, click the hyperlinked name at the bottom of the guide.
Open and Close
the Course Guide
by clicking on this
tab.
The ―Contents‖
view of the Course
Guide.
Map
The Map indicates where you are located within your course. The highlighted, bolded word indicates your current location within the course. You can click on the hyperlinked name within the Map to move to a content item or tab.
Course Overview 93
What’s New
The What‘s New guide lists any items within the course content that may be new. New items can be course mail, assignments, pages, ungraded, etc. To access a new item, click on the name hyperlink in the list of items. To check for new items, click the refresh hyperlink or select last logon, last week, last 2 weeks or last 30 days from the drop-down list.
Course Overview 94
Tasks
The Tasks area displays milestones, personal tasks, unread mail, and ungraded. To check for new items, click the refresh hyperlink.
Course Overview 95
Milestones
Students can track their course progress by viewing a list of pending, completed, or past due milestones. Course editors and course assistants can view milestone achievements for each individual student. The number of milestones is indicated in parentheses.
Click the PLUS SIGN ( ) to view pending, completed or past due milestones.
Personal Tasks
Users can view personal tasks they created for themselves, tasks assigned to them or assigned to all course members. The number of personal tasks is indicated in parentheses.
Click the PLUS SIGN ( ) to view tasks.
Unread Mail
The Unread Mail section displays a list of all new (unread) course or group mail. The number of new email messages is indicated in parentheses.
Click the PLUS SIGN ( ) to view unread mail.
Course Overview 96
Unread Discussion Posts
The Unread Discussion Posts section displays a list of all unread discussion posts and links to each post. The number of unread posts is indicated in parenthesis.
Ungraded Items
The Ungraded Items section displays a list of all new ungraded course items. The number of ungraded items is indicated in parentheses.
Click the PLUS SIGN ( ) to view the ungraded items.
Search
The basic Search area allows the user to type a keyword to search for an item in the content, calendar, mail or roster of a course. Select the course area from the drop-down list, type the keyword in the Search field and click the Search button.
The advanced Search area provides specific search parameters.
Course Overview 97
About
The About section of the Guide displays basic ANGEL information including address and copyright information.
Course Tab 98
Course Tab
By default, the Course tab appears when you enter a course. This page contains several sections that provide at-a-glance information about the course.
By default, the Course tab includes the following sections:
Activity at a Glance shows a summary of course-related activities that have occurred during the past week, including the number of log-ins, discussion posts, mail messages, and submissions.
Grades displays a summary of the grades of the course‘s enrolled participants.
Course Mail provides an entry point to Course Mail. Use View Inbox to jump to your inbox, use Quick Message to bypass the inbox and go directly to the compose message page, and use Unread Messages to see a count of unread messages in the course.
Section Polls allow you to gather feedback from students and introduce a point of interaction on the course home page.
Course Announcements displays any recent announcements that have been posted for the course.
Edit Page
You can rearrange, add, edit, or delete elements on the Course tab. ANGEL 7.3 features a new drag-and-drop editor that makes it easy to configure the way information is displayed on your tabs.
Course Tab 99
Rearrange Items on the Course Tab
To rearrange items on the Course tab:
1. Log in to ANGEL, select a course, and click the Course tab.
2. Click the Edit Page link (located under the course‘s name in the upper left corner of the tab).
ANGEL switches to Page Layout view.
The Edit Page option is available on several tabs.
3. Click the desired item and drag it to a different location.
The mouse pointer changes to a four-way arrow ( ) when you can move the item. As you move the item, other elements on the tab automatically move out of the way.
Course Tab 100
In edit mode, you
may drag and drop
components to a
new page location.
4. When you are finished, click the Save button to return the Course tab to Normal view.
Add an Item to the Course Tab
To add an item to the Course tab:
1. Log in to ANGEL, select a course, and click the Course tab.
2. Click the Edit Page link.
ANGEL switches to Page Layout view. The Add Components and Use Defaults buttons now appear under the course‘s name, replacing the Edit Page link.
3. Click the Add Components button.
The Available Components list appears, showing the names of items that can be added to the tab. Items marked with a check are already on the tab.
Course Tab 101
4. Click the component you want to add, then click the Add Selected button.
The Available Components box closes and the selected component is added to the tab.
You can select more than one component at a time.
5. If desired, rearrange the items on the tab as described previously in ―Rearrange Items on the Course Tab.‖
6. When you are finished, click the Save button to return the Course tab to Normal view.
Delete an Item from the Course Tab
To delete an item from the Course tab:
1. Log in to ANGEL, select a course, and click the Course tab.
2. Click the Edit Page link.
ANGEL switches to Page Layout view.
3. Rest the mouse pointer on the item you want to delete.
The Delete icon ( ) appears on the item‘s title bar.
4. Click the Delete icon to remove the item.
5. When you are finished, click the Save button to return the Course tab to Normal view.
If you change your mind, you can add the deleted item back to the tab as described previously in “Add an Item to the Course Tab.”
Course Tab 102
Edit an Item on the Course Tab
Some items on the Course tab have user-configurable settings. You can edit these settings to change the data displayed by the item, to determine who can view the item, and other features specific to the item.
To edit an item on the Course tab:
1. Rest the mouse pointer on the item.
If the item has user-configurable settings, a Settings icon ( ) appears on the item‘s title bar.
2. Click the Settings icon to view the item‘s settings.
3. Change the desired settings.
4. When you are finished, click the Save button to return the Course tab to Normal view.
Activity at a Glance
The Activity at a Glance tool brings course data to the forefront and assembles it in a simple graphic format that communicates immediately to the viewer. See updated summaries of recent course Logins, Mail Messages, Discussion Posts, Grade Distribution or Submissions every time you log in. Graphic displays illustrate recent course activity that gives instructors immediate perspective into their student‘s course activities.
Click on the graph to navigate to more comprehensive information and options to take action or click the Edit button to display the Activity at a Glance Settings page to select the graphs to display and who they are viewable by.
Course Tab 103
Field Name Definition
Recent Mail Messages
Displays recent daily mail messages.
Recent Logins Displays daily login summary.
Grades Distribution Displays grade summary.
Recent Discussion Points
Displays daily discussion summary.
Recent Submissions Displays daily submission summary.
Viewable By Allows the course editor to select who can view these graphs.
Add an Activity Graph
1. On the Activity at a Glance toolbar, click the Edit button. The Activity at a Glance Settings page displays.
2. Select the graphs you want to display from the Graphs checkboxes.
3. Select who you want to view these graphs from the Viewable By drop-down list.
4. Click the Save button.
Grades
The Grades section displays course grades for exams, quizzes and assignments. Clicking on the graph displays the Reports Console page. Refer to the section of this document titled Reports for details.
Course Calendar
The Course Calendar section displays public or personal course calendar events. You may select to display All, Public or Personal calendar information. You can also show or hide notes.
Course Announcements
The Course Announcements section displays past or present course announcements. You may select to display Past, Present or All. You can also sort by Ascending or Descending. Clicking on the Edit button displays the Announcement Editor. Refer to the section of this document titled Announcement for details.
Course News
The Course News section displays links to news articles. Clicking the Edit button displays the News Editor. Refer to the section of this document titled News for details.
Calendar Tab 104
Calendar Tab
The Calendar tab allows you to post course-specific schedule items for the day, week, month, or year. As the course instructor, you can use the Calendar tab to post calendar events for yourself, for select students in your course, and/or for your entire class.
In addition to appearing on the Calendar tab of the course site, ANGEL calendar entries also appear on each student‘s personal home page, on the dates designated for the events.
Calendar controls
The Calendar tab‘s toolbar contains the following options:
The Add link opens a form for creating calendar entries.
The List and Grid links let you view calendar dates and events as a list or in standard calendar grid format. When viewing calendar entries in List format, you can choose a specific date from the small calendar navigator or choose a month and year from the drop-down menus.
By default, the calendar appears in Grid format.
If your calendar navigator does not appear in List format, click the Show Calendar link (at the left end of the toolbar) to make it visible.
The Day, Week, Month, and Year links (at the right end of the toolbar) let you change your calendar view.
The Next and Previous links enable you switch to the next view (Day, Month, or Year). Click Today to bring up the current day‘s events.
Calendar Tab 105
In the All Entries box (located below the calendar grid), there are links that let you view public entries, entries made by members of a given team, or just your personal entries.
Event Settings
The Event Settings form allows you to add a calendar item for the entire class, for a specific team, or for a particular student. This provides an opportunity to set up appointments with students, teams or the entire class to discuss assignments, provide academic advising, and more. This event is displayed on the user‘s personal calendar, Today‘s Calendar and the user‘s course calendar.
Field Name Description
Title This is the title for the calendar item.
User The User drop-down list allows you to select the entire class, a specific team, or a particular student
Section This is the section of the course.
Category The Category drop-down list allows you to specify the calendar entry type.
Calendar Tab 106
Field Name Description
Contact The Contact text box allows you to provide additional information for the event.
Location The Location text box allows you to provide additional information for the event.
Notes The Notes text box allows you to enter any information that you would like to appear with the calendar entry.
Password/Confirm The optional Password and Confirm fields allow you to password-protect a calendar entry.
Date/Time/Duration The Date, Time and Duration drop-down lists allows you to designate the event timing.
How to Add a Calendar Entry
To add an entry to the calendar:
1. Log in to ANGEL, select a course, and click the Calendar tab.
2. Click the Add link.
The Event Settings page appears.
Calendar Tab 107
3. Type the title of the calendar event into the Title field.
4. Select the user from the User drop-down list.
5. Select the event category from the Category drop-down list.
6. Set the event‘s Date, Time, and Duration from the appropriate drop-down lists.
Instead of clicking the Add link, you can click the desired date on the calendar. This opens the Event Settings page and automatically applies the chosen date to the Date field.
7. Optionally, you can use the Contact, Location, and Notes fields to provide additional information for the event.
The inline HTML Editor is available in the Notes text box, allowing formatted information. For instructions on using the HTML Editor to format text within ANGEL, refer to the Appendix section “How to Use the Inline HTML Editor.”
8. If this is not a recurring event, click the Save button. The Calendar tab appears, with your calendar entry listed.
9. For a recurring event, click the Recurrence button. The Interval Settings page appears.
Calendar Tab 108
10. Specify the Beginning Date, Ending Date, Time, and Duration in the Date and Time Settingss area.
11. In the Interval Settings area, specify whether the event will recur daily, weekly, or monthly. If you select the Weekly or Monthly option, set the specific day on which the event will take place.
12. Click Save.
The Calendar tab appears with your new event listed.
For more on this topic see “How to Add Assignment Dates to the Calendar” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
For more on this topic see “How to Link to Content Items within a Calendar Event” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
How to Edit/Delete/Export Course Calendar Items
Use the Edit or Delete buttons to modify or delete your calendar entry. The Edit button displays the Event Settings editor allowing you to make necessary changes. The Delete button displays the Delete Event notification. Select the Export button to save the calendar entry as a file.
Calendar Views
ANGEL® 7.3 provides several view options for your course calendar. The Calendar toolbar has a Format section allowing you to select how the calendar is viewed – either List or Grid. List format displays the calendar items in a list. The Grid format displays the calendar in a format similar to Microsoft Outlook.
The Calendar toolbar also has a View section allowing you to select Day, Week, Month or Year for viewing appointment, meetings, assignments, etc.
In the lower left section of the Calendar, you may select to view:
All Entries - displays all Public and Personal entries for your Calendar.
Public Entries - displays only those items that are created for the Entire Class.
Team Entries - displays those calendar items that are specific to a team.
Personal Entries - displays those calendar items that are specific to the user.
Calendar Tab 109
Lessons Tab 110
Lessons Tab
The Lessons tab is designed to house the majority of your instructional content. Here, you can create lecture notes, hyperlinks, assessments, discussion forums, drop boxes for assignments, and more. Lesson content can be accessed directly on the Lessons page or nested within folders or subfolders.
Principles for Nesting Content
Since the Lessons tab supports nested content, you have the ability to organize your course content in a variety of ways. Effective nesting assists students in locating materials quickly and easily while also allowing the instructor maximum effectiveness in revealing course content gradually. There are three basic principles to keep in mind when nesting content: the importance of First-level Content, effective Titling, and organizing Sequential Content.
First-level Content: First-level content refers to the content viewable when students first click onto the Lessons tab. This view serves as the entry-point to all course materials housed on the Lessons tab, acting as a signpost that directs students to content that exists at deeper levels. Consequently, first-level content should be quickly scan-able and easy to navigate.
Lessons Tab 111
Consider organizing your course content into a set of folders that exist as first level content. When students first click the Lessons tab, they see only a list of folders that breaks content down into useful categories.
Effective Titling: Creating effective titles for content items helps students locate specific content quickly and easily. Subtitles can be particularly useful in specifying content. At the folder level, subtitles can augment the folder title by providing additional specifics about what materials are contained inside the folder. At the item level (quiz, drop box), subtitles can specify due dates or provide other relevant details concerning the content item.
Organizing Sequential Content: If you plan to reveal content items gradually, nesting your course content accordingly allows you to specify settings such as start and end dates easily using cascade settings. For example, if you create a first-level content folder named "Readings & Homework" that contains sub-folders for Chapters 1 through 10 of the course textbook, each chapter folder and its contents (perhaps including: the reading itself, supplemental links to related websites, and a practice quiz on the chapter) can be set to reveal at the same time. For detailed instructions on using cascade settings, refer to the section of this document titled Cascade Settings.
For more on this topic see “How to Organize Content” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Add Content
The Add Content hyperlink allows course editors to create a variety of content items including: folders, pages, hyperlinks, assessments, surveys, games, discussion forums, drop boxes and more.
Lessons Tab 112
Assessments
Assessments can be used to help build engaging online learning environments, reinforce lessons, and evaluate student work. Assessments can consist of many question types including the common multiple choice, true/false and matching formats.
Assessments contain the following tabs for configuring the assessment settings:
For more on this topic see “Understanding the Difference between Assessments and Quizzes” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides common settings for the assessment including title, subtitle and directions.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
Interaction The Interaction tab provides settings for how the assessment is displayed and delivered.
Review The Review tab determines how instructor is displayed when the assessment is submitted.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating assignments for the assessment.
How to Create/Edit an assessment
To create/edit an assessment on the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
Lessons Tab 113
If Then
You are adding a new assessment
1. Click Add Content.
2. Click Assessment.
You are editing an existing assessment
Navigate to the assessment and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
N
Subtitle
The subtitle text is used when listing the item and also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected. The subtitle appears in a smaller font directly beneath the title text. Use subtitles to give longer descriptions of an item.
N
Page Text The Page Text field is used to provide directions or a description for the assessment.
A
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Lessons Tab 114
Field Name Description View
Link Target
Allows you to choose how will open in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
It is recommended that the No Banner checkbox be selected when opening the link item in a new window. This option eliminates the title and editor settings for the item when it opens in the new window.
N
Icon URL Type a fully qualified URL or browse to an image that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL
Type a fully qualified URL or browse to a page that provides more information about how to use this resource. For example, if you create a link to an online encyclopedia you could use this link to point to the online help for that encyclopedia.
A
5. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 115
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines whether visits to the content item will be logged in the reports console.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
When selected, the assessment will be hidden from the view of non-editors.
N
Lessons Tab 116
Field Name Description View
Viewable by The Viewable By setting allows the instructor to restrict access to the ANGEL® 7.3 content item according to the course rights designation assigned to the user.
Everyone allows the content item to be accessed by anyone on the World Wide Web regardless of whether they are affiliated with your institution and regardless of whether they have a valid account on the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Authenticated Guest allows any authenticated ANGEL® 7.3 user to access the content item. This includes both users who are on the course roster and those who are not.
Students restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of student or higher.
Team Leaders restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of team leader or higher.
Course Mentors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course mentor or higher.
Course Assistants restricts access to the content item only to those on the course roster who have course rights of course assistants or higher.
Course Editors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course editor.
Author Only restricts access to the author of the content item.
N
Lessons Tab 117
Field Name Description View
Password Assign a password to the content item to further restrict who can view it. When accessing the content item, the user will be prompted to type the password (if known) to view the item.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows the course editor to restrict access to a particular group of users. This can be useful when conducting group projects to ensure that only group members see material for their group.
Select the Selected Teams option and select the checkbox(es) next to the teams that need access to the content item.
N
Start Date Select a Start Date to prevent the content item from being displayed until the specified date.
A
End Date Select an End Date to prevent the content item from being displayed after the specified date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows the course editor to determine who can edit the access settings for the content item. The default setting allows all course/group editors to edit these settings but can be set to author only to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the content of the item.
A
Browser Security
The Browser Security list allows the editor to open the assessment or survey in a new browser window (using Medium setting) disabling common browser functions including menus, address bar, context menus (right-click), and the use of most control keys (Ctrl C for copy, Ctrl V for Paste, etc.). The editor may optionally require the use of the ANGEL® 7.3 secure browser (using High setting). The ANGEL® 7.3 Secure Browser is available for download only to designated ANGEL® 7.3 administrators and is commonly installed in proctored testing lab locations.
A
Lessons Tab 118
Field Name Description View
IP Filter You can easily restrict assessment or survey access to a specific IP address. Using the IP Filter enter the IP Information as follows:
Use commas ( , ) to separate multiple IP address entries
Use a minus sign ( - ) to disallow the specific address
Use a plus sign ( + ) to allow the specified address
Use an asterisk ( * ) within an IP address as a wild card meaning all values between 0 and 255
In cases where an IP address is included in more than one entry, the most specific entry is applied (e.g. a setting of -*.*.*.*,+207.46.249.*,-207.46.249.5) allowing access to any IP address within the 207.46.249 class C network with the exception of 207.46.249.5 which has been excluded.
A
7. Click the Interaction tab.
Lessons Tab 119
8. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 120
For more on this topic see “How Students can Re-Enter an Exam” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Field Name Description View
Date enabled Date the assessment is enabled for users. N
Date disabled Date the assessment is no longer available for users.
N
Display mode Sets how the assessment is viewed by users:
All at once: All questions are displayed on a single page.
Question Set at a time: Questions are displayed one question set at a time. The user must click the Continue button to view the next set of questions associated with the assessment.
Question at a time: Questions are displayed one question at a time. The user must click the Continue button to view the next question.
Show question titles: Question titles are displayed with the question text.
N
Question set defaults
Sets the default settings for question sets including the following options:
Randomize the order in which questions are delivered.
Randomize the order of each question's answer options.
Don't allow backtrack: doesn‘t allow users to go back to previous questions or questions set.
This option is only applicable when using the ‗Question set at a time‘ or ‗Question at a time‘ Display mode settings.
Display feedback after each question: Sets feedback to display after each question is answered.
This option is only applicable when using the ‗Question at a time‘ Display mode setting.
N
Lessons Tab 121
Field Name Description View
Correct answer must be selected before next question is presented: Disables the assessment from advancing to the next question until users select the correct answer.
This option is only applicable when using the ‗Question at a time‘ Display mode setting.
Attempts allowed
Sets the number of times a user can complete the assessment
N
Mastery settings
When selected, the course editor specifies a percentage to represent mastery on the assessment. User scores equal to or higher than this percentage are considered to demonstrate mastery of the assessment and denied access to retake the assessment.
N
Validation Sets validation options:
Do not allow incomplete submissions
Allow incomplete submissions with warning
Allow incomplete submissions without warning
N
Save option Allows users to save answers and finish the assessment at a later date/time.
N
Anonymous mode
Allows assessments to be completed and submitted anonymously.
N
Time limit Sets the amount of time allowed to complete the assessment.
N
Time warning Sets a time warning to remind users of how much time they have left to complete the assessment. Time warning values can be set in increments from 1 minute to 30 minutes.
N
Automatically submit assessment when time expires
Sets ANGEL® 7.3 to automatically submit the assessment, regardless of completion status when the time has expired.
N
Lessons Tab 122
9. Click the Review tab.
10. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
View submission history
Determines the level of review feedback to which users have access.
Anonymous assessments do not allow feedback regardless of this setting.
Full Review allows the user to review the full results of the assessment upon submission, restricted only by the current Full Review Options. In addition, upon returning to a previously submitted assessment, the user is presented with a hyperlinked list of the dates on which he/she has taken the assessment. The user may click on the hyperlinked item to review the full results of the submission restricted only by the current Full Review Options.
List only allows the user to review a list summary of the assessment upon submission, including the number of points awarded, the number of points missed, and an overall score.
N
Lessons Tab 123
Field Name Description View
In addition, upon returning to a previously submitted assessment, the user is presented with a list of the dates on which the user submitted the assessment and the grade for each submission (if applicable).
Disabled prevents the display of feedback upon submission of the assessment and also disables the display of information regarding previously submitted assessments.
Review availability
Sets when review feedback is displayed.
Review begins <amount of days> after user submission
Review ends <amount of days> after review begins
Restrict review until all questions are graded.
N
Display feedback
Sets when review feedback is displayed.
Question set completion (conditional) - Displays review feedback upon completion of each question set.
This option is only applicable when using the ‗Question set at a time‘ Display mode interaction setting.
Assessment completion - Displays review feedback upon completion of the assessment.
N
Feedback options
Sets which review feedback options are displayed. Options include:
Overall score
Right or wrong
Question text
User response
Feedback text
Answer key
Grader remarks
Points possible
Points awarded
N
11. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 124
12. Complete the following steps (optional). For more information regarding mapping standards, see the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management.
If you are
Then
Mapping a new standard
To browse for a standard:
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this assessment.
3. Click Save.
To search for a Standard:
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click Save.
Removing To remove a standard:
Lessons Tab 125
If you are
Then
a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click Save.
13. Click the Objectives tab.
14. Complete the following steps (optional). For more information regarding mapping objectives, see the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management.
If you are
Then
Mapping a new
To browse for an objective:
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the
Lessons Tab 126
If you are
Then
objective objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click Save.
To search for an objective:
1. Click the Search Objectives tab.
2. Type a keyword and click Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
Removing an object mapping
To remove and objective:
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click Save.
15. Click the Automate tab (optional).
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Lessons Tab 127
Field Name Description View
Current Actions Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
For more information regarding using actions and agents, see the sections of this document titled Automate Tab and Actions.
16. Click the Assignments tab.
17. Complete the following fields (optional).
Field Name Description View
Task Type Determines when a milestone is considered to have been completed.
Manually marked - Users must explicitly indicate completion by clicking a link.
Item completion - Milestone is considered complete when the lesson item itself is marked as completed for the user.
N
Assign date Specifies the date on which the students should begin work on the milestone. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
N
Lessons Tab 128
Field Name Description View
Due date Specifies the date by which the milestone should be completed. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
N
Assignment Specifies the mapping of the content item to a gradebook assignment/column. To map the content item to a new gradebook assignment/column, select (New Assignment) from the drop-down menu.
N
Category Determines which gradebook category the content item is associated with. To map the content item to a new gradebook assignment/column, click the Other button and complete the following fields:
Title – Provide a title for the gradebook category.
Weight – If the gradebook overall grade will be calculated based on a weighted grading scheme, type the appropriate category weight in the Weight field. If the gradebook overall grade will be calculated on a points-based grading scheme, select the Auto-calculate checkbox option.
Extra Credit – To configure the new gradebook category as extra credit, select the Extra credit checkbox option.
N
Points Possible Species the point scale for the assignment with respect to gradebook reporting.
N
Calculation Type
Determines how the grade for the content item will be calculated when updated in the gradebook.
Average score – Updates the gradebook assignment/column using the average of all graded submissions for the user.
Maximum score – Updates the gradebook assignment/column using the highest score for the user.
First submission – Updates the
N
Lessons Tab 129
Field Name Description View gradebook assignment/column using the first submission from the user.
Last submission – Updates the gradebook assignment/column last submission from the user.
Manual – Does not update the gradebook assignment/column. A course editor or course assistant must manually update the gradebook assignment grade.
Display Format Specifies the format to use when displaying the assignment grades in the gradebook.
N
Hide gradebook assignments from students
Specifies whether the gradebook assignment should be viewable by students.
N
18. Click the Save button.
For more on this topic see “Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
For more on this topic see “Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Creating an Assessment – Content/Access/Interaction Settings” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
For more on this topic see “How to Create a Pass/Fail Exam” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
How to Delete an Assessment
To delete an assessment, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Lessons Tab 130
If you want to Then
Delete the Assessment
Click Delete this Assessment.
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
Delete all submissions
Click Delete All Submissions.
5. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK. You will return to the list of Lessons.
Assessment Editor Overview
The Assessment Editor tab allows the course editor to add, edit, preview and delete questions and question sets.
The At a Glance tab provides a convenient interface to view statistics about assessments including performance, question type distribution, access and interaction.
Lessons Tab 131
Creating Assessment Questions
ANGEL® 7.3 Assessments support the creation of several different question types. The following chart provides a description of the available question types and their methods of grading.
Overview of Assessment Question Types
Question Type
Grading Method Description
Multiple Choice
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by a list of choices. Only one choice may be selected.
Multiple Select
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by a list of choices. Multiple selections are allowed.
True False Automatically graded Presents users with a statement that they must determine to be either true or false.
Matching Automatically graded Presents users with a definition and a drop-down list of terms from which they must choose a match.
Lessons Tab 132
Question Type
Grading Method Description
Ordering Automatically graded Presents users with a list of items to be placed in the correct order.
Fill-in-the-blank(s)
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by multiple single-line answer boxes. Responses are automatically graded against a list of allowed answers.
Short Answer
Manually graded (online)
Presents users with a question followed by a single-line answer box.
Essay Manually graded (online)
Presents users with a question followed by a multiple-line answer area.
Off-line Item
Manually graded (online)
Presents users with a question to be completed offline (no answer field appears).
Algorithmic Automatically graded Presents users with a question containing variables that are randomly replaced by the system based on settings provided. Responses are automatically graded against a answer based on random variables and a mathematical formula.
Add an Algorithmic Question
To add an algorithmic question:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Algorithmic hyperlink or icon ( ). The Algorithmic Question Editor page will open:
Lessons Tab 133
5. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 134
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. The Question Text is displayed to students who receive this question.
Insert variables to be algorithmically replaced by surrounding the variable with braces, for example, {x} + {y}.
Click the HTML Editor link to insert images, apply formatting to the Question Text, add WebEQ equations, etc. Note that variables to be replaced algorithmically may be entered into WebEQ equations in braces, if desired.
Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Random Variables
Random Variables are used to generate a random value that may be used to calculate Answer Variable(s) and/or replace variables in the Question Text.
Enter Variable(s) within braces, like this {x}.
For each Variable entered, the Type dropdown menu offers two options for how the system will randomly replace each variable: Continuous Range and Discrete List.
A Continuous Range lets you specify a numerical range within which a single value will be randomly selected by the system when presenting this question to a student. Enter the lower and upper limits of the numerical range by entering values into the Min and Max fields. The random value selected by the system may be rounded to a specified number of decimal places or significant digits.
A Discrete List lets you manually specify individual values from which the system will randomly choose when presenting this question to a student. When entering more than one discrete value, separate each value with a comma.
Answer Variables
Answer Variables are primarily used to generate a value that will be used as the answer to the question. Answer Variables may also be used as dependant variables in order to perform ―stepped‖ computations to arrive at a final answer. To this end, Answer Variables that precede the ―final‖ answer variable(s) may be used in subsequent answer variable formula(s).
Answer variables are entered as a mathematical formula written in ASCII Math. ASCII Math is a method for
Lessons Tab 135
Field Name Description constructing formulas using a string of ASCII (plain text) characters. Here‘s an example of how one could enter a formula to evaluate the sum of {a} and {b} in ASCII Math:
{a}+{b}
Variables to be replaced algorithmically are entered in braces, e.g. {a}, and must be defined in the Random Variables section of the Question Editor page.
When using functions in a formula, such as square roots, the use of parentheses is required. For example, the following square root:
Would be entered in ASCII math as follows:
sqrt({a})
When the system evaluates the formula you have entered, it follows a specific order of operations:
1. Parentheses (innermost to outermost)
2. Exponents and roots
3. Multiplication and division
4. Addition and subtraction
For example, given:
3 - (5 - (7+1))**2 * (-5) + 3
The system will arrive at an answer by following the order of operations in the following way:
Evaluate the innermost expression (7 + 1):
3 - (5-8)**2 * (-5) + 3
Lessons Tab 136
Field Name Description Evaluate the expression within the remaining parentheses (5 − 8): 3 - (-3)**2 * (-5) + 3
Evaluate the power of (−3)**2:
3 - 9 * (-5) + 3
Evaluate the multiplication 9 * (−5):
3 - (-45) + 3
Evaluate the subtraction 3 - (-45):
48 + 3
Evaluate the addition 48 + 3:
48 + 3 = 51
The following example demonstrates how a more complicated equation can be entered using ASCII Math: the quadratic equation:
Because there are two possible answers for this equation, two separate ASCII Math formulas are required:
(- {b} + sqrt ( {b} ** 2-4 * {a} * {c} ) ) / (2 * {a} )
(- {b} - sqrt ( {b} **2-4 * {a} * {c} ) ) / (2 * {a} )
Once these formulas have been established, there are two ways to evaluate a student. One, you may provide two answer boxes and require the student to enter the positive and negative result. Two, you may or provide one answer box and provide full credit for either the positive or negative result as defined in the Grading Rubrics section.
The following ASCII math operators, constants, and functions recognized by the system:
Lessons Tab 137
Field Name Description Operators:
Operator Description
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
** Power or exponent. For example, 2**2 = 4.
( ) Parentheses used to group elements for precedence
! Logical NOT. For example, !(0) = 1, !(1) = 0, !(-3.14) = 0)
% Modulus or remainder For example, 5%2 = 1.
&& Logical AND For example (0&&0 = 0, 0&&1 = 0, 1&&1 = 1, 3&&-2.5 = 1)
|| Logical OR (For example, 0||0 = 0, 0||1 = 1, 1||1 = 1, 3||-2.5 = 1)
Constants:
Constant Description
_e Base e, Euler‘s constant (2.71828…).
_pi Pi – (3.14159…).
Functions:
Function Description
abs(x) Absolute value of x.
acos(x) Arc-cosine of x in radians.
acosh(x) Hyperbolic arc-cosine of x in radians.
angle(x,y) Arc-tangent of x/y in radians. Uses signs to determine result quadrant.
asin(x) Arc-sine of x in radians.
asinh(x) Hyperbolic arc-sine of x in radians.
atan(x) Arc-tangent of x in radians.
atan2(x,y) Same as angle(x,y).
atanh(x) Hyperbolic arc-tangent of x in radians.
Lessons Tab 138
Field Name Description ceil(x) Round x up to the nearest integer. ceil(2.1) = 3. ceil(-2.1) = -
2.
cos(x) Cosine of x in radians.
cosh(x) Hyperbolic cosine of x in radians.
exp(x) Base e (Euler‘s constant) raised to the power of x.
fact(x) Factorial of x. fact(3) = 6.
floor(x) Round x down to nearest integer. floor(2.8) = 2. floor(-2.8) = -3.
int(x) Return integer portion of x. int(4.32) = 4. int(-4.32) = -4.
ln(x) Base e natural logarithm of x.
log(x) Same as ln(x).
log10(x) Base 10 logarithm of x.
max(x,y,…) Return the maximum of all supplied arguments. max(1,2,3) = 3.
min(x,y,…) Return the minimum of all supplied arguments. min(1,2,3) = 1.
mod(x,y) Modulus or remainder of x/y.
rand( ) Return a random number between 0 and 1.
round(d,x) Round x to d decimal places. Halfway cases round away from 0.
sin(x) Sine of x in radians.
sinh(x) Hyperbolic sine of x in radians.
sqrt(x) Square root. sqrt(9) = 3.
sum(x,y,...) Return the sum of all supplied arguments. sum(1,2,3) = 6.
tan(x) Tangent of x in radians.
tanh(x) Hyperbolic tangent of x in radians.
Answer Boxes Answer Boxes give students the means to provide an answer the question. At least one Answer Box is required, but you may enter multiple Answer Boxes if desired.
Box Label is an optional field that, when entered, presents text to students preceding a given Answer Box.
Box Width, which is displayed when the View Advanced Options checkbox is selected, sets the width of the Answer Box. To set a width, enter a whole number, which equates to the width of the Answer Box measured in characters.
When the Display Units Box checkbox is selected a Unit Box field is displayed to students who receive this question, and additional unit information is displayed in the Grading Rubrics section below.
Lessons Tab 139
Field Name Description Score %, which is displayed when the View Advanced Options checkbox is selected, gives course editors a way to set the percentage each answer box will count towards the total points awarded for a question. If the Score % boxes are left blank, each answer box will count for an equal portion of the question‘s total points. If you choose to manually enter percentages for Answer Boxes, the Score % field(s) must total 100%.
Grading Rubrics
Grading Rubrics determine how student responses will be evaluated by the system in order to provide full, partial, or no credit. A Grading Rubric section is automatically presented for each Answer Box entered for the question. At least one Answer is required for each Grading Rubric section displayed. To provide partial credit, add additional Answers for each Grading Rubric section with different criteria and Score percentages.
The Answer dropdown menu‘s values are determined from the Answer Variables defined above. Select the appropriate Answer Variable to be used by the system when it compares the student‘s response in order to award credit.
For Answer Boxes that are set to require units, a Units field is displayed which requires the entry of the units text a student must enter in order to receive credit. Select the Case Sensitive option if the student‘s entry must exactly match the case of the Units entered. If there is more than one acceptable way to enter a unit, you may add additional Rubric Answers to support additional full or partial credit scenarios.
The Evaluate Answer Using dropdown menu provides three options: Equals, Rounding, and Tolerance. Select Equals to award credit when a student response equals the answer exactly. Select Rounding to award credit based on rounding the answer to a number of decimal places or significant digits. Select Tolerance to award credit when a student response is within an absolute or relative (percentage) range of the answer.
If Show Answer Feedback has been selected, a Feedback field is displayed for each Rubric‘s Answer. Text entered in the Feedback field is displayed to students if the respective Answer is used by the system to award credit. Click the HTML Editor link to insert images, apply formatting to the Feedback text, add WebEQ equations, etc.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide general feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be
Lessons Tab 140
Field Name Description easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Answer labels Sets the type of label to display for your answer choice. Options include alpha listing with A), a) or 1) and by drop down list.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
Add a Multiple Choice Question
To add a multiple choice question:
Lessons Tab 141
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Multiple Choice hyperlink or icon ( ).
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Lessons Tab 142
Field Name Description
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Answer Choices
Provides possible answers for each question. The correct answer is designated by clicking the Correct radio button. Select the ‗view advanced options‘ checkbox and type a percentage in the appropriate % fields (denoting percentage of points possible assigned to the partially correct choice) to assign partial credit to partially correct choices.
Enter feedback for answer options
When selected, feedback fields are displayed for each answer choice allowing the editor to provide unique feedback based on the choice selected by the student.
More answer choices
Allows the editor to add additional answer choices to the question.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Answer labels Sets the type of label to display for your answer choice. Options include alpha listing with A), a) or 1) and by drop down list.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited
Lessons Tab 143
Field Name Description has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
Add a True False Question
To add a true/false question:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the True False hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 144
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Answer The correct answer is designated by clicking the True of False radio button.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Lessons Tab 145
Field Name Description
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
Add a Multiple Select Question
To add a multiple select question, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Multiple Select hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 146
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Grading Sets how a question is graded:
Normal: Grading is based on sum of the point values assigned to each correct choice selected
Lessons Tab 147
Field Name Description by the student. Students are automatically penalized for selecting incorrect answers, but the final score for the question cannot be less than 0 points.
All or nothing: The student is given full credit for an exactly correct answer. Partially correct answers are given a zero for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Answer Choices Provides possible answers for each question. The correct answer is designated by clicking the Correct radio button. Select the ‗view advanced options‘ checkbox and type a percentage in the appropriate % fields (denoting percentage of points possible assigned to the partially correct choice) to assign partial credit to partially correct choices. Negative percentages can specified for incorrect answers, but the final score for the question cannot be less than 0 points.
Enter feedback for answer options
When selected, feedback fields are displayed for each answer choice allowing the editor to provide unique feedback based on the choice selected by the student.
More answer choices
Allows the editor to add additional answer choices to the question.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Answer labels Sets the type of label to display for your answer choice. Options include alpha listing with A), a) or 1) and by drop
Lessons Tab 148
Field Name Description down list.
Maximum possible selections
The maximum number of answers students may select
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
Add an Ordering Question
The ordering question provides a list of terms that need to be placed in the correct order. This question type provides a list of items with a drop-down number list to place the item in the correct order.
To add an ordering question, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 149
4. Click the Ordering hyperlink or icon ( ).
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Enter Choices Type each choice in a different Choice field and select the appropriate sequence value for each using the Order drop-down menus.
Add new definitions
Allows the editor to add additional definitions to the question.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with
Lessons Tab 150
Field Name Description the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
Add a Matching Question
The matching question provides a true matching capability to an assessment question. Use the matching question type for terms and definition type questions.
To add a matching question:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
Lessons Tab 151
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Matching hyperlink or icon ( ).
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Lessons Tab 152
Field Name Description
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Enter terms Enter the terms to be defined.
Add new terms
Allows the editor to add additional terms to the question.
Enter definitions
Enter the definitions for the terms and select the appropriate numeric value from the Match drop-down menu to match each definition to the appropriate term.
Add new definitions
Allows the editor to add additional definitions to the question.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Lessons Tab 153
Field Name Description
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
9. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
10. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
11. Click the Done button.
Add a Fill -in-the-blank(s) Question
ANGEL® 7.3 Assessments provide a fill-in-the-blank(s) question type that ANGEL® 7.3 attempts to grade using a sounds-like algorithm to compare student responses to a list of instructor-provided acceptable answers.
To add a fill-in-the-blank(s) question, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Fill in the blank(s) hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 154
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Use _n_ to insert one or more identified blanks into the question text (e.g. The quick brown _1_ jumped over the lazy _2_.).
Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Input boxes Sets the width (in characters) for each fill in the blank input box. Select the ‗view advanced options‘ checkbox and type a
Lessons Tab 155
Field Name Description percentage in the appropriate Score % field to modify the percentage of total points earned for each input box. This must total 100%.
Add new input boxes
Allows the editor to add additional input boxes to the question.
Enter answers for input box
Enter one or more allowed answers for each input box using any combination of the following options:
Equals – User response must exactly match the allowed answer to be counted as correct.
o Select ‗Not case sensitive‘ to allow any combination of upper case/lowercase characters in the response.
o Select ‗Case sensitive‘ to require the user response to be entered exactly as typed.
o Select ‗Sounds like‘ to accept any user response that phonetically ―sounds like‖ the allowed answer.
Contains – User response must ―contain‖ the allowed answer text as part of their response.
o Select ‗Not case sensitive‘ to allow any combination of upper case/lowercase characters in the response.
o Select ‗Case sensitive‘ to require the user response to be entered exactly as typed.
Pattern match – uses regular expression syntax to determine if an answer matches a pattern. Can be used to test items such as ―Does the answer start with a ―c‖, end with a ―t‖ and have an ―a‖, ―o‖, or ―u‖ in the middle?‖ The regular expression for that would be ^c[aou]t$
Numeric (equals) – User response must exactly match the numeric allowed answer.
Numeric (with rounding) – User response must match the allowed answer when rounded to the specified number of decimal places or significant figures (number of characters from both sides of the decimal point).
Numeric (tolerance) – User response must match the allowed answer within the given tolerances. Example: The correct answer is 1.0 with a lower bound tolerance of .24 and an upper bound tolerance of .15. Answers- .80, 1.0, and 1.10 would be correct. Answers -1.25 and 1.20 would be incorrect.
Lessons Tab 156
Field Name Description If the ―percentage‖ checkbox is selected, the entered tolerances are a percent of the correct answer. Example: The correct answer is 1.0 with a lower bound tolerance of 50% and an upper bound tolerance of 30%. Answers- .5, 1.0, 1.26 would be counted as correct. -.4 and 1.25 would be incorrect.
Selecting View advanced options checkbox expands the available options for scoring the input boxes. The Score % field allows faculty the ability to determine the value (percent) of each answer box. Example: Question point value is 10 points. Answer box 1 has a percentage of 60% for the correct answer and answer box 2 has a percentage of 40% for the correct answer. Thus if the student places the correct answer in box 1 the student receives 6 points.
Add new answer options
Allows the editor to add additional allowed answers for the current input box.
Shared answers
Uses the same set of answer comparisons for all input boxes.
If Shared Answers is selected the user is not allowed to put the same answer in multiple boxes. To allow the same answer in multiple boxes would require the instructor to specify which answer box that the correct answer is associated.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of
When selected, changes to the question will be to all
Lessons Tab 157
Field Name Description this question in this course
instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
12. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
13. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
14. Click the Done button.
Add a Short Answer Question
Short answer questions provide the student with a textbox to type their response. Student responses must be manually graded. For short answer questions, the answer field allows the instructor to specify their grading criteria for what is considered as a correct response.
To add a short answer question, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Short Answer Question hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 158
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Answer Width Sets the width (in characters) for the answer box.
Correct answer Enter the correct answer or the elements that compose a correct answer.
Because short answer questions must be manually graded, the Correct answer field serves a similar purpose as the feedback field – to provide the correct answer, a grading rubric, or feedback regarding the criteria to receive a good grade on the question.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on
Lessons Tab 159
Field Name Description the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
15. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
16. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
17. Click the Done button.
Add an Offline Item
Offline items allow the instructor to add additional questions to an assessment that may be answered or turned in by means other than assessment submission. The student may be advised to upload their response to the assessment or a drop box, attach to course mail or by other means, including physically handing in the additional question/exercise.
To add an off-line item, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
Lessons Tab 160
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Offline item hyperlink or icon ( ).
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Correct answer Enter the correct answer or the elements that compose a correct answer.
Note: Because offline item questions must be manually graded, the Correct answer field serves a similar purpose as the feedback field – to provide the correct answer, a grading rubric, or feedback regarding the criteria to receive a good grade on the question.
Lessons Tab 161
Field Name Description
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Allow file uploads
Allow users to upload files in response to this question
Restrict file types
Enter the file extensions of acceptable file types (e.g. .doc, .txt) separated by commas. Leave the field blank to accept all file types.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
Lessons Tab 162
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
It is advisable to either leave the answer and feedback text fields blank if your assessment settings are set to provide immediate feedback to the student. Otherwise, the display of your grading criteria may provide the students with the answer before the student has the chance to complete the off-line item.
Add an Essay Question
Essay questions provide the student with a text area to type their response. Student responses must be manually graded. For essay questions, the answer field allows the instructor to specify their grading criteria for what is considered as a correct response.
For more on this topic see “How to Grade an Essay or Short Answer Question” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
To add an essay question, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Essay hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 163
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Question Title Provides the title of the question.
Points Provides a point value for the question.
Question Text Type the question text in the Question Text field. Optionally enter question prompt text (i.e. extra text such as a hint or background information that displays with the question text) or footer text (displays following the last question choice). Click the HTML Editor hyperlink to insert images, apply formatting to the question text, etc.
Answer length Sets the length (in rows) for the answer box.
Correct answer Enter the correct answer or the elements that compose a correct answer.
Note: Because essay questions must be manually graded, the Correct answer field serves a similar purpose as the feedback field – to provide the correct answer, a grading rubric, or feedback regarding the criteria to receive a good grade on the question.
Feedback Allows the editor to provide unique feedback based on whether the student provides a correct or incorrect answer.
Keywords Allows the editor to associate new or existing keywords with the question. When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the keywords.
Difficulty When selected, the course editor can assign a difficulty level to the question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). When used in conjunction with the ‗Add to question bank‘ option below, the resulting question can be easily searched for and added to other assessments based on the difficulty setting.
Add to question bank
Adds the current question to the Question Bank Manager for the course.
For more information regarding managing question bank questions, see the section of this document titled Question Bank Manager.
Update all instances of this question in this course
When selected, changes to the question will be to all instances of the question being used in the course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied or re-used at least once within the same course.
Lessons Tab 164
Field Name Description
Automatically accept changes made to this question from the master source
When selected, changes made to the source question (located in a different course or repository) will be automatically applied to the copy of the question being used in this course.
This option will only appear if the question being edited has been copied from a different course or repository.
Add another Select a question type from the dropdown menu and click the Add question button to save the current question and add another question without returning to the Add Question screen.
6. Click the Standards tab to map the question to one or more standards.
7. Click the Objectives tab to map the question to one or more objectives.
8. Click the Done button.
Adding Questions from Other Sources
Copy Questions from an Existing assessment
To copy questions from existing assessment, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the destination assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Copy questions from an assessment hyperlink.
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Choose Assessment
Select the source assessment from the Choose Assessment drop-down list and click the Go button.
Select Questions
Select the checkbox next to each question you want to copy. Optionally select the ‗Select all on this page‘ checkbox to select all of the displayed questions.
Configure copy options
Allow the course editor to specify whether to:
Copy standards
Copy keywords
Copy difficulty level
Automatically accept changes made to these questions when the master sources change
Configure copy options only display when copying
Lessons Tab 165
Field Name Description questions from another course or learning object repository.
6. Click the OK button.
How to Add a Question Pool Item
Question pool items allow the course editor to identify questions to be randomly selected from the course Question Bank Manager or from an associated Learning Object Repository. The selection of questions can be filtered based on search term, keyword, question type and difficulty. Question selection can also be filtered based on question bank folder/category as well as by the course objective or standard mapped to each question.
For more on this topic see “How to use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment from a Question Pool” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
To add a question pool item, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Question Pool Item hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 166
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description
Question title
Specify a title for the question pool (optional).
Number of questions
Specify the number of questions the question pool should display for each user.
Question pool points
Specify the total point value for the question pool (regardless of the number of questions delivered).
Limit results by keyword
Click the Choose keywords link to limit search results to only those questions that match selected keywords. Select the Match ANY keyword option to return questions that match any of the selected keywords. Select the Match ALL keywords option to return only those questions that match all selected keywords.
Lessons Tab 167
Field Name
Description
To select keywords:
1. Select the course you wish to search and click Select. Keywords for the selected course appear in the Select from list field.
2. Select one or more of the keywords (Hold the CTRL key to select multiple keywords) and click Add Selected.
3. Click Save.
Choose Question Bank filters
Click the Choose folder link to limit search results based on question bank or question bank folders.
Search Specify a search term or phrase in the Search text field.
Limit by question type
Deselect one or more question types to exclude those question types from the search results
Limit by difficulty level
Deselect one or more difficulty settings to filter search results based on the difficulty levels specified.
Lessons Tab 168
Field Name
Description
Choose standards filters
Click the Choose standards link and select one or more standards to limit search results to only those questions that match the selected standards.
Choose objectives filters
Click the Choose objectives link and select one or more objectives to limit search results to only those questions that match the selected objectives.
6. Click the Search button.
7. Select the check box next to each question you want to be included in the question pool.
Select a greater number of questions than specified under the Number of questions text field. This will ensure users are presented with the specified number of questions randomly selected from the larger pool of selected questions.
8. Click the Save button.
Copy and Paste Questions
To copy questions from a word processing document:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the destination assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Copy and Paste Questions hyperlink.
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Import Questions
Replace the sample text in the Import Questions text field with the question text copied from your source document. You may copy/paste more than one question at a time. However, the pasted question text must conform to the following format requirements (as shown in the image below).
Each question must begin on a new line.
The first line of each question must start with Q: or the question number followed by a period (e.g. 1. 2. 3. etc.).
If the question has choices the choices must immediately follow the question text.
Each choice must be on a line by itself.
Each choice must begin with a choice letter followed by a period (A. B. C. etc.). Choice letters are not case
Lessons Tab 169
Field Name Description sensitive.
The following optional settings can be added after the question and choices. Each setting must be on a line by itself and follow the format SettingName: SettingValue.
ANSWER: For choice questions enter the letter of each correct choice separated by commas. For open-ended questions enter the actual answer text. Fill in the blank(s) shared answers should have each answer on a separate line in the format of Answer: <Answer>; Percentage: <Percentage of question's point value this answer is worth> Example: Answer:Red;Percentage:25
POINTS: The integer point value for the question. For Multiple Select questions this is the percent value of each correct choice.
IMAGE: The URL of an image to display before the question text.
FEEDBACK: Text to display after the user submits the assessment.
TYPE: Identifies the specific question format to use.
o MC = Multiple Choice
o MS = Multiple Select
o TF = True/False
o SA = Short Answer
o FB = Fill-in-the-blank
o FM = Fill in the blank(s) shared answers
o ES = Essay
o OI = Offline Item
Lessons Tab 170
Field Name Description ANSWERBOXES: Valid for Fill in the blank shared
answers only, indicates the number of answer input boxes to display to the user.
Choice Specifies a default question format for choice-based type questions that do not specify a type value.
Open-Ended Specifies a default question format for open-ended type questions that do not specify a type value.
Points Specifies a default point value for questions that do not specify a point value.
6. Click the OK button.
Browse Question Bank
To add questions by browsing the question bank:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the destination assessment.
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Browse Question Bank hyperlink.
5. Click the + and - icons to expand/collapse the folder views and preview the available questions.
6. Select the checkbox next to each question you want to add to the assessment. Optionally click the ‗Configure copy options‘ checkbox to specify whether to: a) Copy standards, b) Copy keywords, c) Copy difficulty level and/or d) Automatically accept changes made to these questions when the master sources change.
Note: Configure copy options are only applicable when copying questions from another course or learning object repository.
7. Click Done.
For more on this topic see “Understanding Question Banks: Definition of Question Bank and how to Create a Question Bank” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Search Question Bank
To search a question bank, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the destination assessment.
Lessons Tab 171
3. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
4. Click the Search Question Bank hyperlink.
5. Enter your search terms in the blank field and click Search. Optionally click the Advanced Search hyperlink to further filter the search results based on keyword, question bank folder, question type, difficulty, standard or objective.
6. Select the checkbox next to each question you want to add to the assessment.
7. Click Save.
For more on this topic see “How to use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment from a Question Bank” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Managing Questions
How to Preview an Assessment
To preview an assessment, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Preview hyperlink. Your questions are displayed.
4. Click Show/Hide Answers to toggle between student and answer key views.
5. Click Done to close the preview.
How to rearrange questions
To rearrange questions, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. At the upper right corner, ensure the Drag ‗n Drop Enabled checkbox is selected.
4. Click and drag the question to the desired location.
How to delete questions
To delete questions, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Do one of the following:
If you are Then
Deleting a question
1. Click the Delete hyperlink to the right of the question.
2. When prompted to confirm whether you want to delete the questions, click the Delete button.
Lessons Tab 172
If you are Then
Deleting multiple questions
1. Select the checkbox next to each question you want to delete.
2. Select Delete Questions from the Select an Action drop-down menu and click the Go button.
3. When prompted to confirm whether you want to delete the questions, click the Delete button.
How to change point values on multiple questions
To change point values on multiple questions, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the checkbox next to each question you want to update.
4. Select Change Point Value from the Select an Action drop-down menu.
5. Click Go.
6. On the Change Point Value dialogue, enter the new point value for each question.
7. Click Save. The question point values are changed.
How to regrade a question
To regrade a question, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Regrade hyperlink next to the question you want to regrade.
4. Select the appropriate regrade mode.
Regrade mode
Description
Change points or
Allows the editor to change the point value and/or correct answer and regrade all submissions based on the changed values.
Lessons Tab 173
Regrade mode
Description
correct answer
Drop question
The question will be dropped for all submissions and will not be used in grade calculations.
Give full credit
All submissions will be given full credit for the question regardless of the selected choice or answer.
5. Click OK.
6. Complete the following
If you Description
Changed points or correct answer
1. Type the correct point value in the Points field.
2. Select or type the correct answer.
3. Click Done.
Dropped question
The question will be dropped for all submissions and will not be used in grade calculations.
Gave full credit All submissions will be given full credit for the question regardless of their response.
Create/Edit a Question Set
How to Create/Edit a Question Set
To create/edit a question set, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Do one of the following:
If you want to Then
Add a question set to the assessment
1. Click the Add Question Set hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 174
If you want to Then
2. Enter a title for the question set.
3. Click Save.
Edit the settings for a question set
Click the Configure hyperlink located below the title of the question set.
4. On the General tab, complete the following fields:
Field Description
Set title Specifies a title for the question set. Select the checkbox titled ‗Display set title during assessment‘ to display the question set title during the assessment.
Heading text Specifies heading text for the question set (e.g. directions, story problem text, etc.)
5. Click the Interaction tab.
Lessons Tab 175
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Use assessment settings
Automatically uses assessment setting defaults specified when creating the assessment. When deselected, the course editor has the option to modify the following fields.
Question group display mode
The question set mode as defined on the Assessment Interactions tab.
Question set display options
Sets the default settings for question sets including the following options:
Randomize the order in which questions are delivered.
Randomize the order of each question's answer options.
Don't allow backtrack
Display feedback after each question.
Correct answer must be selected before next question is presented.
Some of these options are only available for use based on the Display Mode for the assessment.
Time limit Sets the amount of time allowed to complete the
Lessons Tab 176
Field Description
assessment.
Expiration warning Sets a time warning to remind users of how much time they have left to complete the assessment. Time warning values can be set in increments from 1 minute to 30 minutes.
Automatically submit assessment when time expires
Sets ANGEL® 7.3 to automatically submit the assessment, regardless of completion status when the time has expired.
7. Click Save.
How to Delete a Question Set
To delete a question set, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Delete Question Set hyperlink for the question set you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
For more on this topic see “How to Use Question Sets” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
At a Glance
The At a Glance tab provides a convenient interface to view statistics about assessments including performance, question type distribution, access and interaction.
Field Name
Description
Lessons Tab 177
Field Name
Description
Performance
Performance displays a list of user scores for the assessment (including high score, low score, mean and median) as well as a count of how many copies of the assessment are completed, in progress or not attempted.
Question type distribution
Question type distribution displays the number of each question type included in the assessment, as well as the points and percentage impact of each question type in relation with the total points possible for the assessment.
General
General displays the general settings for the assessment including dates defining access, due date custom URLs.
Lessons Tab 178
Field Name
Description
Access
Access displays the access settings for the assessment including whether tracking is enabled, viewable by rights, whether a password is required, browser security and team access.
Interaction
Interaction displays the interaction settings for the assessment including display mode, number of allowed attempts, validation, time limit and review options.
Gradebook
Gradebook the gradebook setting for the assessment.
Complete an Assessment
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course as a non-editor (or in user preview mode) and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the assessment.
3. Click the Begin Assessment hyperlink.
4. Complete each question.
5. Do one of the following:
Click Submit to submit your assessment as complete.
Click Save to save your assessment answers and return to them later.
Blog
A blog (short for Web log) is a web page with content posted by its owner that may offer the opportunity for visitors to comment on the posting. It is different from a wiki in the sense that only the blog‘s owner can edit the text of the blog while a wiki allows anyone to edit the content.
Lessons Tab 179
Blogs (like wikis) help build engaging online learning environments and are used with discussions and wikis to foster collaborative learning and greater peer-to-peer and student-to-faculty communication. A short sample of online educational activities well suited to blog technology could include:
Instructor professional practice blogs – these blogs can provide information about leaders in their respective fields and provides a forum to discuss information pertaining to professional practice.
Instructional tips for students – a simple, public way of communicating with your students.
Sense of community for students- blogs can be used for single students to reflect on lessons, or by groups of students to share knowledge, reflection and debate.
Course announcements and readings – instructor commentary about announcements or reading assignments.
Annotated links – a collection of annotated research links.
Blogs allow instructors the ability to find new ways to evaluate, recommend and refer student work. The autonomy created by blogs allows students and instructors to find new ways to interact. They are personal and less collaborative in nature, more static than wikis, and they capture changes in thinking with the links to the outside being secondary.
In ANGEL® 7.3 a blog is treated as just another lesson item, with the same grading options as any other lesson item. The following picture shows some of the benefits of the blog format:
A
B
C
D
Lessons Tab 180
Letter Section name Benefit
A Header menu Manage each blog‘s content from this toolbar – only the person who made the original post may edit blog content.
B Right menu A timeline of changes, complete table of contents, and listing of content tags within the blog.
C Blog Content Blog content – easy to format, easy to edit. Only the blog owner may edit the content.
D Comments Blog content supports threaded responses to blog entries.
Creating a Blog
Blogs are created by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the blog are stored.
Blogs contain the following tabs for configuring the blog settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the assessment you are creating.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating assignments for the content item that is being created.
Lessons Tab 181
How to Create/Edit a Blog
To add a blog to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click the Blog hyperlink.
You are editing an existing page
Navigate to the blog and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. On the Content tab, complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
N
Subtitle
The subtitle text is used when listing the item in its parent and also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected. The subtitle appears in a smaller font directly beneath the title text. Use subtitles to give longer descriptions of an item.
N
Link Target Allows you to choose how the assessment opens in a browser.
No banner: Allows you to choose to show the
N
Lessons Tab 182
Field Name Description View banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Causes the linked document to open in the parent frame (one step up in the frame hierarchy).
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
Selecting this checkbox displays the page without the ANGEL® 7.3 toolbar (banner) at the top of the window.
Description The description is an extended description of the contents of the file.
N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL
Type a fully qualified URL to a page that provides more information about how to use this resource. For example, if you create a link to an online encyclopedia you could use this link to point to the online help for that encyclopedia.
A
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
4. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 183
5. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 184
Field Description View
User Tracking
Determines whether visits to the content item will be logged in the reports console.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
This checkbox hides the content item from users. This is useful as you are creating course material that has not been completed. Determines if users are allowed to view the discussion forum.
N
Viewable by The Viewable By setting allows the instructor to restrict access to the ANGEL® 7.3 content item according to the course rights designation assigned to the user.
Everyone allows the content item to be accessed by anyone on the World Wide Web regardless of whether they are affiliated with your institution and regardless of whether they have a valid account on the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Authenticated Guest allows any authenticated ANGEL® 7.3 user to access the content item. This includes both users who are on the course roster and those who are not.
Students restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of student or higher.
Team Leaders restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of team leader or higher.
Course Mentors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course mentor or higher.
Course Assistants restricts access to the content item only to those on the course roster who have course rights of course assistants or higher.
Course Editors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course editor.
Author Only restricts access to the author of the content item.
N
Password Assign a password to an item to further restrict who can view it. When not in edit mode, the system asks the user to type the password before it allows the user to view the item.
N
Lessons Tab 185
Field Description View
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict access to a particular group of users. This can be useful when conducting group projects to ensure that only group members see material for their group.
Select the Selected Teams option designate which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a drop box to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a drop box to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows the course editor to determine who can edit the access settings for the content item. The default setting allows all course/group editors to edit these settings but can be set to author only to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the content of the item.
A
Cascade Settings
Blogs have the unique option to cascade or copy access settings preferences to all sub-Blogs eliminating the need to modify access settings for each sub item. To use this feature select the settings that you want to apply to all existing sub-items. If unchecked, the setting is only applied to the blog itself and new sub-items.
A
6. Click the Standards tab. See the Standards tab documentation for more information.
Lessons Tab 186
7. Complete the following fields. For more information see the Learning Outcomes Management documentation.
If you are
Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 187
If you are
Then
Mapping a new standard
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 188
If you are
Then
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click the Save button.
8. Click the Objectives tab, if applicable.
Lessons Tab 189
9. Complete the following fields:
If you are
Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 190
If you are
Then
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 191
If you are
Then
Search for an Objective
Click the Search Objectives tab.
Type a keyword and click Search.
Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
10. Click the Automate tab. See Automate tab, Agents Console for more information.
Lessons Tab 192
11. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
12. Click the Assignments tab, if applicable.
Lessons Tab 193
Lessons Tab 194
13. Complete the following fields, if applicable.
Field Name Description View
Milestone settings
Task Type: Determines when a milestone is considered to have been completed.
Manually marked: Users must explicitly indicate completion by clicking a link.
Item completion: Milestone is considered complete when the lesson item itself is marked as completed for the user.
Assign date: Specifies the date on which the students should begin work on the milestone. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
Due date: Specifies the date by which the milestone should be completed. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
N
Gradebook settings
Specifies the category the gradebook assignment is associated with.
Assignment: This associates the content item with the gradebook.
Category: Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook. Includes quizzes, exams and homework.
Points Possible: Species the point scale for the assignment with respect to gradebook reporting.
Calculation Type: Select the appropriate calculation type from the Calculation options to determine whether the category average should be based the grade of all category assignments (Use all assignments) or a subset using the highest scored assignments (Use highest or Drop lowest).
Note: The Calculation Type option allows the course editor to configure a category to ―drop lowest‖ or ―use highest‖ n number of grades when calculating each student‘s category average. For example, by specifying ―Use Highest‖ 10 for the Quizzes category, each student category average will be calculated
N
Lessons Tab 195
Field Name Description View based on their 10 highest quiz scores.
Display Format: Specifies the format to use when displaying the assignment grades in the gradebook.
Hide gradebook assignments from students: Specifies whether the gradebook assignment should be viewable by students.
Understanding the Blog Environment
Once you‘ve created a blog, you need to orient yourself to what you see within the online environment.
ANGEL® 7.3 provides hyperlinks which help you create, modify, and maintain your blogs.
Item Location Description
Header menu Header The header menu allows you to quick start a new page or a new entry from within the blog environment. You can also search for a word or phrase and obtain help with blog building.
Sidebar menu Right side The sidebar menu allows you to view entries chronologically, view all entries or view the tags associated with entries.
Content area Middle Within the actual content portion of the screen there are two menus which are hidden until you point over the area.
The first is a menu located in the upper right corner of the content area which allows you to manipulate the content.
The entries menu gives you the option to look through your notes in different ways or print them. This menu is found in the title bar on the right side.
Comments Bottom The comments menu consists of a link that allows you to post comments about the blog.
Navigating the header menu
The picture below is the header menu.
The hyperlinks below allow you to edit your blog.
Lessons Tab 196
Link Location Description
start page Header View the first page of a blog
new entry Header Insert a new blog entry
search Header Search for words and phrases within blog entries
help Header Find help on blog creation
Navigate to the start page
To navigate to the start page, do the following:
Click start page.
Create a new entry
1. Click new entry.
2. Complete the following fields:
Tabs Description
Title Name of the entry.
Tags Lists tags attached to entry.
Text area Allows you to edit and add text to the entry.
3. Click the Save button.
Search the blog
To search the blog, do the following:
1. Position your cursor at the insertion point.
2. In the search box, type your search term.
3. Press the ENTER button.
Lessons Tab 197
Search help
To navigate to help, do the following:
Click help.
Using the sidebar menu
The image below is the sidebar menu.
The links below allow you to edit your blog.
Tabs Description
Timeline Lists entries chronologically, starting with the entry most recently created or modified.
All Lists all entries in alphabetical order.
Tags Lists tags attached to entries. In parenthesis next to the tags, is the number entries with which the tag is associated.
More Shows the missing, orphans and system tabs.
Missing Posts referenced by other posters but which do not exist.
Orphans Lists other posts that exist but that are not linked to the any other posts.
System Entries used to configure the system.
Understanding the content area
The following image is a sample editing menu.
The hyperlinks below allow you to edit your blog.
Lessons Tab 198
Tabs Description
edit Lists entries chronologically, starting with the entry most recently created or modified.
close Closing an entry removes the entry from the content screen. However, it is still listed on the sidebar menu under the Timeline tab.
close others Closing others removes all but the first entry listed on the content screen. These entries are still listed in the sidebar menu under the Timeline tab.
references Shows entries that link to the current entry.
jump Allows you to move to another open entry via a menu.
rollback Rollback to previous revision of entry via a menu.
Editing an entry
1. To edit an entry, do one of the following:
Click the edit hyperlink.
Double-click the entry you wish to edit.
2. Complete the following fields:
Tabs Description
Title Is the name of the entry.
Tags Lists tags attached to entry.
Text area Allows you to edit and add text to the entry.
If you change the title of your entry, you must also change the entries that link to it.
3. Once you have completed your edits, click one of the following:
Lessons Tab 199
Field Name Description
Save To save comment
Cancel To cancel comment
Delete To delete comment
Rollback To rollback to previous revision of comment via a menu.
Closing an entry
To close the uppermost entry, do the following:
Click close.
Closing other entries
To close another entry, do the following:
Click close others.
Viewing references
1. Click references.
2. Select the correct reference from the pop-up menu.
Jump to an entry
To jump to an entry, do the following:
1. Click jump.
2. Select the correct reference from the pop-up menu.
Rollback to an entry
To rollback to an entry, do the following:
1. Click rollback.
2. Select the correct reference from the pop-up menu.
Delete a blog
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the link you wish to delete.
3. On the pop-up menu, click delete.
4. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the Discussion Forum
Click Delete this link.
Lessons Tab 200
If you want to Then
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
5. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of Lessons.
Using Comments
The following image is a sample command menu.
Adding a comment
1. Click the add a comment hyperlink.
2. On the Comment screen, complete the following:
Field Name Description
Title Title for comment
Lessons Tab 201
Field Name Description
Tags Tags for comment
Text area Type comment
3. On the comment screen, click the following:
Field Name Description
Save To save comment
Cancel To cancel comment
Delete To delete comment
Rollback To rollback to previous revision of comment
Deleting a comment
1. Click the hyperlink for the comment you want to delete.
2. In the right corner, click delete.
3. On the dialog box, click OK or Cancel.
Editing a comment
1. Click the hyperlink for the comment you want to edit.
2. In the right corner, click edit.
3. Complete your changes.
4. Click the Save button
Responding to a comment
1. View the comment to which you want to respond.
2. From the Comments menu, click add a comment.
Lessons Tab 202
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Title Title for comment
Tags Tags for comment
Text area Type comment
4. On the Comment screen, click one of the following:
Field Name Description
Save To save comment
Cancel To cancel comment
Delete To delete comment
Rollback To rollback to previous revision of comment
Course Syndication
ANGEL® 7.3 gives users and instructors the opportunity to include media rich learning events and objects. ANGEL® 7.3 also offers portability for users through its course syndication tool using RSS feeds and Podcasts.
What is an RSS Feed?
Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feeds are a group of file formats used by news websites and blogs. You subscribe to a site or blog that provides RSS feeds to be notified when new information, articles, blog posts, etc., are added. You can then use RSS Reader software, which monitors these feeds to retrieve the new information. When using the RSS Reader software, you‘re normally provided with a short description of each article listed as a hotlink.
Lessons Tab 203
What is a Podcast?
Originally coined through Apple‘s iPOD system, the term ‗podcasting‘ describes technologies that automatically distribute audio and video programs over the Internet via a system of publishing and subscribing. It largely utilizes RSS feeds, which promote independent producers to create self-published radio shows, lectures, etc.
Understanding Course Syndication
Course syndication is built by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about course syndication are stored.
Course syndication allows an instructor the ability to create interactive, peer-to-peer collaborative learning communities.
Course syndication contains the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the course syndication you are creating.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and Gradebook items from within the content item.
How to Create/Edit Course Syndication
To add a Course Syndication Folder to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
Lessons Tab 204
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click Add Content.
2. Click the Course Syndication Folder hyperlink.
You are editing an existing page
Navigate to the Course Syndication Folder and click the Settings hyperlink box.
3. Click the Content tab.
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the course syndication N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the course syndication. Can be used to provide more information for users.
N
Page text Is the text for you course syndication use.
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
Lessons Tab 205
Field Name Description View
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
5. Click the Access tab.
6. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 206
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines if user tracking is disabled, on students only, all enrolled users, authenticated guests or everyone.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
Determines if users are allowed to view the Course Syndication Folder
N
Viewable by Determines who can view the Course Syndication Folder.
N
Password Allows you to set a password for users to view your Course Syndication Folder.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you have independent group projects and want to ensure that members only see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define how the context of the item can be changed.
A
Cascade Setting
Folders have the unique option to cascade or copy access settings preferences to all sub-folders eliminating the need to modify access settings for each sub item. To use this feature select the settings that you want to apply to all existing sub-items. If unchecked, the setting will only apply to the
A
Lessons Tab 207
Field Name Description View folder itself and new sub-items.
7. Click the Objectives tab.
8. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 208
If you are Then
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
a. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
b. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
c. Click Save.
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click Search.
c. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
Lessons Tab 209
9. Click the Automate tab.
10. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Actions Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
11. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 210
Lessons Tab 211
12. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with a Gradebook assignment.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
13. Click Save.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
How to add an RSS feed
Once your course syndication is saved, you have the option to add to your course syndication as an RSS feed.
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the Course Syndication Folder
3. Click Add Content.
4. Complete the following fields:
If you want to
Then
Add a Page
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
you are adding a new page
a. Click the Add Content hyperlink
b. Click the Page hyperlink.
you are editing an existing page
Navigate to the Page item and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 212
If you want to
Then
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
N
Subtitle The subtitle text is used when listing the item in its parent and also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected. The subtitle appears in a smaller font directly beneath the title text. Use subtitles to give longer descriptions of an item.
N
Page Text The page text provides additional information that appears on the content page. How the text is formatted depends on the Page Format setting. Currently, the page text field is available on Folder and Game in normal view and Page in advanced view.
N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Link Target Allows you to choose how will open in a browser. Allows you to choose
A
Lessons Tab 213
If you want to
Then
to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
It is recommended that the No Banner checkbox be selected when opening the link item in a new window. This option eliminates the title and editor settings for the item when it opens in the new window.
Icon URL Icon URL is used to change the image of the item‘s default icon. Type a fully qualified URL to a GIF or JPEG image.
A
Help URL Type a fully qualified URL to a page that provides more information about how to use this resource. For example, if you create a link to an online encyclopedia you could use this link to point to the online help for that encyclopedia.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROUND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available
A
Lessons Tab 214
If you want to
Then
choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
5. Click the Access tab.
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description View
Lessons Tab 215
If you want to
Then
User Tracking
Use the tracking option to control when information about visits to a page are logged. You can elect to log access by only certain types of users so that you get the information you need without wasting valuable drive space on the server.
N
Do not allow users to view this item
This checkbox hides the content item from users. This is useful as you are creating course material that has not been completed.
N
Viewable By
The Viewable By setting allows the instructor to restrict access to the ANGEL® 7.3 content item according to the course rights designation assigned to the user.
Everyone allows the content item to be accessed by anyone on the World Wide Web regardless of whether they are affiliated with your institution and regardless of whether they have a valid account on the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Authenticated Guest allows any authenticated ANGEL® 7.3 user to access the content item. This includes both users who are on the course roster and those who are not.
Students restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of student or higher.
Team Leaders restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of team leader or higher.
Course Mentors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course mentor or higher.
Course Assistants restricts access to the content item only to those on the course roster who have course rights
N
Lessons Tab 216
If you want to
Then
of course assistants or higher.
Course Editors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course editor.
Author Only restricts access to the author of the content item.
Password Assign a password to an item to further restrict who can view it. When not in edit mode, the system asks the user to type the password before it allows the user to view the item.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you have independent group projects and want to ensure that members only see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a content item to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a content item to a specific date.
A
Editable By
The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Lessons Tab 217
If you want to
Then
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
7. Click the Standards tab.
8. If you are removing a standards mapping, perform the following:
a. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
b. Click the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
c. Click OK when prompted to "Remove this?".
d. Click Save.
9. If you mapping a new standard, perform either of the following:
Lessons Tab 218
If you want to
Then
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 219
If you want to
Then
Search for a Standard
a. Click the Search Standards tab.
b. Type a keyword and click the Search.
c. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
d. Click Save.
10. Click the Objectives tab.
Lessons Tab 220
If you want to
Then
11. If you removing an objective mapping, perform the following:
a. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
b. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
c. Click OK when prompted to "Remove this?"
d. Click Save.
12. If you mapping a new objective, perform either of the following:
Lessons Tab 221
If you want to
Then
Browse for an objective
a. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
b. Click the checkbox next to the objective to map.
c. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 222
If you want to
Then
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click Search.
c. Click the checkbox next to the objective to map.
d. Click Save.
13. Click the Automate tab.
The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab.
Lessons Tab 223
If you want to
Then
The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name
Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Actions
Provides a list of current actions set for this content item.
A
Field Name
Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the Gradebook.
N
Title This is the title for the Gradebook item. This is used if you want the assignment to have a different title than the content item.
A
Category Determines which category the content is associated with in the Gradebook.
N
Points Possible
The points value for the content item. N
Calculation Type
This determines how the grade is calculated. The default is first submission.
N
Display Format
This determines how the grade is displayed to students. The default is Course Default.
N
Hide Gradebook assignment from students
To keep students from seeing the content item in the Gradebook, select this checkbox.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
Lessons Tab 224
If you want to
Then
Assign Date
The date in which the assignment was assigned to students to complete.
N
Due Date The date on which the assignment is due.
N
14. Click the Assignments tab.
15. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 225
If you want to
Then
16. Click Save.
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the Link page you are creating.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, viewing and editing content items. This editor allows the instructor to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to a lesson item. This editor also determines who can view the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment
The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and Gradebook items from within the content item.
Lessons Tab 226
If you want to
Then
Add a Link
The Link item contains the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the Link page you are creating.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, viewing and editing content items. This editor allows the instructor to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to a lesson item. This editor also determines who can view the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action
Lessons Tab 227
If you want to
Then
Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and Gradebook items from within the content item.
Add a File
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click Add Content.
2. Click File.
You are editing an existing page
Navigate to the file and click Settings.
3. Complete the following fields:
If Then
You are uploading a file
1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description
File to upload
Choose the file you wish to upload
Title Title for the file you are going to upload. This title displays next to the file icon.
File type
Choose the type of file you are going to upload. ANGEL® 7.3 recognizes the file type being uploaded when using Auto Detect.
Lessons Tab 228
If you want to
Then
2. Click Upload File.
3. Click OK.
You are returned to your Lessons list.
You are dragging and dropping a file
1. Click Drag-n-Drop.
2. Drag your files into the Drag and Drop box.
3. Click OK.
You are returned to your Lessons list.
You may find that in most cases you want to extract archive files (e.g. to display a PowerPoint presentation saved as a web page, etc.), however in some cases, you may prefer to leave the archive file in its archived format. For example, you may have uploaded a zip archive which contains several readings (in a .doc or .pdf format) that you want to be easily downloaded by your students as a single file instead of requiring the download of several individual files.
Other common needs for leaving an archive file in an archived format include: 1) the upload of files which are large in file size – leave the file in an archive (compressed) format to ease the time required for the student to download the file. 2) the upload of several associated project files (such as HTML pages, multimedia files, or programming files) – leave the file in an archived format to ensure all files are downloaded together and file associations are kept intact.
4. Click the title of the new link you just created.
5. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 229
If you want to
Then
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description View
Title Is the title for the File N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the File. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
File Target
Allows you to choose how the file opens in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
If you choose no banner, you no longer see the Setting File or Title. To edit, you need to access Lessons, point to your file and click Settings.
N
Description Describes your File content. A
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the
A
Lessons Tab 230
If you want to
Then
content item on the Lessons page. This feature is used for accessibility when drag-n-drop is not available for instructor use.
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL
Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1: Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1: Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1: Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n: For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Lessons Tab 231
If you want to
Then
7. Click the Access tab.
8. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you have independent group projects and want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed
A
Lessons Tab 232
If you want to
Then
after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Cascade Settings Files have the unique option to cascade or copy access settings preferences to all sub-Files eliminating the need to modify access settings for each sub item. To use this feature select the settings that you want to apply to all existing sub-items. If unchecked, the setting only applies to the File itself and new sub-items.
A
9. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 233
If you want to
Then
10. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click Save.
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
Browse for a standard
Lessons Tab 234
If you want to
Then
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click Save.
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 235
If you want to
Then
11. Click the Objectives tab.
12. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 236
If you want to
Then
Mapping a new objective
Do one of the following
Browse for an objective
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click Save.
Search for an Objective
1. Click the Search Objectives tab.
Lessons Tab 237
If you want to
Then
2. Type a keyword and click Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
13. Click the Automate tab.
The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name
Description View
Lessons Tab 238
If you want to
Then
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents
Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
14. Click the Assignments tab.
15. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment Associates the content item with the Gradebook.
N
Title Is the title for the Gradebook item. This is used if you want the assignment to have a different title than the content item.
A
Category Determines which category the content is associated with in the Gradebook.
N
Points Possible
Is the point value for the content item. N
Calculation Type
Determines how the grade is calculated. The default is first submission.
N
Lessons Tab 239
If you want to
Then
Display Format
Determines how the grade is displayed to students. The default is Course Default.
N
Hide Gradebook assignments from students
To keep students from seeing the content item in the Gradebook, select this checkbox.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
Assign Date This is the date the content item is assigned.
N
Due Date This is the date the content item is due.
N
16. Click Save.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
For more on this topic see “How to Create an RSS Feed” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
A hyperlink to the page, link or file appears on the RSS page.
Subscribe to an RSS feed
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the course syndication and click the course to which you want to add the RSS feed.
3. Click RSS Feed.
4. Click Subscribe to this Feed.
Lessons Tab 240
5. In the Name field, edit the name if applicable.
6. From the Create in pull-down menu, select the correct folder to which to add your subscription.
7. Click Subscribe.
For more on this topic see “How to Subscribe to a Course RSS Feed” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Lessons Tab 241
How to add items from a Course Syndication Folder to iTunes
Once your course syndication is saved, you have the option to add your course syndication as an RSS feed.
To add your course syndication as an RSS feed,
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the course syndication and click the course to which you want to add the RSS feed.
3. Click Add to iTunes. The podcast will automatically download into iTunes. Once it has downloaded, you can click Podcast and listen to your podcast.
Updating Podcasts in iTunes
When podcasts are subscribed to, iTunes will automatically update your podcasts when you are connected to the Internet. You can also set iTunes to check for new podcast lectures.
To check for new podcasts do the following:
1. Click Edit
2. Click Preferences
3. Click the Podcasts tab and do the following:
a. Change the number of lectures iTunes downloads.
b. Change how often new podcasts you subscribe to are downloaded.
c. Set iTunes to delete podcasts after you've listened to them if applicable.
Unsubscribing to Podcasts in iTunes
To unsubscribe to a podcast, do the following:
1. Select a podcast
2. Click Unsubscribe (at the bottom of the iTunes window).
Delete a course syndication
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the link you wish to delete.
3. On the pop-up menu, click delete.
4. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the folder and its contents
Click Delete this folder.
Delete the folder only
Click Remove this folder only.
Delete Access Click Delete Access Logs.
Lessons Tab 242
If you want to Then logs
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
Delete sub-items Click Delete Sub-items.
4. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of Lessons.
Discussion Forums
Discussions are completely new in ANGEL 7.3. We‘ve introduced dozens of new features that are designed to better facilitate teaching and learning as well as reducing the amount of time required for instructors to manage discussion forums.
Some quick highlights:
Flexibility. Discussion set-up is now more flexible than ever. ANGEL supports three view modes: Threaded, Nested, and Search. Discussions can be configured to meet a much wider range of use cases—including housing all course-related discussions within a single discussion forum.
Usability. New view and navigation filters allow users to quickly view and navigate between messages— up to 15 different filters allow you view and act on any subset of messages. Forum directions are viewable at all times.
Management Ease. New inline grading (including quick replies), batch grading, and Search Mode make it much easier to efficiently find and act on messages. At-a-Glance gives the instructor immediate perspective on the activity within a discussion.
Grading Power. Scoring Rubrics allow instructors to create a score for a user based on his or her discussion participation and/or the scores achieved on individual posts.
The following sections illustrate the creation and use of discussion forums in ANGEL.
Creating a Discussion
Discussion forums are created via the same process used to create any other content item in ANGEL. You create and configure discussions by choosing options from a series of configuration tabs within the Discussions Settings interface.
To add a discussion forum to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL course and click the Lessons tab. 2. Do one of the following:
Lessons Tab 243
If you are adding a new discussion, click the Add Content link, then click the Discussion link.
If you are editing an existing discussion, navigate to the Discussion forum, then click Settings.
Discussion Settings Overview
The Discussion forum options are located on eight tabs (not all of which are required.)
Lessons Tab 244
These tabs provide the following options:
The Content tab provides settings for the discussion you are creating. On this tab, to enter can titles, subtitles, user directions, and URL information about the discussion.
The Access tab provides settings for accessing, tracking, and viewing content items. This editor allows you to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item. The Access tab enables you to specify who can view and edit the discussion forum. It also lets you set the start and end dates for the discussion forum.
The Post Permissions tab provides settings for the default read, post new, and reply to posts permissions as well as the default settings for any teams within the course.
The Interaction tab is where you set all the Discussion-specific settings, such as discussion modes, view options, moderation settings, attachments, etc.
The Standards tab enables you to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, your institution's cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
The Objectives tab gives you the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones with regard to a discussion forum. Additionally, you can set grade assignments for the forum. You can configure Discussion Scoring Rubrics on the Assignments tab, as well. (This feature is unique to Discussions.) Scoring Rubrics allow you to automatically assign scores based upon student‘s quantitative and qualitative scores.
The Discussion Settings window also includes the following two options, which apply to all tabs:
Normal displays basic settings on the tabs.
Advanced displays both basic and advanced settings.
Discussion Settings: Content Tab
Within the Content tab, you can set the title, description, and launch behavior of a Discussion.
To set up a Discussion's content:
1. In the Discussion Settings interface, click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 245
2. Complete the tab's fields, as follows:
In the Title field, enter a title for the Discussion forum. (Normal view.)
In the Subtitle field, enter a subtitle for the forum. This field can provide more information for readers. (Normal view.)
In the Directions field, enter instructions for students who will use the forum. Directions are always visible for your students. (Normal view.)
Leaving this field blank will hide the Directions portion of the Discussion interface and save screen real estate.
Use the Sequence tool to set a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page. This feature is used for accessibility when drag and drop is not available for instructor use. (Normal and Advanced views.)
The Link Target drop-down list allows you to choose how the Discussion will open in a browser. (Normal view.) Select one of the following options:
o Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
o New Window: Opens in a new window.
o Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
o Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
Additionally, you can choose to show the banner title or hide it. The banner title includes the icon and the title of the Discussion.
Lessons Tab 246
It is recommended that the No Banner checkbox be selected when opening the link item in a new window. This option eliminates the title and editor settings for the item when it opens in the new window.
The Icon URL tool lets you select an icon to display instead of the default content icon. (Advanced view.)
The Help URL tool lets you specify an alternative source for help on this content item. Your institution may create its own separate help document, for example. (Advanced view.)
The Post Types tool allows you select icons for specific types of posts. (Advanced view.)
The Entry Author tool identifies the author of an entry. (Advanced view.)
The Object Author tool identifies the author of an object. (Advanced view.)
Discussion Settings: Access Tab
The Access tab sets user tracking and access rights for the discussion.
To set user tracking and access rights:
1. Click the Access tab.
2. Complete the tab's fields, as follows:
Use the User Tracking drop-down list to disable tracking or to track only students, all enrolled users, authenticated guests, or everyone. (Normal view.)
Select the Do not allow users to view this item check box if you want to hide the discussion forum. Otherwise, leave the box unchecked. (Normal view.)
Lessons Tab 247
Use the Viewable By drop-down list to select the type of users who can view the discussion forum. (Normal view.)
In the Password field, enter a password that users must enter to view the discussion form, if you wish. (Normal view.)
Use the Team Access drop-down list to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that members see only the material for their own group. Selecting the Selected Teams option activates a Team List, which allows you to select which teams have access to the content item. (Normal view.)
For more on this topic see “How to Set Up Teams within a Single Discussion Forum” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
The Start Date tool lets you choose a date on which the discussion forum can be viewed. This prevent the item from being viewed until the specified date. You can use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a specified period of time. (Advanced view.)
The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights. (Advanced view.)
The Object Editable By tool lets you define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc. (Advanced view.)
Discussion Settings: Post Permission Tab
The Post Permissions tab sets the Read, New Post, and Reply rights for the Discussion, as well as the default rights for all teams. (You can set individual team moderation rights on the Interaction tab.)
To set post permissions:
1. Click the Post Permissions tab.
Lessons Tab 248
2. Select options on the tab, as follows:
The three Default check boxes set the Read, New Post, and Reply permissions for all students in the course. Check or uncheck any or all boxes to suit your needs. (Normal view.)
The Teams check boxes determine the permissions for the default team (if teams are present). You can assign specific Read, New Post, and Reply rights to each team. To do so, disable the appropriate Default right, then enable that right per team as desired. Students not in a team will have only those rights selected in the Default row. (Normal view.)
Discussion Settings: Interaction Tab
The Interaction tab sets the majority of the Discussion-specific values for this lesson type.
To set these values:
1. Click the Interaction tab.
Lessons Tab 249
2. Select options on the tab, as follows:
Use the Mode drop-down list to switch the discussion between different usage modes. (Normal view.) Select one of the following options:
o Normal: All students may access and participate fully in discussion.
o Private user journal: Student posts and instructor replies are only visible to the student and the instructor.
Lessons Tab 250
o Private team journal: Posts by team members and instructor replies are only visible to team members and instructors
o Post first: Users must first post a topic before they‘re allowed to view or reply to other student‘s posted topics.
o Fishbowl: Select students or teams to participate in discussion while other selected students or teams may only view discussion.
o Hot seat: Students or teams ―in‖ the hot seat read and reply to topics posted by other students or teams, but may not post new topics themselves.
Once your forum is established and posts have been made, you may not switch modes.
Use the Discussion Views drop-down list to set the student's default view of the discussion. (Normal view.) Select one of the following options:
o Threaded view: Message subject lines are presented in hierarchical view. Clicking on message subject lines presents messages one at a time.
o Nested view: Message subject lines and full body text are presented in a hierarchical view. All message bodies are downloaded when the discussion is launched.
If you want to allow students to change their view, check the Allow users to switch between views checkbox to the right of the drop-down list.
In the Instructor Rating Score box, enter a maximum point value available for each post. Setting a maximum allows the system to calculate and display points earned versus points possible during the grading process. (Normal view.)
Check the Allow Attachments checkbox to allow students to attach files to their discussion posts. (Normal view.)
The Anonymous Posts drop-down list to lets you determine if students can optionally post anonymous messages, or if all posts are anonymous. (Normal view.)
Use the New Topic Posts drop-down list to set the minimum rights level required to post a new top-level topic within a discussion. For example, you can use this option to control top-level topics and force students to respond to given topics instead of creating their own. (Normal view.)
Check the Student Post Edit checkbox if you want to allow students to edit or delete their own posts. Students cannot delete their posts if replies have been posted to them. (Normal view.)
Check the Enable User Profiles checkbox to allow users to view profiles of other users. (Normal view.)
Check the Peer Rating checkbox to allow students to rate the value of other students' posts on a five-point scale. Students can change their votes, but only their last vote is used in the average rating calculation. (Normal view.)
Lessons Tab 251
Check any or all of the Show/Hide Fields checkboxes to determine which fields will appear in the Discussion interface. By default, all fields are displayed. (Normal view.)
Use the Discussion Moderation drop-down list to determine if student posts must be approved by a moderator before they appear within the discussion, or if all posts are automatically approved. (They can be rejected later, if necessary.) Note that you can require specific student posts to be moderated by editing a student‘s permissions via the course roster. (Advanced view.)
The Moderator Rights tools let you choose moderators for this discussion either by rights level (for example, all course editors) or by choosing specific individuals, including students. Moderators can reject, ,delete or edit other users' posts. (Advanced view.)
Select a Team Moderation option to determine which teams will be moderated. (Advanced view.)
If a student belongs to any team with moderation disabled, none of his or her posts will be moderated, even if that student belongs to a team that requires moderation.
Check any or all of the Task Notifications checkboxes to determine which information appears in your task notification list. Note that delivering this information for large discussions may slow your task list. (Advanced view.)
Use the Post Types drop-down list to select icons to represent different types of posts. Post Types can be items such as "Point" and "Counterpoint," for example. You can select one of two default Post Type sets, or create your own by clicking the Edit/Create New button. (Advanced view.)
The Custom Subject Colors tool lets you pick a differentiating color for the subject line of instructor and/or moderator posts. This color can help students identify your posts more easily. (Advanced view.)
The Reply Subject Lines drop-down list controls how ANGEL pre-populates lines of replies to posts. (Advanced view.) Select one of the following options:
o Populated: Automatically prefixes the reply‘s subject line with ―Re:‖ followed by the subject line of the post being replied to.
o Blank: Replies to posts have blank subject lines and require the user to enter a new subject line.
o Blank if reply to RE: Blanks the subject line of a reply if the post being replied to already has a ―RE:‖ in the subject line. This option can help keep long threads more understandable.
Discussion Settings: Standards Tab
The Standards tab allows you to associate the entire discussion with standards as set by your system administrator. This tab may not appear if standards are not in use within your institution, or if your course has not enabled standards.
To set standards:
1. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 252
2. If you want to remove a standards mapping, take these steps: a. Click the Mapped Standards tab. b. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove. c. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖ d. Click Save.
3. If you want to map a new standard, do one of the following: a. Browse for a standard by taking these steps:
i. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
ii. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
iii. Click the Save button.
b. Search for a standard by taking these steps:
i. Click the Search Standards tab.
ii. Type a keyword and click the Search.
iii. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
Lessons Tab 253
iv. Click the Save button
Discussion Settings: Objectives Tab
The Objectives tab allows you to align the discussion with objectives you have set for the course. (Objectives are enabled and created by the instructor via the General Course Settings tool found on the course Manage tab.)
To define objectives:
1. Click the Objectives tab.
2. If you want to remove an objective mapping, take these steps:
a. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
b. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
c. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
d. Click the Save button.
3. If you want to map a new objective, do one of the following:
Lessons Tab 254
a. Browse for an objective by taking these steps:
i. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
ii. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
iii. Click the Save button.
b. Search for an objective by taking these steps:
i. Click the Search Objectives tab.
ii. Type a keyword and click Search.
iii. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
Discussion Settings: Automate Tab
The discussions Automate tab shows you any agents associated with this discussion. (Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab.)
To work with a discussion's agents:
1. Click the Automate tab.
Lessons Tab 255
Discussion Settings: Assignment Tab
On the Assignment tab, you can list an assignment on the course calendar, associate the discussion with a gradebook assignment, or create a scoring rubric for the discussion.
To manage assignments:
1. Click the Assignment tab.
2. Select options on the tab, as follows:
Use the Assignment drop-down list to associate the content item with the gradebook. (Normal view.)
Use the Category tool to associate the content with a category in the gradebook. (Appears when Assignment is selected.)
In the Points Possible box, set a point value for the content item. (Appears when Assignment is selected.)
Lessons Tab 256
Use the Calculation Type tool to determine how the grade is calculated. First Submission is the default setting. (Appears when Assignment is selected.)
Use the Display Format tool to determine how the grade is displayed to students. Course Default is the default setting. (Appears when Assignment is selected.)
Check the Hide gradebook assignments from students checkbox to prevent students from seeing the content item in the gradebook. (Appears when Assignment is selected.)
Use the Task Type tool to determine if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal. (Normal view.)
Check the Use scoring rubrics checkbox to automatically calculate a user‘s score within a discussion based on quantitative (posts, replies, etc.) and qualitative (instructor scores, peer ratings, etc.) measures of student performance. Scores are posted to the Grade Forums tool found in the Utility menu.
Details on the scoring rubric are in the following section, "How to Set Up a Scoring Rubric."
3. Click the Save button, or click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
How to Set Up a Scoring Rubric
To establish a scoring rubric, you need to establish the criteria for each scoring level.
To set up a scoring rubric:
1. Check the Use scoring rubrics checkbox.
The scoring rubric screen appears beneath the check box.
Lessons Tab 257
2. Complete the fields to set up the rubric, as follows:
In the Score field, enter the score you want to assign if the student meets the criteria associated with this score. (Advanced view.)
The Criteria drop-down list lets you create criteria through a series of IF statements. (Advanced view.) Select one of the following options:
o # of posts: A measure of participation
o # of replies. Another measure of participation
o # of replies to my posts: Measures users' ability to spark discussion through posts
o Average peer rating: Informal rating by peers.
o Average post score: The average instructor‘s score for all scored posts
You can assign multiple criteria to any score by clicking the Add Criteria link.
Use the Operators drop-down list to select an operator to evaluate the criteria you selected earlier. Options include =, >, <, ≥, and ≤. (Advanced view.)
The Criteria Value box displays the value calculated by the score, the criteria, and the operator. (Advanced view.)
Lessons Tab 258
Click the Delete Criteria button (the red X at the end of the Criteria row) to delete any single criterion. (Advanced view.)
Click the Add Criteria link to add a new Criteria row so you can set up multiple criteria per score. (Advanced view.)
Click the Add New Score link to add another score, along with corresponding criteria options. (Advanced view.)
The results of the Scoring Rubric are updated in real time on the Discussion Utilities Grade Forum page. See the section "How to Grade a Discussion Forum" for details.
Using Discussion Forums
ANGEL discussions offer four different ways to view messages in a discussion forum:
Threaded View
Nested View
Search View
At-a-Glance View (instructors only) Each of the views is explained briefly here. You can find more details on each view in its respective section.
Threaded View presents messages as a hierarchical list of message topic lines. The post lines can be expanded or collapsed to show or hide replies. Users can sort, flag, score, or rate posts in this view.
Posts are shown in
a sortable list.
Nested View functions in the same manner as Threaded View, but every message‘s body text is displayed in-line in the same window. This view allows you to see the body text of all messages in context of the other message bodies.
Lessons Tab 259
All body text visible
for efficient
browsing.
Search View functions in the same manner as Nested View, but displays only messages that meet the specified search criteria. Search View displays messages in a ―flat‖ (non-hierarchical) manner.
Messages matching the
search criteria are
presented with body text
open.
At-a-Glance View (available only to instructors) consolidates discussion participation, settings, and performance metrics into one page.
Lessons Tab 260
Exploring the Discussion Interface
This section provides a brief overview of the various controls and elements found within Discussions. While nearly all the controls are common to all viewing modes, a few controls are unique to a particular view. The various elements are described in the following sections.
Threaded View Interface
The following illustration shows the screen controls and options available in Threaded View. All of the controls in Threaded View are included in Nested and Search views.
1
3
9
4 5 6
7
8
2
Lessons Tab 261
1. New Post takes you to a new page where you can create a new top-level post in the forum.
2. View Modes let you switch between the four different discussion views.
3. Navigation Controls allow you to move between messages either one reply at a time ( > ) or one top-level post at a time ( >| ). Use the drop-down list to choose which type of messages to navigate.
4. Save Navigation Settings saves a default navigation setting.
5. Print prints the exact view you have set within the post list area.
6. Refresh refreshes the message list to include any new messages that have been posted since you opened the discussion.
7. Directions displays the student instructions as entered by the instructor. The instructions may be collapsed or loaded in a new window to save space on the page.
8. Post List Controls let you manage the posts in the post list. They include:
[+] and [-] expand and collapse all threads within the discussion, respectively.
Post Title sorts posts by title. Sorts alphabetically by post; replies to each post are also sorted at each level of reply.
Flag sorts posts by flag value. Each flag color has a value of 0–9.
Score sorts posts and replies by instructor score.
Author sorts posts and replies by author.
Post Date sorts posts and replies by the date they were posted.
Rating sorts posts and replies by their average peer rating.
9. Post Titles are the names of the posts. Bold items are unread; non-bold items have been read.
Nested View Interface
Nested View differs from Threaded View in that it displays the body text of all the messages in-line. Nested View also offers one additional interface control.
Lessons Tab 262
1
2
1. View All Body Text opens and closes all the message body text. (Available only in Nested View and Search View.)
2. Message Bodies lets you open or close all the message bodies. (In Nested View, all the message bodies are displayed by default.)
Search View Interface
Search View is identical to Nested View, but features an additional search filter and the Advanced Search option.
3
1 2
4
Lessons Tab 263
1. View Filter allows you to limit what types of message are searched.
2. Search Filter allows you to search for and navigate messages that contain the entered search term. The Search Filter works in concert with the View Filter to let you search for messages that match your search term and view.
3. Advanced Search displays a layer with more search options.
Advanced Search
options.
4. Batch Selection & Operations enable you to select multiple messages singly, or by selecting them all. Use the Selected message action drop-down list to apply an action to all selected messages. Available actions include: Approve, Reject, Score, Move, Stick, Unstick, Lock, Unlock, Mark as read, Mark as unread, Delete, and Undelete.
Select or deselect
all posts or replies
Select individual
posts or replies.
Select individual
posts or replies.
At a Glance View Interface
The At-a-Glance View provides instructors with a one-page summary of current activity, basic statistics, and the status of all settings.
Lessons Tab 264
Message Interface
Each message has a consistent set of options, no matter which view you choose. When you open a message, there are two main message option areas: an instructor-only drop-down list and a series of links for all users.
These controls are available
to all users. Note that the
Edit and Delete functions
may be disabled in the
discussions Settings.
These controls are only
available to instructors or
moderators.
Instructor Options
The instructor options appear in a drop-down list at the bottom left of every message. The options include:
Reject: Rejects the current message, setting its status to ―rejected‖. This feature is available even in forums where moderation is turned off. Rejected messages can be viewed and their status changed via the Search view.
Move: Allows you to move a message to another location within the current forum.
Lessons Tab 265
Make Sticky: Marks a message as being ―sticky.‖ Sticky posts are sorted first and appear at the top of the forum; replies made sticky are listed first underneath their respective posts.
Lock: Prevents further replies from being added to the thread from that point forward.
Delete: Deletes the post. This delete command is a ―soft delete." Instructors can view all deleted posts in Search View, and can undelete a post.
Global Options
Reply: Loads the reply screen so you can reply to the post.
Edit: If enabled, allows users to edit their posts.
Print: Prints the message.
Email author: Loads the mail interface so you can send e-mail to the post‘s author.
Delete: If enabled, allows users to delete their posts. Students cannot delete messages that have replies associated with them.
Message read status
When a message is opened, it is automatically marked as read. To mark a message as unread, uncheck the Mark as read checkbox in the lower-right corner of the message.
Set a post‘s status
to unread by
clearing the
checkbox.
Viewing Discussion Messages
In all cases, you click a message's post title to view the message. The manner in which messages are displayed differs depending upon your current viewing mode.
Viewing Discussion Messages in Threaded View
In Threaded View, messages open on their own page to provide the best reading experience.
To open a message in Threaded Mode:
1. Click the Post Title of the message you want to read.
The message opens in a new window.
Lessons Tab 266
Click ―Return to
Post List‖ to return
to the list of posts.
Click on a post title to
view the message in
a new window
2. Use the Navigation controls to view additional messages, or click the <<Return to Post List button to return to the Post List.
Viewing Discussion Messages in Nested View
In Nested View, all message contents are displayed inline so you can view and browse all message text in a single window. You can display or hide all message text, or open and close individual messages.
All message
bodies open by
default.
Click to Hide or
Show all message
bodies
Hide or Show
individual
messages by
clicking the Post
Title.
To show or hide all messages in Nested View:
Lessons Tab 267
1. Click the Hide All Message Bodies icon ( ) to hide all the message bodies.
2. Click the Show All Message Bodies icon ( ) to show all message bodies.
To show or hide individual messages:
1. Click the Post Title of the post to show or hide the message body for that post.
Viewing Discussion Messages in Search View
Search View functions similarly to Nested View with a few extra options. You can further refine your browsing by introducing a search term; all messages then appear in a flat, non-hierarchical list.
Search view adds a
search filter option.
Messages displayed in
a flat, non-hierarchical
list.
To show or hide all messages in Nested View:
1. Enter a search term in the Containing text box, then click press the Search button. Your results appear in the Post List.
2. Click the Hide All Message Bodies icon ( ) to hide all the message bodies.
3. Click the Show all Message Bodies icon ( ) to show all message bodies.
To show or hide individual messages:
1. Click the post title of the post to show or hide the message body for that post.
Using Advanced Search
Search View also offers Advanced Search options to help you fine-tune your search.
To access Advanced Search:
1. Click the Advanced search link, located under the search term entry box.
Lessons Tab 268
Click the ―Advanced search‖
link to view the advanced
search options.
The Advanced Search layer appears.
This layer contains the following options:
Author: You can limit search results to just messages from a particular student or team.
Posted Dates: This option limits the search to posts that occurred after, before, or between two dates:
o Posted after: Setting and enabling (via the checkbox) a ―Posted after‖ date limits the search to messages posted after that date.
o Posted before: Setting and enabling (via the checkbox) a "Posted before‖ date limits the search to messages posted before that date.
o Posted after & Posted before: Setting and enabling both "Posted before" and "Posted after" dates limits the search to messages posted between the two dates.
Status filters: You can further refine your search results by selecting a combination of status.
Navigating Messages
ANGEL offers extremely powerful message-navigation options via the Navigate controls. You can navigate between new posts and replies using 14 different navigation filters.
Navigation Controls
The navigation controls are available at all times. The navigation controls and filters are largely the same in all views. The following section details the navigation controls and filters. Any differences in navigation between the differing views are covered in specific sections below.
Lessons Tab 269
1 2 3
Instructor-only
navigation filters.
1. Navigation Controls allow you to skip to the next or previous post or reply:
navigates to the previous post.
navigates to the previous message.
navigates to the next post.
navigates to the next message.
2. Navigation Filters allow you to choose which messages to jump to or view next:
All posts navigates through all posts and/or replies.
Unread navigates through all unread posts and/or replies.
Read navigates through all read posts and/or replies.
My posts navigates through all of your posts and/or replies.
Replies to my posts navigates through all replies to your posts.
Moderator posts navigates through all of the instructor or moderator posts and/or replies.
Draft navigates through all of your draft posts or replies.
Flagged navigates through all flagged posts or replies.
With attachments navigates through all posts and/or replies with an attachment.
Pending (instructors only) navigates through all posts and/or replies that require approval before they appear on the site. (Moderated forums only.)
Approved (instructors only) navigates through all posts and/or replies that have been approved to appear on the site. (Moderated forums only.)
Ungraded (instructors only) navigates through all posts and/or replies that have been scored.
Lessons Tab 270
Graded (instructors only) navigates through all posts and/or replies that have not been scored.
Locked (instructors only) navigates through all posts and/or replies that have been locked.
3. Save Preferences sets a particular navigation filter as the default option.
Navigating in Threaded View
The navigation controls are available within the Post List and the Message Page.
To navigate messages in Threaded View:
1. Choose a navigation filter from the list.
2. Click the Previous Post ( ) or Next Post ( ) buttons to navigate between top-level posts.
3. Click the Previous Message ( ) or Next Message ( ) button to navigate between every message.
Using the controls on within the Post List simply highlight the next Post Title that meets the filter criteria, as set in the Navigation Filter list.
The navigation buttons
highlight the next post or
reply that meets the filter
criteria as set in the
Navigation Filter pull down
menu.
Once a message is opened, the navigation controls open and load the next post or reply that meets the filter criteria as set in the Navigation Filter list.
Lessons Tab 271
The navigation buttons open
and load the next post or
reply that meets the filter
criteria as set in the
Navigation Filter pull down
menu.
Navigating in Nested View
Since the message bodies are listed in-line in Nested Mode, the navigation controls scroll the next qualifying message to the top of the list and highlights the Post Title line for that message.
To navigate messages in Threaded mode:
1. Choose a navigation filter from the list.
2. Enter a search term in the Containing box and click the Search button. Your results will fill the Post List.
3. Click the Previous Post ( ) or Next Post ( ) buttons to navigate between top-level posts.
4. Click the Previous Message ( ) or Next Message ( ) button to navigate between every message.
Select a Navigation Filter
Click a Previous or Next
control button.
Lessons Tab 272
In Nested View, the next message will scroll to the top of the Post List and the Post Title will be highlighted.
Navigating in Search View
Navigating in Search View is very similar to navigating in Nested View, except you‘re navigating messages that meet both your navigation filter criteria and your search term criteria.
To navigate messages in Search View:
1. Choose a navigation filter from the list.
2. Enter a search term in the Containing box and click the Search button. Your results will fill the Post List.
3. Click the Previous Message ( ) or Next Message ( ) button to navigate between every message.
Select a Navigation Filter Enter a search term and
click ―Search‖
Click Previous or Next
button.
Replying & Posting Messages
The following sections describe how to post a new message and how to reply to an existing message.
Posting a New Message
All new posts are created in the same manner.
To post a new message:
1. Click the New Post button in the upper-left corner of the Discussions interface.
The New Post page appears.
Lessons Tab 273
2. Enter a Post title (required).
The Post title appears in the main message list.
3. Enter your message text in the message text area.
4. Click Save.
Attaching a File to a Post
If enabled via the Discussion settings, you can attach a file to your post. To do so, follow these steps:
1. Click the add a file link just beneath the message text area. The Add attachment dialog box appears.
2. Click Select to browse for files to attach. 3. Select a file and click Open. 4. Click Upload to attach the file.
Lessons Tab 274
You can add additional files using the same method. Remove a file from the list of files to be attached by either clicking the Remove button or by selecting multiple messages via the checkbox on the left and clicking Delete.
Attachments are allowed within discussions by default. You can disable attachments in the Discussions Settings window's Interaction tab.
Using Advanced Message Options
There are six advanced options available for each New Post, as shows in the following illustration. (Note that the advanced options are closed by default.)
Advanced options include the following:
Send replies to course mail sends a copy of each reply made to your post to your Course Mail account.
Save as draft saves the message as a draft message. Draft messages are available in Search View. To view, edit, or post your draft messages, switch to Search View, set your navigation filter to Draft, and click the Search button.
Sticky post (instructor only) makes a post ―sticky.‖ Sticky posts are sorted and presented first in all discussion views. Sticky posts appear at the top of the message lists. Sticky replies appear as the first reply under any given post.
Sticky posts are identified with a pushpin icon ( ).
Do no allow replies (instructor only) prevents users from replying to the message. You might use this option for informational or other posts where replies aren‘t necessary.
Hide post as draft (instructor only) allows you to schedule when a post will appear and disappear within the discussion forum.
o Hide post as draft until: Setting and enabling (via the checkbox) a ―hide post as draft until‖ date stores the post as a draft message (editable in Search View) until the specified date. Users will not see the message until after that date.
o Hide post as draft after: Setting and enabling (via the checkbox) a ―hide post as draft after‖ date stores the post as a draft message (editable in the Search View) after the specified date. Users will no longer see the message after that date.
Replying to Messages
Replying to messages is the same process as posting a new message, except you can view the text of the old message and you have the option of quoting the original message within your reply.
Lessons Tab 275
To reply to a new message:
1. Click the Reply link located in the lower-left corner of the message.
Click ―Reply‖ to reply to any
message.
The Message reply page opens.
Text of message to which
you‘re replying.
Copies original message
into your reply as a quote.
Follow the steps for creating a new post to create your reply. You optionally can include the text of the message to which you‘re replying within the message body area by clicking the Quote original message link.
E-Mailing a Message's Author
You can reply to any message by sending a Course Mail message to that user.
To send a Course Mail message in response to a Discussion message:
1. Click the Email author link located in the lower-left corner of the message.
Lessons Tab 276
Click ―Email author‖ to reply
to the message via Course
Mail.
The Course Mail Compose Message screen appears.
From this point, compose and send the message as you normally would. Once you‘re done with the message, you‘ll be returned to the discussion.
Lessons Tab 277
Managing Messages
Discussions let you manage messages at several interaction points. You can act on a message while reading it in any of the viewing modes; you can act on many messages at same time in Search View.
Deleting Messages
Instructors can delete any message within the discussion. There are two ways to do this: individually and in batches.
Deleting a Single Message
To delete a message, simply click the Delete option in the instructor menu located in the lower- left corner of every post. Optionally, you can click the Delete text link.
Click ―Delete‖ from the
Instructor menu to delete a
message. (you may also
click the ―Delete‖ link to the
right.)
Students can delete messages only if the Discussion Settings > Interaction tab has the Student Post Edit option enabled. Students cannot delete a message if that message already has a reply posted.
Deleting Multiple Messages
You can delete multiple messages in Search View. This capability allows you to select messages for deletion by user, message content, date, or date range—the full tool set of Search View.
To delete messages in Search View:
1. Switch to Search View. The Search View Page appears. You can then search for messages meeting your criteria.
Lessons Tab 278
Select messages singly
Select all / no messages
Choose an action to apply to
selected messages.
2. Select the messages you want to delete by checking the checkbox at the far-right end of the post title line, as shown in the preceding illustration.
3. Choose Delete from the Selected message action menu. You can perform any of the management options from this menu.
Viewing Deleted Messages
Instructors can still view deletes messages in the Search View by selecting Deleted from the View filter, as shown in the following illustration.
All messages that with a ―Deleted‖ status appear. If you delete the message again, it will be permanently deleted.
Undeleting Messages
You can undelete messages by viewing deleted messages in Search View, selecting them, then by choosing Undelete from the Selected message action menu in the lower-right corner of the Search View page.
Lessons Tab 279
Managing Draft Messages
Messages are saved as draft messages by selecting the Advanced option ―Save as draft‖ when posting a new message or replying to an existing message.
To manage your draft messages:
1. Choose Draft from the Navigation Filter list, then find the draft message you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit link at the bottom of the message.
3. Make any changes you wish to make.
Posting a Draft Message
Once you‘ve opened a draft message for editing, you can post it by deselecting the Save as Draft option in the Advanced message options section.
Editing a Message
To edit a message, click the Edit link at the bottom.
Once the message is open, your options are identical to that of creating a new post or a reply.
Flagging a Message
You can apply a colored flag to any message.
To apply a flag:
1. Click the outline of the flag in the Flag column. Doing so creates a red flag.
Click on the flag outline, or
an existing flag to create a
flagged post. Use the
number keys 0 – 9 to set the
color.
2. Change the flag color by choosing a value of 0–9 on the numeric keypad. A different color is assigned to each mumeric value.
Flags are sorted by their color value if you choose to sort on the Flag column.
Double clicking on a flag will reset it to non-flagged (0 value).
Lessons Tab 280
Locking & Unlocking Messages
You can lock a message (and all its child messages) to prevent any further replies from being posted. This may be useful to keep a discussion focused, or to blunt off-topic discussions.
To lock a message:
1. Select a message you want to lock.
2. Select Lock from the instructor menu found in the lower-left corner of the post.
3. The post's status will change to (LOCKED) and a lock icon ( ) will appear next to the Post Title
Users cannot reply to this message or to any of its child messages.
To unlock a message:
1. Select a message you want to unlock.
2. Select Unlock from the instructor menu found in the lower-left corner of the post.
The post's status returns to normal.
Users can now reply to this message and to any of its child messages.
Moderating Messages
Discussions offer two modes of moderation via the Settings > Interaction > Advanced Settings > Discussion Moderation option:
Automatically approve all messages: All messages are approved automatically and appear within the discussion immediately. However, you still have the option of rejecting a message as you‘d expect within a moderated forum.
Moderators must approve all messages: All messages must be approved by a moderator before they appear within the discussion.
Lessons Tab 281
The following sections show you how to moderate messages within a discussion, either individually or in a batch.
Approve or Reject and Individual Message
To approve or reject a message:
1. Choose the desired option from the instructor menu within the post you wish to approve or reject.
2. Click the Go button. The message's status changes to ―REJECTED‖ and is no longer viewable by anyone other than the instructor and the author of the post. The instructor and the author can see the rejected message in Search View by setting the navigation filter to Rejected.
Approve or Reject Multiple Messages
Moderating messages can be a time-consuming process. The following example demonstrates how you can quickly moderate posts.
1. Switch to Search View.
Choose Search View from
the View Mode selector.
2. Set your View filter to Pending and click Search.
Lessons Tab 282
This loads all messages that require approval (status is PENDING) into the message list.
All PENDING messages
shown. With body text open
for easy review.
Select messages you wish
to approve or reject.
Selecting an action here will
apply that action to all
selected messages.
3. Select the messages you want to approve or reject via the checkbox in the upper-right corner of every message.
4. Select the appropriate action from the Selected message action menu, and click Go.
Managing Rejected Messages
Once a message is rejected, it‘s status is set to ―REJECTED‖ and it is no longer viewable in Threaded or Nested views.
It is, however, still visible in Search View if you set the View Filter to Rejected. At that point, all rejected messages are visible to both the instructor and the students who posted the messages.
Students can edit the message and re-submit it for approval, or the instructor may choose to approve at a later date.
Moving Messages
Discussions allow you to move a message from one location to another within a forum.
To move a message:
Lessons Tab 283
1. View the message you want to move. 2. Select Move from the instructor menu, then click Go.
The Move Message(s) dialog box appears.
3. Click on the branch of the discussion where you want to move the message (it will be highlighted) and click Save.
All child messages will be moved, as well.
Printing Messages
The best way to print messages is to use the Print button located near the far-right of the navigation tools.
Print discussion button.
The print routine will prepare the contents of the Post List for printing exactly as you have the Post List configured. Open messages will appear open, closed messages will print closed.
To print a view of your Post List:
1. Click the Print button ( )
Lessons Tab 284
2. Choose Print or Print as PDF. You can save the PDF file as an archive of discussion activity.
Rating Messages
To rate a message, simply click on the star-rating you‘d like to give to the post.
You can choose from the following options:
Empty stars: The post has not been rated by anyone.
Yellow stars: The current average rating of the post.
Blue stars: Your personal rating of the post.
Hovering over the stars shows your rating and the average rating:
Sticky Messages
Messages marked as ―Sticky‖ are sorted first in all discussion views. That means sticky messages will always appear near the top of the Post List (if they‘re a sticky post) or as one of the first replies to a post if they‘re sticky replies.
You may want to make a message sticky if it‘s particularly interesting or if you want to highlight that message within the discussion.
To make a message sticky:
1. View the message you want to make sticky.
2. Select Sticky from the instructor menu, then click Go.
The message will be identified with a pushpin icon to identify its ―sticky‖ status.
Sticky messages are
identified by a push pin icon.
Lessons Tab 285
Viewing Author Information
You can view the personal profile information (according to the student‘s profile page information and permissions) for users within the forum.
To view a user‘s profile information:
1. Click the author‘s name in any discussion view. The profile layer appears.
The profile layer.
2. Click Close to close the profile layer.
Scoring and Grading Messages
ANGEL allows you to manage the scoring and grading of messages both individually or in batch. It also lets you automate the evaluation of student performance within a particular forum.
Scoring Messages One at a Time
You can score messages as you read them in any view.
To score a message:
1. OPTIONAL: Set your navigation filter to Unscored to navigate between only those messages that haven‘t been scored.
2. Click the -- symbol in the Scoring column.
The scoring layer appears.
The scoring layer
Click on the -- symbol
3. Enter a score.
Lessons Tab 286
To use a consistent scoring scale, set the Instructor Rating Score value on the Settings > Interaction tab. Setting this scale will also allow the system to calculate points earned vs. points possible. If you set a Rating Score value, the scoring layer will display that as the maximum score for each post.
4. OPTIONAL: You may choose to reply privately to the student from within this layer. Your message will be visible only to you and the student. To include a reply, check the Include quick reply checkbox and enter your comment.
Select to enable a quick
private reply.
5. Click Save.
Scoring Messages in Batch
In some cases you may want to assign a score simply for completing a post, or if a post contains a keyword. To score multiple messages at once:
1. Select Search View as your view filter.
2. Select Unscored and click Search.
Lessons Tab 287
You may also further refine your results by entering a search term (e.g. keyword, correct or incorrect answers) or by using the Advanced search option.
The search results will be returned showing only those posts yet to be scored:
Select all or no messages
Select individual messages
Apply a score to all selected
messages.
3. Select the messages to which you want to apply the same score.
4. Select Score from the Selected message action menu, then click Go.
The batch scoring layer appears.
5. Enter the score you want to apply to all selected posts and click Save.
Lessons Tab 288
Automatically Evaluating Student Performance
ANGEL offers scoring rubrics to assist instructors in evaluating student performance within a discussion. Instructors can create rubrics that create a score based on a student‘s participation and the average instructor score.
The scoring rubrics allow you evaluate a student's quantitative and qualitative performance. Quantitative measures include count of student posts, count of student replies, count of replies to that student‘s posts, and the average peer rating of that student‘s posts. The qualitative measure is the average instructor‘s score.
Together, these measures allow the instructor to create a rubric that automatically evaluates a student‘s performance within a particular forum.
The results of this rubric provide the instructor with a strong evaluation tool for formulating a final grade for each student. If desired, the rubric results can be copied to the final grade column with a single click within the Grade Forum utility found within the Discussion‘s Utility menu.
Detailed instructions on setting up a scoring rubric can be found in the "How to Set Up a Scoring Rubric" section of this document.
Grading a Discussion Forum
Grading a forum is done through the Grade Forum utility found in the Discussion‘s Utility menu.
Exploring the Grading Utility
The Grading Utility collects and presents student activity and instructor score data that is useful for formulating each student‘s grade.
The various columns on the page are described below.
Lessons Tab 289
User Name: The users name. Clicking the user's name creates a new window with all of that user‘s posts displayed.
Total posts: The total number of new posts and replies submitted.
Posts: The total number of new posts submitted.
Replies: The total number of replies submitted.
Peer replies: The total number of peer replies to that user‘s posts.
Earned / Possible / %: The total points earned, total points possible, and percentage earned as determined by the instructor‘s scores.
Grading Rubric Points: The points earned as calculated by the scoring rubric.
Gradebook Grade (#/100): The actual grade to be entered in the gradebook. May be entered manually, or you may use the Copy rubric scores to grades button to automatically transfer the Grading Rubric Points to the Gradebook Grade column.
Grading a Discussion Manually
To grade a discussion:
1. Enter a grade for each student in the Gradebook grade column.
Enter grades in Gradebook
grade column
Enter optional comment for
each student.
You can view all the student‘s posts by clicking on his or name in the left column. All other statistics concerning student performance are calculated and presented within the table.
2. Place any comments in the Comments box.
3. Click Submit Grades.
Grading a Discussion via Scoring Rubrics
You may transfer the scores calculated by the scoring rubric to the Gradebook Grade column.
Each of the column heads is sortable. Click on the column label to sort the data by that column.
Total points possible and percentage earned will only be calculated if you’ve set the Instructor Rating Score value on the Settings > Interaction tab.
Lessons Tab 290
1. Click the Copy rubric scores to grades button to automatically transfer the Grading Rubric Points to the Gradebook Grade column.
Click the Copy rubric scores
to grades button and the
rubric scores are
automatically copied to the
Gradebook grade column.
2. If you want to add any comments, enter them in the Comments box.
3. Click Submit Grades.
Deleting a Discussion
To delete a discussion forum:
1. Click the Delete link beneath the Discussion‘s name.
Delete a forum by clicking
the delete link.
2. Do one of the following:
If you want to delete the discussion forum, click Delete this Discussion Forum.
If you want to delete the discussion forum's access logs, click Delete Access Logs.
If you want to delete files associated with the discussion forum, click Delete Associated Files.
If you want to delete all user posts, click Delete All Posts.
A prompt appears, asking if you are sure you want to delete the selected item.
Lessons Tab 291
3. Click OK.
You return to the list of lessons.
Drop boxes
A drop box is a folder created by an instructor where class members can upload files. Students commonly use drop boxes to hand in electronic assignments by uploading assignments. These assignments can then be reviewed and graded.
Within each drop box, ANGEL® 7.3 creates individual folders for every student who uploads a file. Students can see only the files in their own folders, and cannot delete files. Instructors can see and delete everything in the drop box. A drop box can be available to the entire class, or restricted to groups defined in the class roster.
Drop boxes and group spaces work similarly. However, if you are a student using a drop box, only you and your instructor can see the files you put there. By contrast, instructors can set up spaces where specific students can view peers‘ work.
Understanding Drop boxes
Drop boxes are created by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the drop box are stored. The picture below shows the basic drop box building environment from the content tab.
Lessons Tab 292
Drop boxes contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the drop box you are creating.
The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description and URL information about the drop box.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the drop box. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the drop box.
Submission The Submission tab determines how many attempts are allowed for the drop box/survey. Instructors can validate drop box items to check for incomplete drop box questions under the submissions tab.
Review The Review tab determines what the user drop box/survey items display when the drop box/survey is submitted.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Lessons Tab 293
Tab Description
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones with regard to your drop box. Additionally, you can set grade assignments for the drop box.
How to Create/Edit a Drop box
To add a drop box to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click the Drop box hyperlink or icon ( )
You are editing an existing page
Navigate to the drop box and click the Settings hyperlink box.
3. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 294
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the drop box N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the drop box. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
Page Text The instructions for you drop box use N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Link Target
Allows you to choose how the drop box opens in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
N
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that can be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document
A
Lessons Tab 295
Field Name Description View may be made by your institution.
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
5. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 296
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines if user tracking is disabled, on students only, all enrolled users, authenticated guests or everyone.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
Determines if users are allowed to view the drop box. N
Viewable by Determines who can view the drop box. N
Password Allows you to set a password for users to view your drop box.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a drop box to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a drop box to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Lessons Tab 297
7. Click the Submission tab.
8. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Max Submissions
Restricts the number of times an individual user can submit assignments to a drop box.
N
Message Box Enables or disables a message box for the drop box. The message box allows the user to provide additional information concerning the item being submitted.
N
Attachments Attach a file to the drop box. N
Make submissions anonymous
Allows the use anonymous submittal of a drop box. It is recommended that this NOT be used on drop boxes.
A
Lessons Tab 298
9. Click the Review tab.
10. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Review Works in conjunction with the related normal, peer review or disabled options to determine the level of review to which users have access. The User Review option applies to the submission of the drop box as well as to the review of previously submitted drop box.
Anonymous drop boxes do not allow feedback regardless of this setting.
Normal - user only sees their submission.
Peer reviewed - all users see all submissions.
Disabled - prevents the display of feedback upon submission of a drop box or survey and disables the display of information regarding previously submitted drop boxes and surveys.
N
Lessons Tab 299
11. Click the Standards tab.
12. Complete the following fields:
If you are
Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
a. Browse for a standard
Lessons Tab 300
If you are
Then
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
b. Search for a Standard
Lessons Tab 301
If you are
Then
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click the Save button.
13. Click the Objectives tab.
14. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 302
If you are Then
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
a. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
b. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
c. Click Save.
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click Search.
Lessons Tab 303
If you are Then c. Click a checkbox next to the objective to
map.
15. Click the Automate tab.
16. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
Lessons Tab 304
17. Click the Assignments tab.
18. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the gradebook.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
19. Click Save.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
How to Delete a Drop box
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Select the Delete hyperlink located underneath the name of the Drop Box to be deleted.
Lessons Tab 305
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the Discussion Forum
Click Delete this Drop box.
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
Delete this All Submissions
Click Delete All Submissions
5. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of Lessons.
Using Drop Boxes
Students use drop boxes to submit electronic files to instructors. This alleviates the amount of files sent from user to instructor and allows more organization for everyone. When you send a message from the drop box, email is sent to instructors alerting them that they have files or information for review and grading.
For more on this topic see “How to Increase the maximum file size for a Drop Box submission” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Students cannot delete submissions, rather, the instructor can delete submissions and students can resubmit.
How to add a file to the drop box
To add a file to the drop box:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click your drop box.
Lessons Tab 306
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Title Title of your message
Message Text of your message
Attachments Add files to your message
Submit Send your message
4. Click the Submit button. A Submission Successful message is displayed.
5. Click the OK button.
How to grade a drop box submission
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click your drop box.
3. Click the assignment you want to grade.
Lessons Tab 307
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Grade The value for the grade. By default, the point value shows 100 max. unless the instructor has assigned the drop box to the gradebook with a different point value.
Remarks Text of your message
Attachments Add files to your message
Send as email message to user
Check if you want to send an email to users alerting them that their assignments have been graded.
5. Click OK.
Try typing your feedback directly into the student‘s file using an alternative color font. Then save the file under a new name to your computer. When you enter the student‘s grade and remarks, you can upload the amended document as a feedback file for your student‘s review.
For more on this topic see “How to Grade a Drop Box Assignment” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Lessons Tab 308
For more on this topic see “How to Grade Drop Box Submissions Offline” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
How to delete drop box submission
When using content items that involve drop boxes you may want to delete submissions affiliated with the content objects without deleting the items themselves.
To delete individual submissions:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Utilities hyperlink (underneath the name of the quiz, survey, or drop box containing submissions you want to delete).
Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. A list of user submissions is provided. To delete an individual submission, click the Delete button. You are prompted ―Are you sure you want to delete this response from user’s name?
This process permanently deletes the submissions and cannot be recovered.
3. Click the OK button.
Files
The File option allows you to upload any type of electronic file to your ANGEL® 7.3 course to share with your students. Common uploaded file types include web pages, word processing documents, spreadsheets, PowerPoint presentations, project files, etc.
In ANGEL® 7.3 a file is treated as just another lesson item, with the same grading options as any other lesson item.
You create Files by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the File are stored. The picture below shows the basic File building environment from the content tab.
Files allow an instructor the ability to create interactive, peer-to-peer collaborative learning communities.
This tool is used for uploading a single file for student use. It is also used to upload a group of files that all point to a single index file; examples: web pages that point to an index file referencing all the other web pages; a PowerPoint presentation saved as a web page which contains images and individual slides in additional files which point to the main PowerPoint default page.
Files contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the File you are creating.
Lessons Tab 309
Tab Description The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description and URL information about the File.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the File. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the File.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones with regard to your File. Additionally, you can set grade assignments for the File.
How to Create/Edit a File
To add a File to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click Add Content.
2. Click File.
You are editing an existing page
1. Navigate to the file and click Settings.
Lessons Tab 310
For more on this topic see “How to Upload a Web Page and Its Contents” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
2. Complete the following fields:
If Then
You are uploading a file
1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description
File to upload
Choose the file you wish to upload
Title Title for the file you are going to upload. This title displays next to the file icon.
File type
Choose the type of file you are going to upload. ANGEL® 7.3 recognizes the file type being uploaded when using Auto Detect.
2. Click the Upload File button.
3. Click OK.
You are returned to your Lessons list.
Lessons Tab 311
If Then
You are dragging and dropping a file
1. Click the Drag-n-Drop button.
2. Drag your files into the Drag-and-Drop box.
3. Click the OK button.
You are returned to your Lessons list.
You may find that in most cases you want to extract archive files (e.g. to display a PowerPoint presentation saved as a web page, etc.), however in some cases, you may prefer to leave the archive file in its archived format. For example, you may have uploaded a zip archive which contains several readings (in a .doc or .pdf format) that you want to be easily downloaded by your students as a single file instead of requiring the download of several individual files.
Other common needs for leaving an archive file in an archived format include: 1) the upload of files which are large in file size – leave the file in an archive (compressed) format to ease the time required for the student to download the file. 2) the upload of several associated project files (such as HTML pages, multimedia files, or programming files) – leave the file in an archived format to ensure all files are downloaded together and file associations are kept intact.
3. Click the title of the new link you just created.
4. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 312
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the File N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the File. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
File Target
Allows you to choose how the file opens in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
N
Description Describes your File content. A
Sequence
Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page. This feature is used for accessibility when drag n drop is not available for instructor use.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon used in place of the default content icon.
A
Lessons Tab 313
Field Name Description View
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
6. Click the Access tab.
7. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 314
Field Name Description View
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
8. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 315
9. Complete the following fields:
If you are
Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button..
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
Browse for a standard
Lessons Tab 316
If you are
Then
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
Lessons Tab 317
If you are
Then
4. Click the Save button.
10. Click the Objectives tab.
11. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new objective
Do one of the following
Browse for an objective
Lessons Tab 318
If you are Then
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click the Save button.
Search for an Objective
1. Click the Search Objectives tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
3. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
Lessons Tab 319
12. Click the Automate tab.
13. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
14. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 320
15. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment Associates the content item with the gradebook. N
Title Is the title for the gradebook item. This is used if you want the assignment to have a different title than the content item.
A
Category Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook.
N
Points Possible The points value for the content item. N
Calculation Type
This determines how the grade is calculated. The default is first submission.
N
Display Format This determines how the grade is displayed to students. The default is Course Default.
N
Hide gradebook assignments from students
To keep students from seeing the content item in the gradebook, select this checkbox.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
Assign Date This is the date the content item is assigned. N
Lessons Tab 321
Field Name Description View
Due Date This is the date the content item is due. N
16. Click the Save button.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
Editing Uploaded File Settings
Once the upload process is complete, a File Upload Successful message displays on the screen with an option to either extract the files from the zip archive or leave the file in its zip format.
You may find that in most cases you want to extract archive files (e.g. to display a PowerPoint presentation saved as a web page, etc.), however in some cases, you may prefer to leave the archive file in its archived format. For example, you may have uploaded a zip archive which contains several readings (in a .doc or .pdf format) that you want to be easily downloaded by your students as a single file instead of requiring the download of several individual files.
Other common needs for leaving an archive file in an archived format include: 1) the upload of files which are large in file size – leave the file in an archive (compressed) format to ease the time required for the student to download the file. 2) the upload of several associated project files (such as HTML pages, multimedia files, or programming files) – leave the file in an archived format to ensure all files are downloaded together and file associations are kept intact.
1. Select the name of the file from the Default File drop-down list to display when the user selects the item.
2. Click the Extract Files button to extract the files or click the OK button if you do
not want to extract the archive. Your uploaded file, represented by a file icon and your file title appears.
To modify the file settings (such as title and subtitle) or access settings (such as tracking or hiding), use the Settings hyperlink (located beneath your created file).
Deleting a File
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Select the Delete hyperlink located underneath the name of the File to be deleted.
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the File Click Delete this File.
Lessons Tab 322
If you want to Then
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
4. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You are returned to the list of Lessons.
Folder
As the primary tab for course content, the Lessons tab can include both a high volume and wide assortment of items, such as assignment guidelines, assessments, lectures notes, discussion forums, and more. One way to manage your course content effectively in this area is to use folders. Lesson content can be nested within folders or subfolders. For information concerning best practice for nesting lesson content, see the section of this document title.
Folders contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the assessment you are creating.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Lessons Tab 323
Tab Description
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating assignments for the content item that is being created.
How to Create a Folder
To add a folder to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
3. Click Add Content.
4. Click Folder.
You are editing an existing folder
3. Navigate to the folder and click Settings.
3. On the Content tab, complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
N
Lessons Tab 324
Field Name Description View
Subtitle
The subtitle text is used when listing the item in its parent and also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected. The subtitle appears in a smaller font directly beneath the title text. Use subtitles to give longer descriptions of an item.
N
Page Text Describes your Folder content. A
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL
Type a fully qualified URL to a page that provides more information about how to use this resource. For example, if you create a link to an online encyclopedia you could use this link to point to the online help for that encyclopedia.
A
4. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 325
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines whether visits to the content item will be logged in the reports console.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
This checkbox hides the content item from users. This is useful as you are creating course material that has not been completed. Determines if users are allowed to view the discussion forum.
N
Viewable by The Viewable By setting allows the instructor to restrict access to the ANGEL® 7.3 content item according to the course rights designation assigned to the user.
Everyone allows the content item to be accessed by anyone on the World Wide Web regardless of whether they are affiliated with your institution and regardless of whether they have a valid account on the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Authenticated Guest allows any authenticated ANGEL® 7.3 user to access the content item. This includes both users who are on the course roster and those who are not.
Students restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of student or higher.
Team Leaders restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of team leader or higher.
Course Mentors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course mentor or higher.
Course Assistants restricts access to the content item only to those on the course roster who have course rights of course assistants or higher.
Course Editors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course editor.
Author Only restricts access to the author of the content item.
N
Password Assign a password to an item to further restrict who can view it. When not in edit mode, the system asks
N
Lessons Tab 326
Field Name Description View
the user to type the password before it allows the user to view the item.
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict access to a particular group of users. This can be useful when conducting group projects to ensure that only group members see material for their group.
Select the Selected Teams option designate which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Select a Start Date to prevent the content item from being displayed until the specified date.
A
End Date Select an End Date to prevent the content item from being displayed after the specified date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows the course editor to determine who can edit the access settings for the content item. The default setting allows all course/group editors to edit these settings but can be set to author only to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the content of the item.
A
Cascade Settings
Folders have the unique option to cascade or copy access settings preferences to all sub-Files eliminating the need to modify access settings for each sub-item. To use this feature select the settings that you want to apply to all existing sub-items. Uncheck a setting to have it apply to the Folder itself and new sub-items.
A
6. Click the Standards tab. See the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management (LOM) for additional information.
Lessons Tab 327
7. Complete the following fields:
If you are
Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 328
If you are
Then
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
a. Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click Save.
b. Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 329
If you are
Then
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click Save.
8. Click the Objectives tab.
Lessons Tab 330
9. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 331
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click Save.
Mapping a new objective
Do one of the following
a. Browse for an objective
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 332
10. Click the Automate tab. See Automate tab, Agents Console for more information.
11. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
12. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 333
13. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Milestone settings
Task Type: Determines when a milestone is considered to have been completed.
Manually marked: Users must explicitly indicate completion by clicking a link.
Item completion: Milestone is considered complete when the lesson item itself is marked as completed for the user by ANGEL as a result of certain actions. If the Milestone is a page, folder, link or a similar content item that can be viewed then the milestone is considered complete when the item is viewed. If the content item is a discussion forum, drop-box, assessment, etc. that requires a submission, then the milestone is considered complete by ANGEL when the item has been submitted by the user and graded whether graded automatically by ANGEL or by the instructor manually.
Assign date: Specifies the date on which the students should begin work on the milestone. This date is displayed on the
N
Lessons Tab 334
Field Name Description View course calendar.
Due date: Specifies the date by which the milestone should be completed. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
Gradebook settings
Specifies the category the gradebook assignment is associated with.
Assignment: This associates the content item with the gradebook.
Category: Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook. Includes quizzes, exams and homework.
Points Possible: Species the point scale for the assignment with respect to gradebook reporting.
Calculation Type: Select the appropriate calculation type from the Calculation options to determine whether the category average should be based the grade of all category assignments (Use all assignments) or a subset using the highest scored assignments (Use highest or Drop lowest).
Note: The Calculation Type option allows the course editor to configure a category to ―drop lowest‖ or ―use highest‖ n number of grades when calculating each student‘s category average. For example, by specifying ―Use Highest‖ 10 for the Quizzes category, each student category average will be calculated based on their 10 highest quiz scores.
Display Format: Specifies the format to use when displaying the assignment grades in the gradebook.
Hide gradebook assignments from students: Specifies whether the gradebook assignment should be viewable by students.
N
14. Click the Save button.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
Lessons Tab 335
How to delete a folder
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Select the Delete hyperlink located underneath the name of the Folder to be deleted.
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the Folder Click Delete this Folder. This removes the folder, its contents, files and data.
Remove this folder only
Click Remove this folder only. This removes the folder and moves the contents up a level.
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs. This removes all access log entries for this folder.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files. Permanently deletes all files associated with this folder.
Delete sub-items Click Delete sub-items. Provides a checklist to delete one or more sub-items.
4. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You are returned to the list of Lessons.
Game
The game option allows an instructor to create a crossword puzzle or quiz show game to challenge student learning. Crossword puzzles can be used to test a student‘s vocabulary of terms used in a lesson. The Quiz Show option can test a student‘s understanding of lesson items using a format similar to a TV game show.
The Game option contains the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the game you are creating.
The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description
Lessons Tab 336
Tab Description and URL information about the game.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the game. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the game.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones with regard to your game. Additionally, you can set grade assignments for the game.
How to Create/Edit a Game
To add a game to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new game
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click the Game hyperlink.
You are editing an existing game
Navigate to the game and click the Settings hyperlink box.
3. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 337
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the game. N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the game. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
Page Text The instructions for the game.
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Link Target
Allows you to choose how the game opens in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
N
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Lessons Tab 338
Field Name Description View
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
5. Click the Access tab.
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Lessons Tab 339
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines if user tracking is disabled, on students only, all enrolled users, authenticated guests or everyone.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
Determines if users are allowed to view the game. N
Viewable by Determines who can view the game. N
Password Allows you to set a password for users to view your game.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Lessons Tab 340
7. Click the Standards tab.
8. Complete the following fields:
If you are
Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
a. Browse for a standard
Lessons Tab 341
If you are
Then
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
b. Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
Lessons Tab 342
If you are
Then
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click the Save button.
9. Click the Objectives tab.
10. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click Save.
Lessons Tab 343
If you are Then
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
a. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
b. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
c. Click Save.
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click Search.
c. Click a checkbox next to the objective to
Lessons Tab 344
If you are Then map.
11. Click the Automate tab.
12. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
13. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 345
14. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the gradebook.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
15. Click Save.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
How to Create a Crossword Puzzle
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the game and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 346
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Game type Select the crossword puzzle type of game.
Enter Questions Type the questions you want your game to contain.
Create Answer Type the answers to the quiz questions.
Delete Click to delete a question/answer.
Add Question Click to add a new question.
5. Click the Save button. You are taken to a preview of your puzzle.
Lessons Tab 347
For more on this topic see “How to Set up and Use Games: Crossword Puzzles” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
How to Edit Questions & Settings
To edit the question or settings for a crossword puzzle or game show, do the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the game by clicking the name of the game.
3. Click the Edit Questions & Settings hyperlink. Modify the questions and/or values for the questions.
4. Click the Save button when all changes are complete.
How to complete a crossword
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the crossword puzzle item.
3. Click one of the squares.
Lessons Tab 348
4. Click in the first square and begin typing your answer.
5. If you need help, click the Hint button.
6. Click the Submit button when your answer is complete Your word appears in the puzzle.
7. Once you‘ve completed the quiz, click the Submit button. Your response is sent to the instructor.
Lessons Tab 349
8. Click the Continue button. You are returned to the list of lessons.
How to Grade a Crossword Puzzle
For the lesson item you want to grade, do the following:
1. Click the Utilities hyperlink located beneath the Crossword Puzzle you want to grade.
2. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submission hyperlink. A list of submissions
How to create/edit a quiz show
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the game and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 350
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Game type Select the quiz show type of game.
Define 1-4 Question Categories
Type the Category titles in the text fields provided.
Enter Questions (at least one per category)
Type the questions for the categories. Provide at least one question per category.
Set Value Set the dollar value for the question
Assign Category Assign the question to a category.
Create Answers 1. Click the Edit button to activate the answers pop-up menu.
Lessons Tab 351
Field Name Description
2. Provide an answer for the current question.
3. Select the Correct radio button for the correct answer. You may provide additional answers but only one will be correct.
4. Click the Done button when complete.
Add Question button
Click the Add Question button to add additional questions to the Game Show.
5. Click Save. You are taken to a preview of your puzzle.
Lessons Tab 352
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
For more on this topic see “How to Use Games: Quiz Shows” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
How to complete quiz show
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the correct lesson item.
Lessons Tab 353
3. Click a dollar amount under one of the quiz show categories.
4. Select the correct answer and click the Submit button. Your dollar amount earned appears in the lower left corner of the question screen.
Lessons Tab 354
5. Click the Close button. The dollar amount for the question has been made inactive and your score appears in the lower right corner of the screen.
6. Once you‘ve completed the quiz, click the Submit button. Your response is sent to the instructor.
7. Click Continue. You are returned to the list of lessons.
How to Delete a Game
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Select the Delete hyperlink located underneath the name of the Game to be deleted.
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the game Click Delete this page.
Lessons Tab 355
If you want to Then
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
4. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of Lessons.
IMS/SCORM Package
SCORM (Sharable Content Objective Reference Model) is a standard for learning objects (a unit of educational content delivered via the internet), which defines and accesses information about learning objects so they can be easily shared among different learning management systems (LMSs). It also defines communications between client side content and a host system (the run-time environment).
How to Upload an IMS/SCORM Package
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
3. Click the IMS/SCORM Package hyperlink.
4. Click the Upload an IMS/SCORM Package hyperlink
5. To upload a file, do the following:
a. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Browse Click the Browse button to locate the IMS/SCORM file
Import Click the Import button to import the IMS/SCORM file.
b. Click the Upload File button.
Lessons Tab 356
c. Click the OK button. You are returned to your Lessons list.
How to Delete an IMS/SCORM Package
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Select the Delete hyperlink underneath the name of the IMS/SCORM item to be deleted.
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the IMS/SCORM Package, its contents, files and data
Click the Delete this Link hyperlink.
Delete Access Logs to clear all log entries for this IMS/SCORM package.
Click the Delete Access Logs hyperlink.
Delete Associated files for this IMS/SCORM package.
Click the Delete Associated files hyperlink.
4. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You are returned to the list of Lessons.
Creating a Link to an IMS/SCORM Manifest
IMS/SCORM Manifests contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the IMS/SCORM link you are creating.
The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description and URL information about the drop box.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the IMS/SCORM link. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the IMS/SCORM link.
Lessons Tab 357
Tab Description
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones with regard to your IMS/SCORM object. Additionally, you can set grade assignments for the IMS/SCORM object.
How to Create/Edit an IMS/SCORM Link
To add an IMS/SCORM link to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
3.
If Then
You are adding a new link
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click IMS/SCORM Package.
3. Click the Link to a IMS/SCORM Manifest
You are editing an existing link
Navigate to the IMS/SCORM package and click the Settings hyperlink.
4. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 358
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the IMS/SCORM link. N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the IMS/SCORM link. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
Description The instructions for you IMS/SCORM link. use
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Link Target
Allows you to choose how the IMS/SCORM package will open in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
If you choose no banner, you will no longer see the Setting drop box or Title on your manifest. To edit, you will need to access Lessons, point to
N
Lessons Tab 359
Field Name Description View your IMS/SCORM package and click Settings.
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
6. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 360
Lessons Tab 361
7. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines if user tracking is disabled, on students only, all enrolled users, authenticated guests or everyone.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
Determines if users are allowed to view the IMS/SCORM package.
N
Viewable by Determines who can view the IMS/SCORM package.
N
Password Allows you to set a password for users to view your IMS/SCORM package.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to an IMS/SCORM package to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to an IMS/SCORM package to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Lessons Tab 362
8. Click the Standards tab. This step is optional.
9. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click the OK button when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click Save.
Mapping a new standard
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
Search for a Standard
a. Click the Search Standards tab.
b. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
Lessons Tab 363
If you are Then c. Click a checkbox next to the standard to
map.
d. Click the Save button,
10. Click the Objectives tab. This step is optional.
11. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click the OK button when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 364
If you are Then
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
a. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
b. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
c. Click the Save button.
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
c. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
d. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 365
12. Click the Automate tab. This step is optional.
13. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
Lessons Tab 366
14. Click the Assignments tab.
15. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Gradebook Settings
Assignment associates the content item with the gradebook.
N
Milestone Settings
The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
16. Click the Save button.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
SCORM Assignment
The SCORM Assignment utility allows you to create assignments in the gradebook for SCORM items. SCORM items that are disabled have already been added to the gradebook.
To add a SCORM gradebook assignment:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the SCORM item).
3. Click the SCORM Assignments hyperlink. A list of SCORM items appears.
Lessons Tab 367
4. Select the checkbox next to the SCORM assignment you want to add to the gradebook.
5. Select the gradebook category from the Gradebook Category drop-down list or select the other button to create a new category.
6. Click the Submit button. A confirmation screen appears indicating the SCORM content has been added to the gradebook.
7. Click the OK button.
Links
A link is a shortcut to content within or outside ANGEL® 7.3. It can be a link to photos, document files, links to websites, or media files.
Links help build engaging online learning environments and are used with discussions to foster a collaborative learning or a greater peer-to-peer and student-to-faculty communication. A short sample of online educational activities well suited to links includes:
Instructor professional practice links – these links can provide information about leaders in their respective fields and provides a forum to discuss information pertaining to professional practice.
Instructional tips for students – a simple, public way of communicating with your students.
Course announcements and readings – instructor commentary about announcements or reading assignments.
Annotated links – a collection of annotated research links.
In ANGEL® 7.3 a link is treated as just another lesson item, with the same grading options as any other lesson item.
Lessons Tab 368
Understanding Links
Links are built by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the link are stored. The picture below shows the basic link building environment from the content tab.
Links contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the link you are creating.
The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description and URL information about the link.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the link. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the link.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for
Lessons Tab 369
Tab Description advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones and/or set grade assignments for the link.
How to Create/Edit a Link
To add a link to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click the Link hyperlink.
You are editing an existing page
Navigate to the link and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Click the Content tab.
4. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 370
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the link N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the link. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
Link Target
Allows you to choose how will open in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
It is recommended that the No Banner checkbox be selected when opening the link item in a new window. This option eliminates the title and editor settings for the item when it opens in the new window.
N
Description Describes your link content. A
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
5. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 371
Lessons Tab 372
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. Use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. Use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Lessons Tab 373
7. Click the Standards tab.
8. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 374
If you are Then
Mapping a new standard
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click the Save button.
9. Click the Objectives tab.
Lessons Tab 375
Lessons Tab 376
10. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click the Save button.
Search for an Objective
1. Click the Search Objectives tab.
2. Type a keyword and click Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the objective to
Lessons Tab 377
If you are Then map.
Lessons Tab 378
11. Click the Automate tab.
12. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Agents Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
13. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 379
14. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the gradebook. N
Title This is the title for the gradebook item. This is used if you want the assignment to have a different title than the content item.
A
Category Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook.
N
Points Possible
The points value for the content item. N
Calculation Type
This determines how the grade is calculated. The default is first submission.
N
Display Format
This determines how the grade is displayed to students. The default is Course Default.
N
Hide gradebook assignments from students
To keep students from seeing the content item in the gradebook, select this checkbox.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
Assign Date This is the date the content item is assigned. N
Due Date This is the date the content item is due. N
15. Click the Save button.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
Deleting a link
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Select the Delete hyperlink located underneath the name of the Link to be deleted.
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to
Then
Delete the link Click Delete the Link.
Lessons Tab 380
If you want to
Then
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
4. When prompted by the dialogue screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of links.
Page
A page content item allows an instructor the ability to provide lecture notes, course expectations, assignment requirements, etc.
The Page item contains the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides page settings for the page you are creating. The Content tab provides a title and a subtitle (optional) as well as a page text area for your lecture notes, course expectations, assignment requirements, etc.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, viewing and editing content items. This editor allows the instructor to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to a lesson item. This editor also determines who can view the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced
Lessons Tab 381
Tab Description
users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and gradebook items from within the content item.
How to Create or Edit a Page
To create or edit a Page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page a. Click the Add Content hyperlink
b. Click the Page hyperlink.
You are editing an existing page a. Navigate to the Page item and click the Settings hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 382
3. Click the Content tab.
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
N
Subtitle The subtitle text is used when listing the item in its parent and also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected. The subtitle appears in a smaller font directly beneath the title text. Use subtitles to give longer descriptions of an item.
N
Page Text For the Page item, this is the main content presented to the student. You have the full HTML editor to use (don‘t forget you can cut & paste MS Word documents) and can create sophisticated documents for presentation to your class.
N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Link Target Allows you to choose how will open in a browser. A
Lessons Tab 383
Field Name Description View
Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
It is recommended that the No Banner checkbox be selected when opening the link item in a new window. This option eliminates the title and editor settings for the item when it opens in the new window.
Icon URL Icon URL is used to change the image of the item‘s default icon. Type a fully qualified URL to a GIF or JPEG image.
A
Help URL Type a fully qualified URL to a page that provides more information about how to use this resource. For example, if you create a link to an online encyclopedia you could use this link to point to the online help for that encyclopedia.
A
For more on this topic see “How to add images to a content item: Creating an Image Gallery” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Lessons Tab 384
5. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 385
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Tracking
Use the tracking option to control when information about visits to a page are logged. You can elect to log access by only certain types of users so that you get the information you need without wasting valuable drive space on the server.
N
Do not allow users to view this item
This checkbox hides the content item from users. This is useful as you are creating course material that has not been completed.
N
Viewable By The Viewable By setting allows the instructor to restrict access to the ANGEL® 7.3 content items according to the course rights designation assigned to the user.
Everyone allows the content item to be accessed by anyone on the World Wide Web regardless of whether they are affiliated with your institution and regardless of whether they have a valid account on the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Authenticated Guest allows any authenticated ANGEL® 7.3 user to access the content item. This includes both users who are on the course roster and those who are not.
Students restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of student or higher.
Team Leaders restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of team leader or higher.
Course Mentors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course mentor or higher.
Course Assistants restricts access to the content item only to those on the course roster who have course rights of course assistants or higher.
Course Editors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course editor.
Author Only restricts access to the author of the content item.
N
Password Assign a password to an item to further restrict who can view it. When not in edit mode, the system asks the user to type the password before it allows the
N
Lessons Tab 386
Field Name Description View
user to view the item.
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
7. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 387
If you are
Then
Removing a standards mapping
5. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
6. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
7. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
8. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
Browse for a standard
Lessons Tab 388
If you are
Then
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click Save.
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
Lessons Tab 389
If you are
Then
4. Click Save.
8. Click the Objectives tab.
Lessons Tab 390
If you are
Then
Removing an object mapping
5. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
6. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
7. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
8. Click Save.
Mapping a new objective
Do one of the following
Browse for an objective
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click the Save button.
Search for an Objective
Lessons Tab 391
Lessons Tab 392
9. Click the Automate tab.
<
10. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Actions
Provides a list of current actions set for this content item.
A
11. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 393
Lessons Tab 394
12. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the gradebook. N
Title This is the title for the gradebook item. This is used if you want the assignment to have a different title than the content item.
A
Category Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook.
N
Points Possible
The points value for the content item. N
Calculation Type
This determines how the grade is calculated. The default is first submission.
N
Display Format
This determines how the grade is displayed to students. The default is Course Default.
N
Hide gradebook assignments from students
To keep students from seeing the content item in the gradebook, select this checkbox.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
Assign Date Provides an assignment date for the Milestone. The assigned date appears on the calendar providing a visual reminder to students and instructors of the assignment.
N
Due Date Provides an assignment due date for the Milestone. The due date appears on the calendar providing a visual reminder to students and instructors of the assignment due date.
N
13. Click the Save button when all items are complete.
For more on this topic see “How to Upload Files for Course Use” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
For more on this topic see “How to upload images in a content item” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Lessons Tab 395
Section Heading
Section Headings can be used to place any block of text or visual element on the Lessons page. Section Headings are commonly used to place directions within the Lessons page or for visually grouping several related items.
To add a Section Heading:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides page settings for the Section Heading you are creating. The Content tab provides a title and a page text area.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access and viewing the Section Heading. This editor also determines who can view the lesson item.
How to Create or Edit a Section Header
To create or edit a Section Header:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new Section Header c. Click the Add Content hyperlink
d. Click the Section Header hyperlink.
You are editing an existing Section Header
b. Navigate to the Section Header item and click the Settings hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 396
3. Click the Content tab:
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
Note: The title is only visible to instructors. Students will not be able to view the title.
N
Page Text Text entered here will appear to the student. This is the only text from the Section Heading that is visible to students.
N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
Lessons Tab 397
5. Click the Access tab.
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Do not allow users to view this item
This checkbox hides the content item from users. This is useful as you are creating course material that has not been completed.
N
Lessons Tab 398
Field Name Description View
Viewable By The Viewable By setting allows the instructor to restrict access to the ANGEL® 7.3 content items according to the course rights designation assigned to the user.
Everyone allows the content item to be accessed by anyone on the World Wide Web regardless of whether they are affiliated with your institution and regardless of whether they have a valid account on the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Authenticated Guest allows any authenticated ANGEL® 7.3 user to access the content item. This includes both users who are on the course roster and those who are not.
Students restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of student or higher.
Team Leaders restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of team leader or higher.
Course Mentors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course mentor or higher.
Course Assistants restricts access to the content item only to those on the course roster who have course rights of course assistants or higher.
Course Editors restricts access to the content item only to those users on the course roster who have course rights of course editor.
Author Only restricts access to the author of the content item.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End
A
Lessons Tab 399
Field Name Description View
Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Quizzes
A quiz is an assessment of students‘ knowledge. In ANGEL® 7.3, a quiz is treated as just another lesson item, with the same grading options as any other lesson item. It can consist of multiple choices, true/false and matching questions.
Quizzes will help build engaging online learning environments and are used with discussions to reinforce lessons. Quizzes allow instructors to find new ways to evaluate, recommend and refer student work.
Understanding Quizzes
You build quizzes by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the quiz are stored. The picture below shows the basic quiz building environment from the content tab.
Quizzes allow an instructor the ability to create interactive, peer-to-peer collaborative learning communities.
Quizzes contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
For more on this topic see “Understanding the Differences between Assessments and Quizzes” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the quiz you are creating.
The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description and URL information about the quiz.
Lessons Tab 400
Tab Description
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the quiz. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the quiz.
Delivery The Delivery tab provides settings used for the delivery of a quiz or survey. These settings include the Take Quiz link, display settings and time settings.
Submission The Submission tab determines how many attempts are allowed for the quiz/survey. Instructors can validate quiz items to check for incomplete quiz questions under the submissions tab.
Review The Review tab determines what the user quiz/survey items display when the quiz/survey is submitted.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
The Assignment tab allows you to create course milestones with regard to your quiz. Additionally, you can set grade assignments for the quiz.
How to Create/Edit a Quiz
To add a quiz to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
Lessons Tab 401
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click Add Content.
2. Click Quiz.
You are editing an existing page
Navigate to the quiz and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Click the Content tab.
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the drop box N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the quiz. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
Directions The instructions for your quiz use N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Link Target
Allows you to choose how will open in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
N
Lessons Tab 402
Field Name Description View Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
It is recommended that the No Banner checkbox be selected when opening the link item in a new window. This option eliminates the title and editor settings for the item when it opens in the new window.
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
5. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 403
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines if user tracking is disabled, on students only, all enrolled users, authenticated guests or everyone.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
Determines if users are allowed to view the discussion forum.
N
Viewable by Determines who can view the discussion forum. N
Password Allows you to set a password for users to view your discussion forum.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a test to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Browser Security
The Browser Security list allows the editor to open the quiz/survey in a new browser window (using Medium security) disabling common browser
A
Lessons Tab 404
Field Name Description View functions including menus, address bar, context menus (right-click), and the use of most control keys (Ctrl-C for copy, Ctrl-V for paste, etc.)
IP Filter You can easily restrict quiz or survey access to a specific IP address. Using the IP Filter enter the IP Information as follows:
Use commas ( , ) to separate multiple IP address entries
Use a minus sign ( - ) to disallow the specific address
Use a plus sign ( + ) to allow the specified address
Use an asterisk ( * ) within an IP address as a wild card meaning all values between 0 and 255
In cases where an IP address is included in more than one entry, the most specific entry is applied (e.g. a setting of -*.*.*.*,+207.46.249.*,-207.46.249.5) allowing access to any IP address within the 207.46.249 class C network with the exception of 207.46.249.5 which has been excluded.
A
Lessons Tab 405
7. Click the Delivery tab.
8. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Take quiz Enabled/Disabled N
Display Mode Determines how the questions are displayed. Options include:
All questions
Single question
Single question – No Backtrack
Single question mode requires a DHTML-capable browser.
Scramble the order in which questions are delivered - Scrambles the order in which questions are displayed. Selecting this checkbox provides a quiz displaying questions randomly for each student. This option is available only for quizzes.
Scramble of the order of choices on questions- Scrambles the order of answer choices for multiple choice, multiple select, matching and ordering question types. This option is available only for quizzes.
N
Time Limit Determines if the quiz is a timed quiz. This option is available only for quizzes.
N
Lessons Tab 406
Field Name Description View
Time Warning Provides a pop-up window warning users the amount of time left on the quiz.
Automatically submit when time limit expires- Selecting this checkbox automatically submits a user‘s quiz when the time limit is reached. The user receives a warning pop-up that time has expired.
A
9. Click the Submission tab.
10. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Max Attempts Restricts the number of times an individual user can take a quiz or survey.
N
Validation Allows the instructor to specify what, if any, validation is done when the user attempts to submit the quiz or survey.
N
Auto-Save Allows the instructor to determine if auto-saving is disabled or how frequently a quiz is saved. This option can be used as a safeguard if the Save button is disabled.
A
Do not allow users to save and finish later
Checkbox disables the Save button. A
Make submissions anonymous
Allows the use anonymous submittal of a quiz or survey. It is recommended that this NOT be used on quizzes.
A
Lessons Tab 407
11. Click the Review tab.
12. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Review Works in conjunction with the related Full Review Options to determine the level of review to which users have access. The User Review option applies to the submission of the quiz or survey, as well as to the review of previously submitted quiz or survey.
Anonymous quizzes and surveys do not allow feedback regardless of this setting.
Full Review allows the user to review the full results of the quiz or survey upon submission, restricted only by the current Full Review Options. In addition, upon returning to a previously submitted quiz or survey, the user is presented with a hyperlinked list of the dates on which he/she has taken the quiz or survey. The user may click on the hyperlinked item to review the full results of the submission restricted only by the current Full Review Options.
Summary only allows the user to review a summary of the quiz or survey upon submission, including the number of points awarded, the number of points missed, and an overall score. In addition, upon returning to a previously submitted quiz or survey, the user is presented with a list of the dates on which the user submitted a quiz or survey and the grade for each submission (if applicable).
Disabled prevents the display of feedback upon submission of a quiz or survey and also disables the display of information regarding previously submitted
N
Lessons Tab 408
Field Name Description View
quizzes and surveys.
Review options
Review using one of the following options
Field Name Description
Answer key Displays the correct answer.
Feedback text Displays feedback provided in the quiz.
Grader remarks Displays remarks from the grader.
Overall Score Displays overall score for the quiz or survey.
Points awarded Displays points awarded to the user.
Points possible Displays total points possible.
Question text Displays the question text.
Right or wrong Indicates whether the question is right or wrong.
User response Display user response to the questions.
N
13. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 409
14. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click Save.
Mapping a new standard
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
Lessons Tab 410
If you are Then 3. Click Save.
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click Save.
15. Click the Objectives tab.
16. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 411
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖.
4. Click Save.
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click Save.
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click Search.
Lessons Tab 412
If you are Then c. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
17. Click the Automate tab.
18. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Actions Provides a list of current actions set for this content item.
N
19. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 413
20. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the gradebook.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
21. Click Save.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
Select Advanced options to display all of the editor options.
Several of the common access settings can be very useful when used on a quiz. In particular:
Select the Do not allow users to view this item to hide a quiz which is a ―work-in-progress‖. This setting is also useful for quizzes that are being used as ―question banks‖ or for future quizzes that should not yet be made available to students.
The Team Access option is useful for distributing multiple versions of a test (i.e. two versions of a test – one for every other seat in a computer lab, etc.).
The Password field supports proctored testing through the process of 1) password protecting a quiz or test and 2) providing the password to each designated proctor. The student would be required to schedule and meet with the proctor to take the test. At test time, the proctor would provide the password and observe the student during the test to ensure testing rules are followed (e.g. time limit, use of notes, etc.).
Lessons Tab 414
The Start Date and End Date settings are useful for limiting the ―window of time‖ that a quiz is available. In combination with the ―Time Limit‖ and ―Auto-submit‖ options available on the Submissions tab, this approach is very useful for take-home quizzes, to decrease the amount of time available for unwanted student collaboration or sharing of printed copies of the quiz.
How to Delete a Quiz
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Quiz hyperlink.
3. Point to the quiz you wish to delete.
4. On the pop-up menu, click delete.
5. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the Quiz Click Delete this Quiz.
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
Delete all submissions
Click Delete All Submissions.
Delete questions Click Delete Questions.
6. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of Lessons.
Creating Questions
ANGEL® 7.3 quizzes support the creation of several different question types. The following chart provides a description of the available question types and their methods of grading.
Question Type
Grading Method Description
Section Not graded Supports the placement of text (e.g.
Lessons Tab 415
Question Type
Grading Method Description
Heading directions, story problem text, etc.)
Multiple Choice
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by a list of choices. Only one choice may be selected.
Drop-down List
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by a drop-down list of choices. Only one choice may be selected.
Multiple Select
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by a list of choices. Multiple selections are allowed.
True False Automatically graded Presents users with a statement that they must determine to be either true or false.
Matching Automatically graded Presents users with a definition and a drop-down list of terms from which they must choose a match.
Ordering Automatically graded Presents users with a list of items to be placed in the correct order.
Fill-in-the-blank
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by a single-line answer box. Responses are automatically graded against a list of allowed answers.
Fill-in-multiple-blanks
Automatically graded Presents users with a question followed by multiple single-line answer boxes. Responses are automatically graded against a list of allowed answers.
Short Answer Manually graded (online)
Presents users with a question followed by a single-line answer box.
Essay Manually graded (online)
Presents users with a question followed by a multiple-line answer area.
Off-line Item Manually graded (online)
Presents users with a question to be completed offline (no answer field appears).
Pool Item Varies based on question type
Selects one or more random items from the question pool based on a specific criteria.
How to Add a Section Heading
Section headings can be used to place any block of text or visual element on the survey. Section headings are commonly used to place directions at the top of a survey or for placing a story problem, scenario, image, and/or animation above or in between several related questions.
Lessons Tab 416
The Section Heading question type provides quizzes with the option of displaying a random subset of questions (from a larger bank of question) for each copy of the quiz requested.
To add a section heading:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Section Heading hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Feedback Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test.
N
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Lessons Tab 417
Field Name Description View
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
4. Click the Save button.
The Max Question option allows you to display a random subset of the questions located under the section heading for each copy of the quiz that is requested.
When properly placed, several Section Headings may be used within a single quiz to create several different sections or ―banks‖ of questions from which to display random question subsets.
Lessons Tab 418
The position of the first Section Heading marks the beginning of the first section; the position of a second Section Heading marks the beginning of the second section, and so on.
Add a Multiple Choice Question
Multiple choice questions are the most commonly used question type for online exams. The following steps outline the ease with which a multiple choice question can be created in ANGEL® 7.3.
To add a multiple choice question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Multiple Choice hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 419
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points/Choices Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Lessons Tab 420
Field Name Description View
Feedback if selected
Used to provide selective information to the user concerning the answer selected after submitting a quiz. This may be used when several answers could be correct but one answer is better than then rest. This provides an area to explain why one answer would be better than another.
A
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything
Lessons Tab 421
Field Name Description View placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
4. Click the Save button.
You may add images, animations, or other media to quiz questions, choices, or feedback by using the HTML editor or by typing/pasting HTML code directly into any of the fields. Be aware that filenames for embedded or linked media files may be easily seen by students by selecting right-click > properties, viewing the browser status bar, etc. You may optionally use the Image URL option for image upload which masks the filename of the uploaded image.
Add a Drop-down List Question
The drop-down list question type provides another multiple choice question in a drop-down format. The traditional multiple choice question type uses a radio button selection type. The drop-down list question type may be a preferred question format if you are concerned with the question security. The student sees the question and selects the correct answer from the list of answers, thus showing only one answer when finished with a selection.
To create a drop-down list question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Drop-down List hyperlink or the icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 422
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points/Choices Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Feedback if selected
Used to provide selective information to the user concerning the answer selected after submitting a
A
Lessons Tab 423
Field Name Description View
quiz. This may be used when several answers could be correct but one answer is better than then rest. This provides an area to explain why one answer would be better than another.
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
Lessons Tab 424
4. Click the Save button.
Add a Multiple Select Question
Unlike the multiple choice question type, the total points possible for a multiple select question are the sum of the values of all assigned answers. Negative values may be assigned to incorrect answers to penalize students who provide wrong guesses.
Multiple select questions that do not provide negative values for incorrect answers provide no penalty to students who select one or all of the incorrect answers. In this case, a student who indiscriminately selects ALL of the available choices (correct and incorrect) would receive the same full credit for the question as a student who answered it absolutely correct.
To add a multiple select question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Multiple Select hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 425
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points/Choices Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Lessons Tab 426
Field Name Description View
Never Scramble
This option will keep your quiz questions in a consistent order each time students access the quiz.
N
Feedback if selected
Used to provide selective information to the user concerning the answer selected after submitting a quiz. This may be used when several answers could be correct but one answer is better than then rest. This provides an area to explain why one answer would be better than another.
A
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Grading Select how to grade the question: normal, all or nothing, allow negative.
N
Max selections Set the number of answers the students can choose N
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you
A
Lessons Tab 427
Field Name Description View use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
4. Click the Save button.
You may optionally assign negative points to choices that are incorrect by typing a negative number in the Points field next to the incorrect choices.
Normal grading grades the answers that are correct providing the point value for the total correct. All or Nothing grading provides a correct answer grade only if all the correct answers are selected. Allow Negative grading deducts a negative amount from the total should a user select an incorrect answer in their selection process.
You may add images, animations, or other media to quiz questions, choices, or feedback by using the HTML editor or by typing/pasting HTML code directly into any of the fields. Be aware that filenames for embedded or linked media files may be easily seen by students by selecting right-click > properties, viewing the browser status bar, etc. You may optionally use the Image URL option for image upload which masks the filename of the uploaded image.
Add a True False Question
Unlike the multiple choice question type, you select the correct answer from the answer drop-down list instead of first creating the choices.
To add a true/false question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the True False hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 428
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points/Choices Allows you to assign points to each response N
Answer Choose true or false N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Lessons Tab 429
Field Name Description View
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
4. Click the Save button.
Add a Matching Question
The matching question provides a true matching capability to a quiz question. Use the matching question type for terms and definition type questions.
To add a matching question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
Lessons Tab 430
2. Click the Matching hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the N
Lessons Tab 431
Field Name Description View question type when in the question editor.
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
Terms Define the first part of the matching question. This can be vocabulary, part of a sentence, etc.
N
Definitions Define the second part of the matching question. This can be vocabulary, part of a sentence, etc.
N
Match Choose the correct term number to match with the correct definition.
N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Never Scramble
This option will keep your quiz questions in a consistent order each time students access the quiz.
N
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Feedback if missed
Define messages that the user sees if the question is answered incorrectly.
A
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Lessons Tab 432
Field Name Description View
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
4. Click the Save button.
You may use the HTML Editor to compose your choice. Access the HTML
Editor by clicking on the HTML Editor icon ( ).
Add an Ordering Question
The ordering question provides a list of terms that need to be placed in the correct order. This question type provides a list of items with a drop-down number list to place the item in the correct order.
To add an ordering question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
2. Click the Ordering hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 433
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
Order Choose the correct order in which answers should be put by users
N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Never This option will keep your quiz questions in a A
Lessons Tab 434
Field Name Description View Scramble consistent order each time students access the quiz.
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Feedback if missed
Define messages that the user sees if the question is answered incorrectly.
A
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Lessons Tab 435
4. Click the Save button.
Add a Fill -in-the-blank Question
ANGEL® 7.3 quizzes provide a fill-in-the-blank question type that ANGEL® 7.3 attempts to grade using a sounds-like algorithm to compare student responses to a list of instructor-provided acceptable answers.
To add a fill-in-the-blank question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
2. Click the Fill-in-the-blank hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Lessons Tab 436
Field Name Description View
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
Allowed Answers
Define acceptable answers N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Never Scramble
This option will keep your quiz questions in a consistent order each time students access the quiz.
A
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Grading Determine grading of user answers: normal, exact match, no sounds like, no rounding
A
Precision Specifies the number of decimal points the student answer must conform to (e.g. a value of 2 would require the student answer to be accurate when rounded to two decimal points.
A
Feedback if Selected
Used to provide selective information to the user concerning the answer selected after submitting a quiz. This may be used when several answers could be correct but one answer is better than then rest. This provides an area to explain why one answer would be better than another.
A
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Lessons Tab 437
Field Name Description View
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
4. Click the Save button.
ANGEL® 7.3 attempts to grade fill-in-the-blank questions using a sounds-like algorithm to compare student responses to a list of instructor-provided acceptable answers. Student responses that are phonetically ―sound like‖ one of the instructor-provided allowed answers are counted as correct. Depending upon the strictness of grading, it might be desirable to provide additional allowed answers to ensure phonetically incorrect student responses (that the instructor would have counted as correct) are counted as correct. Allowed answers are not case-sensitive.
Add a Fill -in-multiple-blanks Question
The fill-in-multiple-blanks question allows the instructor to ask a question that has multiple blanks the student has to complete. This question type allows the instructor to specify the allowed answers which is a percentage of the total amount of points for the question. It also allows you to add the correct number of answer boxes and give the question points.
To add a Fill-in-multiple-blanks question:
Lessons Tab 438
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink.
2. Click the Fill-in-multiple-blanks hyperlink or icon ( ).
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
% N
Lessons Tab 439
Field Name
Description View
Allowed Answers
Define acceptable answers N
Feedback Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test.
Grading Determine grading of user answers: normal, exact match, no sounds like, no rounding
A
Precision Specifies the number of decimal points the student answer must conform to (e.g. a value of 2 would require the student answer to be accurate when rounded to two decimal points.
N
Number of Answer boxes
Determine the number of answer boxes which display to the student.
If you have four answers and set the number of answers box to 1, only your first answer will display.
A
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Never Scramble
This option will keep your quiz questions in a consistent order each time students access the quiz.
A
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Lessons Tab 440
Field Name
Description View
Grading Determine grading of user answers: normal, exact match, no sounds like, no rounding
A
Precision Specifies the number of decimal points the student answer must conform to (e.g. a value of 2 would require the student answer to be accurate when rounded to two decimal points.
A
Feedback if Selected
Used to provide selective information to the user concerning the answer selected after submitting a quiz. This may be used when several answers could be correct but one answer is better than then rest. This provides an area to explain why one answer would be better than another.
A
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-
A
Lessons Tab 441
Field Name
Description View
in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
6. Click the Save button.
You may add images, animations, or other media to quiz questions, choices, or feedback by using the HTML editor or by typing/pasting HTML code directly into any of the fields. Be aware that filenames for embedded or linked media files may be easily seen by students by selecting right-click > properties, viewing the browser status bar, etc. You may optionally use the Image URL option for image upload which masks the filename of the uploaded image.
In advanced mode, Normal grading (under Grading drop-down list) determines the weight of the answer instead of the percentage. Placing the correct answer with the highest value first in the list gives this answer a higher weight than the second answer or third answer.
Add a Short Answer Question
Short answer questions provide the student with a textbox to type their response. Student responses must be manually graded. For short answer questions, the answer field allows the instructor to specify their grading criteria for what is considered as a correct response. This is very similar in purpose to the feedback text field.
To add a short answer question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Short Answer hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 442
Lessons Tab 443
7. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Answers Type answer in box. N
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Lessons Tab 444
Field Name Description View
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
8. Click the Save button.
Because short answer questions must be manually graded, the answer text field serves the same purpose as the feedback text area – to provide the correct answer, a rubric, or feedback regarding the criteria to receive a good grade on the short answer. When you provide feedback or grading criteria, you may choose to use either of these fields or both.
Add an Essay Question
Essay questions cannot be automatically graded by ANGEL® 7.3 and must be manually graded before a final quiz score is posted to the gradebook.
To add an essay question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Essay hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 445
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Answers Type answer in box. N
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Lessons Tab 446
Field Name
Description View
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 447
Because essay questions must be manually graded, the answer text field serves the same purpose as the feedback text area – to provide the correct answer, a rubric, or feedback regarding the criteria to receive a good grade on the essay. When you provide feedback or grading criteria, you may choose to use either of these fields or both.
Add an Off-line Item
Off-line items allow the instructor to add additional questions to a quiz that are answered or turned in by means other than quiz submission. The student may be advised to turn in the off-line item using the course mail or drop box or by other means, including physically handing in the additional question/exercise.
To add an off-line item question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Off-line Item hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Lessons Tab 448
Field Name Description View
Type The drop-down list provides an option to change the question type when in the question editor.
N
Text Provides an area for the question text. How the text is formatted depends on the page format setting.
N
Answers Type answer in box. N
Points Allows you to assign points to each response N
General Feedback
Used to specify a comment that should be returned to the user when the user submits the test. The feedback appears following the question. This field can be used to increase the effectiveness of quizzes by providing additional information such as where the material is covered in the book.
N
Image URL Used if you would like an image to appear before the question. To use, type the fully-qualified URL to the GIF or JPEG image in this field. You can use this setting to include an image that you want to reference in a question or a series of questions.
N
Keywords Provides an area where you can add keywords that pertain to a question. Setting keywords on a question allows it to be reused for additional quizzes based on a keyword selection.
A
Difficulty Provides an option to assign a difficulty level to a question (very easy, easy, average, difficult and very difficult). This area is another tool that can be used when requesting a reusable question based on difficulty level.
A
Lessons Tab 449
Field Name Description View
Advanced Options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
4. Click the Save button.
It is advisable to leave the answer and feedback text fields blank if your quiz settings are set to provide immediate feedback to the student. Otherwise, the display of your grading criteria may provide the students with the answer before the student has the chance to complete the off-line item.
Add a Pool Item
A pool item question is selected based on criteria that you provide. As you create questions in a quiz, you have the advanced option to add keyword(s) and/or difficulty to a question.
Using the keyword and/or difficulty criteria provides a search mechanism to access questions in your course or any learning object repository associated with your course to pull these questions into your quiz. The advanced settings on the Pool Item editor provide additional settings which can aid in the selection of the pool questions.
Lessons Tab 450
To add an item from a pool:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Pool Item hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Select Select which question for which to enter key words
N
Keywords to Match
Type keywords to match when choosing pool items
N
Match Choose how to match keywords N
Min Points Allows you to select the minimum point value from your pool item. This criterion is used when searching through your quizzes for questions that meet the minimum point criterion.
A
Max Points Allows you to select the maximum point value from your pool item. This criterion is used when searching through your quizzes for questions that meet the maximum point criterion.
A
Min Difficulty Allows you to determine the minimum difficulty criterion for the questions selected. This criterion is used when searching through your quizzes for questions that meet the minimum difficulty criterion.
A
Lessons Tab 451
Field Name Description View
Max Difficulty Allows you to determine the maximum difficulty criterion for the questions selected. This criterion is used when searching through your quizzes for questions that meet the maximum difficulty criterion.
A
Ignored Question Types
Allows you to specify which question types to ignore when selecting questions. By default, no checkboxes are selected so ANGEL® 7.3 searches through all question types. To ignore a specific question type, select the checkbox next to the type to ignore.
A
Use questions from this section only
Pulls questions only from the current section. If unchecked, the pool search pulls from this section as well as any Learning Object Repository associated with this section.
A
5. Click the Save button.
Selecting Any Keywords matches any of the keywords listed in your Keywords to Match. Selecting All Keywords searches and matches all the keywords listed in your Keywords to Match.
Copy Questions
ANGEL® 7.3 makes it very easy to copy quizzes or questions from existing quizzes.
To copy questions from an existing ANGEL® 7.3 quiz:
1. From the Copy Questions drop-down list, select the quiz name from which to copy questions.
2. Click Copy.
3. Select the Copy all questions checkbox if you wish to copy all the questions or select the checkbox next to the question(s) you wish to copy.
4. By default, the Include Keywords checkbox is selected. If the quiz questions being copied do not contain keywords, this checkbox can be cleared.
5. Click the OK button.
6. Questions added are indicated by Added in place of the checkbox. For additional questions on additional pages, click the Next hyperlink or the page number hyperlink.
7. Click the OK button when your selection is complete.
8. Click the Save button.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
Lessons Tab 452
Import Questions
To import questions from a word processing document, perform the following steps:
1. Click Import Questions.
2. Replace the sample text in the Import Questions text field with the question text copied from your source document.
You may copy, paste, and import more than one question at a time. However, the pasted question text must follow the format of the sample question text as shown.
The question text must conform to the following specifications:
Each question must begin on a new line.
The first line of each question must start with ‗Q:‘ or the question number followed by a period (‗1.‘, ‗2.‘, ‗3.‘, etc.).
If the question has choices the choices must immediately follow the question text.
Each choice must be on a line by itself.
Each choice must begin with a choice letter followed by a period (‗A.‘, ‗B.‘, ‗C.‘, etc.).
The following optional settings can be added after the question and choices. Each setting must be on a line by itself and follow the format SettingName: SettingValue. See the image below for a formatting example.
Setting Description
ANSWER: For choice questions type the letter of each correct choice separated by commas. For open-ended questions type the actual answer text.
POINTS: The integer point value for the question. For Multiple Select questions this is the value of each correct choice.
IMAGE: The URL of an image to display before the question text.
FEEDBACK: Text to display after the user submits the quiz.
TYPE: Identifies the specific question format to use.
SH Section Heading
MC Multiple Choice
MS Multiple Select
TF True/False
SA Short Answer
Lessons Tab 453
FB Fill-in-the-blank
ES Essay
OI Offline Item
To specify ‗x‘ number of questions in a section heading you can use the format section heading SELECT:# where # is the number of questions to select from this section.
3. Use the Choice, Open-ended, and Points drop-down lists to specify the default point value and question format for choice type questions and open-ended type questions.
4. Click the OK button.
Calculated Questions Wizard
Note: If you are using Calculated Questions you should consider using Algorithmic Questions in Assessments. Algorithmic Questions offer additional functional and reporting capabilities.
The Calculated Questions Wizard allows a group of questions to be created on the basis of a formula and variables input by the author. Instructors can also choose how many of
Lessons Tab 454
the questions are asked on a given test allowing students to receive different versions of the same question at random.
To create a series of formula based questions using the Calculated Question Wizard:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the quiz toolbar).
2. Click the Calculated Questions hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Type a question in the Question field, but use variable letters within curly braces in place of any numeric values that are being used within the question.
For example, type the following:
{X} meters divided by {Y} millimeters multiplied by {Z} centimeters equals
____.
4. Type the formula to be solved in the Correct Formula field using supported characters to build the mathematical equation. Use variable letters within curly braces in place of any numeric values that are being used with the formula. Any variable appearing in the question must also appear as part of the formula.
Following the example above, type the following in the Correct Formula field:
{X} / ({Y} * 1000) * ({Z} * 100)
Supported mathematical symbols include:
Symbol Mathematical Meaning
+ Addition
Lessons Tab 455
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
% Percentage
. Decimal
^ Raise to a power
\ Integer Division
MOD Modulus
2E10 (E) Scientific Notation
SQRT Square Root
SIN Sine
COS Cosine
TAN Tangent
5. If applicable, type the correct label in the Correct Units field.
Following our example, type meters in the Correct Units field.
6. Use of the Distracter Formula field determines whether the Calculated Questions Wizard creates the questions as a multiple choice or as fill-in-the-blank. To create multiple choice questions, you must enter a distracter for each additional choice you wish to have. To create fill-in-the-blank questions, you must leave the distracter boxes empty.
Following our example, create multiple choice questions by typing the following formulas in the first three Distracter Formula fields:
Distracter 1: {X} / ({Y} * 100) + ({Z} * 10) Distracter 2: {X} / ({Y} * 1000) * ({Z} * 10) Distracter 3: {X} / ({Y} * 1000) * {Z}
7. If applicable, type distracter labels in the appropriate Distracter Units fields.
The units field is optional and can be delimited by the pipe symbol ( | ) to have the wizard randomly choose one of several units.
Following our example, type meters in the first distracter units field, type meters|centimeters|millimeters in the second distracter units field and type centimeters in the third distracter units field. Upon completion of the questions, the Calculated Question Wizard randomly selects one of the three unit labels for each version of the distracter two choice. Choice orders are automatically randomized upon question creation.
Lessons Tab 456
8. Select the number of questions you want to generate from the How many questions would you like to generate? drop-down list.
9. Select the number of questions you would like displayed from the How many questions would you like displayed on the quiz? drop-down list.
10. Select how many points each question is worth from the How many points is each question worth? drop-down list.
11. Click the Continue button.
12. Type the minimum allowed value in the Min field and the maximum allowed value in the Max field for each variable specified.
13. Select the number of decimal places to allow for each variable from the Dec drop-down list.
14. Click the Continue button.
Lessons Tab 457
15. Review the provided variable values and change, if desired.
16. Select the number of decimal places the answers should be rounded to from the How many decimal places should answers be rounded to? drop-down list.
17. Click the Continue button.
18. Review the provided correct and incorrect Answer Values for each of the questions.
19. For fill-in-the-blank questions only, select the require exact match for correct answer checkbox if you want to require responses to exactly match what is shown on the screen. When left unselected, a response that is more accurate than the rounded answer displayed is also counted as correct.
20. Click the Finish button.
To Grade a Quiz Response
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz item).
Lessons Tab 458
3. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. The Submissions page appears.
4. Click the Grade button next to the User ID you wish to grade. The Grade Quiz page appears.
Should your quiz have a combination of graded and ungraded questions, you can select the Hide Graded Items checkbox allowing you to quickly grade those ungraded questions manually.
Items that have not been graded are easily spotted by a blue pencil icon next to the Points Earned field. Items that have already been graded have either a green checkmark icon or a red X icon denoting whether the question was answered correctly or incorrectly.
5. Type the student‘s score in the Score field of each ungraded question.
You may optionally re-grade or type comments for any of the questions regardless of whether they had already been graded or not.
6. When you have finished grading the quiz, click the OK button.
7. Repeat steps 4-7 for each quiz you wish to grade.
To View Submissions
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz item).
3. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. The Submissions page appears.
4. Click the View button next to the student submission you wish to view. You are provided with a view of the student‘s quiz submission with the graded items and items that need to be manually graded.
Lessons Tab 459
5. When finished viewing, click the Done button.
To Delete a Submission
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz item).
3. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. The Submissions page appears.
4. Click the Delete button next to the student submission you wish to delete.
The student‘s quiz submission is deleted from the course.
5. You are prompted to make sure you wish to delete the student‘s response. If you wish to proceed, click the OK button.
Grade by Question
The Grade by Question feature allows for blind grading of ungraded responses. The grading is done one question at a time moving through all ungraded responses before moving to the next question.
To grade by question:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz).
3. Click the Grade by Question hyperlink. The Grade by Question page appears.
4. Select the question responses you wish to grade by clicking the Ungraded: n Responses hyperlink. The questions page appears along with the response with a field for grading.
5. Grade the responses by placing a point value in the Grade field and any feedback in the Feedback field.
6. Click the OK button when finished.
Lessons Tab 460
Export Submission and Grade Data
The Export Submissions and Grade Data utility allows you to export a quiz item‘s data in a simple format (comma separated value; .csv) that can be easily opened with a spreadsheet program (such as Microsoft Excel). The fixed length text (.prn) and tab delimited (.txt) file types may require some simple conversion to open in a spreadsheet program.
To export submission and grade data:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz).
3. Click the Export Submission and Grade Data hyperlink. The Export Submissions screen appears.
4. Select the preferred file format from the File Format drop-down list.
5. Click the Export button. A file download box appears on the screen asking to open, save or cancel.
6. Click the Save button. A Save As dialog appears.
7. Type a name for the downloading file in the File Name field.
8. Select a location for the downloading file and click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 461
Previewing Quizzes
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the quiz hyperlink for the quiz you wish to view.
3. Click Preview.
4. Click Done when you‘ve finished previewing your survey.
Completing Quizzes
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the quiz hyperlink for the quiz you wish to view.
3. Click Begin <name of quiz >.
If you‘ve saved the quiz and returned to it, you will see the option Resume <name of quiz >.
4. Do one of the following:
Click Submit when you‘ve finished your quiz. When you‘ve submitted the quiz, you will receive a confirmation
Click Save Answers to leave the survey or finish it later.
a. Click Continue to finish the quiz.
b. Click Finish later to leave the quiz.
Surveys
A Survey item provides the opportunity to assess the progress of the student. A survey item can contain several different question types.
In ANGEL® 7.3, a survey is treated as just another lesson item, with the same grading options as any other lesson item. Surveys help build engaging online learning environments and are used with discussions to reinforce lessons. Surveys allow instructors to find new ways to evaluate, recommend and refer student work. They are personal and less collaborative in nature, more static than wikis, and they capture changes in thinking with the surveys to the outside being secondary.
Creating a Survey
Surveys are built by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the survey are stored. The picture below shows the basic survey building environment from the content tab.
Lessons Tab 462
Surveys contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the survey you are creating.
The Content tab allows you to enter titles, subtitles, description and URL information about the survey.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
The Access tab allows you to define who can view and edit the survey. It also allows you to set the start and end dates for the survey.
Delivery The Delivery tab provides settings used for the delivery of the survey. These settings include the Take Survey link and display settings.
Submission The Submission tab determines how many attempts are allowed for the survey. Instructors can validate survey items to check for incomplete survey questions under the submissions tab.
Review The Review tab determines what survey items display for review by the user when the survey is submitted. By default, full review is selected.
Lessons Tab 463
Tab Description
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating Milestones and Gradebook settings for the content item that is being created. This allows the instructor the ability to create milestones and grade book items from within the content item.
How to Create/Edit a Survey
To add a survey to the Lessons page:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new page
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click the Survey hyperlink.
You are editing an existing page
1. Navigate to the survey and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. Click the Content tab.
Lessons Tab 464
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Title Is the title for the survey N
Subtitle Is the secondary title for the survey. Can be used to provide more information for readers.
N
Directions Defines what participants should be posting as part of the discussion forum.
N
Sequence
Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page. This feature is used for accessibility when drag-n-drop is not available for instructor use.
A
Survey Target
Allows you to choose how surveys open in a browser. Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Opens in new window unless you are in frames.
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
N
Lessons Tab 465
Field Name Description View
Post URL Specifies the URL of a custom script to which responses should be posted for additional processing.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that is used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL Allows you to select an alternate source for help on this content item. A separate help document may be made by your institution.
A
Entry Author Identifies entry author. A
Object Author Identifies object author. A
5. Click the Access tab.
6. Complete the following fields:
Lessons Tab 466
Field Name Description View
User Tracking Determines if user tracking is disabled, on students only, all enrolled users, authenticated guests or everyone.
N
Do not allow users to view these items
Determines if users are allowed to view the discussion forum.
N
Viewable by Determines who can view the discussion forum.
N
Password Allows you to set a password for users to view your discussion forum.
N
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict viewing of an item to a particular group of users. This can be useful if you want to have independent group projects and you want to ensure that only members see material for their own group.
Selecting Selected Teams from the drop-down list activates a Team List allowing you to select which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to the survey to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to the survey to a specific date.
A
Editable By The Editable By setting allows you to define which types of users should be able to edit the access setting for an item. The default setting is to allow all course/group editors to edit these settings. It can also be set to author/owner to further restrict editing
A
Lessons Tab 467
Field Name Description View rights.
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the context of the item. Context is page text, directions, etc.
A
Browser Security
The Browser Security list allows the editor to open the survey in a new browser window (using Medium security) disabling common browser functions including menus, address bar, context menus (right-click), and the use of most control keys (Ctrl-C for copy, Ctrl-V for paste, etc.)
A
IP Filter You can easily restrict quiz or survey access to a specific IP address. Using the IP Filter enter the IP Information as follows:
Use commas ( , ) to separate multiple IP address entries
Use a minus sign ( - ) to disallow the specific address
Use a plus sign ( + ) to allow the specified address
Use an asterisk ( * ) within an IP address as a wild card meaning all values between 0 and 255
In cases where an IP address is included in more than one entry, the most specific entry is applied (e.g. a setting of -*.*.*.*,+207.46.249.*,-207.46.249.5) allowing access to any IP address within the 207.46.249 class C network with the exception of 207.46.249.5 which has been excluded.
A
7. Click the Delivery tab.
Lessons Tab 468
8. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Take <survey name>
Enabled/Disabled. Allows the instructor the ability to turn off the Take <survey name> link.
N
Display Mode Determines how the questions are displayed. Options include:
All questions
Single question
Single question – No Backtrack
Single question mode requires a DHTML-capable browser.
Scramble the order in which questions are delivered - Scrambles the order in which questions are displayed. Selecting this checkbox provides a quiz displaying questions randomly for each student. This option is available only for quizzes.
Scramble of the order of choices on questions- Scrambles the order of answer choices for multiple choice, multiple select, matching and ordering question types. This option is available
N
Lessons Tab 469
Field Name Description View only for quizzes.
9. Click the Submission tab.
10. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Max Attempts Restricts the number of times an individual user can take a quiz or survey.
N
Validation Allows the instructor to specify what, if any, validation is done when the user attempts to submit the quiz or survey.
N
Auto-Save Allows the instructor to determine if auto-saving is disabled or how frequently a quiz is saved. This option can be used as a safeguard if the Save button is disabled.
A
Do not allow users to save and finish later
Checkbox disables the Save button. A
Make submissions anonymous
Allows the use anonymous submittal of a quiz or survey. It is recommended that this NOT be used on quizzes.
A
Lessons Tab 470
11. Click the Review tab.
12. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
User Review Works in conjunction with the related Full Review Options to determine the level of review to which users have access. The User Review option applies to the submission of the survey, as well as to the review of previously submitted survey.
Anonymous surveys do not allow feedback regardless of this setting.
Full Review allows the user to review the full results of the quiz or survey upon submission, restricted only by the current Full Review Options. In addition, upon returning to a previously submitted quiz or survey, the user is presented with a hyperlinked list of the dates on which he/she has taken the quiz or survey. The user may click on the hyperlinked item to review the full results of the submission restricted only by the current Full Review Options.
Summary only allows the user to review a summary of the quiz or survey upon submission, including the number of points awarded, the number of points missed, and an overall score. In addition, upon returning to a previously submitted quiz or survey, the user is presented with a list of the dates on which the user submitted a quiz or survey and the grade for each submission (if applicable).
N
Lessons Tab 471
Field Name Description View
Disabled prevents the display of feedback upon submission of a quiz or survey and also disables the display of information regarding previously submitted surveys.
Review options
Allows you to review by user response or feedback text
N
Full Review Options
Feedback text – displays feedback provided in the survey.
User response – displays user response to the questions.
N
Lessons Tab 472
13. Click the Standards tab.
Lessons Tab 473
14. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click the OK button when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new standard
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 474
If you are Then
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click the Save button.
15. Click the Objectives tab.
16. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to
Lessons Tab 475
If you are Then remove
3. Click the OK button when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new objective
Browse for an objective
a. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
b. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
c. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 476
If you are Then
Search for an Objective
a. Click the Search Objectives tab.
b. Type a keyword and click the Search button.
c. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
17. Click the Automate tab.
Lessons Tab 477
18. The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Field Name Description View
Associated Agents
Provides a list of associated agents set for this content item.
N
Current Actions Provides a list of current actions set for this content item
N
19. Click the Assignments tab.
20. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Assignment This associates the content item with the gradebook.
N
Title This is the title for the gradebook item. This is used if you want the assignment to have a different title than the content item.
A
Category Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook.
N
Points Possible The points value for the content item. N
Calculation Type
This determines how the grade is calculated. The default is first submission.
N
Lessons Tab 478
Field Name Description View
Display Format This determines how the grade is displayed to students. The default is Course Default.
N
Hide gradebook assignments from students
To keep students from seeing the content item in the gradebook, select this checkbox.
N
Task Type The Task Type determines if this content item can be manually completed by the student or if ANGEL® 7.3 determines the completion based on viewing, grading, or submittal.
N
Assign Date This is the date the content item is assigned. N
Due Date This is the date the content item is due. N
21. Click Save.
For more on this topic see “How to Create a Survey” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
How to Delete a Survey
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Delete hyperlink beneath the name of the survey you wish to delete
3. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the Survey Click Delete this Survey.
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
Delete all submissions
Click Delete All Submissions.
Delete questions Click Delete Questions.
Lessons Tab 479
4. When prompted by the dialog screen, click the OK button or the Cancel button. You are returned to the list of Lessons.
Overview of Survey Question Types
ANGEL® 7.3 Surveys support the creation of several different question types. The following chart provides a description of the available question types.
Question Type Description
Section Heading Supports the placement of text (e.g. directions, story problem text, etc.).
Text Box Presents users with a labeled single-line text entry box.
Text Area Presents users with a labeled multiple-line text entry area.
Checkbox Presents users with a labeled checkbox.
Check List Presents users with a statement and a series of checkbox items. Users may select all items that apply.
Drop-down List Presents users with a labeled drop-down list box.
Option List Presents users with a statement and a list of options. Users may select only ONE option.
Likert Scale Presents users with a statement and a ranking scale. Users must select the most appropriate ranking.
Copy Questions Copy questions from survey to survey
Import Questions Import questions from a text file or through cut and paste.
How to Add a Section Heading
Section headings can be used to place any block of text or visual element on the survey. Section headings are commonly used to place directions at the top of a survey or for placing a story problem, scenario, image, and/or animation above or in between several related questions.
To add a section heading:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Section Heading hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 480
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Text The text of your header N
Feedback Feedback is displayed to the user following the submission of the survey.
N
Image URL An image used for the header N
Sequence The order in which the header appears A
4. Click the Save button.
How to Add a Text Box Question
To add a text box question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
Lessons Tab 481
2. Click the Text Box hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal or compact.
N
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
N
Image URL An image used for the text box N
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Lessons Tab 482
Field Name Description View
Advanced options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Sequence The order in which the text box appears A
4. Click the Save button.
How to Add a Text Area Question
To add a text area question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Text Area hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 483
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal or compact.
N
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
For example, if you want to change the width of a text box so students can see the whole content of the text box, you can change this by specifying the appropriate HTML textbox attribute (e.g. size=100, meaning 100 pixels wide)
N
Image URL An image used for the text area N
Lessons Tab 484
Field Name Description View
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Advanced options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Sequence The order in which the text area appears A
4. Click the Save button.
How to Add a Checkbox Question
To add a checkbox question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Checkbox hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 485
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal or compact.
N
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
N
Image URL An image used for the check box N
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Advanced Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently
A
Lessons Tab 486
Field Name Description View options available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
Sequence The order in which the check box appears A
4. Click the Save button.
How to Add a Check List Question
To add a check list question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Check List hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 487
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal or compact.
N
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
N
Image URL An image used for the check list N
Lessons Tab 488
Field Name Description View
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Advanced options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Sequence The order in which the check list appears A
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 489
How to Add a Survey Drop-down List Question
To add a drop-down list question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Drop-down list hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal N
Lessons Tab 490
Field Name Description View or compact.
Choices Allows you to specify the available choices for choice-based survey questions (drop-down menu, options list, etc.)
N
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
N
Image URL An image used for the drop-down list N
Advanced options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Sequence The order in which the drop-down list appears A
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 491
How to Add an Option List Question
To add an option list question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Option List hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal N
Lessons Tab 492
Field Name Description View
or compact.
Choices Allows you to specify the available choices for choice-based survey questions (drop-down menu, options list, etc.)
N
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
N
Image URL An image used for the drop-down list N
Advanced options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Sequence The order in which the drop-down list appears A
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 493
How to Add a Likert Scale Question
A typical question using a Likert Scale might pose a statement and ask the user whether they Strongly Agree, Address, Undecided, Disagree or Strongly Disagree.
To add a Likert Scale question:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Likert Scale hyperlink or icon ( ).
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Type Choose the correct question type from the drop-down list.
A
Questions The text for the question N
Lessons Tab 494
Field Name Description View
Display Mode The manner in which the question displays- normal or compact.
N
Choices Allows you to specify the available choices for choice-based survey questions (drop-down menu, options list, etc.)
N
Field ID Allows you to specify an alternate, more readable field ID for each question. This is helpful if you plan to export submission data to a spreadsheet for sorting or reviewing.
A
Attributes Allows you to specify HTML attributes relating to the size and formatting of the text field, text box, drop-down box, and similar fields.
N
Image URL An image that is used for the drop-down list N
Advanced options
Provides an interface for specifying advanced item settings. The following options are currently available:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
A
Sequence The order in which the drop-down list appears A
4. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 495
How to Copy Survey Questions
ANGEL® 7.3 makes it very easy to copy surveys or questions from existing surveys.
To copy questions from an existing survey:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Select the survey you wish to copy question from the Copy Questions drop-down menu.
3. Click the Copy Questions hyperlink or icon ( ). The Copy Questions page appears with a listing of the questions available to be copied.
4. Select the Copy all questions checkbox to copy all the questions or select the checkbox next to the question(s) you wish to copy.
5. Click the OK button.
How to Import Questions
To import survey questions from a word processing document, perform the following steps:
1. Click the Add Question hyperlink (located on the survey toolbar).
2. Click the Import Questions hyperlink or icon ( ).
Lessons Tab 496
3. Replace the sample text in the Import Questions text area with question text copied from your source document.
You may copy, paste, and import more than one question at a time. However, the pasted question text must follow the format of the sample question text as shown.
The question text must conform to the following specifications:
Each question must begin on a new line.
The first line of each question must start with ‗Q:‘ or the question number followed by a period (‗1.‘, ‘2.‘, ‗3.‘, etc.).
If the question has choices the choices must immediately follow the question text.
Each choice must be on a line by itself.
Each choice must begin with a choice letter followed by a period (‗A.‘, ‗B.‘, ‗C.‘, etc.).
The following optional settings may be added after the question and its choices. Each setting must be on a line by itself and follow the format SettingName: SettingValue.
Lessons Tab 497
Setting Description
ANSWER: For choice questions type the letter of each correct choice separated by commas. For open-ended questions enter the actual answer text.
IMAGE: The URL of an image to display before the question text.
FEEDBACK: Text to display after the user submits the quiz.
TYPE: Identifies the specific question format to use.
SH Section Heading
TX Single-line text.
TA Multi-line text
CB Checkbox
CL Check List
DL Drop-box list
OL Option List
LS Likert Scale
4. Use the Choice and Open-ended drop-down lists to specify the default question format for choice type questions and open-ended type questions.
5. Click the OK button.
Previewing Surveys
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the survey hyperlink for the survey you wish to view.
3. Click the Preview hyperlink.
4. Click the Done button when you‘ve finished previewing your survey.
Completing Surveys
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the survey hyperlink for the survey you wish to view.
3. Click Begin <name of survey>.
If you‘ve saved the survey and returned to it, you will see the option Resume <name of survey>.
4. Do one of the following:
Lessons Tab 498
Click the Submit button when you‘ve finished your survey. When you‘ve submitted the survey, you will receive a confirmation
Click Save Answers to leave the survey or finish it later.
a. Click the Continue button to finish the survey.
b. Click the Finish later button to leave the survey.
Wikis
What is a Wiki? Wikipedia (http:en.wikipedia.org) describes a wiki as:
“….a type of web site that allows the visitors themselves to easily add, remove, and otherwise edit and change some available content, sometimes without the need for registration. This ease of interaction and operation makes a wiki an effective tool for collaborative authoring.”
The wiki provides an asynchronous collaborative tool for students and instructors to foster collaborative learning and greater peer-to-peer and student-to-faculty communication. The wiki‘s simple interface makes it a perfect tool to introduce students to the online environment and process of interacting with other students. Wikis can be used as online icebreakers to help students get to know each other and to accelerate the collaborative learning process to produce better learning results.
As technology and interaction becomes a more important component of engaging online learning environments, wikis continue to grow and become increasingly popular and useful tools to facilitate this process. Wiki‘s give students more direct access to their content without using a threaded discussion. The progression of learning can be seen through entries and comment entries. Additionally, wikis can be used for each student as an e-portfolio for collection of student work and allowing students to customize their space to show their work. The ANGEL® 7.3 wiki is based on the Tiddly Wiki model (http://www.tiddlywiki.com).
The powerful group-edit nature of a wiki makes it an especially attractive tool for team activities and collaborative learning exercises. Wikis can be used for collaborative research, peer review, and review commentary by external experts. They can also be used to discuss and mange documents. It is a personal forum for expression but open to collaboration, where students and instructors can express ideas. Wikis are a great way to express ideas and create relationships to pages in and outside of the course environment via hyperlinks and tags.
In ANGEL® 7.3, a wiki is treated as just another lesson item, with the same grading options as any other lesson item. The following image shows some of the benefits of the wiki format:
Lessons Tab 499
Lessons Tab 500
Letter Section name Benefit
A Header menu Manage each wiki‘s content from this toolbar – anyone may edit wiki content.
B Right menu A timeline of changes, complete table of contents, and listing of content tags within the wiki.
D Wiki Content Wiki content – easy to format, easy to edit
C Comments Wiki content supports threaded discussion within each wiki section.
Creating a Wiki
Wikis are created by completing a series of tabs which contain fields where information about the wiki are stored. The image below shows the basic wiki building environment from the content tab.
Wikis allows an instructor the ability to create collaborative, updatable, changeable environments for peer-to-peer collaboration.
Wikis contain the following tabs for configuring the page settings:
Tab Description
Content The Content tab provides settings for the assessment you are creating.
Access The Access tab provides settings for access, tracking and viewing content items. This editor allows instructors the ability to set tracking on content items to control information about visits to the lesson item.
Standards The Standards tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to standards provided by the institution. Standards may include those created by national sanctioning bodies, institutional cultural or behavioral standards, etc.
Objectives The Objectives tab provides the instructor the ability to map a page content item to objectives created by the instructor. These objectives allow the instructor to design educational outcomes that best fit a course‘s curriculum.
Automate The Automate tab display a list of Agents associated with that content item. Agents are created via the course‘s Automate tab. The content item‘s Automate tab also offers Action Settings for advanced users.
Assignment The Assignment tab provides access to creating assignments for the content item that is being created.
How to Create/Edit a Wiki
To add a wiki to the Lessons page:
Lessons Tab 501
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a wiki
1. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
2. Click the Wiki hyperlink.
You are editing an wiki
Navigate to the wiki and click the Settings hyperlink.
3. On the Content tab, complete the following fields:
Field Name
Description View
Title The title text is used when listing the item. It also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected.
N
Subtitle
The subtitle text is used when listing the item in its parent and also appears at the top of the page when the item itself is selected. The subtitle appears in a smaller font directly beneath the title text. Use subtitles to give longer descriptions of an item.
N
Link Target Allows you to choose how the assessment opens in a browser.
N
Lessons Tab 502
Field Name
Description View
No banner: Allows you to choose to show the banner title or hide it.
Same Widow: Opens in the same window you are using.
New Window: Opens in a new window.
Parent Window: Causes the linked document to open in the parent frame (one step up in the frame hierarchy).
Top Window: Opens in topmost window which replaces your current window.
Selecting this checkbox displays the page without the ANGEL® 7.3 toolbar (banner) at the top of the window.
Description The description is an extended description of the contents of the file.
N
Sequence Sequence is a numeric value that determines the display sequence of the content item on the Lessons page.
A
Icon URL Allows you to select an icon that will be used in place of the default content icon.
A
Help URL
Type a fully qualified URL to a page that provides more information about how to use this resource. For example, if you create a link to an online encyclopedia you could use this link to point to the online help for that encyclopedia.
A
4. Click the Access tab.
Lessons Tab 503
5. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Team Access
The Team Access setting allows you to restrict access to a particular group of users. This can be useful when conducting group projects to ensure that only group members see material for their group.
Select the Selected Teams option designate which teams have access to the content item.
N
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the End Date setting to restrict access to a drop box to a specific date.
A
End Date Selecting an End Date prevents the item from being displayed after the specified date. You might use this setting in conjunction with the Start Date setting to restrict access to a drop box to a specific date.
A
Lessons Tab 504
Field Name Description View
Editable By The Editable By setting allows the course editor to determine who can edit the access settings for the content item. The default setting allows all course/group editors to edit these settings but can be set to author only to further restrict editing rights.
A
Object Editable By
Object Editable By allows you to define who can change the content of the item.
A
6. Click the Standards tab.
7. Complete the following fields.
If you are Then
Removing a standards mapping
1. Click the Mapped Standards tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove.
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
Lessons Tab 505
If you are Then 4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new standard
Do one of the following:
Browse for a standard
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the standard to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map to this Page.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 506
If you are Then
Search for a Standard
1. Click the Search Standards tab.
2. Type a keyword and click the Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the standard to map.
4. Click Save.
8. Click the Objectives tab, if applicable. See the Objectives tab documentation for more information.
Lessons Tab 507
Lessons Tab 508
9. Complete the following fields:
If you are Then
Removing an object mapping
1. Click the Mapped Objectives tab.
2. Clear the checkbox next to the mapping to remove
3. Click OK when prompted to ―Remove this?‖
4. Click the Save button.
Mapping a new objective
Do one of the following:
Browse for an objective
1. Click the Browse Standards tab and navigate to the objective to map.
2. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
3. Click the Save button.
Lessons Tab 509
If you are Then
Search for an Objective
1. Click the Search Objectives tab.
2. Type a keyword and click Search.
3. Click a checkbox next to the objective to map.
10. Click the Automate tab. Here you can view any agents that are associated with the lesson.
Lessons Tab 510
11. Click the Assignments tab.
Lessons Tab 511
12. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description View
Milestone settings
Task Type: Determines when a milestone is considered to have been completed.
Manually marked: Users must explicitly indicate completion by clicking a link.
Item completion: Milestone is considered complete when the lesson item itself is marked as completed for the user.
Assign date: Specifies the date on which the students should begin work on the milestone. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
Due date: Specifies the date by which the milestone should be completed. This date is displayed on the course calendar.
N
Gradebook settings
Specifies the category the gradebook assignment is associated with.
Assignment: This associates the content item with the gradebook.
Category: Determines which category the content is associated with in the gradebook. Includes quizzes, exams and homework.
Points Possible: Species the point scale for the assignment with respect to gradebook reporting.
Calculation Type: Select the appropriate calculation type from the Calculation options to determine whether the category average should be based the grade of all category assignments (Use all assignments) or a subset using the highest scored assignments (Use highest or Drop lowest).
Note: The Calculation Type option allows the course editor to configure a category to ―drop lowest‖ or ―use highest‖ n number of grades when calculating each student‘s category average. For example, by specifying ―Use Highest‖ 10 for the Quizzes category, each student category average will be calculated based on their 10 highest quiz scores.
Display Format: Specifies the format to use
N
Lessons Tab 512
Field Name Description View when displaying the assignment grades in the gradebook.
Hide gradebook assignments from students: Specifies whether the gradebook assignment should be viewable by students.
13. Click the Save button.
Click Cancel to exit the window without making changes.
Understanding the Wiki Environment
Once a wiki is created, you need to orient yourself to what you see within the online environment.
ANGEL® 7.3 provides several groups of hyperlinks which help you create, modify, and maintain your wikis.
Item Location Description
Header menu Header The header menu allows a user to quickly start a new page or a new entry from within the wiki environment. You can also search for a word or phrase and obtain.
Sidebar menu Right side The sidebar menu allows you to view entries chronologically, view all entries or view the tags associated with entries.
content area Middle Within the actual content portion of the screen there are two menus which are hidden until you point your mouse over the area.
The first is a menu located in the upper right corner of the content area which allows you to manipulate the content.
The entries menu gives you the option to look through your notes in different ways or print them. This menu is found in the title bar on the right side.
Comments Bottom The comments menu consists of a link that allows you to post comments about the wiki.
Lessons Tab 513
Navigating the header menu
The image below is the header menu.
The hyperlinks described below allow you to edit your wiki.
Link Location Description
start page Header View the first page of a wiki
new entry Header Insert a new wiki entry
search Header Search for words and phrases within wiki entries
help Header Find help on wiki creation
Navigate to the start page
To navigate to the start page, do the following:
Click start page.
Create a new entry
1. Click new entry.
2. Complete the following fields:
Tabs Description
Title Is the name of the entry.
Tags Lists tags attached to entry.
Lessons Tab 514
Text area Allows you to edit and add text to the entry.
3. Click the Save hyperlink located in the upper right corner of the wiki window.
Search the wiki
To search the wiki, do the following:
1. Position your cursor at the insertion point.
2. In the search box, type your search term.
3. Press the ENTER key.
Search help
Help provides information on adding images, links, text formatting, block formatting, adding tables, and more.
To navigate to help, do the following:
Click the help hyperlink.
Using the sidebar menu
The image below is the sidebar menu.
The hyperlinks below allow you to edit your wiki.
Lessons Tab 515
Tabs Description
Timeline Lists entries chronologically, starting with the entry most recently created or modified.
All Lists all entries in alphabetical order.
Tags Lists tags attached to entries. In parenthesis next to the tags, is the number entries with which the tag is associated.
More Lists entries that have links to them but are not defined.
Understanding the content area
The following image is a sample editing menu.
The hyperlinks below allow you to edit your wiki.
Tabs Description
edit Lists entries chronologically, starting with the entry most recently created or modified.
close Closing an entry removes the entry from the content screen. However, it is still listed on the sidebar menu under the Timeline tab.
close others Closing others removes all but the first entry listed on the content screen. These entries are still listed in the sidebar menu under the Timeline tab.
references Shows entries that link to the current entry.
jump Allows you to move to another open entry via a menu.
rollback Rollback to previous revision of entry via a menu.
Editing an entry
1. To edit an entry, do one of the following:
Click edit.
Double-click the entry you wish to edit.
Lessons Tab 516
2. Complete the following fields:
Tabs Description
Title Is the name of the entry.
Tags Lists tags attached to entry.
Text area Allows you to edit and add text to the entry.
If you change the title of your entry, you must also change the entries that link to it.
3. Once you have completed your edits, click one of the following:
Field Name Description
Save To save comment
Cancel To cancel comment
Delete To delete comment
Rollback To rollback to previous revision of comment via a menu.
Closing an entry
To close the uppermost entry, do the following:
Click close.
Closing other entries
To close another entry, do the following:
Click close others.
Viewing references
1. Click references.
2. Select the correct reference from the pop-up menu.
Lessons Tab 517
Jump to an entry
To jump to an entry, do the following:
1. Click jump.
2. Select the correct reference from the pop-up menu.
Rollback to an entry
To rollback to an entry, do the following:
1. Click rollback.
2. Select the correct reference from the pop-up menu.
Delete a wiki
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Wiki hyperlink.
3. Point to the link you wish to delete.
4. On the pop-up menu, click delete.
5. Choose one of the following:
If you want to Then
Delete the Discussion Forum
Click Delete this link.
Delete Access Logs
Click Delete Access Logs.
Delete Associated files
Click Delete Associated files.
6. When prompted by the dialog screen, click OK or Cancel. You will return to the list of Lessons.
Using Comments
The following image is a sample command menu.
Lessons Tab 518
Adding a comment
1. Click the add a comment hyperlink.
2. On the Comment screen, complete the following:
Field Name Description
Title Title for comment
Tags Tags for comment
Text area Type comment
3. On the comment screen, click the following:
Field Name Description
Save To save comment
Cancel To cancel comment
Delete To delete comment
Rollback To rollback to previous revision of comment
Lessons Tab 519
Deleting a comment
1. Click the link for the comment you want to delete.
2. In the right corner, click the delete hyperlink.
3. On the dialog box, click the OK or Cancel buttons.
Editing a comment
1. Click the link for the comment you want to edit.
2. In the right corner, click edit.
3. Complete your changes.
4. Click the Save button.
Responding to a comment
1. View the comment to which you want to respond.
2. From the Comments menu, click add a comment.
3. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Title Title for comment
Tags Tags for comment
Text area Type comment
4. On the Comment screen, click one of the following:
Lessons Tab 520
Field Name Description
Save To save comment
Cancel To cancel comment
Delete To delete comment
Rollback To rollback to previous revision of comment
Advanced Content Settings
Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings appear on the Content tab (in Advanced mode) for all content types. The advanced settings allow you to use optional commands to fine tune how the content type functions. Advanced settings include:
EXACTMATCH=1 :Disables numeric rounding and ―sounds like‖ algorithm.
NOSOUNDSLIKE=1 :Disables the ―sounds like‖
NOROND=1 :Disables numeric rounding
MAXSEL=n :For use on Multiple Select questions. Restricts the user to selecting n number of available choices
FIELD_ATTRIBUTES= : Allows editor to specify HTML field attributes for the student response input field
Multiple advanced options should be separated with a semi-colon (e.g. EXACTMATCH=1;FIELD_ATTRIBUTES=COLS=80;)
CONTAINS: Auto-grades correctly with any text you use. If any part of the user‘s answer contains the specified text.
MATCH: Auto-grades correctly if any part of the user‘s answer matches the given regular repression. Example: MATCH:[a-zA-Z0-9_] matches anything placed in a fill-in-the-blank question and automatically grades it as a correct answer as long as the answer is not blank.
Action Settings
Action Settings are available within a the Advanced view of a content item‘s Automate tab. Action Settings allow you to drive system behavior via a string of commands that execute after a system event.
In the lesson item to which you want to add actions, do the following:
1. Click the Automate tab.
2. Click the Advanced option.
3. Click the Action Editor hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 521
4. Click the New button.
5. Click the following links and complete the following fields when applicable.
Link Field Name Description
Add Variable Variable name Specifies the name of the variable.
Amount to add Specifies the amount to add.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Alert Alert Message Text Specifies the alert message text.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Announcement Announcement Specifies the announcement text.
Duration Specifies the duration of the announcement.
Lessons Tab 522
Link Field Name Description
Days Offset Specifies the number of days to offset (wait before displaying) the event.
Start time Specifies the start time of the announcement.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Calendar Title Specifies the title of the calendar.
Category Specifies the category of the calendar.
notes Specifies additional viewable notes that you wish to be associated with the calendar event.
days offset Specifies the number of days to offset (wait before displaying) the event.
start time Specifies the start time of the calendar.
duration Specifies the number of minutes the calendar should remain displayed.
Editable by User Specifies if the user can edit the calendar
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Email (External) From Specifies from whom the email originated.
To Specifies to whom the email is intended
Cc Specifies additional email recipients.
BCC Specifies private (hidden) email recipients.
Subject Specifies the email subject.
Message Text Contains the message text.
Message format Specifies message format (HTML, smart text, plain text).
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Lessons Tab 523
Link Field Name Description
From Specifies from whom the email originated.
Go To Match Text Specifies the exact password, or title of the item to which you want to redirect the student.
Delay Specifies how long students may view the confirmation/results page.
Item type Specifies a specific item type.
Action editor Specifies an additional action to be performed on the resulting page. For example, if you are redirecting to a quiz or form, type TAKE in the Action field and the user is directed into the assessment or form, bypassing the intermediate ―Take the Assessment‖ page.
Sub-Event Specifies additional sub-events.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Lock password(s) Specifies a password to lock out unauthorized users.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Mail (Internal) From Specifies from whom the email originated.
To Specifies to whom the email is intended
Cc Specifies additional email recipients.
BCC Specifies private (hidden) email recipients.
Subject Specifies the email subject.
Message Text Contains the message text.
From Internet Address
Specifies where the email originated.
Reply to Internet Address
Specifies to where/to whom the reply email should return.
Lessons Tab 524
Link Field Name Description
Hide Recipients Specifies if recipients are hidden.
Forward to Internet email
Specifies if email can be forwarded to internet email
Message format Specifies message format (HTML, smart text, plain text).
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Message HTML Message Text Specifies the HTML message text.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Redirect URL Specifies the redirect URL
Delay Specifies the amount of time before users are redirected.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Replace variable text
Variable name Specifies the variable name.
Find text Specifies which text to find.
Replace with Specifies with which text to replace the found text
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Set variable Variable name Specifies the variable name.
Variable value Specifies the variable value.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Team Enroll Team(s) Specifies the teams affected.
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Team Unenroll Team(s) Specifies the teams affected.
Event Specifies the event.
Lessons Tab 525
Link Field Name Description
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
Unlock password(s) Specifies the password for the unenrollment option
Event Specifies the event.
Criteria Specifies the criteria of the event.
6. Click the Save button.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary.
More Options
More options includes items that can be copied from within the current course, a learning object repository or another course or group allowing the instructor to reuse existing material.
Copy Items
Copy Items allows you to duplicate content on an item-by-item basis. This tool may be useful if you are creating similar content items. For example, if you are creating a series of drop boxes with different titles but the same settings and directions, you may want to use the copy items tool to duplicate the drop boxes and then edit the copied items to change the title of each drop box.
This item can only copy content items, not submissions.
To copy items:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Copy Items hyperlink or icon ( ). A list of content items available with the current course displays.
4. Select the item you want to copy from the list. The items selected copy to your course at the bottom of the course lessons.
Selecting a folder copies the folder and all its contents.
5. Continue selecting the items you want to copy until you have copied all desired items.
Import from Learning Object Repository
The Import from Learning Object Repository (LOR) feature allows you to import content from any LOR that your course is granted access. As an instructor, you have the option
Lessons Tab 526
to copy or link to content from any existing LOR which is associated with the same campus, school, department, course or section as your course.
To Import Items from a Learning Object Repository
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lesson tab.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Import from Learning Object Repository hyperlink or icon ( ). The Import from Learning Object Repository page appears. The import screen presents two options for locating the content that you want to import. The first option (Browse) allows you to browse and import content from a specific course, group or repository. The second option (Repository Search) allows you to search one or more repositories by keyword to locate content of specific topics. The Repository Search option also allows for restricting the search to one or more ANGEL® 7.3 content types (page, folder, quiz, etc.)
To Import Content Using the Browse Option
1. Select the appropriate course, group or repository from the drop-down list and click the Browse button. A list of lesson content items appears.
Lessons Tab 527
2. Select the checkbox next to each content item you want to import.
Selecting a checkbox next to a folder selects the folder along with its sub-items. To view the content of a folder, click the folder‘s title or icon. A list of all sub items appears.
To examine content before selecting it, click on the item‘s title or icon. The content item opens in a new window.
3. Click the Copy Item button to copy the selected items into your course. The copied items appear at the specified level on the Lessons tab.
If you import content from a LOR, you are also provided with the option to link to the content items (Link to Items button). Using this option creates a linked item within your course which links to the source item in the repository.
Linking to items can be very useful but can also have unintended consequences. In particular, when linking to a quiz, survey, or drop box, student submission results are stored in the course repository and are not accessible from the course which contains the link. In some cases, this may be the desired outcome (i.e. course/instructor evaluations, standardized testing, departmental survey, etc.); however in most common cases you should copy these item types.
Lessons Tab 528
Other consequences and benefits of linking to content include:
When linking to a repository discussion forum, the forum postings are stored in the repository. The forum postings are still viewable from the course which contains the link; however, the discussion forum becomes shared among all of the courses that link to the discussion forum. This can be very useful for providing a shared discussion forum among several different courses.
Linking is ideal for providing access to large media files such as audio and video lectures. This approach reduces unnecessary duplication and inefficient use of server hard drive space.
Reports for linked items only allow top-level activity summary and detail reports of who has accessed the link. Reports for a linked folder do not provide any detail regarding who accessed sub-items within the link (folder). Those details are only available from within the repository.
To Import Content Using the Repository Search Option
1. Type one or more keywords into the Find Text field.
2. Select one or more resources from the Resources list and select one or more repositories from the Repositories list.
Lessons Tab 529
To select more than one item type and/or more than one repository, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on the item type.
3. Click the Search button. The Repository screen appears with a list of content items matching your keyword(s) and item type criteria.
4. Select the checkbox next to each content item you want to import.
Selecting a checkbox next to a folder, selects the folder along with its sub-items. To view the content of a folder, click the folder‘s title or icon. A list of all sub items appears.
To examine content before selecting it, click on the item‘s title or icon. The content item opens in a new window.
5. Click the Copy Items button to copy the selected items into your course or click the Link to Items to create a linked item within your course which links to the source item in the repository. The copied or linked items appear at the specified level on the Lessons tab.
Linking to items can be very useful but can also have unintended consequences. In particular, when linking to a quiz, survey, or drop box, student submission results are stored in the course repository and are not accessible from the course which contains the link. In some cases, this may be the desired outcome (i.e. course/instructor evaluations, standardized testing, departmental survey, etc.); however in most common cases you should copy these item types.
Other consequences and benefits of linking to content include:
When linking to a repository discussion forum, the forum postings are stored in the repository. The forum postings are still viewable from the course which contains the link; however, the discussion forum becomes shared among all of the courses that link to the discussion forum. This can be very useful for providing a shared discussion forum among several different courses.
Lessons Tab 530
Linking is ideal for providing access to large media files such as audio and video lectures. This approach reduces unnecessary duplication and inefficient use of server hard drive space.
Reports for linked items only allow top-level activity summary and detail reports of who has accessed the link. Reports for a linked folder do not provide any detail regarding who accessed sub-items within the link (folder). Those details are only available from within the repository.
Import from a Course or Group
The Import from a Course or Group feature allows you to import content from courses or groups. As an instructor, you may copy content from any course or group in which you have editing rights.
For more on this topic see “How to Copy Content Items from One Course to Another” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
To import items:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located in the left toolbar).
3. Click the Import from a Course or Group hyperlink or icon ( ). The import screen appears.
4. Select the section from the Section drop-down list.
5. Click the Browse button. A collapsed list of lesson content items appears. To expand the folders, click on the folder name.
Lessons Tab 531
6. Select the checkbox next to the item(s) you want to import.
7. Click the Copy Items button. Copied items appear at the specified level on the Lessons tab.
Templates
ANGEL® 7.3 provides several templates and wizards to simplify the creation of course content.
Add from Template
The Add from Template tool allows the editor to add content to their course using personal or published content templates.
To add content using a content template:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located in the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Add from Template hyperlink. The Course Templates Page appears.
Template Type Description
Lessons Tab 532
Course Templates Templates already created within the course. These templates can be reused as desired.
My Templates Templates you have created and saved to your my Templates.
Favorites Templates that you have imported from other areas in ANGEL® 7.3.
Search Allows you to search for an existing template. Clicking the title of a template moves a copy to your Favorites folder for use in your course.
4. Locate the content template you want to import and click the title of the template to begin the import process. The Content Template Wizard appears.
ANGEL® 7.3 provides several sample templates that can be imported for use in a course or simply to gain a better understanding of what a published template looks like.
5. Follow the steps provided to complete the import process. The number of steps varies based on the template.
Add Content from MERLOT
This tool allows the search of the MERLOT Repository for content material. This search tool uses keywords to search the MERLOT site for content related to your search criteria. To narrow your search, select the advanced option to provide more detail for your search.
To search and add content from MERLOT:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar).
3. Click the Add content from MERLOT hyperlink.
4. Type a keyword in the search field and click the Search button. A list of available content appears.
Lessons Tab 533
5. Select the content items that you want to import and click the Add Selected button (located at the bottom of the page). The selected content is added to your Lessons page.
Rearrange
The rearrange utility provides the ability to rearrange the layout of the content under the Lessons tab. The hyperlink for this utility is located under each content level allowing you to rearrange folders at the top level or sub-content within a folder.
To use the rearrange tool:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the folder containing the material you want to rearrange.
3. Click the Rearrange hyperlink (located on the left side of the toolbar). The rearrange utility appears.
Lessons Tab 534
4. Select the item you wish to move and drag it to the desired location. Click the Save button when all items are in the correct order.
Reports
Clicking the Report hyperlink displays a list of report utilities that can be used for the item or level where you are located. Available utilities vary by content item type.
ANGEL® 7.3 allows you to monitor access to your course via numerous reports. Complete and accurate reports are dependant upon tracking settings, which are set at the item level, when creating or editing the content item. Item reports are available on the Lessons tab. Additional reporting is available on the Report tab.
The following chart shows the utilities available for each Lesson tab feature.
Activity Summary
The activity summary provides a report that tabulates which users have accessed an item and how many times they have accessed the item.
Lessons Tab 535
To view the activity summary:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the content item to view the Activity Summary.
3. Click the Reports hyperlink.
4. Click the Activity Summary hyperlink.
The activity summary page appears on the screen. Graph bars give a visual indication of the number of times each student has accessed the content item. The activity summary report, by default, is organized alphabetically by username.
5. Click the Login Name or Visits hyperlinks to order the list by that particular category.
6. When finished viewing the activity summary, click the Done button.
Activity Detail
The activity detail report provides information concerning when the student accessed the course content. The report information varies dependant upon the content type.
To view an activity detail report:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Navigate to the content item to view the activity detail.
3. Click the Reports hyperlink (located in the toolbar).
4. Click the Activity Detail hyperlink.
The activity detail report varies based on the content item viewed.
Lessons Tab 536
Two examples of the activity detail report are displayed below:
Activity Details of a folder. Notice there are no details in the Details column.
COLUMN NAME DESCRIPTION
USER_ID UNIQUE NAME FOR EACH USER IN ANGEL® 7.3.
RIGHTS THE COURSE RIGHTS FOR THE USER THAT ACCESSED THE CONTENT ITEM.
DATE THE DATE AND TIME THE USER ACCESSED THE CONTENT ITEM.
DETAILS THE UNIQUE OBJECT_ID FOR THE CONTENT ITEM WITH A DESCRIPTION OF
Lessons Tab 537
An assessment or survey contains information concerning this content item, such as delivered, submitted or reviewed. Delivered indicates that the content item has been delivered for the student to take. Submitted indicates that the content item has been submitted and Reviewed indicates that the student reviewed the content item.
5. When finished reviewing the activity detail report, click the Done button.
Response Summary
The Response Summary report displays each question of a survey followed by a Responses box indicating the average responses and the responses total. Next to each survey response choice is the number of items answered per choice.
To view a response summary:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the survey item you wish to review using the Response Summary.
3. Click the Reports hyperlink (located in the toolbar).
4. Click the Response Summary hyperlink. The response summary page appears.
When finished reviewing the Response Summary, click the Done button.
Lessons Tab 538
Item Analysis
The item analysis report helps instructors refine existing assessments by evaluating the assessment‘s ability to discriminate between students who understand the material and those who do not.
There are five different statistics on an item-by-item level for every assessment question.
Reliability measures the extent to which the measurements of a test remain consistent over repeated assessments of the same subject. Think of it as ―discrimination at the assessment level‖.
Discrimination compares the answers given to each question by those who passed the assessment with the answers of those who failed the assessment. A question is said to be a strong discriminator if students who answer a question correctly also tend to perform well on the overall assessment.
Difficulty shows the percentage of total points earned versus total points possible. Single assessment displays the score .
Frequency and distribution measure the number of times a particular answer option was chosen. A green checkmark indicates which of the answer options was correct.
Mean displays the average score computed by dividing the total points earned by the total points available.
Click the hide hyperlink to collapse the details of a particular question. Click the view hyperlink to expand the details of the particular question.
Click the edit for regrade hyperlink to go directly to the question editor to edit and regrade the question for existing submissions.
For additional information on the regarding of questions, see the section of this document titled Assessments.
Lessons Tab 539
SCORM Reports
SCORM reports provide a view of student activity on a SCORM content item.
To view SCORM reports:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the SCORM item to review.
3. Click the Reports hyperlink (located in the toolbar). The SCORM Report list appears.
4. Click the Activities hyperlink review the report. Your report provides breakdown of SCOs and how the user performed against it (total time, score, status, etc.)
Utilities
Clicking the Utilities hyperlink displays a list of utilities that can be used for the content item and available utilities vary by content type.
The following chart shows the utilities available for each content item.
Associated File Manager
The Associated File Manager feature allows you to upload, download, rename, copy, move, zip, manage or delete files associated with a content item. This feature may be useful when embedding files into content items. For example, if you create a page of text that also includes an image you can upload the image file as an associated file.
Lessons Tab 540
How to Upload Associated Files
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the content item to which you want to associate files.
You must be inside the item itself in order to associate files.
3. Navigate to the Utilities hyperlink. The utilities menu appears.
The selections on the utilities menu vary slightly depending on the type of content item.
4. Click the Associated File Manager hyperlink. The associated files screen appears.
5. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the left side of the toolbar).
6. Click the Upload Files hyperlink. The File to Upload screen appears.
7. Click the Browse button to select the file to upload. The Choose File dialog appears to select the file. Select your file and click the Open button.
8. Click the Upload File button. The Upload Successful page appears.
9. To continue uploading files, click the Upload Another File button. When finished uploading files, click the Done button.
10. Click the Exit Associated Files button.
Lessons Tab 541
How to Upload a File using Drag and Drop
1. Log into yourANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the content item to which you want to associate files.
You must be inside the item itself in order to associate files.
3. Navigate to the Utilities hyperlink. The utilities menu appears.
The selections on the utilities menu vary slightly depending on the type of content item.
4. Click the Associated File Manager hyperlink. The associated files screen appears.
5. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the left side of the toolbar).
6. Click the Drag-n-Drop hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 542
7. Drag the files and folders from your computer into the drag-n-drop window.
8. When finished, click the Done button.
9. Click the Exit Associated Files button.
How to Create a Folder as an Associated File
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the content item to which you want to associate files.
You must be inside the item itself in order to associated files.
3. Point to the Utilities hyperlink. The utilities menu appears.
4. Click the Associated File Manager hyperlink.
5. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
6. Click the Create a Folder hyperlink.
7. Type a title in the Folder Name field.
8. Click the OK button. The associated files screen appears showing the created folder. To place content into the created folder, click the folder title and then click the Add Content hyperlink.
Lessons Tab 543
How to Create a File as an Associated File
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click on the content item to which you want to associate files.
You must be inside the item itself in order to associate files.
3. Point to the Utilities hyperlink. The utilities menu appears.
4. Click the Associated File Manager hyperlink.
5. Click the Add Content hyperlink.
6. Click the Create a File hyperlink.
7. Type a title in the File Name field.
8. Type or paste text in the File Contents field.
When entering text into the file contents field, use the HTML Editor which allows you to design your page using a simple word processing style interface. This tool also allows you to embed images, hyperlinks, and other elements into your page. For detailed instructions on using this tool, refer to Appendix I, HTML Editor.
9. Click the OK button.
10. Click the Exit Associate Files button.
How to Link to an Associated File
Course content may be linked from your associated file manager by creating a link to the appropriate file in the Associate File Manager.
To create a link:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the content item).
3. Click the Associate File Manager hyperlink.
4. Locate and right-click directly on the hyperlinked name of the file and select Copy Shortcut (this process may vary depending on your preferred browser).
5. Click the Lessons tab.
6. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the tool bar).
7. Click the Link hyperlink or icon ( ).
8. Complete the Link fields as described in the section of this document Link > How to Create a Link.
Move Item
The move item utility allows you to move content to another folder in your ANGEL® 7.3 Lessons area. This provides you with the opportunity to manage your content and move items as necessary.
Lessons Tab 544
To move content:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the content item).
3. Click the Move Item hyperlink. A page with a list of your folders displays.
4. Click the hyperlink title of the folder you where you want to move the item. Your content item is moved to the designated folder.
Export Item
The Export Items utility allows you to move a content item to any course in which you have editor rights.
To move content:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the content item you wish to export.
3. Point to the Utilities hyperlink.
4. Click the Export Item hyperlink.
5. From the Export to drop-down list, select the course or group to which this item should be exported.
6. Click the OK button. Your content item is moved to the specified course or group.
View, Grade, or Delete Submissions
ANGEL® 7.3 provides an easy-to-use interface for viewing and grading quiz responses. Optionally, an instructor may re-grade previously graded quizzes or add comments to quiz questions.
To Grade a Quiz Response
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz item).
Lessons Tab 545
3. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. The Submissions page appears.
4. Click the Grade button next to the User ID you wish to grade. The Grade Quiz page appears.
Should your quiz have a combination of graded and ungraded questions, you can select the Hide Graded Items checkbox allowing you to quickly grade those ungraded questions manually.
Items that have not been graded are easily spotted by a blue pencil icon next to the Points Earned field. Items that have already been graded have either a green checkmark icon or a red X icon denoting whether the question was answered correctly or incorrectly.
5. Type the student‘s score in the Score field of each ungraded question.
You may optionally re-grade or type comments for any of the questions regardless of whether they had already been graded or not.
6. When you have finished grading the quiz, click the OK button.
7. Repeat steps 4-7 for each quiz you wish to grade.
To View Submissions
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz item).
3. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. The Submissions page appears.
Lessons Tab 546
4. Click the View button next to the student submission you wish to view. You are provided with a view of the student‘s quiz submission with the graded items and items that need to be manually graded.
5. When finished viewing, click the Done button.
To Delete a Submission
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz item).
3. Click the View, Grade, or Delete Submissions hyperlink. The Submissions page appears.
4. Click the Delete button next to the student submission you wish to delete.
The student‘s quiz submission is deleted from the course.
5. You are prompted to make sure you wish to delete the student‘s response. If you wish to proceed, click the OK button.
Grade by Question
The Grade by Question feature allows for blind grading of ungraded responses. The grading is done one question at a time moving through all ungraded responses before moving to the next question.
For more on this topic see “How to Grade an Essay Question” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Lessons Tab 547
To grade by question:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz).
3. Click the Grade by Question hyperlink. The Grade by Question page appears.
4. Select the question responses you wish to grade by clicking the Ungraded: n Responses hyperlink. The questions page appears along with the response with a field for grading.
5. Grade the responses by placing a point value in the Grade field and any feedback in the Feedback field.
6. Click the OK button when finished.
How to regrade a question
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click on the assessment with which you wish to work.
3. Next to the question you wish to regrade, click the Regrade hyperlink.
7. Choose the correct regrade mode.
Lessons Tab 548
Regrade mode
Description
Change points or correct answer
In the Question editor, change the points or correct the answer. Notice all other fields are inactive.
Drop question By dropping the question, it will no longer be used to in grade calculations.
Give full credit By giving full credit, the question will now be graded at full credit for users.
8. Click the OK button.
Export Submission and Grade Data
The Export Submissions and Grade Data utility allows you to export a quiz item‘s data in a simple format (comma separated value; .csv) that can be easily opened with a spreadsheet program (such as Microsoft Excel). The fixed length text (.prn) and tab delimited (.txt) file types may require some simple conversion to open in a spreadsheet program.
To export submission and grade data:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz).
3. Click the Export Submission and Grade Data hyperlink. The Export Submissions screen appears.
Lessons Tab 549
4. Select the preferred file format from the File Format drop-down list.
5. Click the Export button. A file download box appears on the screen asking to open, save or cancel.
6. Click the Save button. A Save As dialog appears.
7. Type a name for the downloading file in the File Name field.
8. Select a location for the downloading file and click the Save button.
Pending Items
Pending Items are quizzes or surveys that have been delivered to the student but not submitted. The student may have saved their answers but lost their internet connection during the taking quiz or survey or had a computer hardware problem. This area provides information to the instructor who can optionally delete the pending item and allow the student to retake the quiz or survey.
To view pending items:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz or survey).
3. Click the Pending Items hyperlink. A list of pending items displays showing the user (in the form of user_id), date/time started, and the IP address of the user.
4. To view the pending item, click the View button.
Lessons Tab 550
5. To submit the pending item, click the Submit button.
6. To delete the pending item, click the Delete button.
Deleting a pending item removes any answered questions that the student has completed,
7. When finished, click the Done button.
Email Quiz/ Email Survey
The Email Quiz/Email Survey utility allows you to email a quiz or survey to a semicolon separated list of individuals. When preparing your quiz or survey that is to be sent via email, you need to set the Anonymous setting to Enabled and the Viewable By to Everyone. For additional information on Quiz and Survey settings, see the sections under the Lessons Tab titled Quiz and Survey Editor Tabs.
Add to Pool
The Add to Pool utility allows you to add your quiz questions to a pool of questions with a specific keyword. The pool item is then searchable from the Add a Question tool found when creating a quiz. For additional information concerning the use of pool items, see the Add a Pool Item section under the Lessons tab.
To add to pool:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz).
3. Click the Add to Pool hyperlink. The keyword page appears.
4. Add a keyword for this pool of questions in the Keyword field.
5. Click the OK button. Your questions from the selected quiz are added to the pool of questions and are assigned the keyword you specified.
View Posted Submissions
When creating course content, you may find that you want to include a form requiring input from your student. When you create this form, which can be done using standard HTML form tags, the student submits the requested information and it is recorded in ANGEL® 7.3 as a submission.
To view posted submissions:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
Lessons Tab 551
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the content item).
3. Click the View Posted Submissions hyperlink. The submissions list appears.
4. Click the View button to view the submission. Optionally, to delete a submission click the Delete button.
5. When finished reviewing the submissions, click the Done button.
Export Posted Submissions
The Export Posted Submissions and Grade Data utility allows you to export the data submitted from quizzes, drop boxes and surveys.
To export posted submissions:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the quiz, survey or drop box name).
3. Click the Export Submission and Grade Data hyperlink. The export submissions page appears allowing you to select the items you wish to export.
Lessons Tab 552
4. Select the file format to export from the drop-down list.
Export a submission item‘s data in a single format (comma separated value; .csv) that can be opened with a spreadsheet program (such as Microsoft Excel). The fixed length text (.prn) and tab delimited (.txt) file types may require some simple conversion to open in a spreadsheet program.
5. Select the checkbox next to the information you want to export.
6. Click the Export button. The File Export and File Download dialog box appears.
7. Click the Save button on the File Download dialog box. The Save As dialog box appears.
8. Type a file name in the File name field.
9. Click the Save button.
10. When the export is complete, click the Close button on the File Export dialog box.
Export Response Statistics
Responses to survey items can be exported in a simple format (comma separated value; .csv) that can be opened with a spreadsheet program (such as Microsoft Excel). The fixed length text (.prn) and tab delimited (.txt.) file types may require some simple conversion to open in a spreadsheet program.
Lessons Tab 553
To export response statistics:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the survey).
3. Click on the Export Response Statistics hyperlink. The export response statistics page appears.
4. Select the file format from the File Format drop-down list.
5. Select checkboxes next to the information you want to export.
6. Click the Export button. A File Download dialog box appears.
7. Click the Save button. The Save As dialog box appears.
8. Type a file name in the File name field.
9. Click the Save button.
10. When the export is complete, click the Close button.
SCORM Assignment
The SCORM Assignment utility allows you to create assignments in the gradebook for SCORM items. SCORM items that are disabled have already been added to the gradebook.
To add a SCORM gradebook assignment:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the SCORM item).
3. Click the SCORM Assignments hyperlink. A list of SCORM items appears.
Lessons Tab 554
4. Select the checkbox next to the SCORM assignment you want to add to the gradebook.
5. Select the gradebook category from the Gradebook Category drop-down list or select the other button to create a new category.
6. Click the Submit button. A confirmation screen appears indicating the SCORM content has been added to the gradebook.
7. Click the OK button.
Re-upload File
The Re-upload File utility allows you to upload a file from your computer to replace the existing file in your content.
To re-upload a file:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the uploaded content item).
3. Click the Re-upload File hyperlink. The upload form page appears.
Lessons Tab 555
4. Click the Browse button to locate the file on your local computer.
5. Once your file is located and the file name appears in the File to Upload field, click the Upload File button. When the file has completed uploading, a File Upload Successful message appears.
6. Click the OK button.
Download Submissions
The Download Submissions utility allows you to download items that have been submitted to a drop box and grade the item outside of ANGEL® 7.3.
To download submissions:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Point to the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the drop box name).
3. Click the Download Submissions hyperlink. The download submissions page appears.
4. Select ungraded submissions or all submissions from the Download drop-down list.
5. Click the Download button to zip and save the files to your computer.
Lessons Tab 556
6. Unzip the files using a zip utility program. Click on the Grade.htm file. The Grade Form appears.
Located on the left, links to all submissions by student name are displayed. The top right section is the grading form. When you select a specific student‘s submission by clicking the link to the left, the file name appears in the lower right section so you can view the submission.
7. Type the grade in the Grade field.
8. User the Browse button to browse your computer if you wish to provide a feedback file to the student.
9. When you have completed grading the submissions, click the Submit button (located at the bottom of the Grade Form). The processing request information appears in the lower portion of the Grade Form.
Lessons Tab 557
Grade by Question
The Grade by Question feature allows for blind grading of ungraded responses. The grading is done one question at a time moving through all ungraded responses before moving to the next question.
To grade by question:
1. Log into your ANGEL course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Utilities hyperlink (located underneath the name of the assessment).
3. Click the Grade by Question hyperlink. The Grade by Question page appears.
4. Select the question responses you wish to grade by clicking the hyperlinked number under Ungraded Submissions. The questions page appears along with the response with fields for scoring and comments.
5. Grade the responses by placing a point value in the Score field and any feedback in the Comments field.
6. Click the Continue button when finished.
Lessons Tab 558
Delete
Use the Delete hyperlink to remove an item from your course environment.
To Delete an Item
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Delete hyperlink (located underneath the name of the content item you want to delete). The Delete Menu appears.
The selections on the Delete Menu vary slightly depending on the type of content item.
3. Click the Delete this xxxx hyperlink (where xxxx is the name of the content item) to remove the item, its contents, its files, and its data. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you wish to delete the item permanently.
4. Click the OK button.
When access to an item has been cached using the Tracking feature, you may wish to us Delete Access Logs to erase the access records to an item.
To Delete Access Logs
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Delete hyperlink (located underneath the name of the content item you want to delete).
3. Click the Delete Access Logs hyperlink. You are prompted that this permanently deletes the specific item or data and if you want to continue.
This process permanently deletes the item or data and cannot be recovered.
4. Click the OK button. A records affected message appears at the top of the delete menu showing how many records were altered.
Lessons Tab 559
To Delete Associated Files
When files are associated with an item you may want to delete these associated files removing the association with the content item.
To delete associated files:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Delete hyperlink (located underneath the name of the content item). The Delete Menu appears.
3. Click the Delete Associated Files hyperlink. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the data permanently.
4. Click the OK button. A records affected message appears at the top of the delete menu showing how many records were altered.
To Delete Sub-items from a Folder
At the Folder level you may want to delete certain sub-items within a folder while retaining other sub-items.
To delete sub-items from a folder:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Delete hyperlink (located under the name of the folder). The delete menu appears.
The selections on the Delete Menu vary slightly depending on the type of content item.
3. Click the Delete Sub-items hyperlink. A delete checklist appears.
4. Select the checkbox to the left of the sub-item(s) you want to delete.
5. Click the OK button. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the sub-items permanently.
6. Click the OK button. A list of the deleted sub-items appears.
7. Click the OK button.
Lessons Tab 560
To Delete All Submissions
When using content items that involve submissions such as quizzes, surveys, and drop boxes you may want to delete submissions affiliated with the content objects without deleting the items themselves.
To delete all submissions:
4. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
5. Click the Delete hyperlink (underneath the name of the quiz, survey, or drop box containing submissions you want to delete).
6. Click the Delete All Submissions hyperlink. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the submissions permanently.
This process permanently deletes the submissions and cannot be recovered.
7. Click the OK button. A records affected message appears at the top of the delete menu showing how many records were altered.
To Delete Questions
When using content items that involve questions such as quizzes and surveys you may want to delete questions affiliated with the content items without deleting the items themselves.
To delete questions:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Delete hyperlink (located underneath the name of the quiz or survey containing the questions you want to delete).
3. Click the Delete Questions hyperlink. The list of questions to delete appears.
4. Select the checkbox next to the question you want to delete.
5. Click the OK button. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the questions permanently.
This process permanently deletes the item or data and cannot be recovered.
6. Click the OK button. A list of questions that have been deleted appears.
Lessons Tab 561
Delete Discussion Forum Posts
When using discussion forums you may want to delete postings affiliated with a discussion forum without deleting the forum itself.
To delete postings from a discussion forum:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Delete hyperlink (located underneath the name of the discussion forum containing the postings you want to delete).
3. Click the Delete All Posts hyperlink. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the postings permanently.
This process permanently deletes the item or data and cannot be recovered.
4. Click the OK button. The Delete of All Forum Posts successful message is displayed.
Preferences
The Preferences utility provides additional options that can be set for your lesson preferences. There are three areas that can be changed – Navigation Menu, Default Access Settings, and Advanced Settings.
Lessons Tab 562
Navigation Menu
The Navigation Menu provides navigation options for the Lessons area. By default, Next and Previous appear on the course navigation toolbar in the upper right. The lessons preference navigation menu allows you to add up, top, index, and footer navigation to your course navigation toolbar.
Default Access Settings
The Default Access Settings determine the tracking options and viewable by option when creating new course content. Setting these options prior to creating content sets your preferences for your content eliminating the need to set tracking and viewable by on each new content item created.
Tracking
To set tracking:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Preferences hyperlink (located in the upper left toolbar).
3. Select the tracking option from the Tracking drop-down list. By default tracking is disabled.
4. Click the Save button.
Viewable By
To set viewable by:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the Preferences hyperlink (located in the upper left toolbar).
3. Select the tracking option from the Viewable By drop-down list. By default viewable by is set to students.
4. Click the Save button.
Advanced Settings
The Advanced Settings area provides advanced options for your lessons content.
Root View
The Root View setting allows you to select how the lesson content is viewed. The following settings are available:
View Description
Default This shows the content items in a list view.
List View If you have changed the view from the default setting, you can select list view to return the content items to a list.
Grid View The grid view provides a grid of the content items. You can elect to have the grid appear in 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 grids.
Lessons Tab 563
Folder View
For items contained within a folder you can select how the items within the folder are viewed. You have the option to select the following settings.
View Description
Default This shows the content items in a list view.
List View If you have changed the view from the default setting, you can select list view to return the content items to a list.
Grid View The grid view provides a grid of the content items. You can elect to have the grid appear in 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 grids.
Editor Menu
The Editor Menu setting allows you to determine how your editing menu is displayed. To change how the Editor Menu is displayed, select your preference from the drop-down list.
View Description
Default Menu is displayed beneath the name of the content item using hyperlinks (Context Menu).
Buttons Displays buttons Edit and Delete next to the content name.
Text Displays Edit and Delete text hyperlinks next to the content name.
Top-level Delete Menu
Selecting the checkbox next to the Top-level Delete menu places a delete hyperlink in the toolbar at the top level of your lesson content. You do not have to click the lesson content item in order to access the delete utility.
The Print hyperlink allows you to print the current page displayed Lessons tab.
My Notes
The My Notes hyperlink provides each user with an online space to take notes on any content located on the Lessons tab.
Using My Notes
To access My Notes:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Lessons tab.
2. Click the My Notes hyperlink (located in the upper right toolbar). The Note Editor page displays.
3. Type or paste your text in the Note field.
Lessons Tab 564
4. Click the Save button. A review of your note is displayed.
5. To access the Notes Editor to edit your text, click the hyperlinked title of the note.
6. To add additional notes, click the Notes Menu button.
7. Click the New Note hyperlink.
Previous/Next
The Previous/Next hyperlinks located in the toolbar in the upper right serve as a navigation tool progressing you through your course content. Previous moves you to the item previously viewed. The Next hyperlink takes you to the next content item on the Lessons tab. Use these links to move quickly through your content.
Resources Tab 565
Resources Tab
The Resources tab is the central location for information concerning the course. It provides students and instructors one place to see the syllabus, course bookmarks and institutional resources.
Syllabus
The Syllabus can be created by using a form that allows you to type syllabus information in an ANGEL® 7.3 syllabus template; or you can upload a custom syllabus file you have created.
Creating a Syllabus
To create a course syllabus using the default template:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Resources tab.
2. Click the Edit button located on the Syllabus toolbar. The Syllabus Source appears.
Resources Tab 566
3. Click the Syllabus Editor button to create a syllabus using the syllabus form. The syllabus editor page appears.
In the General Information section:
1. Type or paste the title of the syllabus in the Heading field.
2. Type or paste the keywords in the Keywords field.
In the Faculty Information section:
Field Description
Heading Type the text that you want to display as the title of the syllabus.
Keywords Type a list of keywords separated by spaces to improve keyword search results.
Resources Tab 567
1. Type or paste the name of the primary instructor in the Name field.
2. Type or paste the home and office phone numbers in the Home and Office Phone fields.
3. Type or paste the office address, calling hours and office hours in the Office Address, Calling Hours and Office Hours fields.
4. Type of paste the email address, homepage URL and photograph URL in the E-mail, Homepage and Photograph URL fields.
Field Description
Name Type the primary instructor‘s full name as you want it to appear in the syllabus.
Home Phone Type the home phone number of the primary instructor if desired. Please remember that this information is publicly available if provided.
Office Phone Type the office phone number of the primary instructor.
Office Address Type the building code and room number of the primary instructor.
Calling Hours Type the days of the week and hours the instructor is available to accept phone calls.
Office Hours Type the days of the week and hours the instructor is available for office hours.
E-mail Type the e-mail address for the primary instructor.
Homepage Type the URL of the primary instructor‘s homepage if one exists. Do not use the URL for the course‘s homepage as a different field is available for this URL.
Photograph URL Type the URL for a photograph of the primary instructor if desired. Remember that this photograph is publicly available if provided.
Resources Tab 568
In the Course Information section:
Field Description
Meeting Location Type the building code and room number or physical address where class is held.
Meeting Times Type the days of the week and times class is held.
Start Date Type the date that class if first held.
Homepage Type the URL for the homepage for this course. This may be a common page for all sections of the course or unique to this section.
Required Text List all textbooks and other materials required for the course. Make sure to include the names of the authors and revision number.
Suggested Text List any additional suggested books or other resources.
Description A strong course description early in the syllabus can often generate student interest by giving a stimulating overview of the course, including its content, its value, and the philosophical or pedagogical assumptions behind it. You will want to increase student enthusiasm and to emphasize the relevance and applicability of the course. You will also want the description to reflect your values and attitudes.
Objectives Course objectives or goals can sometimes be combined with the course description, depending on their complexity and the nature of the course and discipline. Course objectives, ideally characterized by action verbs, usually appear as a statement or an outline describing what students should be able to do at the end of the semester. Clear objectives can foster a sense of partnership and an awareness that you and your students are working toward the same goals. Objectives can provide both a focus and a motivation for learning. Four basic questions can help you identify and/or quantify your objectives or goals:
1. What do you want your students to learn?
2. What assignments, classroom activities, and pedagogical approaches will help them master the identified knowledge, skills, or attitude change?
3. How will you determine that students have accomplished what you set out to teach them?
4. How will you evaluate their achievements?
Resources Tab 569
Field Description
Attendance Policy You need to determine whether or not to count attendance or class participation toward the final grade. Some students will need to miss class because of work or family obligations, so you will want to clarify your policy in writing. You should be flexible, but not overly permissive. If you want to count points for class participation toward the final grade, be certain you define this
Field Description
Schedule Students often turn first to the tentative schedule, which lists topics, assignments, class activities such as field trips, projects, and examinations with their due dates. They want to know what will be happening and when. For an instructor, probably the most difficult planning decisions concern the structuring of course material. How much can students cover in a typical semester? What points should be emphasized? What textbook material can be omitted? To help students organize their time, your syllabus could also reflect a step-by-step approach to major assignments. For a research paper counting significantly toward the final grade, for instance, you might want to assign due dates for a working bibliography, outline, and a rough draft. Be certain your schedule emphasizes, perhaps through bold type, the dates of exams and specific assignments. Your list of assignments should permit adjustments if your entire class should suddenly get involved in an animated discussion that seems more worthwhile than a scheduled quiz or if you unexpectedly need to spend more time on a particular topic. Many instructors include a formal announcement indicating that their syllabus is subject to change depending on the needs of the class but emphasizing that students are responsible for the material covered because of an adjustment.
Requirements Course requirements should be suggested in your objectives and in your assignment schedule. It is desirable, however, to also give an explicit explanation of your expectations in a separate section of the syllabus, or combined with your explanation of grading policies. Many instructors prepare handouts during the semester to aid students with specific assignments, but these should not replace a written explanation of the course requirements in your syllabus. The extra material (explanations of the assigned case study, book review, class project, research paper, or term paper) can even be attached to the syllabus. Some instructors indicate their attendance and make-up policies in this section of the syllabus.
Resources Tab 570
sometimes-elusive phenomenon and emphasize its significance for students. Are you looking for the number of times students speak up or for the quality of their commentary? Will you let students know, during the semester, how they are doing in this regard? Will active class participation substantially affect the final grade or only be considered in borderline cases? Will lack of participation - especially by the shy or insecure person - have an adverse affect on the final grade? Will participation in group activities be evaluated?
Academic Integrity To protect yourself, perhaps in conjunction with your grading policy, you will want to mention the School's policy on integrity in the Student Handbook and your own views about cheating on exams or about plagiarism. Students are often naive about plagiarism, associating it merely with copying and not with the use of ideas which they have paraphrased without proper citation. To encourage academic integrity, especially in large classes, you might include this statement in your syllabus: "You may be asked to show photo identification before being permitted to sit for course examinations. Please bring photo ID to all exams."
Miscellaneous If you use any unusual class procedure, such as cooperative small group learning, panel presentations, or class journals, course web sites, or an online course environment, you should make them known in your syllabus at least briefly.
1. Complete the fields that you want to include on your syllabus. Fields not completed are not displayed to the students.
2. Click the Save button.
For more on this topic see “How to Edit a Syllabus” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Using Syllabus Files
If you have a completed syllabus you may find the Syllabus Editor a tedious task – requiring you to input or copy/paste each field one by one. If you are uploading an existing syllabus file, you will want to convert an existing document (Word, WordPerfect, etc.) to a web page and upload it to ANGEL® 7.3‘s Syllabus Files.
The Syllabus Files allows you to organize your syllabus files by creating folders, pages, or uploading files. For additional information on creating folders and pages, refer to the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
Convert and Upload an Existing Syllabus File
To convert a Microsoft Word document to a web page:
1. Open your Word syllabus on your local computer.
Resources Tab 571
2. In Microsoft Word select Save As from the File menu.
This step may vary slightly if you are using a different version of Microsoft Word or a different work processing program. Most word processing programs (Microsoft Word, WordPerfect, etc.) offer the option to save as a web page or save as HTML (Hypertext Markup Language). In most cases, the steps will be very similar to the process described.
5. Select Web Page (filtered) or HTML from the Save a type: drop-down list.
6. Click the Save button.
By converting your word processing document to a web page before uploading it into ANGEL® 7.3 your uploaded syllabus is more accessible to students – not requiring the student to have the specific word processing program installed to be able to view the syllabus.
If your syllabus document included embedded images, you notice that the process of saving the document as HTML creates an HTML file (syllabus.htm) and an associated folder containing the images needed to properly display the HTML-formatted syllabus. The recommended process for uploading the syllabus file and associated folder is discussed in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
Uploading the Syllabus
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Resources tab.
2. Click the Edit button on the Syllabus toolbar.
3. Click the Syllabus Files button.
4. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located in the upper left toolbar).
5. Click the Upload Files hyperlink.
6. Click the Browse button to browse your computer for your syllabus file.
7. Once the appropriate filename appears in the form click OK. The path to your syllabus file appears in the File to Upload field.
8. Click the Upload File button. Uploading your file may take a few minutes. When complete an Upload Successful message displays.
9. Click the Done button.
10. Click the Exit Syllabus Files button.
11. Click the Edit button on the Syllabus toolbar.
12. Select your syllabus file name from the Syllabus Source drop-down list. Your uploaded file name is preceded by Document:
13. Click the Update button.
Course Resources
Course resources are links to other web pages which may be of use to your students.
Resources Tab 572
Adding Resources
To add additional resources for your students:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Resources tab.
2. Click the Edit button in the Course Resources toolbar.
3. Click the Add a Link hyperlink located in the Resources Links menu bar.
4. Type or paste a title in the Title field.
5. Type or paste a fully qualified URL in the URL field.
6. Type or paste a description for the link in the Description field.
7. Select a target for the page from the Target drop-down list.
8. Select the category from the Category drop-down list. You can created new categories by clicking the Other button and typing the new category name in the prompt.
9. Select who may view this resource by selecting the Viewable By in the drop-down list.
10. Click the Save button.
Institutional Resources
Institutional resources are resources provided by your institution that are of use to students and instructors. The resources provided vary by institution.
To remove institutional resources from your course:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Resources tab.
2. Click the Edit Page hyperlink (located on the Resources toolbar).
3. Click the remove button ( ) on the Institutional Resources component.
4. Click the Save button.
Communicate Tab 573
Communicate Tab
The Communicate tab provides access to all course communication tools.
The Edit Page hyperlink (located under Communicate) permits you to choose which communication features to make available to your students.
Use the Course Mail to communicate to your students and other faculty or teaching assistants in your course. Read, compose and review sent mail.
Team Files provides a space for student teams to share project files and other documents.
The News and Announcements area allows you to post course announcements, class news, and polls for your students.
Live Chat allows communication online in the modes of today‘s learners – in real time. Participate in peer-to-peer chat reinforcing concepts and building community.
Live Office Hours provides a virtual office including scheduling capabilities and a queue manager to control student access.
Discussion forums are listed and are accessible not only under the Lessons tab, but can be quickly accessed through the Communicate tab.
Click the Add/Edit Links hyperlink to include hyperlinks to specific web pages in the Communicate Links area.
Communicate Tab 574
Course Mail
Students and instructors can use the Course Mail tool to correspond with each other without requiring the use of Internet e-mail accounts. Users can access their Inbox to view, read, and compose messages. Optionally, users can move directly to their inbox to compose a message using the Quick Message option. ANGEL lists the number of messages in the Unread Messages area indicating a total of All messages, System messages, and Personal messages.
All indicates a total of system messages, personal messages, and course messages. Personal indicates the total number of messages that have been sent to the user from another ANGEL user. These messages have been sent outside of a course using the Course Mail nugget from the user‘s Personal Home page. System indicates messages that have been sent to the user by the ANGEL administrator. A system message may be a broadcast message indicating weather closures or specific happenings at your institution.
Touring the Inbox
The Inbox is the focal point for Course Mail which enables a user to send, read, and store all your Mail messages in one view. There are nine main elements to the Inbox as shown in the following figure.
Communicate Tab 575
Number Title Description
1 Preferences Preferences provides the user the ability to select the message format (HTML or plain-text), Font Preference (Arial, Comic Sans, Courier New, Tahoma, Times New Roman or Verdana), Font Color (Black, blue or red), number of messages per page, forward to Internet e-mail option (Do not forward mail, Forward mail and keep as new, Forward mail and mark as read, and Forward mail and delete), and an area for your Email Address (Internet e-mail) to forward your course mail.
Preferences also allow the user to set up Signature Options. The user can elect to use e-mail signatures and also set up course-specific signatures.
ANGEL can automatically spell check your email before sending if this preference is selected.
Privacy Settings allows the user the ability to remove their name from public search so other users cannot search for their name and send course mail from the personal home page.
2 Search Search allows a user to search for mail messages. The search can be by subject, message text, or to whom the mail message has been sent or received.
3 Actions Actions allow the user to Delete selected items, Send to Folder selected items, Mark as Read selected items, Mark as Unread selected items, and Message Read By to see who has read the selected items.
4 Filter Allows the user to select which messages are displayed in the message window. Users can select Show All to display all messages (personal, system and/or courses), Personal to display messages that are marked as personal, System to display messages received from the ANGEL administrator or Course (contains a list of displayed courses).
5 Compose New Message button
Clicking on the Compose New Message button allows the user to create a new mail message.
6 Message area This area shows a list of mail messages. The messages displayed will depend on the Filter selected from the Filter list.
7 Source The source displays to the user from where the message was received (Personal, System or a specific course title).
8 My Folders My Folders area provides an area where a user can use folders to organize their mail messages.
Communicate Tab 576
Number Title Description
9 System Folders System Folders are default folders used to display any saved Drafts, Inbox mail messages, Sent mail messages or Trashed messages.
Message Window
The message window displays the email messages for the active folder. This window contains the following components in the Message Window Menu Bar.
Field Name Icon Definition
Menu
Select messages by those that are unread, read, or with file attachments.
Icon
Designates read and unread messages
Attachment
Messages containing a file attachment
Priority
Designates the urgency of a message with Low, Normal, or High classification
From
Who sent the message
Subject
What the message is about
Source
Personal or Course name (includes section ID if logged in as instructor)
Date
Date and time message sent
You can sort from ascending to descending order by each of the fields. You can also drag a column header, located in the message window, to the blue bar labeled Drag a column header and drop it here to group by that column.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains commands that can be performed within Course Mail. The toolbar commands within the Inbox Messages area include the following.
Communicate Tab 577
Command Definition
Compose New Message button
Compose a course mail message. See section Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message.
Search Search allows a user to search for mail messages. The search can be by subject, message text, or to whom the mail message has been sent or received.
Actions Actions allow the user to Delete selected items, Send to Folder selected items, Mark as Read selected items, Mark as Unread selected items, and Message Read By to see who has read the selected items.
Filter Allows the user to select which messages are displayed in the message window. Users can select Show All to display all messages (personal, system and/or courses), Personal to display messages that are marked as personal, System to display messages received from the ANGEL administrator or Course (contains a list of displayed courses).
Preferences Preferences provides the user the ability to select the message format (HTML or plain-text), Font Preference (Arial, Comic Sans, Courier New, Tahoma, Times New Roman or Verdana), Font Color (Black, blue or red), number of messages per page, forward to Internet e-mail option (Do not forward mail, Forward mail and keep as new, Forward mail and mark as read, and Forward mail and delete), and an area for your Email Address (Internet e-mail) to forward your course mail.
Preferences also allow the user to set up Signature Options. The user can elect to use e-mail signatures and also set up course-specific signatures.
ANGEL can automatically spell check your email before sending if this preference is selected.
Privacy Settings allows the user the ability to remove their name from public search so other users cannot search for their name and send course mail from the personal home page.
Using the Actions Drop-down Box
Clicking on this drop-down box notes the following fields:
Communicate Tab 578
Field Name Definition
Send to Folder Send a message to a System folder or one of your folders that you created under My Folder.
Mark as Read Mark an unread message as read.
Mark as Unread Mark a read message as Unread. These messages always appear in a bold font.
Delete Delete a message. Message is moved to the Trash folder.
Message Read By Check who else has read the message. Messages sent using the Do not disclose recipients option do not display the names of recipients who have and have not read the message.
To use the Actions drop-down:
1. Click the checkbox next to the desired mail message. You may optionally select the checkbox next to the Menu to select all mail messages
2. Select the action from the Actions drop-down list.
3. Click the Go button.
Using the Filter Drop-down Box
Clicking this drop-down box gives you the following fields:
Field Name Definition
Show All Shows all personal messages, course messages, and system messages.
Personal Shows personal email only.
System Shows messages sent by the ANGEL administrator.
Course Shows a list of active courses in which the user is enrolled and gives access messages for the selected course.
To use the Filter drop-down:
1. Select the option from the Filter drop-down list.
2. Click the Go button.
System Folders
The System Folders have been created in ANGEL as the default folders for Drafts, Inbox mail, Sent mail and Trash (deleted mail). The bolded name indicates the folder that is active on your screen.
Communicate Tab 579
Next to each folder in parenthesis is the number of unread messages followed by total number of messages contained in that folder.
Field Name Definition
Drafts Save a draft email message that has not been sent.
Inbox All incoming email messages arrive in this folder first.
Sent Course Mail messages that have been sent are found in this folder.
Trash Messages you wish to delete are contained in the trash folder. To permanently delete, a user must go into trash folder, select messages and delete again.
My Folders
My folders you to create individual folders tailored to your specific storage needs.
Next to each folder in parenthesis is the number of unread messages followed by total number of messages contained in that folder.
The functions you can perform in My Folders include:
For more on this topic see “How to Create Folders in Course Mail” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Field Name Definition
New Create a New Folder to store messages.
Communicate Tab 580
Rename Rename a folder that has been created.
Delete Delete a folder.
Deleting a folder also deletes any email messages in the folder.
Search
Field Name Definition
Search Allows a user to search by a message subject or message text.
Preferences
The Preferences hyperlink located to the right of the Inbox view allows the user to define the message view preferences, signatures, editing options and privacy settings.
For more on this topic see “How to Set Mail Privileges within a Course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
The window is described in greater detail in the following table:
Field Name Definition
Message Preferences Message Format Choose Plain Text or HTML
Communicate Tab 581
Field Name Definition
for how you want to format messages.
Font Preference Arial
Comic Sans MS
Courier New
Tahoma
Times New Roman
Verdana
No. of Messages Per Page
25, 50 or 100
Forward to Internet E-Mail
Do not forward mail
Forward mail and keep as new
Forward mail and mark as read
Forward mail and delete
Email Address Enter an Internet e-mail address where you want the mail forwarded to.
Signature Options Signatures may be customized for each course. Select Use E-Mail Signatures to begin using the signature option. By selecting Use E-Mail Signatures allows the activation of the Use Course-Specific Signatures so the user can be tailored to each individual course as desired. The Inline HTML editor provides the ability for the user to
Editing Options Check the box to automatically check your spelling before you send a message.
Privacy Settings To prevent users who do not share a course with you from sending you Course Mail, check ―Don‘t show my name in public search‖.
You can also remove users from your blocked list. See section Blocking a User for more detail.
Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message
The Compose Message section allows the user to compose and send messages to members of their courses.
Communicate Tab 582
To compose and send a message:
11. Log into your ANGEL course, click the Communicate tab, and click the View Inbox hyperlink. The Inbox appears.
12. Click the Compose New Message button. The compose message window opens.
Communicate Tab 583
The following elements makeup the Compose Message window:
Field Name Definition
Return to Inbox hyperlink
Allows the user to return to the Inbox by clicking on this hyperlink.
To: button
The To: button displays the Select Recipients list box of available recipients to send mail messages. Refer to Selecting and Removing Recipients for more information.
Remove selected recipients button
Allows the user to remove the selected recipients from the To: list.
Subject Enter a subject for the message.
Priority Select message urgency from:
Low
Normal
High
HTML Editor toolbar The HTML Editor toolbar allows you to apply formatting, add images, etc. to your message.
For information regarding how to use the HTML Editor, refer to Appendix I Inline HTML Editor.
Communicate Tab 584
Field Name Definition
Attachments The Attach files hyperlink allows you to add a file attachment to your message.
Message Options Send a copy to each recipient’s Internet e-mail allows you to send a duplicate message outside the ANGEL environment to the recipients' email address.
Send a copy to each recipients mentor if known sends a copy of the email to a known mentor or advisor for the recipient.
Send Button Click this button when you are ready to send the message to selected recipients.
Save Draft Button Click this button to save a draft of your message in the Draft System Folder.
Cancel Button Click this button to delete the message. You lose all information contained in the message.
13. Select the intended recipient(s) from the Select Message Recipients list box, and click the To-> button. The recipient name appears in the To field. Do the same for Cc-> and Bcc-> fields.
Hold the Control key on your keyboard (or the Apple key on a Macintosh) and click to select multiple recipients.
14. Click the OK button to exit the Select Message Recipients window.
15. Type a subject for the message in the Subject field.
16. Type the message in the Message field. Format as necessary using the inline HTML text editor.
17. Attach any files if necessary. (see Adding an Attachment section below)
18. Choose a message Priority. The default is Normal but you can select Low or High.
19. Choose from the message options, if desired. (see Selecting and Removing Recipients below)
20. Click the Send button to send the message to its recipients. Click the Save Draft button to save in the Drafts folder for future editing. Click the Cancel button to delete your message. These three buttons are located at the top and bottom of the message window.
Formatting Text
When composing messages you can use the inline HTML editor to format your message.
Communicate Tab 585
The components of the inline editor from left to right.
Field Name Icon Definition
Collapse Toolbar
Hides the inline editor.
Insert/Edit Macro
Insert or Edit a macro to enhance a message.
Paste
Paste text or picture into the message.
Edit Menu
Click arrow to pull down more toolbar features.
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Paste as plain text
Paste from Word
Find
Replace
Select All
Remove Format
Bold
Add bold text.
Italic
Add italics to text.
Underline
Underline text.
Insert Content Link
Attach ANGEL content such as a survey or quiz to the email.
Insert/Edit Web Link icon
Insert an Internet hyperlink in the message.
Insert/Edit Image
Insert an image or picture into the message.
Insert Equation icon
Insert spreadsheet equation.
Insert Menu
Insert an additional toolbar feature for the following:
HTML Widget
Insert Equation
Communicate Tab 586
Field Name Icon Definition
Special Character
Universal Keyboard
Line
Page Break
Insert/Remove Numbered List
Insert or remove a numbered list.
Insert/Remove Bulleted List
Insert or remove a bulleted list.
Font
Change type of font.
Arial
Comic Sans MS
Courier New
Tahoma
Times New Roman
Verdana
Size
Change size of text.
xx-small
x-small
small
medium
large
x-large
xx-large
Check Spelling
Check spelling in the message.
Source
Add HTML source code.
Adding and Removing Attachments
To attach a file to your course mail message:
6. Click the Attach files hyperlink. The Add Attachments upload window appears.
Communicate Tab 587
7. Click the Select button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
8. Locate and select your attachment file and click the Open button. Click the Add button to select more files to upload.
9. Click the Upload button to upload the files. The uploaded file(s) appears in the Attachments box of the message window.
With the Add Attachments window open, you can check the box next to a file that you have designated for upload and click the Delete button or you can click the Remove button next to the file. If you discover that you need to remove the file after uploading it to your message, you can click the remove hyperlink next to the file name.
10. Proceed with editing or sending the message.
Selecting and Removing Recipients
To select or remove recipients:
5. Within Compose Message, click the To: button. The Select Message Recipients window opens.
Communicate Tab 588
6. Click on the View Section: drop down box to choose All users or Users by individual course. You can also type a name in the Search form to find a user by first or last name.
7. Click on the user name to highlight it and then click the To-> or Cc-> or Bcc-> buttons to add the recipient. The name appears in its respective list box.
You can select multiple names at once by using the CTRL + Click keys. After having selected a recipient, remove the name by clicking on it to highlight it and then clicking on the Remove selected recipients button.
8. After you are satisfied with the recipients that you have selected, click the OK button. The compose message window appears and you see the names listed in the respective list boxes.
If you want to cancel the recipients, click the Cancel button and return to the Compose Message window and the To field will be blank.
Message Options
There are two options for sending messages.
Field Name Definition
Send a copy to each recipient‘s Internet e-mail
If you wish to send a copy of the Course Mail to a recipient‘s Internet e-mail address, check this box.
Send a copy to each recipient‘s mentor if known
If you wish the recipient‘s mentor to have a copy of the Course Mail, check this box.
Communicate Tab 589
Reading and Replying to a Course Mail Message
The Course Mail Read Message section allows the user to read and reply to messages. The Read Message elements as shown in the following figure include:
Message Window
Toolbar
Message Window
The Read Message window displays the email message.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains commands that can be performed within Read Message and includes the following elements:
The following elements makeup the Read and Reply window:
Command Definition
Compose New Message button
Compose a course mail message. See section Composing and Sending a Course Mail Message.
Actions Same as the Inbox more Actions except for the addition of the ―Create a Task‖ option detailed below.
Create a Add a personal task based on the information
Communicate Tab 590
Command Definition
Task contained within the mail message.
Send to Folder
Send a message to a System folder or one of your personal folders that you created under My Folder.
Mark as Unread
Mark a read message as Unread. Unread messages always appear in a bold font.
Delete Delete a message. Message is moved to the Trash folder.
Message Read By
Select the checkbox next to the message to see who has read the message.
Reply button Replies to the sender of the message.
Reply All button Replies to all recipients of the message (within the rights of the user replying – e.g. can‘t reply to an All Campus message).
Forward button Forwards message to a new recipient that you select.
<Previous Next> buttons
Previous / Next – loads the previous and next messages within the current active folder.
Print Opens the Print dialog box to select a printer.
Return to Inbox Allows the user to return to the message inbox.
Communicate Tab 591
Read Course Mail Message
To read a course mail message:
4. Log into your ANGEL course, click the Communicate tab, and click the View Inbox hyperlink. The Inbox appears.
5. Click the hyperlinked name of the sender or the subject of a mail message to display the full message. The mail message appears on the screen.
New/Unread messages appear in bold. Once the message has been opened, it appears non bold.
In the Inbox view, messages with attachments display a paper clip icon located to the left of the message subject.
6. Click the appropriate button to Reply, Reply All, or Forward the course mail message at which point the process is similar to composing a message.
Viewing and Saving an Attachment
To view and save a message attachment:
To view the attachment, click the name of the file attachment hyperlink and the message opens.
To save the attachment to your hard drive, right click on the attachment hyperlink and choose Save Target As. . . . The Save As dialog box opens for the user to save the attachment.
Sending Message to a Folder
To send a message to a folder:
Communicate Tab 592
4. After opening a message to read, go to the More Actions drop down box and choose Send to Folder. Click the Go button. You will see the following dialog box.
You can also send a message to a folder by checking the box next to the message within a folder view and choosing Send to Folder from the More Actions drop down box.
5. Using the drop down box, choose the system or personal folder that you either want to move the message to or copy the message to.
6. Click Continue. The message appears in the folder that you have chosen.
Deleting a Message
There are several ways to delete a message.
In the system or personal folder view, select the checkbox located next to the message and select the Delete action from the Actions: drop-down list.
After the user opens a message to read, delete the message selecting Delete from the Actions: drop-down box and click the Go button.
To permanently delete a message, you must be in the Trash folder view. Select the checkbox located next to the message and click on the Actions drop-down box and choose Delete. A Permanent Delete dialog box opens. Click the Delete button if you want to permanently delete the message from the Course Mail Inbox.
Viewing Who has Read or not Read a Message
Selecting the Message Read By option from the More Actions… drop-down list provides the user with a list of who has read the selected message. To view a list of who has read or not read the mail message perform the following:
7. Click the View Inbox hyperlink.
8. Select the checkbox next to the mail message you want to check.
9. Select Message Read By option from the Actions: drop-down list. Click the Go button. The Message Read By page appears.
Communicate Tab 593
10. Optionally select have not from the List users that drop-down list.
11. Click the Refresh button.
12. To return to course mail, click the Back to mail button.
Sorting and Viewing Messages
The Course Mail Inbox gives you a powerful tool to sort and view your messages.
Sorting by Column Headers
If you want to group Course Mail by column, you can drag a column header to the blue subject bar. A spinning Loading icon is the signal that the sorting is beginning and you have successfully moved the column into the new position.
The figure below shows the blue bar before dragging the subject column to the blue subject bar.
The figure below shows the blue bar after dragging the subject column. Note that messages are grouped by Subject.
To remove a grouping, drag the column on the blue bar, in this example Subject, from the blue bar back to one of the column headers.
Selecting Messages from My Folders
To select messages from the My Folders view, choose the folder containing the messages that you want to select.
Communicate Tab 594
3. Within a folder view, click the Menu drop down box and the following window opens.
4. When the user clicks on one of the three options, the active folder view shows only those messages relevant to the command selected.
Select All unread messages. Selects all Unread Messages in the currently active folder.
Select All read messages. Selects all Read messages in the current folder.
Select all With Files. Selects all messages with a file attached.
Showing Messages by Personal or Course
To further sort and group messages, click the Filter: drop down box and choose either Show All, Personal, System or course mail designated by the Course Name.
Working with Inbox Folders
The Inbox folders allow users to store Course Mail messages. Aside from the default System Folders, users can create, rename, and delete personal folders in the My Folders section.
Creating a Folder
To create a folder:
4. Click the down arrow next to My Folders. Choose New and the following window appears.
5. Type the name of the new folder and choose Save.
You can type up to 64 characters for a folder name.
6. The new folder appears under the My Folders blue bar in alphabetical order.
Communicate Tab 595
Renaming a Folder
To rename a folder:
6. Click the drop down arrow next to My Folders. Choose Rename. You see the following window.
7. Click the drop down arrow under Choose folder to rename: and choose the folder to rename.
8. Type the new name for the folder.
9. Click the Rename button.
10. The renamed folder appears under the My Folders blue bar.
Deleting a Folder
To delete a folder:
5. Click the drop down arrow next to My Folders. Choose Delete. You see the following window.
6. Choose the folder to delete.
7. Click the Delete button.
8. The deleted folder is removed from My Folders.
Deleting a folder deletes all message contained within the folder.
Searching a Folder
To search a folder:
5. Choose the system or personal folder that you want to search.
6. Type the subject of the message in the Search form.
Communicate Tab 596
7. Click Search button.
8. The message window shows the search results.
Roster
The Roster tool allows students and instructors to view a list of course participants and teams.
Course Roster
The Course Roster section provides faculty and student email addresses, user profiles, learner profiles, and participant pictures, as well as, team member information. To access Course Roster, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Communicate tab, and click the Course Roster hyperlink. The People page appears.
Field Name Definition
Show Pictures/Hide Pictures
A hyperlink that either shows pictures or hide pictures depending on which one is visible.
Communicate Tab 597
Field Name Definition
Roster Search Allows the user to search the roster for a course participant.
E-mail The email address hyperlink opens with the default email utility and the email address in the To field.
User profile The user profile hyperlink displays detailed information of the user selected.
View: Members Teams
The View: Members Teams hyperlinks allow the user to view the People page displaying course participants, or the Course Teams displaying all of the teams.
User Profile
The User Profile hyperlink, located underneath the user‘s name, directs you to information concerning the user. My Profile information of the user is available only if the user has allowed it to be viewable. The User Profile also contains any bookmarks that user has created and made viewable.
My Bookmarks
Bookmarks allow you to add your favorite webpage links to your Profile for easy access and to sort them by category. You may set permissions on each bookmark to optionally allow others to use the bookmark as well.
To add a bookmark:
1. Click the Add/Edit Links hyperlink. The Bookmarks page appears.
2. Click the Add a Bookmark hyperlink. The Bookmark Editor appears.
Communicate Tab 598
Field Name Definition
Title The Title field contains the bookmark name.
URL The fully qualified URL of the webpage you want to bookmark.
Description Extended description of the webpage.
Target You may specify a valid browser window or frame target name in the Target field to cause the bookmark to open in a different browser window or frame. For example, to force the bookmark to open in a new browser window, type _blank in the Target field.
Category The Category area allows you to organize your Bookmarks.
Viewable By The Viewable By drop-down list allows you to select who you allow to view your bookmarks.
From the Bookmark Editor page:
1. Type the bookmark name in the Title field.
2. Type the bookmark web address in the URL field.
Optionally provide a description for the bookmark in the Description field.
3. Select from the Category drop-down list or add a category. To add a category select the Other button and add the new name of your category.
4. Select an alternate user group from the Viewable By drop-down list to allow the specified user group to view your bookmark. Selecting Everyone from the Viewable By drop-down menu potentially allows anyone (including unauthenticated users) to view the bookmark.
5. Click the Save button.
Communicate Tab 599
Course Enrollment
The Course Enrollment area lists the course(s) in which the user is enrolled, the roll within the course, the rights within the course (this is a numeric value), and any other settings as noted by the system.
Group Enrollment
The Group Enrollment area lists any group(s) in which the user is a member as well as the roll within the group, rights and other settings as noted by the system.
The name of the course or group is a hyperlink that provides access to the actual course. What is viewable within the course is based on the course settings.
Teams
Selecting the Teams hyperlink displays the Course Teams roster. From this page you can access the team roster, edit the roster or edit the teams. Refer to the sections of this document titled Roster Editor and Team Editor for more details.
Team Files
The Team Files section allows you to upload, download, rename, copy, move, zip, manage or delete files associated with a content item. This feature may be particularly useful when embedding files into content items. For example, if you create a page of text that also includes an image, you can upload the image file as an associated file. Refer to the section of this document titled Associated File Manager for more details.
Team Projects
Team Projects area provides an HTML page listing the project(s) specifications for a particular team. In order to view the Team Projects nugget it is necessary to create a special default.htm page under the Team Files area.
For more on this topic see “How to Set Up Team Projects” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
To create the team project page:
Communicate Tab 600
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Communicate tab.
2. Click on the hyperlinked name of the desired team in the Team Files area.
3. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located in the upper left toolbar).
4. Click the Create a file hyperlink. The Create a File page appears.
5. Type the file name default.htm in the File Name field.
6. Type specific comments, instructions, etc. in the File Contents field.
7. Click the OK button. The hyperlink Team n Project appears in the Team Projects area. Clicking on the hyperlink name displays the comments, instructions, etc. that you have specified in the default.htm page.
News and Events
The News and Events section provides communication tools that alert the student of important announcements, news concerning the course and gathering opinions through course polls.
Announcements
The Announcements tool allows course editors to create course announcements that are displayed on the course welcome page and on the student‘s personal page (Home).
For more on this topic see “How to Post an Announcement” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
To access Announcements, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Communicate tab, and click the Announcements hyperlink. The Announcement Editor page appears.
Field Name Definition
Add Announcement The Add Announcement hyperlink allows you to add an announcement.
User The User drop-down list allows you to view announcements for the user type you select.
View: Past Present Future All
The View hyperlinks allow you to select what announcements to view.
Sort: Ascending Descending
The Sort hyperlink allows you to select the order in which the announcements are viewed.
Add a Course Announcement
From the Announcement Editor page, click the Add Announcement hyperlink. The Announcement Editor Announcement Settings form appears.
Communicate Tab 601
Field Name Definition
Announcement Use the Announcement field to specify the text that should
appear as the announcement.
Start Date The Start Date setting specifies the date on and after which the item should be displayed. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. The Start Date also determines the order in which items appear.
End Date The End Date setting specifies the date on which the item should no longer be displayed.
Sequence The Sequence setting can be used to explicitly specify the order in which items with the same start date should be displayed.
User The User setting specifies the User or Team to which the item applies. The special setting Everyone indicates the item applies to all users within the course, group or area.
From the Announcement Editor Announcement Settings form:
1. Type your announcement into the Announcement text box
2. Use the drop-down menus to designate a Start Date and an End Date for the announcement to be displayed.
3. Use the Sequence drop-down menu to determine the display order when multiple announcements are shown simultaneously.
Communicate Tab 602
4. Click the Save button. Your announcement now appears on the Announcement Editor and the Course Announcements screen.
Edit/Delete a Course Announcement
To modify or to delete an announcement, use the Edit and Delete buttons (located to the left of your announcement on the Announcement Editor screen).
News
The News tool allows course editors to create course news articles. Roster members can view course news articles by visiting a read-only version of the News tool.
To access News, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Communicate tab, and click the News hyperlink. The News Editor page appears.
Field Name Definition
Add Article The Add Article hyperlink allows you to add an article.
User The User drop-down list allows you to view articles added for the user type you select.
View: Past Present Future All
The View hyperlinks allow you to select what articles to view.
Display: Headlines Abstracts Stories
The Display hyperlink allows you to select the type of news article to view.
Add a News Article
From the News Editor page, click the Add Article hyperlink. The News Editor News Settings page appears.
Communicate Tab 603
Field Name Definition
Headline Use the Headline field to specify the text that should appear as the title of the story.
Story Use the Story field to specify the full text of the story.
Abstract Use the Abstract field to specify a brief one or two line summary of the story.
Author The Author field identifies the author of the story.
Source The Source field identifies the source of the story.
Communicate Tab 604
Field Name Definition
Copyright The Copyright field specifies copyright information for the story.
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. The Start Date also determines the order in which items appear.
End Date The End Date setting specifies the date on which the item should no longer be displayed.
Sequence The Sequence setting can be used to explicitly specify the order in which items with the same start date should be displayed.
Top Story Setting Top Story to "Yes" indicates that it should be listed in the My News section of enrolled users for section-specific articles and in the Top Stories section for public articles.
User The User setting specifies the User or Team to which the item applies. The special setting Everyone indicates the item applies to all users within the course, group or area.
From the News Editor News Settings form:
1. Type a title for the news article in the Headline field.
2. Type the text for the news article in the Story text box.
3. Optionally provide an abstract for the news article and/or provide the name of the author, source of the article, and copyright.
Type ―©‖ (without the quotes) in the Copyright text field to display the copyright symbol (©) inline with your copyright information. You may optionally type ―®‖ (without the quotes) to display a registered symbol (®) or ―™‖ (without the quotes) to display a trademark symbol (™).
4. Use the drop-down menus to designate a Start Date and an End Date for the article to be displayed.
5. Use the Sequence drop-down menu to determine the display order when multiple news articles are shown simultaneously.
6. Select Yes from the Top Story drop-down menu to designate the news article as a top story. Top story news articles appear in the My News nugget (if enabled) of the student‘s personal page (Home).
7. Click the Save button.
To preview news articles as seen by students, preview the course using the User Preview Tool (Tools > User Preview Tool), and return to the News tool. For information on using the User Preview Tool, see the User Preview Tool section of this document.
Communicate Tab 605
Edit/Delete a News Article
To modify or to delete a news article, use the Edit and Delete buttons (located to the left of the news article on the News Editor screen).
Polls
The Polls tool allows course editors to create course poll questions that are displayed on the course welcome page and on the student‘s personal page (Home).
To access Polls, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Communicate tab, and click the Polls hyperlink. The Quick Poll Editor page appears.
Field Name Definition
Add Question Provides access to the Question Editor-+.
View: Past Present Future All
The View hyperlinks allow you to select what articles to view.
Sort: Ascending Descending
The Sort hyperlink allows you to select the order in which the polls are viewed.
Communicate Tab 606
Add a Poll Question
From the Quick Poll Editor page, click the Add Question hyperlink. The Question Editor General Settings page appears.
Field Name Definition
Question Use the Question field to specify the text that should appear as the main question text.
Feedback Use the Feedback field to specify feedback text that should appear when a user has submitted a response to this
Communicate Tab 607
Field Name Definition
question. You can use the special token %BARGRAPH% to display summary statistics. HTML is allowed, but for best results don't use elements that change the size of text.
List Type Use the List Type field to specify feedback text that should appear when a user has submitted a response to this question. HTML is allowed, but for best results don't use elements that change the size of text.
List Items The List Items field allows you to type a list of choices or list items to be provided when the question is presented. For all other control types, each choice is a selectable item.
Input Type The Input Type field identifies what type of control to use for user input of a text entry.
Input Label The Input Label field identifies what type of control to use for user input of a text entry.
Input Attributes Use the Input Attributes field to specify any additional attributes for the text box or text area.
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. The Start Date also determines the order in which items appear.
End Date The End Date setting specifies the date on which the item should no longer be displayed.
Sequence The Sequence setting can be used to explicitly specify the order in which items with the same start date should be displayed.
From the Question Editor General Settings form:
1. Type a poll question in the Question field.
2. Optionally provide feedback text in the Feedback field. This text is made viewable to the user upon their submission of the poll question
3. To create a poll question with a list of choices, select a format for the choice options from the List Type drop-down menu and type each choice in a List Items field.
4. To create an open-ended poll question, disregard the List Settings section of the editor (step 3 above), select an input field format from the Type drop-down menu. You may optionally provide a label for the input field in the Label field.
Optionally type textbox or text area name=value attributes (HTML) in the Attributes field to modify the size, default value, character limit for the input field.
Communicate Tab 608
For example, to alter the height of a text area, type ―rows=X‖ (without quotes, where X equals the number of rows) in the Attributes field. For more information on HTML attributes, see an HTML reference guide.
5. Use the drop-down menus to designate a Start Date and an End Date for the poll to be displayed.
6. Use the Sequence drop-down menu to determine the display order when multiple poll questions are shown simultaneously.
Multiple course polls with overlapping Start and End dates are displayed as multiple questions for a single poll (survey). Upon submission, both responses and non-responses are submitted for all visible poll questions for the course. Users are not given an opportunity to resubmit unanswered poll questions.
7. Click the Save button.
To preview poll questions as seen by students, exit and re-enter the course. The course poll questions appear on the course welcome page. Students may also view/submit course polls from a non-editable version of the Polls tool located on the Communicate page.
Edit/Delete a Poll Question
To edit or to delete a poll question, use the Edit and Delete buttons (located to the left of the poll question on the Quick Poll Editor screen).
View Summary or Detailed Report
To view a summary or detailed report of user responses, click the Summary or Details hyperlink (located below the poll question on the Quick Poll Editor screen).
Export a Poll Question
To export results of a poll question as a tab-delimited file, click the Export hyperlink.
Communicate Tab 609
Live Chat
The Live Chat section provides a synchronous communication vehicle for common uses such as exam review, team meetings, and more.
Live Chats Editor
The Live Chats editor allows users to add, edit and delete a chat session. The Live Chats editor can be accessed by clicking the Edit hyperlink located in the Live Chat title bar (on the Communicate page).
For more on this topic see “How to Set Up a Live Chat” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Communicate Tab 610
Add a Live Chat Session
The Add a Live Chat tool allows you to create a live chat session that is displayed on the Communicate page under the Live Chat title bar.
Field Name Definition
Name Specifies the name of the chat room which appears as the link.
Description Specifies an extended description of the room to help describe its purpose.
Tracking If set to "ON", all posted messages are saved so that they may be reviewed in the chat logs.
Team Specifies the name of the team.
Viewable By Specifies the minimum rights that a user must have in order to access the related room.
Start Date Selecting a Start Date prevents the item from being displayed until the specified date. This can be useful if you want to enter items ahead of time, but you do not want them displayed until a specific date. The Start Date also determines the order in which items appear.
End Date The End Date setting specifies the date on which the item should no longer be displayed.
From the Live Chats editor page:
1. Click the Add a Live Chat hyperlink. The Live Chat Editor Live Chat Settings page appears.
2. Type a name in the Name field.
3. Type a description in the Description field.
4. Select whether tracking is on or off from the Tracking drop-down list.
Communicate Tab 611
5. Select a team from the Team drop-down list.
6. Select who can view the chat session from the Viewable By drop-down list.
7. Use the drop-down menus to designate a Start Date and an End Date for the poll to be displayed.
8. Click the Save button. The chat session is saved and displays under the Live Chat title bar.
Edit/Delete a Live Chat Session
To edit or to delete a scheduled live chat session, use the Edit and Delete buttons (located to the left of the live chat session on the Live Chat Editor Live Chat Settings screen).
View Logs
1. Click the View Logs hyperlink located below the live chat session. The Chat with your classmates page appears.
2. Select a start date/time from the Start Date drop-down menus to limit or expand the number of logs displayed. The live chat sessions are displayed.
3. Click the Go button.
Communicate Tab 612
Clear Logs
1. Click the Clear Logs hyperlink located below the live chat session. The Clear Chat Log page displays.
2. Click the OK button. All log entries are cleared.
Desktop Sharing
Desktop sharing allows you to demonstrate and share any desktop application, such as Microsoft® Suite products or tutorial software provided by textbook publishers. Interact with individuals, groups, or teams. Desktop Sharing is a great way to work on projects together. You can view online users and participate in private conversations as applications are shared.
Desktop Sharing requires the presenter‘s computer must have .NET 1.1 or later installed. Information regarding the installation of .NET 1.1 or later is available from the Microsoft Corporation (http://www.microsoft.com/en/us/default.aspx).
Using Desktop Sharing
Before you begin your desktop sharing, you are required to install the desktop sharing application. ANGEL® 7.3 walks you through the set-up process, but you want to allow time before your presentation to complete the set-up.
Communicate Tab 613
Desktop Sharing Set-up
To set up your desktop sharing application:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Communicate tab.
2. Add a Live Chat according to the instructions under the section titled Live Chats Editor.
3. Type your Live Chat and click on the Desktop Sharing button.
4. Click the Present to this room hyperlink. The One-Click Install window opens.
Communicate Tab 614
5. Click the Automatic Install hyperlink. The Security Warning page appears.
6. Select I understand the security risk and wish to continue option. Click the Next> button. The Welcome….. page appears.
Communicate Tab 615
7. Click the Next> button. The Ready to Install the Program page appears.
8. Click the Install button. The installation begins and may take a few minutes. When the installation is complete the InstallShield Wizard Complete page appears.
Communicate Tab 616
9. Click the Finish button. You are asked if you want to start the ANGEL® 7.3 Desktop Sharing now, click Yes if you want to begin, click No if you want to exit.
Desktop Presentation
To begin sharing your desktop:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Communicate tab.
2. Click the hyperlink name of the Live Chat you are using for your desktop sharing.
3. Click the Desktop Sharing button.
4. Click the Present to this room hyperlink. The desktop sharing window appears.
Communicate Tab 617
The following information displays when you begin your desktop sharing:
You are currently sharing your desktop with this room. By default, users can see your entire desktop. You may change sharing options such as how much users may view by right-clicking the desktop sharing icon in your system tray
( ). You may stop sharing at any time by right-clicking the desktop sharing icon in your system tray, then selecting "Exit". You may also stop sharing by closing this window. Please note that viewers will by default be watching this presentation from a window the same size as the dotted box surrounding this text. Viewers may scroll to see your entire screen, but it may be helpful to reduce the size of the presentation beforehand so it will fit into the box. You may check your viewers' screen resolutions and adjust the size of this presentation from the Options tab. Note that you must apply that setting before starting the presentation. To give viewers the best view of your desktop, you may click the full screen icon ( ) next to the Desktop Sharing Tab. Note that viewers cannot see or use chat while in full screen mode. To bring viewers out of full screen mode, you may click "Exit Full screen Mode " from the upper-left hand corner of the screen.
5. Follow the information provided on the sharing window to display your desktop to your students.
Communicate Tab 618
Whiteboard
The Whiteboard adds another dimension to your classroom. Augment communication and creativity, illustrate and share imagery and complex concepts with students, teams, or the learning community.
Whiteboard Tools
Tool Description
Determines the fill color and the line color. The box in the background determines the fill color. The box in the foreground determines the line color.
Determines the thickness of a line. Click on the line thickness you want to use.
Select tool. Allows you to select an item on the whiteboard.
Text tool. Allows you to add text to the whiteboard.
Image tool. Allows you to add an image to the whiteboard.
Line tool. Allows you to add lines to the whiteboard.
Polyline tool. Allows you to draw and connect lines similar to
Communicate Tab 619
pen tools in graphics programs.
Freehand tool. Allows you to draw lines freehand.
Rectangle tool. Allows you to draw a rectangle.
Ellipse tool. Allows you to draw ellipses.
Polygon tool. Allow you to draw polygons.
Bring to front and send to back tools.
Delete, clear and lock tools. Allows you to delete selected items, clear the entire whiteboard and lock the whiteboard.
Using the Whiteboard
To access the whiteboard:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Communicate tab.
2. Click on the hyperlink name of the Live Chat you want to use with the whiteboard.
3. Click the Whiteboard button. The Whiteboard window appears.
4. Click on any of the whiteboard tools and place them in the field below the toolbar.
Live Office Hours
The Live Office Hours section provides the date and time the instructor is online for a chat session. The course editor can add or edit the live office hours by clicking the Edit hyperlink located in the Live Office Hours title bar (on the Communicate page). The Your Office Hours Schedule for this Course page appears.
Communicate Tab 620
Field Name Definition
Beginning Specifies the beginning date of the event.
Ending Specifies the ending date of the event.
Time Specifies the start time of the event.
Duration Specifies how long the event lasts.
Weekly Specifies the days and the weekly frequency of the event.
Monthly Specifies the monthly frequency of the event.
Add a Live Office Hours Session
1. Use the drop-down menus to designate a Beginning, Ending, Time and Duration for the live office hour session.
2. Select either Weekly or Monthly intervals. Then select the day and type the frequency.
3. Click the Save button. The Calendar page displays with the Live Office Hours session scheduled.
Communicate Tab 621
Edit a Live Office Hours Session
Click the Edit hyperlink located in the Live Office Hours title bar (on the Communicate page). The Your Office Hours Schedule for this Course page appears. Select or type your changes and click the Save button. The Calendar page displays with your new Live Office Hours session scheduled.
Delete a Live Office Hours Session
To delete a scheduled Live Office Hour session, refer to the section of this document titled Calendar for more details.
Discussion Forums
The Discussion Forums section contains a list of all discussion forums in the course providing easy access to specific topics without navigating the Lessons folder structure. The Discussion Forums section is only visible if at least one discussion forum exists in the course. For information on creating and using discussion forums, see the Add a Discussion Forum section under the Lessons tab of this document.
To subscribe to a Discussion Forum, the user must have an email address to which email notification can be sent. When a user subscribes to a discussion forum, they receive an email notification of any new posts to the forum to which they have subscribed.
A user can subscribe to a discussion forum by clicking the Subscribe hyperlink or by clicking on the hyperlink name of the discussion forum. If the user clicks the discussion forum name, the user is able to subscribe under the Utilities hyperlink. The utilities menu also provides a Print Forum option for the user.
Communicate Links
The Communicate Links section allows course editors to create links to external web-based tools or resources for use by students or instructors. Links can be made available to the entire class or specific user based on course rights.
Communicate Tab 622
To access Communicate Links, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Communicate tab, and click the Add/Edit Links hyperlink. The Communicate Links page appears.
Add a Link
From the Communicate Links page, click the Add a Link hyperlink. The Communicate Link Editor Link Settings page appears.
Field Name Definition
Title Specifies the title that you want to appear as the link text. This is the text the users click to go to the specified URL.
URL Specifies the fully qualified URL of the page you want to display. Usually this starts with http://.
Description Specifies an extended description of the page or resource that the URL references. This text appears after the Title text and is not hyperlinked.
Target Specifies the target frame or window in which the link should be opened. The default is _self which causes the page which the URL references to replace the page containing the link.
Viewable By Specifies the minimum rights that a user must have in order to view the related bookmark.
Communicate Tab 623
From the Communicate Link Editor Link Settings form:
1. Type a title for the link in the Title textbox.
2. Type a fully qualified web address in the URL textbox.
3. Optionally provide a link description in the Description field.
4. Optionally type an HTML formatted target name in the Target field to specify the link to display in a particular browser window. For example type ―_blank‖ (without the quotes) in the Target field to force the link to open in a new window.
5. Optionally select a category name from the Category drop-down menu. To create a new category, click the Other button to provide the new category name.
6. Optionally restrict viewable access to the link by selecting a course rights level from the Viewable By drop-down menu.
7. Click the Save button.
Edit/Delete a Communicate Link
To edit an existing Communicate link, click the Edit button located next to the tool link. To delete an existing link, click the Delete button located next to the link item.
Report Tab 624
Report Tab
The Report tab provides a deeper insight into student activities and progress. It provides simple options to gather, view, share, save, or take action on the wealth of course, team, or student information at your fingertips.
Reports Console Tour
Go to the Reports Console by logging into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Report tab and the following window will appear.
Report Settings Tab
In the Report Settings tab, there are three main areas:
Choose Report
Configure Report
Command Toolbar
Choose Report
Field Definition
Category Allows the user to choose from seven categories:
Learner Profile
WhoDunIt
Class
Content
Report Tab 625
Field Definition
Grades
Milestones
Learning Outcomes
Report Allows the user to choose from up to thirteen types of reports. The type of report will depend on the Category selected.
User(s) Category and Report data are gathered from this chosen user.
Next icon I allows the user to go to the next report and/or the next user.
Configure Report
Field Definition
Starting Allows the user to choose the start date of the report. You can do this from the pull-down menu or the calendar icon next to it.
Ending before Allows the user to choose the ending date of the report. You can do this from the pull-down menu or the calendar icon next to it.
Select report view Choose from three views:
Chart
Drill Down
Table
Collapse You can collapse the Starting and Ending before fields to allow for more room in Report Settings.
Report Tab 626
Command Toolbar
Command Description
Run After you choose and configure the type of report that you want to generate, click the Run command.
Print Preview An Adobe Acrobat PDF preview of the report is launched.
Send Report Attaches the report to course mail. Report is saved in PDF format.
Export Allows you to save a copy of the report in one of the following formats:
HTML
CSV
Save Save report to the Saved Reports tab.
Report Tab 627
Saved Reports Tab
Report Tab 628
Saved Reports allows you to do three main functions:
Function Definition
View Saved Reports Allows you to view a list of saved reports.
Run last report Run the previous saved report.
Run next report Run the next saved report.
You can also click the Collapse icon to remove the View Saved Reports window.
Running Reports
ANGEL® 7.3‘s Reports Console presents a wealth of data-mining opportunities in one central location. This allows instructors the flexibility with a full range of report options in a simple console interface that makes selecting components easy. You can track all aspects of an individual learner, grades, milestone, or specific content with the Report Console.
Running the Learner Profile Report Category
The Learner Profile gives instructors the ability to accurately access each student‘s total performance in one location. This tool greatly reduces the amount of time spent accessing student work and participation, provides comprehensive student information and relates each student‘s performance to the class as a whole.
For more on this topic see “How to Check Student Activity Within a Course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Available Learner Profile Report Data
Select Data Description
Activity Logs Provides access to a student‘s activity in a course. Activity can include login/logout information and content item accessed if tracking is turned on for the item.
Attendance Provides attendance status. Used in conjunction with the Attendance Component.
Chat Sessions Provides information on the total number of chat sessions for the user and the date of the chat.
Forum Posts Provides the name of the discussion forum and the number of posts made to the forum.
Report Tab 629
Select Data Description
Grade book Grades Provides information on the individual student grades as well as the course average for each grade book assignment.
Instructor Notes Provides a list of notes that have been added under the WhoDunIt report.
Logons Provides the dates and total number of logons to the course.
Mail from User Provides the dates and total number of messages sent by the user.
Mail to User Provides the dates and total number of messages sent to the user.
Milestones Provides the dates of the milestone and indicates if the milestone is pending, due or completed.
Performance against objectives
Provides data showing progress of a class or student against the stated objective.
Performance against standards
Provides data showing progress of a class or student against the stated standard.
Submissions Provides dates and total number of submissions.
Using the Learner Prof ile Category
To use the Learner Profile:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Report tab.
2. Select the Report Settings tab.
3. Select Learner Profile in the Category pull down list.
4. Select the report data you wish to display from the Report pull down list.
5. From the User(s) section, select the user‘s name from the drop-down list.
As you change the Category or Report data, the reports console automatically updates providing the requested report.
6. Customize the report by changing the Starting and Ending before fields.
7. Select report view.
8. Click the Run button to run the report.
Running the Grades Report Category
The Grades report provides a comprehensive view of student grades in one location.
Report Tab 630
Available Grades Report Data
Select Data Description
Student Grades Provides a list of grades for the selected student.
To use the Grades report:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Report tab.
2. Select the Report Settings tab.
3. Select the Grades option from the Category pull down list.
4. Select the report data you wish to display from the Report pull down list.
5. From the User(s) section, select the user‘s name from the drop-down list.
6. Select report view.
7. Click the Run button to run the report.
Running the Milestones Report Category
ANGEL® 7.3‘s milestone feature lets you specify assignment and due dates for key course objectives and displays them automatically on the course calendar. You can review each learner‘s milestone report and run a missed milestone report to reveal students who may be falling behind or to identify those who may need help.
Available Milestones Report Data
Select Data Description
Milestones Provides a display of milestones indicating the assigned, due, and completion date.
To use the Milestones report:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Report tab.
2. Select the Report Settings tab.
3. Select the Milestones option from the Category pull down list.
4. Select the report data you wish to display from the Report pull down list.
5. From the User(s) section, select the user‘s name from the drop-down list.
6. Select report view.
7. Click the Run button to run the report.
Running a Print Preview
After you run a report, you can click the Print Preview button to either view a PDF version of the report or save a PDF version to your hard drive.
Report Tab 631
Sending a Report
After running a report, you can click the Send Report button to send the PDF version of the report to any course students or faculty using Course Mail. The report attaches to a course mail allowing the user to type information concerning the report in the mail message.
Exporting a Report
Export a report:
1. Click the Export button and the Export report window will open.
2. Click the Export report to drop-down list and click on one of three versions for your report:
HTML
CSV
3. Click the Export button and a File Download dialogue box will open and give you the option of opening the document or saving it to your hard drive.
Saving a Report
Export a report by doing the following:
1. Click the Save button and the Save Report window will open.
2. Type the name of the report in the Enter report name field.
3. Click the Save button and the following window will appear showing that the report was saved successfully.
4. The saved report can be found under the Saved Reports tab.
Report Tab 632
Viewing Saved Reports
Saved Reports contains a list of any reports you have saved. To view your saved reports locate the report name from the View Saved Reports console.
Report Tab 633
Click the drop-down box next to the saved report and choose Run to run the report, Delete to delete the report from the list, or Settings to modify the report.
To Run the last report, click the Run last report button. To run the next report, click the Run next report button.
Automate Tab 634
Automate Tab
The Agent Technology located on the Automate tab support personalized learning paths and individual teaching styles while fostering enhanced student interactions and improved outcomes. Agents identify at-risk learners as well as student achievements and milestones. Instructors can easily tailor instructions with dynamic content availability that supports self-paced study, problem-based learning and conditional material release.
Agents Console
The Agents Console allows the instructor to add agents that run on a scheduled basis or upon request; agents that run when a user views, takes, submits or reviews a content item; or an agent that runs when a user accesses specific areas within the ANGEL® 7.3 environment.
Agent Console Fields
Field Description
Title Name of the Agent
Category Agents may be:
On Demand – Must be manually run when needed
Scheduled – Run automatically as per a schedule
Content – Run when a user interacts with specified content items
Event – Run when a user enters or exits the course, or sends an email
Type Recurring
One Time – Agent will run once
On View – Agent will run once a selected item is viewed by a user
On Review – Agent will run when the selected item is reviewed
On Grade – Agent will run when item is graded
On Submit – Agent will run when item is submitted
On Take – Agent will run when a quiz, survey, or assessment is taken
Enter Course – Agent runs when a user enters the course
Exit Course – Agent runs when a user exits the course
Automate Tab 635
Field Description
Send Course Mail – Agent will run when an email is sent
N/A – no Type applicable
Last Status Shows the status for the last time the Agent was run:
Successful – Agent executed successfully
Processing – Agent is currently running
Error – Agent failed to execute
N/A – Agent has no status
Last Run Date and Time Agent was last run
Next Run Date and Time Agent is scheduled to next run
Scheduled Agent
Scheduled Agents run on a scheduled basis. As the instructor you can set up an on demand, specific date, daily, weekly or monthly schedule of actions to retrieve course or student data.
For more on this topic see “How to Automate Sending an Email to Students Who Have Not Logged onto a Course within a Specified Time Period” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Automate Tab 636
Create a Scheduled Agent
To create a scheduled agent:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Automate tab. The Agents Console appears.
2. Click the Add New Agent button. The Create Agent Step 1 of 3: Choose Agent Type page appears.
3. In the Name your Agent text field, type a meaningful name for the agent you are creating
4. Select the Scheduled Agent option.
5. Select the schedule option from the Choose Schedule section.
6. Click the Next button under the Agent Summary to continue to Step 2 of 3: Configure Users and Conditions where user conditions are selected.
7. Type the name for the Name Section (optional). By default, All Users is pre-defined in the text field.
8. Select your users from the User Selection Properties section.
Automate Tab 637
Field Description
Select Users Any User
Specific Users – allows you to specify which user(s) this Agent will monitor.
Rights Filter Any Rights
Specific Rights – allows you to specify which rights the user must have to be included in the user selection.
Team Filter Any Team
Specific Teams – allows you to specify which team memberships the users must have to be included in the user selection.
9. Select any conditions from the User Selection Conditions drop-down list. Ask ―Under what conditions should the users selected above be included in this agent?‖ to determine the condition that you will select.
10. Click the Next button to continue to Step 3 of 3: Configure Actions.
11. Select an action from the Choose Action Type… drop-down list. Click the Action descriptions hyperlink to view a brief description of the actions. A complete list of the action descriptions is under the section of this document titled Actions.
Automate Tab 638
12. Configure the selected action by completing the specified fields in the action. The fields to be completed vary based on the action. When finished configuring the action click the Next button.
13. Review or edit the completed agent.
If you want to Then
Complete the agent Click the Save button
Edit any part of the agent
Click the hyperlink name of the section you want to edit. User Selection and Action areas have a drop-down list asking if you want to Edit, Copy or Delete the user selection or action.
Changing the Agent Type clears all User Filter and Action settings.
14. Click the Save button when complete.
Content Agent
Content Agents run when a user views, takes, submits or reviews a content item.
For more on this topic see “How to conditionally release content using an agent” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Automate Tab 639
Creating a Content Agent
To create a content agent:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Automate tab. The Agents Console appears.
2. Click the Add New Agent button. The Create Agent Step 1 of 3: Choose Agent Type page appears.
3. In the Name your Agent text field, type a meaningful name for the agent you are creating
4. Select the Content Agent option.
5. Select the content item by clicking the Choose Lessons hyperlink. Select the lesson type from the Lesson Type drop-down list. Select the any xxx or specific xxx option to specify any content type or a specific content item.
Automate Tab 640
6. Click the Add button to add the content item.
7. Select the event that will trigger the agent to run from the drop-down list.
8. Click the Next button under the Agent Summary to continue to Step 2 of 3: Configure Users and Conditions where user conditions are selected.
9. Type the name for the Name Section (optional). By default, All Users is pre-defined in the text field.
10. Select your users from the User Selection Properties section.
Field Description
Select Users Any User
Specific Users – allows you to specify which user(s) this Agent will monitor.
Rights Filter Any Rights
Specific Rights – allows you to specify which rights the user must have to be included in the user selection.
Team Filter Any Team
Specific Teams – allows you to specify which team memberships the users must have to be included in the user selection.
Automate Tab 641
11. Select any conditions from the User Selection Conditions drop-down list. Ask ―Under what conditions should the users selected above be included in this agent?‖ to determine the condition that you will select.
12. Click the Next button to continue to Step 3 of 3: Configure Actions.
13. Select an action from the Choose Action Type… drop-down list. Click the Action descriptions hyperlink to view a brief description of the actions. A complete list of the action descriptions is under the section of this document titled Actions.
14. Configure the selected action by completing the specified fields in the action. The fields to be completed vary based on the action. When finished configuring the action click the Next button.
15. Review or edit the completed agent.
If you want to Then
Complete the agent Click the Save button
Edit any part of the agent Click the hyperlink name of the section you want to edit. User Selection and Action areas have a drop-down list asking if you want to Edit, Copy or Delete the user selection or action.
Changing the Agent Type clears all User Filter and Action settings.
16. Click the Save button when complete.
Automate Tab 642
Example of Content Agent Use
The Content Agent can be used to set up an action on any type of content item. Many instructors use this agent to release content as a student progresses through a course instead of having all the content available to the student from the beginning.
For more on this topic see “How to post a grade for a survey using an automated Agent” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
The scenario that we use is to release the next lesson folder based on a student assessment grade.
To set up a content agent:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Automate tab. Click the Add New Agent hyperlink.
2. Type a name for your agent in the Name your Agent text field. Example: Release Lesson 2 based on score from Assessment 1.
Automate Tab 643
4. Type a title for the agent in the Title field. Example: Release Lesson 2 on score from Assessment.
5. Click on the Select content to monitor hyperlink to select your content item. In this example we selected Assessment (the title of the assessment) from the list of assessment items.
6. From the drop-down list, select graded. Place the percentage grade range in the “and grade is between xx % and xx %” fields. By default 100% is listed in the second field.
7. Click the Next button to move to Step 2 of 3: Configure Users and Conditions.
8. Type a name in the Name Selection text field. This is optional and by default All Users is pre-defined in the text field.
9. Select your users from the User Selection Properties section.
Field Description
Automate Tab 644
Select Users Any User
Specific Users – allows you to specify which user(s) this Agent will monitor.
Rights Filter Any Rights
Specific Rights – allows you to specify which rights the user must have to be included in the user selection.
Team Filter Any Team
Specific Teams – allows you to specify which team memberships the users must have to be included in the user selection.
In our scenario we are using any user with specific rights of Students so when a student takes the assessment this agent runs based on their score on the assessment. No change is made under User Selection Conditions as the assessment score drives the agent.
Automate Tab 645
10. Click the Next button to move to Step 3 of 3: Configure Actions.
11. Select the Unlock action from the Choose Action Type drop-down list.
Automate Tab 646
12. In the Configure Action section, click the Event Originator from the Unlock content for list and click the Add-> button. The event originator is the user that is activating the event by completing their assessment.
13. Type the password in the first field. Example: !lesson2
Automate Tab 647
Typing an exclamation point in front of the password hides the content from the students until the criterion is met for unlocking the item.
14. Click the Next button to review your agent settings.
15. Click the Save button to save the Content Agent.
Event Agent
The Event Agent is triggered when a user accesses specific areas within the ANGEL® 7.3 environment such as entering a course, exiting a course or sending course mail.
Automate Tab 648
Create an Event Agent
To create an event agent:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Automate tab. The Agents Console appears.
2. Click the Add New Agent button. The Create Agent Step 1 of 3: Choose Agent Type page appears.
3. In the Name your Agent text field, type a meaningful name for the agent you are creating
4. Select the Event Agent option.
5. Select the event option from the Choose Events section.
6. Click the Next button under the Agent Summary to continue to Step 2 of 3: Configure Users and Conditions where user conditions are selected.
7. Type the name for the Name Section (optional). By default, All Users is pre-defined in the text field.
8. Select your users from the User Selection Properties section.
Automate Tab 649
Field Description
Select Users Any User
Specific Users – allows you to specify which user(s) this Agent will monitor.
Rights Filter Any Rights
Specific Rights – allows you to specify which rights the user must have to be included in the user selection.
Team Filter Any Team
Specific Teams – allows you to specify which team memberships the users must have to be included in the user selection.
9. Select any conditions from the User Selection Conditions drop-down list. Ask ―Under what conditions should the users selected above be included in this agent?‖ to determine the condition that you will select.
10. Click the Next button to continue to Step 3 of 3: Configure Actions.
11. Select an action from the Choose Action Type… drop-down list. Click the Action descriptions hyperlink to view a brief description of the actions. A complete list of the action descriptions is under the section of this document titled Actions.
12. Configure the selected action by completing the specified fields in the action. The fields to be completed vary based on the action. When finished configuring the action click the Next button.
Automate Tab 650
13. Review or edit the completed agent.
If you want to Then
Complete the agent
Click the Save button
Edit any part of the agent
Click the hyperlink name of the section you want to edit. User Selection and Action areas have a drop-down list asking if you want to Edit, Copy or Delete the user selection or action.
Changing the Agent Type clears all User Filter and Action settings.
14. Click the Save button when complete.
Actions
A brief description of each action type follows and the action type varies dependant on the agent you are using.
Action Title Description
Add Variable The Add Variable action allows the course editor to create and manage environment variables that are associated with the user submitting a quiz item. This could track course progress, competency, etc. An example of the Add Variable action could be used to create and increment a variable called Assessment_Competency that would increment by 1 for every assessment a student received a 70% or higher and decrement for every assessment a student received 69% or lower. A unique Assessment_Competency value would be stored for each student in the course – the results of which could be printed to a page for instructor review.
1. Select the user from the Add Variable For drop-down.
2. Click the Add -> button.
3. Type the variable name in the Variable Name field.
4. Provide the value to add in the Amount to Add (optional) field.
5. Click the Save Action button.
Alert Add a JavaScript pop-up message.
1. In the Alert Message Text field, type the text you wish to display in the pop-up message.
2. Click the Save Action button.
Announcement Add an announcement to a user‘s course announcements.
1. Select who will see the announcement from the Add Announcement For drop-down list.
Automate Tab 651
Action Title Description
2. In the Announcement text area, type the text you wish to be displayed as the personal announcement.
3. Click the Save Action button.
Calendar The Calendar action posts a personal calendar event to a user‘s course calendar page.
1. In the Title textbox, type the text you wish to be displayed as the title of the personal calendar event.
2. Select a user from the Users drop-down list.
3. In the Category textbox, type the category for the personal calendar event.
4. In the Notes text area, type any additional viewable notes that you wish to be associated with the personal calendar event.
5. You may optionally type a numeric value in the Days Offset textbox to specify the number of days to offset (wait before displaying) the personal calendar event.
6. You may optionally type a numeric value in the Duration textbox to specify the number of minutes the personal calendar event should remain posted.
7. Click the Save Action button.
Email (External) The Email action sends an Internet email message when triggered by a specified event. This item would be useful if you need to send an email message to someone outside of the ANGEL® 7.3 environment.
1. Type a valid Internet email address in the From textbox to specify who appears as the sender of the message.
2. Type a valid Internet email address(es) in the To textbox to specify who should receive the Internet email message.
3. Your may optionally type a valid email address(es) in the Cc or Bcc fields to specify who should also receive the Internet email message.
4. Type a subject in the Subject field.
5. Type your message text in the Message Text field.
6. You may optionally select the format from the Format drop-down list.
7. Click the Save Action button.
Automate Tab 652
Action Title Description
GoTo The GoTo action redirects the user to another content item (in the same course) when triggered by a specified event.
1. In the Match Text field, type the exact password, or title of the item you with to redirect the student to.
To copy the Entry_ID for an item, right-click on the title or icon of an item, select Copy Shortcut, paste the copied link into the Match Text field, and delete the entire pasted link except the last alpha-numeric characters following ―ENTRY_ID=‖ (without the quotes).
If more than one item exists with the same title or password provided in the Match Text field, the user is redirected to a list of the matching items. You can combine partial titles with an asterisk (*) as a wildcard to locate multiple items with similar titles.
2. Leave the Delay field blank or type 0 if you wish the redirect to take place immediately. Type a higher number such as 600 (10 minutes) to allow the user to view the confirmation/results page for as long as they wish.
3. You may optionally provide an item type in the Item Type field to restrict the GoTo action to a particular type of item.
4. You may optionally configure an additional action to be performed on the resulting page. For example, if you are redirecting to a quiz or form, type TAKE in the Action field and the user is directed into the quiz or form, bypassing the intermediate ―Take the Quiz‖ page.
5. Additional advanced functions or sub-events can be triggered using the Sub-event field.
6. Click the Save Action button.
Grade Assignment Posts a grade to the gradebook:
1. Select the assignment from the Assignment drop-down list
2. Select the user(s) from the Max Points Grade For drop-down list.
3. Click the Add -> button to add the user(s).
4. Add the Percentage or Points value to be added.
5. Select the Locked checkbox to keep the grade from changing in the gradebook.
6. Type comments in the Comments field.
7. Click the Save Action button.
Automate Tab 653
Action Title Description
Lock The lock action locks existing content from the user when triggered by a specified event. The lock action can only lock content that had previously been locked and is still associated with a particular password.
1. Select the user from the Lock content for drop-down list.
2. Click the Add -> button.
3. Type the password(s) in the Password(s) field.
4. Click the Save Action button.
Mail (Internal) The mail action sends a course mail message when triggered by a specified event.
1. Type a valid ANGEL® 7.3 username in the From field (this is pre-populated with your username) to specify who appears as the sender of the message
2. Select the recipient(s) from the Recipients drop-down list and click the desired send button (To ->, Cc ->, or Bcc ->)
3. Type a subject in the Subject field.
4. Type your message text in the Message Text field.
5. Click the Save Action button.
Message The message action presents an inline message to the user when triggered by a specified event.
1. Type the text you wish to be displayed in the inline message in the HTML Message Text field.
2. Click the Save Action button.
Milestone Completion
Allows the instructor to set a milestone completion action when triggered by a specified event.
1. Select the milestone from the Milestone drop-down list.
2. Select the user from the Complete For drop-down list.
3. Click the Save Action button.
Redirect The redirect action redirects the user to a webpage when triggered by a specified event.
1. In the URL field, type the fully qualified URL of the web page you wish to redirect the user to.
2. You may optionally type a value (in seconds) in the Delay field to specify a period of time to display the conformation/results page before redirecting to the specified URL.
3. Click the Save Action button.
Replace Variable The Replace Variable Text action could be used to update a list of ‗items to be completed‘. As the student complete the items, an
Automate Tab 654
Action Title Description
Text image of a checkbox (next to the list item) could be replaced with the image of a selected checkbox.
1. Select the users from the Set Variable For drop-down list.
2. Click the Add -> button.
3. Type the variable name in the Variable Name field.
4. Type the text to find in the optional Find Text field.
5. Type the text to replace in the optional Replace With field.
6. Click the Save Action button.
Set Variable The Set Variable action could be used to change the starting point for each student based on the last quiz they had received a passing score for.
1. Select the users from the Set Variable For drop-down list.
2. Click the Add -> button.
3. Type the variable name in the Variable Name field.
4. Type the value in the Variable Value field.
5. Click the Save Action button.
Task Allows a personal task to be created.
1. Type a subject in the Subject field.
2. Type a message in the Body field.
3. Select a due date from the Due Date calendar or n days from agent run date.
4. Select the user from the Assigned To drop-down list.
5. Select a priority from the Priority drop-down list.
6. Select a category from the Category drop-down list or create a new category using the Other button.
7. Click the Save Action button.
Task Completion Allows a personal task item to be marked complete.
1. Select the task from the Task drop-down list.
2. Select the user from the Complete For drop-down list.
3. Click the Save Action button.
Automate Tab 655
Action Title Description
Team Enroll Allows an instructor the ability to enroll users in a team based on a specified event.
1. Select the user(s) to enroll from the Users to enroll field.
2. Click the Add -> button.
3. Type the team(s) name(s) in the Team(s) fields.
4. Click the Save Action button.
Team Unenroll Allows an instructor the ability to unenroll users in a team based on a specified event.
1. Select the user(s) to enroll from the Users to unenroll field
2. Click the Add -> button
3. Type the team(s) name(s) in the Team(s) fields.
4. Click the Save Action button.
Unlock The Unlock action releases password-protected content to the user when triggered by a specified event. The Unlock action can only unlock content that has been previously locked and is still associated with a particular password.
1. Select the user(s) to unlock content for from the Users to unlock content for field.
2. Click the Add -> button.
3. Type the password(s) in the Password(s) fields.
4. Click the Save Action button.
Using an exclamation point (!) in front of the password hides the folder, quiz or item you wish to unlock from the user without having to set the Hide From Student checkbox. Use the same format and password on the folder, quiz or item you wish to unlock including the exclamation point (!). Example: !password
Manage Tab 656
Manage Tab
The Manage tab provides a wide array of course management tools, including: common course tools to help you manage grades and attendance; environmental tools that enable you to alter a variety of course settings; and data management tools that allow you to backup and restore, import and export, and manage files.
Course Management
Course Management allows course editors to configure and maintain course grades, manage enrollments and rights, manage team enrollments and settings, take attendance and review attendance information, and maintain course milestones. Course assistants are also provided with access to Course Management to allow them to assist course editors (e.g. maintaining course grades and attendance, etc.). Course assistants are not allowed to edit the configuration of Course Management.
Gradebook
The Gradebook section allows course editors to track and display grades for ANGEL® 7.3 content items (quizzes, drop boxes, discussion forums, SCORM assessments, and surveys) and for assignments handed-in outside of the ANGEL® 7.3 environment. Assignments are organized by categories which can be weighted to compute an overall grade for each student.
To access the Gradebook, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Gradebook hyperlink.
Manage Tab 657
Gradebook Setup Wizard
Upon first access to the gradebook section, the Gradebook Setup wizard appears.
The course gradebook can optionally be configured using the Gradebook Management tools which can be accessed from the course gradebook menu by clicking the Skip Wizard button. For information regarding how to manually configure the course gradebook, refer to the section of this document titled Gradebook Management.
Step 1 – Create Categories
The first step in setting up the gradebook is to create categories for the purpose of grouping like assignments based on their impact on the overall grade.
Manage Tab 658
Field Name Definition
Points Each category is worth a total number of points. All categories are added up to determine the overall grade. For example, a category called Homework is worth 300 points, Quizzes is worth 150 points, and Exams is worth 150 points. For this scenario, use the appropriate point value (300, 150, and 150) as the weight for each category.
The grade by points scenario can optionally be accomplished using a single category (e.g. called Assignments) with a value of 100 (percent) or with a value equal to the total point value sum of all assignments. The use of more than one category is only required if you prefer to weight categories to determine the overall average (percentage) or if you want to categorize assignments by assignment type.
Percentage Each category is worth a specific percentage of the overall grade. For example, a category called Homework is worth 50% of the overall grade, Quizzes is worth 25%, and Exams is worth 25%. In this case, simply use the appropriate percent value (50, 25, and 25) as the weight for each category.
Title The gradebook setup wizard displays sample category titles (Homework, Quizzes, and Exams). These sample values should be overwritten using appropriate titles based on the course‘s actual grading scenario.
Calculation The Calculation option allows the course editor to configure a category to ―drop lowest‖ or ―use highest‖ n number of grades when calculating each student‘s category average. For example, by specifying ―Use Highest‖ 10 for the Quizzes category, each student category average is calculated based on their 10 highest quiz scores.
Be sure to provide a title and calculation for each category you want added to the gradebook before clicking the Next button.
1. Select the gradebook mode Points or Percentage.
2. Type the title in the Title field.
3. Select the calculation method from the Calculation drop-down list and type the number used for the calculation. Refer to the Calculation description in the table above for details.
4. Click the Next button. The Step 2a - Select Content Items page appears.
Manage Tab 659
Step 2a – Select Content Items
The next step in the gradebook setup process is to select the ANGEL® 7.3 content items (quizzes, drop boxes, discussion forums, SCORM assessments, and surveys) that you want to display in the gradebook. All content types display in this step; pages, files, etc.
Select the checkbox next to each content item you want to add to the gradebook and click the Next button. The Step 2b – Category, Points and Calculation page appears.
Manage Tab 660
Step 2b– Specify Category, Points and Calculation Type
In step 2b, each content item must be assigned its appropriate category and point value.
Field Name Definition
Categories The Categories drop-down list allows you to assign a category to the content item listed.
Points The Points text box allows you to type a value for each content item.
Calculation Type The Calculation Type drop-down list determines whether the student grade for each content item should be calculated based on the student‘s first submission, last submission, average score, maximum score, or entered manually.
1. Select the appropriate category from the Categories drop-down menu and type the appropriate point value in the Points field for each content item on the page.
2. Select the appropriate option from the Calculation Type field.
3. Click the Next button. The Step 3 – Setup Grading Scale page appears.
Step 3 – Setup Grading Scale
In Step 4, the course editor is allowed to optionally configure a grading scale for the course gradebook. The grading scale supports any non-numeric characters including
Manage Tab 661
A+, A, A-, B+, B, B-, etc., +, -, etc., S (satisfactory), U (unsatisfactory), I (incomplete), etc. to represent alternate performance scales.
1. Type a letter grade and the minimum percentage in the appropriate fields.
2. Click the Next button. The Gradebook displays.
Gradebook Interface
The Gradebook interface consists of five areas of functionality:
View section that allows the course editor to view grades.
Enter/Edit Grades section allows the course editor to enter grades and comments.
Gradebook Setup section that allows the course editor to configure gradebook preferences and import/export grades.
Gradebook Management section that allows the course editor to manually create and edit gradebook categories, assignments, macros, and grading scale.
Gradebook Tutorial section that allows the course editor to learn about the gradebook setup wizard.
Manage Tab 662
To access the Gradebook, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Gradebook hyperlink. The Gradebook page appears.
View
The View tools allow the course editor to easily view all grades or view a filtered list of grades based on category, or student, and print grades.
Manage Tab 663
Field Name Definition
View All Grades The View All Grades hyperlink when selected displays a list of students and gradebook assignments on the View Grades page.
View Grades by Category or Users
The All Categories and All Users drop-down lists allows you to filter the gradebook grades by category and/or by users.
To filter the view to a particular user, select the Find Student… option from the All Users drop-down menu, type any portion of the user‘s first name, last name, or username in the textbox, and click the Search button. Click the Select hyperlink next to the user you wish to view and click the Go button.
To filter the view of gradebook grades by category and/or users, select the appropriate category and team from the All Categories and All Users drop-down menus and click the Go button. The View Grades page displays a list of students and gradebook assignments based on the category and users selections (as shown in the View Grades section below).
Print Grades The Print Grades hyperlink creates a printer-friendly PDF view of the gradebook.
For best results, change your printer preferences to landscape to display the maximum number of assignments on each page.
View Grades
The View Grades page displays grades for the first 25 students (ordered by last name) based on the criteria specified on the View menu. Use the scroll bar (located below the last student) and scroll to the right to view all assignment grades and category averages.
Field Name Definition
Show: The Show drop-down menu allows the course editor to filter the list of students based on team affiliation.
Only Students Clearing the Only Students checkbox allows the course editor to display grades for all enrolled users including non-students.
Manage Tab 664
Field Name Definition
Number to Display For courses with more than 25 students, the course editor can view the additional student grades by selecting a higher value from the Number to Display drop-down menu.
View: Default Points Percentage
View optionally allows the course editor to view grades formatted as Default, Points, or Percentage.
The Default radio button displays grades based on the view format settings specified in Gradebook Preferences.
Update The Update button refreshes the page with the selections you made from the drop-down lists or radio buttons. Click the Update button after making the selections.
Previous | Next Use the Previous | Next ―paging‖ options (located at the bottom of the page) to advance to the next page of students.
Done To exit the View Grades page, click the Done button located at the bottom of the page.
Print Grades
The gradebook allows for the printing of the grades. The view produces a PDF document containing all student grades for all categories.
This feature works best with version 7 of the Adobe Acrobat Reader plug-in for your browser. This can be downloaded from Adobe at http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/main.html .
To use print grades:
1. Log into your ANGLE course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Gradebook hyperlink. The View or Print Gradebook PDF page appears.
Manage Tab 665
3. From the Page Size drop-down list select the size you want to use. Default is Letter but other choices include Legal, 11 x 17, A3, A4, A5, A6, B3, B4, and B5.
4. From the Page Orientation drop-down list select how you want the gradebook to print. Default is Landscape, but Portrait is also available.
5. Select the page margins from the Page Margins drop-down list.
6. Select the font from the Font Family drop-down list.
7. Select the font size from the Font Size drop-down list.
8. Select the category order from the Category Order drop-down list.
9. Select the team from the Team drop-down list.
10. Select the Show Students Only checkbox if you want only student grades to appear.
11. Select the Show Averages Only checkbox if you only want averages displayed.
12. Click the Generate PDF button.
Additional information is available by clicking the More Info hyperlink. If you cannot view the PDF, you can still view the report by clicking the previous HTML-only version hyperlink.
Manage Tab 666
Grades by User or by Assignment
The View Grades page provides easy access to enter grades by student or by assignment.
To enter grades for a particular student, click the student‘s hyperlinked name. The Enter Grades by User page displays the student‘s name at the top of the page and an editable list of assignment grades (as shown in the By User section below).
To enter grades for a particular assignment, click the hyperlinked assignment title. The Assignment Editor page displays the assignment name and attributes with a list of assignment tasks. Click the Add Grades hyperlink to display the Enter Grades by Assignment page (as shown in the By Assignment section below).
Manage Tab 667
Enter/Edit Grade
The Enter/Edit Grade tools allow the course editor to enter or edit grades and comments by assignment or user.
Assignment
Manage Tab 668
The assignment attributes (max points, category, content items, overall course average and calculation method) are displayed in a shaded table just below the Selected Assignment list box. If the assignment is associated with one or more ANGEL® 7.3 content items (quiz, drop box, discussion forum, etc.), a Content Items attribute displays hyperlinked titles of each associated content item providing quick access to the content item.
Assignment attributes settings can be modified using the Assignment Editor. For information regarding how to modify assignment settings, refer to the section of this document titled Assignment Editor.
Field Name Definition
Selected Assignment
To enter grades for another assignment, select the new assignment from the Selected Assignment drop-down list located at the top of page.
Show The Show drop-down menu allows the course editor to filter the list of students based on team affiliation.
Only Students Clearing the Only Students checkbox allows the course editor to display grades for all enrolled users including non-students.
Display For courses with more than 25 students, the course editor can view the additional student grades by selecting a higher value from the Display drop-down menu.
Go The Go button refreshes the page with the selections you made from the drop-down lists or radio buttons. Click Go after making the selections.
View: Full Condensed
Optionally select Condensed from the View radio option to change to a simple view of percentage and points fields for each student. Select Full from the View option to view all grading options including Locked and Comments (discussed below).
Percentage or Points
Assignment grades can be entered into either the Percentage or Points fields for each student. As you move to the next user, the neighboring field automatically updates with the appropriate value calculated based on the entered score and assignment‘s max points.
When entering grades using points, review the Max Points value displayed in the assignment attributes table to verify points are being entered based on the appropriate scale.
When using gradebook macros to enter grades, macros/labels must be entered in the Percentage field to be calculated correctly. For information regarding how to configure macros, refer to the section of this document titled Macros.
Manage Tab 669
Field Name Definition
Locked The Locked option is used with gradebook assignments that are associated with ANGEL® 7.3 content items (quiz, drop box, discussion forum, etc.). It allows the course editor to ―lock‖ and manually overwrite a student grade to ensure it isn‘t overwritten by updates to the associated ANGEL® 7.3 content item.
Comments The course editor can optionally provide feedback in the Comments field for each student. Comments are displayed in the student‘s grade report and are only viewable to the student for whom they are intended.
Batch Update The Batch Update tool makes it easy to add a common grade for all members of a particular team or to add a common grade to all students who do not have a grade listed (i.e. to batch update an assignment to give a zero to everyone who did not complete the assignment).
To batch update grades for displayed users for a particular assignment, type a percentage or point value in the appropriate field, optionally select the Locked checkbox and provide a common comment (if applicable), and click the Batch Update button.
To add a common grade for all members of a particular team, first select the team from the Show drop-down box to filter the list of students based on team affiliation.
The Batch Update tool is also useful when a large percentage of the students receive a common grade (i.e. all but a few students earn 100%). In this scenario, grade the few students who did not earn the common grade, then use the Batch Update tool to update the grade for all ungraded students.
Save Changes The Save Changes button saves the gradebook changes.
Cancel Changes Gradebook changes can be cancelled by clicking the Cancel Changes button.
Previous Page | Next Page
Use the Previous Page | Next Page ―paging‖ options (located at the bottom of the page) to advance to the next page of students.
Done Click the Done button to exit.
Manage Tab 670
1. To enter or edit grades by assignment, click the By Assignment hyperlink on the Gradebook page. The Enter Grades by Assignment page displays.
2. Select the assignment you want to edit from the Selected Assignment drop-down menu and click the Go button. The page updates to display the assignment name and attributes with an editable list of student grades.
3. Type information and click the Save Changes button.
User
Field Name Definition
Grade Type a non-numeric grade including A+, A, A-, B+, B, B-, etc., +, -, etc., S (satisfactory), U (unsatisfactory), I (incomplete), etc. to represent an alternate performance assessment.
Manage Tab 671
Field Name Definition
Percentage/Points Student grades can be entered into either the Percentage or Points fields for each assignment dependent on if you selected Percentage or Points when creating the gradebook. As you move to the next assignment, the neighboring field automatically updates with the appropriate value calculated based on the entered score and assignment‘s max points.
When entering grades using points, review the Max Points value displayed next to the assignment name to verify points are being entered based on the appropriate scale.
When using gradebook macros to enter grades, macros/labels must be entered in the Percentage field to be calculated correctly. For information regarding how to configure macros, refer to the section of this document titled Macros.
Locked The Locked option is used with gradebook assignments that are associated with ANGEL® 7.3 content items (quiz, drop box, discussion forum, etc.). It allows the course editor to ―lock‖ and manually overwrite a student grade to ensure it is not overwritten by updates to the associated ANGEL® 7.3 content item.
Comments The course editor can optionally provide feedback in the Comments field for each assignment. Comments are displayed in the student‘s grade report and are only viewable to the student for whom they are intended.
Save The Save button saves the gradebook changes.
Cancel Gradebook changes can be cancelled by clicking the Cancel button.
Done To exit, click the Done button.
1. To enter or edit grades by user, click the By User hyperlink from the Gradebook page. The Enter Grades by User page displays on the screen.
2. Select the Search hyperlink. The Search page displays.
Manage Tab 672
3. Type any portion of the user‘s first name, last name, or username in the textbox and click the Search button.
To return a list of all students in the class, leave the textbox blank and click the Search button. To view a list of students based on team affiliation, select the team from the All Users drop-down menu and click the Search button.
4. Click on the student‘s hyperlinked name that you want to grade. The Enter Grades by User page updates to display the student‘s name at the top of the page and an editable list of assignment grades.
5. Type information and click the Save button.
Gradebook Setup
Gradebook setup tools allow the course editor to modify gradebook preferences (e.g. grade display format, etc.), import and export grades to and from a delimited spreadsheet format, import assignments from repositories, and publish course grades.
For more on this topic see “How to set up the Gradebook: Preferences and Grading Scale” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Manage Tab 673
Gradebook Preferences
To modify gradebook preference settings, click the Preferences hyperlink. The Gradebook Preferences page displays.
Manage Tab 674
Field Name Definition
Default Display Format
Select a different value from the Default Display Format drop-down menu to change how grades should be displayed in the gradebook and student‘s grade report.
Treat Ungraded Items as Zero
Select the Treat Ungraded Items as Zero checkbox to display a score of zero for all assignments that do not have a grade specified.
The Treat Ungraded Items as Zero option can be useful when determining mid-term or final grades if the gradebook includes assignments that do not have a grade specified (i.e. students did not complete or turn-in the assignments).
Limit Course Assistants by Team
Select the Limit Course Assistants by Team checkbox to limit course assistant rights so they can only view and enter grades for students who are affiliated with the same team(s) as the course assistant.
For more information regarding how to add a course assistant to a course, refer to the section of this document titled Edit Roster.
Gradebook Mode Select Points or Percentage from the Gradebook drop-down list. This general preference determines how the gradebook displays the grade values.
Options: Display Overall Average
Optionally clear the Display Overall Average checkbox if you do not want to display the overall, calculated grade on the student‘s grade report and on the View Grades by User page.
Overall Average is always displayed in the View All Grades grid view regardless of whether the Display Overall Average checkbox is selected or not.
Overall Display Format
Select a different value from the Overall Display Format drop-down menu to change how the overall grade should be displayed in the gradebook and student‘s grade report.
Save Click the Save button to save the gradebook preferences.
Import Grades
The Import Grades option allows the course editor to import assignment grades from any delimited file format.
The Import Grades utility does not add new assignments or students to an existing gradebook or roster. New assignments must already exist (or be added) to the gradebook prior to the import process for the new assignment grades to be
Manage Tab 675
successfully imported into the gradebook. Likewise new students must exist (or be added) to the course roster prior to the import process for the new student grades to be successfully imported.
To import assignment grades into the ANGEL® 7.3 Gradebook:
1. Click the Import Grades hyperlink. Step 1 of the Import Grades page displays.
2. Click the Browse button. A Choose File dialog box appears on the screen.
3. Locate and select the delimited grades file you wish to import and click the Open button.
4. Select the delimiter format for the grades file (comma, tab, or other) and click the Next button. Step 2 of the Import Grades page displays.
Manage Tab 676
The Import Grades page provides options for mapping each column of data to the correct gradebook assignment and for ―skipping‖ some data columns to selectively update specific assignment grades.
When importing a grades data file that was originally exported from the ANGEL® 7.3 gradebook and which has not been modified from its original column mapping format, you may ignore the Column Mappings options and proceed to step 5 below. Changes to the Column Mapping fields are required only if you are working with a custom column format or if you want to ―skip‖ particular assignment grades.
5. Select the column that contains the User ID for each student. Then, map each of the other columns to the assignment whose grades are stored in the column.
6. Select Skip for any column which does not contain any data you want imported.
7. Select Percentages or Points from the Treat Values as radio buttons.
8. Clear Lock Important Grades if you want ANGEL® 7.3 to recalculate the grade against a submission.
9. Click the Finish button. A message appears noting the number of assignment and student records that were successfully imported.
Export Grades
The Export Grades option allows the course editor to export the assignment grades, for all students, as a comma delimited or tab delimited file. The resulting delimited file can easily be viewed and modified in a standard spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel.
To export assignment grades to a delimited file:
1. Click the Export Grades hyperlink. The Export Grades page displays.
2. Select the delimited file format you prefer to export (comma-separated or tab-separated values).
3. Optionally select the Include Averages and Include Course ID checkboxes to include the additional data in the export file.
4. Click the Export button. A File Download dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Click the Save button to save the file. A Save As dialog box appears on the screen.
Manage Tab 677
6. Select a location to save the file and click the Save button. Once the file has finished downloading, you may open the file in any spreadsheet program (recommended) or text editor to view or modify the assignment grades.
Import Assignments
The Import Assignments option allows the course editor to import assignments from resource libraries.
To import assignments from resource libraries:
1. Click the Import Assignments hyperlink. The Import Assignments from Resource Libraries page displays.
2. Select a library from the Available Libraries drop-down list and click the Select button.
3. Type resources in the Resources text box.
4. Select where to create assignments from the Create Assignments in: drop-down list.
5. Click the Import button to import the assignment. The Assignments page appears (Refer to the Assignments section for more details on this page).
Manage Tab 678
6. Click the Add New button. The page updates to display the Assignment Editor at the bottom of the page.
Field Name Definition
Normal/Advanced Clicking the Advanced option displays all of the category options.
Title The Title is used to identify the assignment.
Manage Tab 679
Field Name Definition
Description The Description is used to describe the assignment.
Category The Category is used to associate the type of category with the assignment.
Points The Points field allows you to enter a value for the assignment.
Display Format The Display Format allows you to use a different display format for the assignment grade than the gradebook default (specified in Gradebook Preferences).
Calculation Type The Calculation Type option is intended to be used in combination with the Associated Content Items option. If the gradebook assignment has one or more associated content items, then the Calculation Type option should be used to determine which content item grade should be used to update the gradebook assignment.
Since many content items can be graded multiple times, and multiple content items can be associated with the same gradebook assignment, you have four options for obtaining a grade: Average Score, Maximum Score, First Submission, Last Submission, and Manual.
Average Score uses an average of all scores submitted. Maximum Score uses the highest of all scores submitted. First Submission uses the first score submitted. Last Submission uses the last (most recent) score submitted. The calculation type of Manual requires the instructor to enter a score manually.
Extra Credit The Extra Credit checkbox configures the category to be calculated as extra credit.
Associated Content Items
See Calculation Type
From the Assignment Editor:
1. Click the Advanced option to display all of the assignment options.
2. Type a title for the assignment in the Title field.
3. (Optional) Type a description for the assignment in the Description field.
4. Select an assignment category from the Category drop-down menu.
5. Specify a point possible value for the assignment in the Points field.
6. (Optional) Select a different option from the Display Format drop-down menu if you want to use a different display format for the assignment grade than the gradebook default (specified in Gradebook Preferences).
7. Select the appropriate calculation type from the Calculation Type drop-down menu.
Manage Tab 680
The Calculation Type option is intended to be used in combination with the Associated Content Items option. If the gradebook assignment has one or more associated content items, the Calculation Type option should be used to determine which content item grade should be used to update the gradebook assignment.
Since many content items can be graded multiple times, and multiple content items can be associated with the same gradebook assignment, you have four options for obtaining a grade: Average Score, Maximum Score, First Submission, Last Submission, and Manual.
Average Score uses an average of all scores submitted. Maximum Score uses the highest of all scores submitted. First Submission uses the first score submitted. Last Submission uses the last (most recent) score submitted. The calculation type of Manual requires the instructor to enter a score manually.
8. Select the Extra Credit checkbox if you want this assignment to be extra credit.
9. On the right side of the Assignment Editor, select any content items that you want to associate to this assignment.
10. Click the Save button. The assignment is added to the Assignments page.
Publish Course Grades
The Publish Course Grades is available in the gradebook and allows the instructor to save an official record of the course grade from a hyperlink in the gradebook setup section. This option needs to be activated by your ANGEL® 7.3 Administrator.
To publish grades:
1. Click on the Publish Course Grades hyperlink. The Publish Grades page appears.
2. Select the type of grade that you want published from the Published Grade Type drop-down list.
3. Click the Go button. The Publish Grades page updates to display the publish grade type at the top of the page and an editable list of grades to publish at the bottom.
Manage Tab 681
If you have published a grade type for a student, it is the initial value in the Grade to Publish field; otherwise this is blank.
4. Based on the current course average from the gradebook, type the Grade to Publish and any comments.
5. Click the Publish all displayed grades button to publish your grades.
6. Click the Done button when finished.
Apply Batch Grade and Comments
This button allows you to complete a batch grade and comment update with the value that is placed in the Default value to place in all empty Grades to Publish field.
Manage Tab 682
Gradebook Management
Gradebook management tools allow the course editor to create and edit categories, assignments, and macros, and to edit the grading scale.
For more on this topic see “How can students see their grades” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Categories
The Categories page allows the course editor to add new gradebook categories, to edit settings for one or more categories (modifying multiple), and to delete categories.
Categories are an important gradebook concept. The primary purpose of categories is to group assignments based on their impact on the overall grade.
For more on this topic see “How to set up the Gradebook: Categories and Assignments” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
For example, a few of the most common calculation approaches include:
Scenario 1 – Grade By Percent
Each category is worth a specific percentage of the overall grade. For example, a category called Homework is worth 50% of the overall grade, Quizzes is worth 25%, and Exams is worth 25%. In this case, simply use the appropriate percent value (50, 25, and 25) as the weight for each category.
Scenario 2 – Grade By Points
Each category is worth a total number of points. All categories are added up to determine the overall grade. For example, a category called Homework is worth 300 points, Quizzes is worth 150 points, and Exams is worth 150 points. For this
Manage Tab 683
scenario, use the appropriate point value (300, 150, and 150) as the weight for each category.
The grade by points scenario can optionally be accomplished using a single category (e.g. called Assignments) with a value of 100 (percent) or with a value equal to the total point value sum of all assignments. The use of more than one category is only required if you prefer to weight categories to determine the overall average (scenario 1 above) or if you want to categorize assignments by assignment type.
To access the Categories page, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, click the Gradebook hyperlink, and click the Categories hyperlink.
Assuming the gradebook was created using the Gradebook Wizard, the Categories page may already have one or more category titles listed including calculation method, release date, weight, and percentage-based impact on the overall grade. Weight and Percent Overall columns display a sum value at the bottom of their respective columns.
Add New Category
To add a new category, click the Add New button. The page updates to display the Category Editor at the bottom of the page. Refer to the section of this document titled Category Editor for more details.
Edit Existing Category
Existing categories may be edited by selecting one or more categories and clicking the Edit Selected button. The page updates to display the Category Editor at the bottom of the page. Make your changes and click the Save button.
Delete Existing Category
Existing categories may be deleted by selecting one or more categories and clicking the Delete Selected buttons. A pop-up appears asking if you want to delete selected categories. Click OK to remove the selection from the Categories page.
Manage Tab 684
Modify Multiple Categories
The course editor can optionally modify multiple categories from a single editor by selecting the checkbox next to each category and clicking the Edit Selected button. The page updates to display the Category Editor at the bottom of the page. Make your changes and click the Save button.
Show Category Tasks
Additional category tasks are available by selecting a single category and clicking the Show Tasks button.
For more on this topic see “How to Rearrange Categories and Assignments” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Add/View Assignments
The Add Assignments and View Assignments hyperlinks provide easy access to add new assignments or view, edit or delete existing assignments.
Manage Tab 685
To add an assignment to the selected category, click the Add Assignments hyperlink. The Assignment Editor displays - to allow the course editor to create a new assignment in the selected category (as shown in the Assignment Editor section below).
To view existing assignments for the selected category, click the View Assignments hyperlink. The Assignments page displays a list of existing assignments in the selected category (as shown in the Assignment section below).
Reorder Assignments
To reorder assignments within the selected category, click the Reorder Assignments hyperlink. The Reorder Assignments page displays a list of all assignments in the selected category.
1. Select the assignment you want to move and click the appropriate button to move the selected assignment up, down, to the top of the list, or to the bottom of the list.
2. Continue this process until all assignments have been reordered properly.
3. Click the Save button to save your work.
Edit/Delete Category
The selected category can be edited or deleted by clicking the Edit Category Settings or Delete Category hyperlinks or by clicking the Edit Selected or Delete Selected buttons.
Move Category
The selected category can be moved up or down in the list of categories by clicking the Move Up or Move Down buttons.
Exit Show Tasks
To close the list of category tasks, click the Done button located at the bottom of the page.
Exit Categories
To exit the Categories page, click the Back to Main Menu hyperlink.
Manage Tab 686
Category Editor
Field Name Definition
Normal/Advanced Clicking the Advanced option displays all of the category options.
Title The Title is used to identify the category.
Description The Description is used to describe the category.
Calculation: Use all assignments
Drop lowest
Use highest
The Calculation options allow the course editor to determine whether the category average should be based on the grade of all category assignments (Use all assignments) or a subset using the highest scored assignments (Use highest or Drop lowest).
Release Date The Release Date option allows the course editor to effectively hide the category average and the grades for all assignments assigned to the category until a future release date.
Average Shown When cleared, the category average does not display in the student or instructor views.
Average Format Select a format from the Average Format drop-down list if you want to use a different display format for the category average than the gradebook default (specified in Gradebook Preferences).
Manage Tab 687
Field Name Definition
Extra Credit The Extra Credit checkbox configures the category to be calculated as extra credit.
To add a new category:
1. From the Categories page, click the Add New button. The page updates to display the Category Editor at the bottom of the page.
2. Click the Advanced option to display all of the category options.
3. Type a title for the category in the Title field.
4. (Optional) Type a category description in the Description field.
5. (Optional) Select the appropriate calculation method from the Calculation options to determine whether the category average should be based on the grade of all category assignments (Use all assignments) or a subset using the highest scored assignments (Use highest or Drop lowest).
The Calculation option allows the course editor to configure a category to ―drop lowest‖ or ―use highest‖ n number of grades when calculating each student‘s category average. For example, by specifying ―Use Highest‖ 10 for the Quizzes category, each student category average is calculated based on their 10 highest quiz scores.
6. (Optional) Specify a different Release Date and time for the category to effectively hide the category average and the grades for all assignments assigned to the category until a future release date.
7. (Optional) Clear the Average checkbox if you do not want to display the category average. When cleared, the category average does not display in the student or instructor views.
8. (Optional) Select a different option from the Average Format drop-down menu if you want to use a different display format for the category average than the gradebook default (specified in Gradebook Preferences).
9. (Optional) Select the Extra Credit checkbox to configure the category to be calculated as extra credit.
10. Click the Save button. The category is added to the Categories page.
Manage Tab 688
Assignments
The Assignments hyperlink provides easy access to add new assignments or view, edit or delete existing assignments. To access the Assignments page, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, click the Gradebook hyperlink, and click the Assignments hyperlink.
Assuming the gradebook was created using the Gradebook Wizard, the Assignments page may already have one or more assignment titles listed including category, points possible, and release date.
Add Assignments
To add a new assignment, click the Add New button. The page updates to display the Assignment Editor at the bottom of the page. Refer to the Assignment Editor section below for field descriptions.
Edit Existing Assignments
Existing assignments may be edited by selecting one or more assignments and clicking the Edit Selected button. The page updates to display the Assignment Editor at the bottom of the page. Make your changes and click the Save button.
Delete Existing Assignments
Existing assignments may be deleted by selecting one or more categories and clicking the Delete Selected buttons. A pop-up appears asking if you want to delete selected assignments. Click OK to remove the selection from the Assignments page.
Modify Multiple Assignments
The course editor can optionally modify multiple assignments from a single editor by selecting the checkbox next to each category and clicking the Edit Selected button. The page updates to display the Assignment Editor at the bottom of the page. Make your changes and click the Save button.
Manage Tab 689
Show Assignment Tasks
Additional assignment tasks are available by selecting a single assignment and clicking the Show Tasks button.
Add Grades
The Add Grades hyperlink provides easy access to add grades to the selected assignment. To add grades to the selected assignment, click the Add Grades hyperlink. The Enter Grades by Assignment page displays (as shown in the Add Grades by Assignment section above).
Edit/Delete Assignment
The selected assignment can be edited or deleted by clicking the Edit Assignment Settings or Delete Assignment hyperlinks or by clicking the Edit Selected or Delete Selected buttons.
Exit Show Tasks
To close the list of assignment tasks, click the Done button located at the bottom of the page.
Exit Assignments
To exit the Assignments page, click the Back to Main Menu hyperlink.
Manage Tab 690
Assignment Editor
Field Name Definition
Normal/Advanced Clicking the Advanced option displays all of the category options.
Title The Title is used to identify the assignment.
Description The Description is used to describe the assignment.
Category The Category is used to associate the type of category with the assignment.
Points The Points field allows you to type a value for the assignment.
Display Format The Display Format allows you to use a different display format for the assignment grade than the gradebook default (specified in Gradebook Preferences).
Manage Tab 691
Field Name Definition
Calculation Type The Calculation Type option is intended to be used in combination with the Associated Content Items option. If the gradebook assignment has one or more associated content items, then the Calculation Type option should be used to determine which content item grade should be used to update the gradebook assignment.
Since many content items can be graded multiple times, and multiple content items can be associated with the same gradebook assignment, you have four options for obtaining a grade: Average Score, Maximum Score, First Submission, Last Submission, and Manual.
Average Score uses an average of all scores submitted. Maximum Score uses the highest of all scores submitted. First Submission uses the first score submitted. Last Submission uses the last (most recent) score submitted. The calculation type of Manual requires the instructor to type a score manually.
Extra Credit The Extra Credit checkbox configures the category to be calculated as extra credit.
Associated Content Items
See Calculation Type
To add a new assignment:
1. From the Assignments page, click the Add New button. The page updates to display the Assignment Editor at the bottom of the page.
2. Click the Advanced option to display all of the category options.
3. Type a title for the assignment in the Title field.
4. (Optional) Type a description for the assignment in the Description field.
5. Select an assignment category from the Category drop-down menu.
6. Specify a point possible value for the assignment in the Points field.
7. (Optional) Select a different option from the Display Format drop-down menu if you want to use a different display format for the assignment grade than the gradebook default (specified in Gradebook Preferences).
8. Select the appropriate calculation type from the Calculation Type drop-down menu.
9. Select the Extra Credit checkbox if you want this assignment to be extra credit.
10. On the right side of the Assignment Editor, select any content items that you want to associate to this assignment.
11. Click the Save button. The assignment is added to the Assignments page.
Manage Tab 692
Extra Credit Assignment
In addition to having an entire category as extra credit, you now have the option to set up an extra credit assignment. However, you cannot have an extra credit assignment within an extra credit category.
For more on this topic see “How to create an extra credit assignment” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Macros
Macros can be used to map a non-numeric grade to a percentage value. For example, adding a macro with a filter value of A and a percent 95 would allow the grader to type the letter grade of A into the grade entry page and the gradebook interprets the grade as 95%.
To access the Macro Editor, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, click the Gradebook hyperlink, and click the Macros hyperlink. The Macro Editor displays.
Field Name Definition
Filter The Filter field allows you to enter a non-numeric character (e.g. a letter grade) that is associated to the percentage.
Percent The Percent field allows you to enter a percentage that corresponds to a non-numeric character.
Add Macros
1. Type a non-numeric character in the Filter text box.
2. Type the corresponding percentage in the Percent text box.
3. Click the Save hyperlink. Continue this process to add additional macros.
Edit/Delete Macros
Macros can be easily edited or deleted by clicking the Edit or Delete hyperlinks located next to the macro.
Manage Tab 693
Exit Macros
Click the Back to Main Menu hyperlink to exit the Macros page.
Grading Scale
The Grading Scale allows the course editor to specify a grading scale that is used to display letter grades in addition to the percentages or scores for assignments, category averages, and overall grades.
To access the Grading Scale Editor, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, click the Gradebook hyperlink, and click the Grading Scale hyperlink.
Field Name Definition
Label The Label field allows you to enter a non-numeric character (e.g. a letter grade) that is associated to the minimum percent.
Minimum Percent The Minimum Percent field allows you to enter a percentage that corresponds to a non-numeric character.
Add Grading Scale
1. Type a letter grade (or any non-numeric character) in the Label text box.
2. Type the corresponding percentage in the Minimum Percent text box.
3. Click the Add New hyperlink. The new grading scale is added. Continue this process to add all labels for the grading scale.
Edit/Delete Grading Scale
Labels can be easily edited or deleted by clicking the Edit or Delete hyperlinks located next to the label.
Manage Tab 694
Exit Grading Scale
Click the Back to Main Menu hyperlink to exit the Grading Scale.
Gradebook Tutorial
The Gradebook Tutorial allows you to learn about the gradebook setup wizard and other commonly used gradebook features. These demonstrations walk you through the basic gradebook setup using the gradebook wizard: Creating a Points-Based Gradebook and Creating a Percentage-Based Gradebook.
Roster
The Roster section allows course editors to manage enrollments and rights.
To access the Roster Editor, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Roster hyperlink. The Roster Editor appears.
Roster Editor
For more on this topic see “How to Add or Remove a Student from a Course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Manage Tab 695
Field Name Definition
Add a User The Add a User hyperlink allows the course editor to search for an existing user to add to the roster or add a new user account.
Batch Enroll Batch enroll provides the course editor with an easy to use wizard interface to batch create new user accounts and to batch enroll new and existing users into existing courses and groups.
Export Export allows you to export your entire roster in a .tsv (tab separated format).
Edit/Delete The Edit and Delete buttons allows you to edit or delete the name next to the buttons.
Name checkbox The checkbox next to the Name allows you to edit, delete, batch enroll or export your selection.
Delete Selected The Delete Selected button allows you to delete multiple names.
Add a User
The Add a User hyperlink (located on the Roster Editor toolbar) provides an option to add a student, team leader, course mentor, course assistant, course editor or a course administrator. You may create a new account or add a user that already has an account for your institution. This option may be restricted by your ANGEL® 7.3 Administrator.
Add a New Account
1. Click the Add a User hyperlink (located on the Roster Editor toolbar). The Add a User page displays.
2. Click the Create a New Account button. The Account Settings page displays.
Manage Tab 696
Field Name Definition
Authentication The authentication is how the user logs into ANGEL® 7.3, either using ANGEL® 7.3 to authenticate or an external source.
Account ID The Account ID determines the unique student ID or user ID ANGEL® 7.3 uses to identify the new user. Account ID values must be unique within the ANGEL® 7.3 system. See the Username description below for more information regarding Account ID.
First Name and Last Name
The First Name and Last Name fields are required fields.
E-mail Type the e-mail address of the user.
Phone Select the type of phone number from the drop-down list and enter the corresponding number.
Photo URL The Photo URL allows you to add a photo of the user.
Manage Tab 697
Field Name Definition
Username The Username field determines the unique username the new user uses to log into the system. Username values must be unique within the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
The Account ID and Username fields are often entered with identical values. In some cases, institutions may prefer to use separate values for each (e.g. student or billing ID as the Account ID and username as Username). Best practice would be to not use a student ID or SSN as a username as the Username is visible in many areas of ANGEL® 7.3.
Password/Confirm The Password/Confirm options allow you to assign a password to the account.
Send e-mail to user Select the Send e-mail to user checkbox to send the user an e-mail with the password and login information.
On the Account settings page:
1. Type an Account ID for the user (Required). This information could be a user‘s email address.
2. Type a First Name for the user (Required).
3. Type a Last Name for the user (Required).
4. Type a valid e-mail address (Optional).
5. Type a Phone contact (Optional).
6. Type a Photo URL (Optional).
7. Type a Username. This may be a user‘s email address.
You may leave the Username blank to use the Account ID as a username.
8. Type a Password and Confirm the Password (Optional).
Leave Password and Confirm blank to have a random password generated by ANGEL® 7.3.
9. Select the Send e-mail to user checkbox if you want to send the user an email with their login information and password.
Manage Tab 698
10. Click the Save button. The Account Creation Successful page appears.
11. Click the Enroll button to enroll the new user into your course. The Enrollment Setting page appears.
Field Name Definition
Username The Username displays the name entered in the Account Settings page.
Manage Tab 699
Field Name Definition
Rights Rights can be changed for a user within your course. These items may be limited by your ANGEL® 7.3 Administrator. Rights changed within a course (section) affect the user rights within the course (section) only. Section Level Rights are described below:
Authenticated Guest - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a guest.
Default course/group restrictions: Guests cannot view the student portion of the roster, cannot access instructor or student tools, and can only view lesson content, chat rooms, or forums that have been made viewable to users with a rights level of Guests (or lower).
Student/Member - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a student/member.
Default course/group restrictions: Students/Members cannot access instructor tools, and can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Students/Members (or lower).
Team Leader - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a team leader.
Default course/group restrictions: Team Leaders cannot access instructor tools, and can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Team Leaders (or lower).
Course/Group Mentor - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a mentor such as a course librarian.
Default course/group restrictions: Course/Group Mentors cannot access instructor tools, and can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Course/Group Mentors (or lower).
Course/Group Assistant - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of an assistant. This role has access to grading features and several instructor reports.
Default course/group restrictions: Course/Group Assistants have limited access to instructor tools such as activity reports (under Lessons and Tools tabs), Course Gradebook, and Attendance Manager. Course/Group Assistants can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Course/Group Assistants (or lower).
Team Membership Specifies to what team the user should be assigned.
Manage Tab 700
Field Name Definition
Rights (continued) Course/Group Editor - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of an editor. This is the typical role for the instructor of record. Editors can manage the course roster, edit all content and access all reports and utilities.
Default course/group restrictions: None - Course/Group Editors have full access to all instructor tools, reports, etc. Furthermore, Course/Group Editors are not subject to restrictions such as Team association, Start Dates, End Dates and Hidden item settings.
Course/Group Administrator - Identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of an administrator.
Default course/group restrictions: None - Course/Group Administrators have full access to all instructor tools, reports and editing capabilities.
Title This is the title displayed for the user in the course.
Hidden Hides the user from view. This is useful for an observer that does not want to be seen in the course.
Disabled Disabling a user in a course removes their access to the course.
Notify user of account changes by e-mail
An email can be sent to the user to notify the user of changes to their status in a course.
On the Enrollment settings page:
1. Select the Title from the drop-down menu. The title selected displays beneath the user‘s name and does not affect the user‘s course (section) rights.
To add a title not in the drop-down list, click the Other button. Add the name in the prompt window and then click OK.
2. Select the Hidden property of the user from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the Disabled property of the user from the drop-down menu.
4. Select the team from the appropriate team checkbox.
5. Select Notify user of account changes by e-mail checkbox if you want the user notified of changes to their account.
6. Click the Save button.
Manage Tab 701
Add a User with an Existing Account
1. Click the Add a User hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar). The Add a User page displays.
You should search to see if the user has an account at your institution before creating a new user.
2. To search for an existing account, add the user‘s first name, last name or user ID in the Account Search text area.
3. Click the Search button. A list of users matching the information you specified displays.
4. If the user appears in the returned list, click the Select button next to the user‘s name to enroll them in the course. If the user does not have an existing account, refer to the section of this document titled Add a New User for details.
5. Once you click the enroll button next to the user‘s name, the Enrollment Settings page appears. Refer to the section of this document titled Enrollment Settings for details.
Edit a User
1. From the Roster Editor page, click the Edit button next to the user‘s name. The Enrollment Settings editor appears. Refer to the section of this document titled Enrollment Settings for details.
2. Type changes and click the Save button.
Manage Tab 702
Delete a User
1. From the Roster Editor page, click the Delete button next to the user‘s name. The Unenroll screen appears.
2. Click the Delete button.
You may send an email notification to the user to advise they have been unenrolled by selecting the checkbox next to Send Email Notification.
Batch Enroll
The Batch Enrollment tool provides the course editor with an easy to use wizard interface to batch create new user accounts and to batch enroll new and existing users into existing courses and groups.
To access the Batch Enroll wizard, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, click the Roster hyperlink (located under Course Management), and click the Batch Enroll hyperlink (located in the Roster Editor toolbar). The Batch Enrollment wizard appears. The batch process involves the following steps:
Upload the File
Field Name Description
Filename The batch process requires the import of a text file of your user account and/or course enrollment data in comma delimited (.txt) or tab delimited (.csv) format.
CSV files created on the Mac need to be saved in ―Windows‖ or ―MS DOS‖ format through the editor they are created with on the Mac.
Manage Tab 703
Field Name Description
Format At the end of the batch steps, you have an opportunity to save your settings which appear in the Format drop-down menu for future use.
To upload a file:
1. Type a file name or click the Browse button to browse your computer for your enrollment file. The Choose File dialog box appears.
2. Locate your file on your computer and click the Open button.
3. Once your file name appears in the Filename textbox, click the Upload button. The Step 1: File Format page appears.
Step 1: File Format
In this step, you are selecting the format settings for the file you want to upload.
Field Name Description
Delimiter The type of delimiter the batch file uses to separate data values.
File contains quoted values
Data values in a batch file that have quotes around them.
First row contains column labels
The batch file begins with column headers (labels) and the student and/or course data does not begin until the second line
To complete Step 1:
1. Select the type of delimiter the batch file uses to separate data values. If your batch file uses a delimiter symbol other than a comma or a tab, select Other, and enter the proper symbol in the corresponding textbox.
2. Select the file contains quoted values checkbox if your file contains quoted values.
3. Select the first row contains column labels checkbox if the first row of your file contains column labels.
4. Click the Continue button. The Step 2: File Preview screen appears.
Manage Tab 704
Step 2: File Preview
In Step 2, the first few records in the file are displayed as defined by the settings you selected in Step 1.
To complete Step 2:
1. Review the data to ensure it appears to be logically ordered. If you notice inconsistencies, click the Back button to change your settings.
2. Click the Continue button. The Step 3: Column Mappings screen appears.
Step 3: Column Mappings
In this step, you map your data to specific ANGEL® 7.3 account or enrollment variables. Within each ANGEL® 7.3 account or enrollment drop-down menu, ANGEL® 7.3 displays all of your data values for the first record of your batch file.
Manage Tab 705
Account Settings
Manage Tab 706
Account Settings determine the environment or system level settings for newly created accounts only and does not update existing accounts.
Field Name Description
Account ID The Account ID field determines the unique student ID or user ID ANGEL® 7.3 uses to identify the new user. Account ID values must be unique within the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Account IDs should be comprised of alpha-numeric characters (100 character limit) and may include underscore, dash, period, and @ special characters. Avoid using other special characters. Ensure Account IDs do not have leading or trailing spaces.
First Name and Last Name
The First Name and Last Name fields accept any character string (special characters included) up to 50 characters.
Email The Email field accepts any character string (special characters included) up to 255 characters.
Username The Username field determines the unique username the new user uses to log into the system. Username values must be unique within the ANGEL® 7.3 system.
Usernames should be comprised of alpha-numeric characters (100 character limit) and may include underscore, dash, period, and @ special characters. Avoid using other special characters. Ensure Usernames do not have leading or trailing spaces or apostrophes.
Password The Password field determines the user‘s initial password. Passwords may be comprised of any character string (special characters included) up to 15 characters in length.
Account Rights
The Account Rights field accepts any binary value between 1 and 64 - a value of 1 providing the lowest permission level (General) and a value of 64 providing the highest permission level (System Administrator). For more information on individual account rights levels, see the User Account Manager section of this document.
Account Status
The Account Status field indicates the status of the account. A value of 0 indicates Active, 1 indicates Disabled, and 2 indicates Expired.
Authentication
The Authentication field indicates whether the account is an internal ANGEL® 7.3 account or an external account such as an NT domain account or POP account. For ANGEL® 7.3 internal accounts the field should be set to a value of ―1‖. For all other account types the field should be set to a value of ―0‖.
Account Expiration
If a value is specified, the Account Expiration field determines the date on which the user account expires. This field accepts any SQL-supported date value (i.e. 4/31/2005 or 4-31-2005).
Phone The Phone field accepts any character string (special characters
Manage Tab 707
Field Name Description
included) up to 25 characters.
Photo URL The Photo URL field accepts any character string (special characters included) up to 255 characters. Provide a fully qualified URL or path.
Enrollment Settings
Enrollment Settings determine course or group level settings for new enrollments only and does not update existing enrollments or create new courses or groups. For more information regarding updating existing user accounts or enrollments, or batch course creation, refer to the section of this document titled Text Import Tool section.
Field Name Description
Course/Group ID The value mapped to the Course/Group ID field (if provided) determines the course the user is enrolled into.
Course/Group IDs should be comprised of alpha-numeric characters (100 character limit) and may include underscore, dash, period, and @ special characters. Avoid using other special characters. Ensure Course/Group IDs do not have leading or trailing spaces.
Course/Group Rights
The value mapped to the Course/Group Rights field (if provided) determines a unique rights level in each course a user is enrolled into.
The Course/Group Rights field accepts any binary value between 1 and 64 - a value of 1 providing the lowest permission level (Guest) and a value of 64 providing the highest permission level (Course/Group Administrator). These available rights levels are listed below.
A setting of Guest (1) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a guest. Default course/group restrictions: Guests cannot view the student portion of the roster, cannot access instructor or student tools, and can only view lesson content, chat rooms, or message boards that have been made viewable to users with a rights level of Guests (or lower).
A setting of Student/Member (2) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a student/member. Default course/group restrictions: Students/Members cannot access instructor tools, and can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Students/Members (or lower).
A setting of Team Leader (4) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a team leader. Default course/group restrictions: Team Leaders cannot access instructor tools, and can only view lesson content that has
Manage Tab 708
Field Name Description
been made available to users with a rights level of Team Leaders (or lower).
A setting of Course/Group Mentor (8) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of a mentor. Default course/group restrictions: Course/Group Mentors cannot access instructor tools, and can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Course/Group Mentors (or lower).
A setting of Course/Group Assistant (16) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of an assistant. Default course/group restrictions: Course/Group Assistants have limited access to instructor tools such as activity reports (under Lessons and Tools tabs), Course Gradebook, and Attendance Manager. Course/Group Assistants can only view lesson content that has been made available to users with a rights level of Course/Group Assistants (or lower).
A setting of Course/Group Editor (32) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of an editor. Default course/group restrictions: None - Course/Group Editors have full access to all instructor tools, reports, etc.
A setting of Course/Group Administrator (64) identifies that the user‘s primary role in the course or group is that of an administrator. Default course/group restrictions: None - Course/Group Administrators have full access to all instructor tools, reports, etc.
Title The value mapped to the Title field determines the user‘s title within the course (e.g. Student, Instructor, etc.). The Title field accepts any character string up to 50 characters.
Team The Team field determines the user‘s team association within the course or group. This field accepts any string value up to 100 characters.
Hidden The value mapped to the Hidden field determines whether the user is hidden or visible on the course roster. The Hidden field accepts a bit value of 0 or 1 (a value of 0 for visible and a value of 1 for hidden).
Locked The value mapped to the Locked field determines whether the user is locked in the course roster. Locked user accounts are not removed from the course roster during drop/add updates to the course roster. The Locked field accepts a bit value of 0 or 1 (a value of 0 for unlocked and a value of 1 for locked).
Disabled The value mapped to the Disabled field determines whether the user is disabled from viewing the course, but still part of the
Manage Tab 709
Field Name Description
course roster. The Disabled field accepts a bit value of 0 or 1 (a value of 0 for active and a value of 1 for disabled). The Disabled setting is useful in temporarily restricting student access to the course for reasons such as non-payment.
Status Code The Status Code field provides an administrator-definable field commonly used to record the user‘s status within a course. ANGEL® 7.3 does not use this value in any manner other than to store the value with other enrollment values. The Status Code field accepts integer values between 0 and approximately 32,000.
Billing ID The Billing ID field provides an administrator-definable field commonly used to record the user‘s Billing ID for a course. ANGEL® 7.3 does not use this value in any manner other than to store the value with other enrollment values. The Billing ID field accepts any character string up to 100 characters.
Enrollment Action The Enrollment Action field determines what action should be taken on this record. A value of 1 indicates Add and 0 indicates a Drop.
Profile Settings and Profile Viewable By Settings
Profile settings allow you to complete user profile information (if available) for new users and does not update existing profile information. All the viewable by settings can also be completed.
To complete Step 3:
1. Select the items that correspond to the correct Field Name from the Column drop-down list.
Using Account ID, Username, Password, First Name, and Last Name are required when using the Batch Enroll Tool.
2. Click the Continue button. The Step 4: Default Field Values page appears.
Manage Tab 710
Step 4: Default Field Values
The settings you provide in this step determine the default field values to be used for each account that does not provide field values. All field descriptions are listed in the Field Name and Description tables in Step 3.
The Account Group field allows you to associate all newly created accounts with a particular account group. For information regarding implementing account groups, refer to the section of this document titled User Account Manager.
Manage Tab 711
To complete Step 4:
1. Select the value in the Default column that should be used for each field. This would only need to be done if the data does not exist in your file.
2. Click the Continue button. The Step 5: Account Synchronization page appears.
Step 5: Account Synchronization
The Account Synchronization settings allow you to choose whether username and/or email values should be used (in addition to Account ID) when searching for existing user accounts.
Field Name Description
Username Selecting the Username checkbox includes the username field in the search criteria.
Email Selecting the Email checkbox includes the email field in the search criteria.
If an account does not Creates new accounts if they do not already exist.
Manage Tab 712
Field Name Description
exist, create one
Force password change on first login
Forces the user to change their initial password upon first login.
Username Format Max Size
Allows you to select the maximum character size.
Password Format Max Size
Allows you to select the maximum character size.
Format Codes \id = Account ID
\un = Username (password only)
\09 = Random number 0 through 9
\AZ or \az = Random alpha character (uppercase/lowercase)
\VV or \vv = Random vowel (uppercase/lowercase)
\FI or \fi = First initial (uppercase/lowercase)
\LI or \li = Last initial (uppercase/lowercase)
\FN or \fn = First name (uppercase/lowercase)
\LN or \ln = Last name (uppercase/lowercase)
\EM or \em = Email address (uppercase/lowercase)
To complete Step 5:
1. Select the Username and/or Email checkboxes if these fields should be included when searching for existing accounts.
Selecting these additional checkboxes provides an additional review against existing accounts to insure duplicate accounts are not created.
2. Select If an account does not exist, create one checkbox to create new accounts if they do not already exist.
3. Select the Force password change on first login checkbox to force the user to change their initial password upon first login.
4. Type a format code (using format code key) in the Username Format and Password Format textboxes to create the default format to be used for user accounts that do not have a username/password specified in the source data file.
5. Set a default maximum size for generated usernames and/or passwords using the Max drop-down menus.
6. Click the Continue button to proceed. The Step 6: Final Review page displays.
Step 6: Final Review
This page allows you to review your settings to confirm your data is properly matched to the appropriate fields. If you notice any inconsistencies, click the Back button to fix the
Manage Tab 713
data mappings. If everything is correct, click the Finish button to complete the batch enrollment/user account creation. You can optionally save the settings, before clicking Finish, for use in future batch enrollment/user account creations.
Batch Enrollment Results
Manage Tab 714
The Batch Enrollment Results page provides results summary and the ability to email a detailed report.
To view a detail of the report, click the View Detail Report hyperlink. This displays a table containing the information created during the Batch Enrollment.
To email the detail report, select the Email Detail Report checkbox, enter your email address in the Your Email text box and click the Send Mail button.
Click the Do Not Send Mail button to not send the detail report and to exit out of the wizard.
Export
To access the Export utility, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, click the Roster hyperlink (located under Course Management), and click the Export hyperlink (located in the Roster Editor toolbar). The File Download dialog box appears.
1. To save the roster.tsv file locally, click the Save button.
2. Select the location to save the document and change the name of the document if desired.
3. Click the Save button.
4. When the download is complete, you can close the Downloading File pop-up.
Manage Tab 715
Teams
The Teams section allows course editors to manage team enrollments and settings.
For more on this topic see “How to Create Team Projects” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
For more on this topic see “How to set Team Access rights for Lesson Content” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Manage Tab 716
To access the Teams Editor, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Teams hyperlink. The Teams Editor appears.
Teams Editor
The Teams Editor page allows the course editor to create teams, assign users, check for unassigned users, randomly generate teams and rebalance generated teams.
Add a Team
Manage Tab 717
For more on this topic see “How to Create Teams” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Field Name Description
Team Name of the team. This name must be unique within the course or group.
Description Extended description of the team.
Homepage The fully qualified URL of the homepage for team members.
Project URL The fully qualified URL of the project homepage to be made publicly available.
Hidden Indicates that the team should not be publicly displayed such as on the teams list and in the mail utility.
Disabled Indicates that the team should not be publicly displayed such as on the teams list and in the mail utility.
File Sharing Allows team members to upload files to a common team space to share.
Quota Specifies the maximum file space that a team may use for file sharing.
To add a new team:
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the Add a Team hyperlink (located on the Teams Editor toolbar). The New Teams editor appears.
2. Type a team name and description of the team. Complete the homepage (if applicable), project URL, hidden and disabled areas.
If you plan to use the Random Team Generator to create sub-teams, the maximum number of characters that can be used for a team name is 20 characters.
3. Select disabled or enabled from the File Sharing drop-down list and type megabyte (MB) quota, if applicable.
4. Click the Save button. The Add Team Member page appears.
5. Select users by checking the checkbox next to the desired users.
6. Click the Add Selected button.
7. When finished selecting members, click the Done button.
Unassigned Users
Using the Unassigned Users hyperlink provides a list of users that have not been assigned to any teams.
Manage Tab 718
To add unassigned users:
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the Unassigned Users hyperlink (located in the Team Editors toolbar). The Unassigned Users page appears.
The checkbox next to each name allows you to select one or more users and assign them to a particular team.
2. Select the users that you wish to add to a team by selecting the checkbox next to their name.
3. Select the team from the Add to Team … drop-down list.
If you wish to create a new team, select the Other button.
4. Click the Add Selected button to add the users to the selected team.
5. Click the Done button when finished.
Edit an Existing Team
Once a team has been created you need to add members, remove members, edit team settings, rename the team or delete a team.
Add Users
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the add users hyperlink underneath the name of the team that you wish to edit. The Add Team Members page appears.
Manage Tab 719
Users that are already a member of the team are represented by the person
icon ( ). Users that are not members of the team have a checkbox next to their name.
2. Select the checkbox(s) next to the user you wish to add to the team.
3. Click the Add Selected button to add the users.
4. When finished adding members, click the Done button.
Remove User
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the remove users hyperlink underneath the name of the team that you wish to edit. The team page appears.
2. Select the checkbox(s) next to the user you wish to remove from the team.
3. Click the Delete Selected button to remove the users.
4. When finished, click the Done button.
Edit Team Settings
This page allows you to edit settings. Refer to the Field Name and Description table in the Add a Team section for details on the fields.
Manage Tab 720
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the settings hyperlink underneath the name of the team that you wish to edit. The Team Settings page appears.
2. Make the desired changes to the team settings and click the Save button to save any changes. The Teams Editor page appears.
Rename Team
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the rename hyperlink underneath the name of the team that you wish to edit. The Rename Team page appears.
2. Type the new team name in the New Name textbox.
3. Select the update associated content checkbox to update any content that has been associated with this team.
4. Click the Save button.
Manage Tab 721
Delete Team
1. From the Teams Editor page, click the delete hyperlink underneath the name of the team that you wish to delete. A Permanently Delete this Team pop-up appears.
2. Click the OK button to delete the team. The team is deleted.
Random Team Generator
The Random Team Generator feature allows you to create random teams and sub-teams based on criteria you set. This functionality makes the team aspect of ANGEL® 7.3 more robust and easier to support courses with a high number of teams.
From the Teams Editor page, click the Random Team Generator hyperlink (located in the Teams Editor toolbar). The Criteria Selection page appears.
Criteria Selection
Manage Tab 722
Field Name Description
Root Name of Teams to be generated
A number is appended to the end, i.e. Root-01, Root-02 when the teams are actually generated. The wizard errors if the root name plus the appended number is greater than 20 characters. Team names should be comprised of alpha-numeric characters and may include underscore, dash, spaces, or period special characters. However, we recommend that unique names be used due to the file structure naming convention in ANGEL® 7.3, i.e. Team-01 and Team 01 have the same file name Team_01. Others special characters should not be used.
Limit number of teams to create
Providing a numeric value will limit the number of teams that are created.
Limit maximum and minimum users per team
Providing a numeric value limits minimum and maximum number of users that are assigned per team.
Maximum number of users per team
Maximum number of users assigned per team.
Minimum number of users per team
Minimum number of users assigned per team.
Select users with rights of
Selects users with the specified rights.
Entire Roster Selects users from the entire roster such as students, instructors, team leaders, course assistants, etc.
Selected Teams Selects users from the specified teams.
Only include users who have accessed the course
Selects only those users that have accessed the course. Does not include users that have enrolled in the course but have never accessed the course.
Create as sub-teams Allow the creation of sub-teams for users if Selected Teams is specified.
From the Selection Criteria page:
1. Type the Root Name of the Teams to be generated.
2. Determine the Criteria for the teams by selecting the Limit the number of teams to create or Limit the maximum and minimum number of team members, if applicable.
3. Type the maximum and minimum number of team members, if applicable.
4. Determine the user pool by selecting the user rights checkbox.
5. Determine where you are pulling user information by selecting Entire Roster, Selected Teams or Users not enrolled on a team.
Manage Tab 723
6. Select Only include users who have accessed the course checkbox if you do not want users other than those in the course roster.
7. Select Create as sub-teams checkbox if you want to create sub-teams of the existing teams.
8. Click the Next button. The Adjustment Page appears.
Adjustment Page
The Adjustment Page provides the opportunity to move users from team to team, unassign users, or move unassigned users to a particular team.
From the Adjustment Page:
1. To move the users, highlight the user name and select a new team from the Move to list underneath the team or unassigned users.
2. Once you have adjusted the teams, click the Generate Teams button. The Team Generator Results page appears confirming the teams created and the members on each team.
Manage Tab 724
3. Click the Continue button. The Team Editor page appears.
Rebalance Generated Teams
The Rebalance Generated Teams feature provides an option to move students from one team to another or add new users to teams. This applies to teams that have been generated by the Random Team Generator.
For more on this topic see “How to Rebalance Teams” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
From the Teams Editor page, click the Rebalance Generated Teams hyperlink (located in the Teams Editor toolbar). The Rebalancing page appears.
From the Rebalancing page:
1. Select your team name from the Select the set of teams to balance drop-down list.
2. Click the Next button. The Random Team Generator Adjustment Page appears.
Manage Tab 725
3. To move a user to a different team, highlight the user‘s name and select the new team from the list beneath the team name.
Hold the ‗Control‘ key on your keyboard (or the Apple key on a Macintosh) and click to select multiple users.
4. When you have completed adjusting the teams, click the Generate Teams button. The Team Generator Results page appears confirming the team members and the teams to which they are assigned.
5. Click the Continue button. The Teams Editor page appears.
Attendance
The Attendance section allows the course editor to take attendance and review attendance information. To access the Attendance Manager, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Attendance hyperlink. The Attendance Manager appears.
Attendance Manager
The Attendance Manager allows course editors and course assistants to track student attendance for classroom and online sessions. The Attendance Manager optionally supports the manual logging of student attendance as described below.
Course editors/assistants can retrieve and share an automatically generated daily PIN to allow students to mark themselves as present (using the Attendance page component from the Edit Page component on the Course tab). The PIN is randomly generated and displays on the Course page. This PIN is randomly generated each day
Manage Tab 726
for the purpose of allowing students to mark themselves as present. You may optionally provide this PIN to your students (who attend the class session) and ask them to update their attendance using the My Attendance course tool (described later in this document) to eliminate the need to manually log student attendance.
How to Log Student Attendance
1. From the Attendance Manager, click the date hyperlink for the date you want to enter student attendance. The Attendance Editor for the specific date appears on the screen.
You may optionally click a different Month or Year hyperlink, before completing the above step, to change the view of dates to a different month or year.
Manage Tab 727
2. Based on the Legend displayed, select a status for each student from the Status drop-down menu.
You may optionally select a default value from the Default drop-down menu to set a default status for all students for the particular date.
3. Optionally type a note to the student in the Notes field.
4. Click the Save button.
Manage Tab 728
Preferences
The Preferences utility allows course editors or course assistants to configure which days of the week the Attendance Manager should display. In addition, course editors/assistants may modify the default attendance status codes and labels by replacing the values in the appropriate fields. Click the Save button to save your changes.
To reset the Attendance Manager to use the default status codes, click the Use Defaults button.
Export
Manage Tab 729
Click the Export hyperlink to export the attendance data in a tab or comma delimited format. Tab and comma delimited formats can be easily opened and viewed in any standard spreadsheet program.
Mode/Sort Views
The Mode selector allows course editors/assistants to toggle between the default calendar-based grid view and a list-based list view. The Sort selector allows course editors/assistants to alter the Grid-based or List-based views to sort by Name, Username, or Date.
Click on the name or username of a student to view all attendance records and notes for that student.
Question Bank Manager
The Question Bank Manager provides a central interface to allow the course editor to create, edit, categorize and manage questions for use in any assessment in the course.
Manage Tab 730
How to Create/Rename a Folder in the Question Bank Manager
To create/rename a folder in the Question Bank Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Question Bank Manager hyperlink.
3. Perform one of the following:
If Then
You are adding a new folder
1. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the folder or location you want to add the new folder.
2. Click the Add subfolder hyperlink.
3. Type a title for the folder and click the Save button.
You are renaming an existing folder
1. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the folder you want to rename.
Manage Tab 731
If Then
2. Click the Rename hyperlink.
3. Type a new title for the folder and click the Save button.
How to Delete a Folder in the Question Bank Manager
To delete a folder in the Question Bank Manager:
5. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
6. Click the Question Bank Manager hyperlink.
4. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the folder or location you want to add the new folder.
5. Click the Delete hyperlink.
6. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
How to Create/Edit an Assessment using the Question Bank
Manager
To create/edit an assessment using the Question Bank Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Question Bank Manager hyperlink.
3. Perform one of the following:
Manage Tab 732
If Then
You are adding a new question
1. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the folder or location you want to add the new question.
2. Click the Add question hyperlink.
3. Click the hyperlink for the question type you want to add.
4. Complete the fields on the Question Editor and click the Save button. Note: For more information regarding how to use the Question Editor for each question type, see the section of this document titled Creating Assessment Questions.
You are editing an existing question
1. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the question you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit hyperlink.
3. Complete the appropriate changes on the Question Editor and click the Save button. Note: For more information regarding how to use the Question Editor for each question type, see the section of this document titled Creating Assessment Questions.
How to Delete a Question from the Question Bank Manager
To delete a question from the Question Bank Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Question Bank Manager hyperlink.
3. Click the down arrow icon ( ) next to the question you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete hyperlink.
Manage Tab 733
5. Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
How to Rearrange Questions in the Question Bank Manager
To rearrange a question in the Question Bank Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Question Bank Manager hyperlink.
3. Click and hold on the question and drag it to a different folder or location.
Environment Settings
The Environment Settings area (located in the middle column) contains tools for changing several settings for your course including course tab names, enrollment and access settings, and the course theme.
General Course Settings
The General Course Settings editor allows course editors to view and change general course information and settings. To access the General Course Settings, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the General Course Settings hyperlink.
Course Data Tab
The Course Data tab allows the user to edit the information concerning the course
Manage Tab 734
General Information
General Information contains the title, category, keywords and description for the course as well as then the course begins and ends. Enabling Standards and Objectives and setting the default language for the course are set in the General Information section. General Information settings can be changed at a later time using the General Course Settings tool located under the Manage tab within the course.
1. Type or change the name for the course in the Title field.
If there are several sections with the same name, you want to place a unique identifier for each section after the name of the course (e.g., Introduction to Engineering Technology – section B101, Introduction to Engineering Technology – section B102, etc.). This aids the instructor who may be teaching several sections of the same course and assist in differentiating between sections.
2. Select an appropriate category from the Category drop-down list.
Manage Tab 735
Keywords (optional) can be added to aid the searching capabilities. Students and faculty may use these keywords to locate specific classes through the Course Search utility.
3. Provide a description in the Description field (optional) to specify additional information concerning the course and the course objectives.
4. Select a Course Begins and Course Ends date (optional) to show the dates for the class when viewed through the Course Search utility.
To enforce the Course Begins date so that students cannot access the course until the specified date requires the use of the environment variable ENFORCE_START_DATE with a value of 1. To enforce the Course Ends date so that students cannot access the course after the specified date requires the user of ENFORCE_END_DATE with a value of 1. For additional information on Environment Variables see the section of this document titled Environment Variables.
5. Enabling standards (optional) allows the instructor the ability to map course content to institution standards that have been added to the ANGEL® 7.3 environments by the standards administrator. Standards may not be provided by your institution. Information for mapping standards to course content is provided in the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management.
6. Enabling objectives allows the instructor the ability to map objectives to course content. Objectives are created by the instructor at the course level and may be tied to institution standards. . Information for creating and mapping objectives to standards and course content is provided in the section of this document titled Learning Outcomes Management.
7. Provide a URL for a stylesheet in the Stylesheet field (optional).
8. Redirect URL redirects the students to the provided URL (optional).
9. Redirect Target determines if the URL the users are being directed to opens in a new window, parent window, top window, etc. (optional).
10. Language options can be selected. Current languages available are English and Spanish.
Access Settings
Access Settings allows the user to determine who has access to the course and if the course can be seen in Find a Course searches.
Manage Tab 736
Member Access determines if students or members of the course have access or if the editor only has access. Setting the Member Access to editor only provides access to the instructor but no students. This option can be used before the start of a semester, term or quarter to allow the instructor time to create course content and structure the online course. Once the course is ready for student access the instructor can change access to the course to All Members under the Manage tab > General Course Settings in the course. Additional information on how to use the General Course Settings is available in the section of this document titled Manage Tab.
Guest Access determines whether guests are allowed to access the course.
o The Anonymous setting allows users that have not logged in to the s environment access to the course. Once in the course the anonymous user does not have access to content or student information unless the instructor has set the Viewable By settings to Everyone. Additional information on Viewable by is available in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
o The Authenticated setting allows users that have logged in to the ANGEL® 7.3 environment access to the course. Once in the course the authenticated user does not have access to content or student information unless the instructor has set the Viewable By settings to Authenticated Guest. Additional information on Viewable by is available in the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
o The Search Engines option allows users to set if the course can be located using the Find a Course searches. No disables the search for the course and Yes enables the search for the course.
For more on this topic see “How to activate/deactivate a course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Enrollment Dates Tab
Enrollment Settings allow you to set an enrollment PIN and designate enrollment Start and End dates for the course. Enrollment Settings can be changed at a later time using the General Course Settings tool under the Manager tab within the course.
Manage Tab 737
For information regarding modifying General Course Settings, refer to the section of this document titled General Course Settings.
Share the Enrollment PIN with users to allow them to use the Course Search tool to self-enroll in the course. Courses that are hidden from the Course Search tool are not available for PIN self-enrollment. The Enrollment PIN specified by ANGEL® 7.3 may be changed prior to saving the course information.
Leaving the enrollment PIN blank allows anyone to self-enroll for the course without having to be invited or added by an editor in the course.
The Enrollment Begins and Enrollment Ends fields allow course editors to specify an enrollment period for the course.
Enrollment beginning and ending dates only affect self-enrollment. Course editors are still able to add and remove users at any time. Setting the end date to a date in the past disables the PIN enrollment feature.
Standards Tab
The Standards tab provides an option for instructors to map their course to provided standards. Standards that have been published by your institution show in a list as available standards. Availability of standards is controlled by your ANGEL® 7.3 Standards Administrator.
Manage Tab 738
To activate a standard for a course:
1. Click on the Standards tab.
2. Expand the desired standard by clicking on the plus sign ( ).
3. Select the standards folder checkbox to select all standards contained within the folder. Optionally, the user can expand a standard folder to select specific standard items.
4. Click the Save button when all standards have been selected.
Objectives Tab
The Objectives tab allows the instructor the opportunity to create objectives for the course.
To add a course objective:
1. Click on the Objectives tab.
2. Click the arrow ( ) next to the Course Objectives folder. The Add New Outcome and Add New Folder hyperlinks appear.
Manage Tab 739
3. To close the window, click on the X icon ( ).
If Then
Adding a New Outcome
1. Click the Add New Outcome hyperlink.
2. Provide the Objective Outcome in the text field.
Adding a New Folder
1. Click the Add New Folder hyperlink.
2. Enter the name of the folder in the prompt.
3. Click the OK button.
Folders can be used to organize objectives into similar groups.
To edit, move or delete a course objective:
1. Click on the Objectives tab.
2. Click the arrow ( ) next to the created objective. The Edit, Move Up, Move Down and Delete hyperlinks appear.
3. To close the window, click on the X icon ( ).
If Then
Add New Outcome
1. Click the Add New Outcome hyperlink.
2. Add the Objective in the Objective text field.
3. Select the Standards tab to select the
Manage Tab 740
standard to map the objective.
4. Click the Save button.
Add New Folder
1. Click the Add New Folder hyperlink.
2. Type a name in the prompt.
3. Click the OK button.
Editing an objective
1. Click the Edit hyperlink.
2. Modify or change the text of the objective in the text field.
3. Click the Save button when complete.
Moving an objective up
1. Click the Move Up hyperlink.
2. Continue clicking the Move Up hyperlink until the objective has moved to the correct location.
Moving an objective down
1. Click the Move Down hyperlink.
2. Continue clicking the Move Down hyperlink until the objective has moved to the correct location.
Deleting an objective
1. Click the Delete hyperlink.
2. On the prompt to confirm the Delete this outcome? Click the OK button to delete. Click the Cancel button to cancel the delete of the objective,
Course Theme Selector
The Course Theme Selector tool allows course editors to select, edit or create a custom theme for the course. To access the Course Theme Selector, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Course Theme Selector hyperlink. For information regarding how to use the Course Theme Selector, refer to the section of this document titled Theme Selector.
Manage Tab 741
Tab Settings
The Tab Settings utility allows course editors to rename, disable and/or redirect course tabs to another web page. Course editors may also specify whether to display the course welcome page and may change or redirect the start tab.
For more on this topic see “How to Customize Tabs” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Manage Tab 742
To access the Tab Settings, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Tab Settings hyperlink.
Field Name Description
Start Tab Specifies which course tab the user views upon entering the course. The default start tab is Courses (Home).
Start URL Type a fully qualified web address in the Start URL field to display an external web page instead of the default start tab.
Home Specifies the starting tab displayed when a user enters the course.
Calendar Calendar tab. Contains the course calendar.
Content Lessons tab. Contains all the course content items.
Resources Resources tab containing course syllabus, course resources and institutional resources.
In Touch Communicate tab. All course communication items are contained on this tab.
Manage Tab 743
Field Name Description
Reports Reports tab. All course reports are available on this tab.
Agents Automate tab. This tab contains the agents console.
Tools Manage tab. This tab contains tools to manage your course.
Environment Variables
The Environment Variables utility allows course editors to add, view, edit, and delete a wide range of available environment variables which can modify aspects of the course environment for one or more users. Examples of environment variable uses within a course include: changing the names of one or more tools, defining values for custom tokens, and updating lesson icons based on student progress. Environment variables can be found in Appendix VIII.
To access the Course Environment Variables page, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Environment Variables hyperlink. The Course Environment Variables page appears.
Search ANGEL® 7.3 Learning Knowledge Base (http://support.angellearning.com) using keywords ―environment variable‖ for example uses of environment variables within a course.
Course Environment Variables
You may see variables listed that have been set by your ANGEL® 7.3 system administrator
Field Name Description
Manage Tab 744
Field Name Description
Add a Variable The Add a Variable hyperlink allows the course editor to add a new variable.
User Specifies which user‘s variables are being viewed.
Other This button allows you enter another users username
Show Values Selecting this checkbox shows the values of the environment variables listed.
Edit/Delete The Edit and Delete buttons allows you to edit or delete the variable next to the buttons.
Add a Variable
1. From the Course Environment Variables page, select all users from the drop-down menu, select a particular user from the drop-down menu or specify another user by clicking the Other button.
2. Click the Add a Variable hyperlink. The Course Environment Variable Editor appears.
3. Add the environment variable in the Variable Name text area. (A selection of environment variables is listed in Appendix VIII of this document).
4. Provide the variable value in the Variable Value text area. (A selection of environment variables is listed in Appendix VIII of this document).
5. Click the Save button.
Edit a Variable
1. From the Course Environment Variables page, click the Edit button next to the variable. The Course Environment Variable Editor appears.
Manage Tab 745
2. Type changes (A selection of environment variables is listed in Appendix VIII of this document) and click the Save button.
Delete a Variable
1. From the Course Environment Variables page, click the Delete button next to the variable. The Course Environment Variable Editor appears. A Permanently Delete this Variable pop-up appears.
2. Click the OK button to delete the variable. The variable is deleted from the Course Environment Variables page.
Mail Settings
Mail settings allow the user to set the defaults for course mail. These settings are based on the rights of the user within the course and are defined using the Minimum Rights drop-down list for each item.
Features
Item Description
Send Internet E-mail
Provides the option to forward course mail to a user‘s internet email address. A checkbox selection displays based in the rights specified under Minimum Rights. Default all users can request a course mail message be sent to a user‘s internet email account.
Send to All Faculty/Leaders Provides the option to send course mail to all faculty members at once. By default all users can send course mail to all faculty members.
Send to All Students/Members Provides the option to send course mail to all students/members at once. By default all users can send course mail to all students/members.
Send to Teams Provides the option to send course mail to all Teams. By default all users can send to teams in a course.
Send to Individuals
Provides the option to send course mail to all individuals in the course; students and faculty. By default all users can send course mail to individual course students or faculty.
Reply to All This option provide the opportunity for a user to elect ―Reply to All‖ when responding to course mail.
Manage Tab 746
Item Description
Message Options
Do not disclose recipients
If selected, the default changes to not disclose who the course mail has been sent to.
Send a copy to each recipient‘s Internet email
If selected the default changes to send a copy of the course mail message to each user‘s internet email account.
Send a copy to each recipient‘s Mentor if known
If selected a copy of the course mail message is delivered to the user‘s mentor/advisor.
Data Management
The Data Management area (located in the right column) contains tools for managing course files, backing up and restoring your course, importing and exporting content and maintaining the data in your course.
Manage Tab 747
Course Files Manager
The Course Files Manager tool enables course editors to manage course files. All files associated with the course such as syllabus, course content, mail, discussions, teams, etc. are located in the Course Files Manager. This allows the course editor immediate access to any files necessary for the course. To access the Course Files page, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Course Files Manager hyperlink. The Course Files page appears.
Course Files
The Course Files page allows course editors to add content, and download, rename, copy, move, zip or delete course folders and the files within those folders.
Add Content to Course Files
The Add Content hyperlink displays the Add Content page allowing the course editor to create a folder, create a file, upload files, and drag-n-drop. Refer to the section of this document titled Add Content for more details.
Download All
The Download All option allows you to download all files listed in the Course Files area. All files are downloaded in a ZIP formatted file and can be archived on your local computer.
To download all:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the Download All hyperlink located in the toolbar. A File Download dialog appears.
4. Click the Save button. The Save As dialog appears.
Manage Tab 748
5. The file name is pre-populated with the course_id.zip which can be changed to a course name if desired. Click the Save button. Depending on the size of your course files, this download may take a few minutes.
Download File
You may opt to download just a particular portion of the Course Files using the Download hyperlink. This allows you to archive a particular file to your local computer.
To download a file:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the download hyperlink located underneath the name of the file you want to download. A File Download dialog appears.
4. Click the Save button. The Save As dialog appears.
5. The file name is pre-populated with the file_name.zip which can be changed if desired. Click the Save button. Depending on the size of your file the download may take a few minutes.
Rename File
The Rename option allows you rename a file. Caution should be used when renaming course files.
To rename a file:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the rename hyperlink located underneath the file you want to rename. The Rename Folder page appears.
4. Type a new name in the Folder Name field.
5. Click the OK button.
Copy File
The Copy option allows you to make a copy of the specific file or folder.
To copy a folder:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the copy hyperlink located underneath the file or folder you want to copy. The Copy Folder (File) page appears.
4. Type a new folder name in the Folder Name field.
5. Click the OK button. A new folder/file is added to the list of items in the Course Files area.
Manage Tab 749
Move File
The Move file option allows you to move a file or folder to a different folder in within the Course Files area.
To move a folder/file:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the move hyperlink underneath the name of the folder/file you want to move. The Move Folder page appears.
4. From the list of available folder(s) click the name of the folder to which the file/folder should be moved.
5. Click the OK button. The file is moved to the specified location.
Zip File
The Zip file option allows you to zip the selected folder. This ZIP file then resides in the Course Files.
To zip a file:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the zip hyperlink located underneath the folder you want to zip. The Zip Folder page appears asking if you are sure you want to zip this folder.
Manage Tab 750
4. By default, the delete folder after zipping checkbox is checked. If you want to delete the folder after the zip process is complete, leave this checked, otherwise uncheck the checkbox.
5. Click the OK button. The selected file is zipped and placed in the Course Files.
Delete File
The Delete file option allows you to delete files from the Course Files area.
Caution should be used when using the Delete file option.
To delete a file:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Course Files Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. Click the delete hyperlink underneath the name of the folder you want to delete. The Delete Folder page appears
4. You are asked if you are sure you want to delete this folder and all its contents. If you are sure, click the OK button.
Backup/Restore
The Backup/Restore tool allows course editors to backup and restore all course content and student data. Course backups are stored on and can be easily restored from the ANGEL® 7.3 server. Backup files can also be downloaded to course editor‘s local computer as an additional safeguard.
For more on this topic see “How to Backup a Course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
To access the Backup/Restore page, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Backup/Restore hyperlink. The Backup/Restore page appears.
Manage Tab 751
How to Backup a Course
1. From the Backup/Restore utility, click the Backup Now button. A message appears stating ―Creating backup. This may take several minutes…‖ Once the backup is complete, a ―Backup Complete‖ message appears on the screen.
2. Click the OK button. Notice the Backup/Restore utility displays the date, time, and size of the latest course backup.
3. To download a copy of the backup file, click the Download Backup button.
4. When prompted, click the Save button, select a location to save the course backup file, and click the Save button.
Once the backup file has begun downloading, you may close the Downloading File popup window.
How to Restore a Course
Restoring a course from a previous backup overwrites all changes and activity performed in the course since the date of the last course backup. The date and time of the last course backup are listed directly on the Backup/Restore page. As a precaution before restoring to an active course, consider exporting the course as a safeguard. For information on exporting an ANGEL® 7.3 course, refer to the sections of this document titled Export Wizard and ANGEL® 7.3 Archive.
1. From the Backup/Restore page, click the Restore Backup button. A message appears stating ―This will destroy everything done since the date of the last backup. Are you sure you want to do this?‖
2. Click the OK button. The restore process may take several minutes depending on the size of the course. A message appears reporting the deletion of the existing course data and importing of the backup file course data.
3. Once the restore process is complete, scroll to the bottom of the page and click the OK button.
Manage Tab 752
Import Wizard
The Import Wizard utility allows course editors to import different types of content including ANGEL® 7.3 course archives, WebCT and Blackboard course exports, IMS content packages, calendar events and announcements, WebCT question banks, and standard zip files.
To access the Import Wizard, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Import Wizard hyperlink. The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
Content Package
The Content Package import utility allows course editors to import ANGEL® 7.3 course archives, IMS/SCORM content packages (including uniquely formatted WebCT and Blackboard export files), and archived content from a standard zip file.
How to Import an ANGEL® 7.2 Course Archive
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package Upload page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the ANGEL® 7.3 Archive file and click Open.
For information on exporting an ANGEL® 7.3 course, refer to the sections of this document titled Export Wizard and ANGEL® 7.3 Archive.
6. You may optionally select the Overwrite existing file checkbox to overwrite any previously uploaded .zip file (source file) with the same filename. Selecting this option does not overwrite existing or previously imported lesson items.
7. Click the Upload File button once. An Upload Successful message appears when the upload process is complete.
Manage Tab 753
The upload process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
8. Click the OK button to continue. The Import Settings menu appears.
9. Select the checkboxes next to the items you want to import.
Select the top-level Content and/or User Data checkboxes to automatically select all sub items under each top-level category. You may optionally select or clear specific items to tailor the import settings.
10. Click the Import Data button. An ―Importing data‖ message appears on the screen.
11. Once the import process has completed, scroll to the bottom of the screen and click the OK button.
For more on this topic see “How to Populate Course Content into a Course Shell” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
How to Import an IMS Content Package
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package Upload page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the IMS content package file and click Open.
You may optionally select the Overwrite existing file checkbox to overwrite any previously uploaded .zip file (source file) with the same filename. Selecting this option does not overwrite existing or previously imported lesson items.
6. Click the Upload File button once. An Upload Successful message appears when the upload process is complete.
The upload process may take up to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
7. Click the OK button to continue. The Import Options menu appears.
8. Select the checkboxes next to the items you want to import.
Select the top-level Content and/or User Data checkboxes to automatically select all sub items under each top-level category. You may optionally select or clear specific items to tailor the import settings.
Manage Tab 754
9. Click the Import Data button. An ―Importing data‖ message appears on the screen.
10. Once the import process has completed, scroll to the bottom of the screen and click the OK button.
How to Import a Blackboard Course Export
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package Upload page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the Blackboard export file and click the Open button.
You may optionally select the Overwrite existing file checkbox to overwrite any previously uploaded .zip file (source file) with the same filename. Selecting this option does not overwrite existing or previously imported lesson items.
6. Click the Upload File button once. An Upload Successful message appears when the upload process is complete.
The upload process may take up to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
7. Click the OK button to continue. The Blackboard Import Settings menu appears.
8. From Add To section, select the Lessons directory you want to import into.
The default setting of Top-level imports the file contents to the root level of the Lessons tab. Select New Folder and provide a new folder name to import the file contents into a new folder. Select the Existing Folder option (if applicable) and select an existing folder from the drop-down menu to import the file contents into an existing folder.
9. Select the checkboxes next to the additional items (discussion board postings, announcements items, calendar items) you want to import.
10. Select the Remove unused files after import checkbox to remove unused files from ANGEL® 7.3 once the import is complete.
If the above option is not selected, following the import, the unused files can be located in the root level of the Associated File Manager (Lessons tab > Utilities > Associated File Manager). For more information about using the Associated File Manager, refer to the section of this document titled Associated File Manager.
11. Click the OK button once. Once the import has completed, an ―Import Complete‖ message appears on the screen.
Manage Tab 755
The import process may take up to several minutes depending on the number of entries in the source data file.
12. Click the OK button and navigate to the Lessons tab to view the imported content.
Depending on the structure of the source course export file, you may need to rearrange some of the imported content. For more information about rearranging course content, refer to the sections of this document titled Rearrange and Move Item.
How to Import a WebCT Course Export
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package Upload page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the WebCT Export file and click the Open button.
You may optionally select the Overwrite existing file checkbox to overwrite any previously uploaded .zip file (source file) with the same filename. Selecting this option does not overwrite existing or previously imported lesson items.
6. Click the Upload File button once. An Upload Successful message appears when the upload process is complete.
The upload process may take up to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
7. Click the OK button to continue. The WebCT Import Settings menu appears.
If the Zip Import Wizard menu appears instead of the WebCT Import Settings menu (displayed above), this is an indication that you are importing a WebCT export file that was exported either using an older version of the WebCT IMS export utility or by other means. For best results, we recommend exporting the WebCT content using the latest version of the WebCT IMS export utility.
For information regarding importing WebCT content using the Zip Import Wizard menu (instead of the WebCT Import Settings menu), refer to the section of this document titled How to Import a Standard Zip File.
8. From Add To section, select the Lessons directory you want to import into.
The default setting of Top-level imports the file contents to the root level of the Lessons tab. Select New Folder and provide a new folder name to import the file contents into a new folder. Select the Existing Folder option (if applicable) and select an existing folder from the drop-down menu to import the file contents
Manage Tab 756
into an existing folder.
9. Select the Add system links checkbox if your import file contains WebCT system link items (such as links to student gradebook, chat rooms, etc.) that you want to import along with the course data.
10. Select the Add chat rooms checkbox if your import file contains chat rooms that you want to import along with the course data.
11. Select the Remove unused files after import checkbox to remove unused files from ANGEL® 7.3 once the import is complete.
If the above option is not selected, following the import the unused files can be located in the root level of the Associated File Manager (Lessons tab > Utilities > Associated File Manager). For more information about using the Associated File Manager, refer to the section of this document titled Associated File Manager.
12. Click the OK button once. Once the import has completed, an ―Import Complete‖ message appears on the screen.
The import process may take up to several minutes depending on the number of entries in the source data file.
13. Click the OK button and navigate to the Lessons tab to view the imported content.
Depending on the structure of the source course export file, you may need to rearrange some of the imported content. For more information about rearranging course content, refer to the sections of this document titled Rearrange and Move Item.
How to Import Respondus QTI Questions
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package Upload page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the Zip file and click the Open button.
Respondus questions must be exported in IMS QTI format (in Respondus, select IMS QTI Personality > Preview & Publish > Save) prior to import into ANGEL® 7.3.
Optionally select the Overwrite existing files checkbox if you are repeating the upload and want to overwrite the previously uploaded archive file. Selecting this option does not overwrite existing or previously imported lesson items.
Manage Tab 757
6. Click the Upload File button once. An Upload Successful message appears when the upload process is complete.
The upload process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
7. Click the OK button to continue. The next screen allows you to select where you want the items added to your course or group.
8. Once you have selected where you want the item, click the OK button.
9. When the import process is complete, click OK. Your item appears under the Lessons tab in the area you specified.
How to Import a Standard Zip File
The import utility also supports the import of standard zip archive files. Imported zip files are extracted to the Associated File Manager for the Lessons tab and recreate the file structure of an imported zip file on the server, preserving all relative references within the content. The tool adds each folder as an ANGEL® 7.3 folder under the Lessons tab of the course.
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package Upload page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the Zip file and click the Open button.
Optionally select the Overwrite existing files checkbox if you are repeating the upload and want to overwrite the previously uploaded archive file. Selecting this option does not overwrite existing or previously imported lesson items.
6. Click the Upload File button once. An Upload Successful message appears when the upload process is complete.
The upload process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
7. Click the OK button to continue. The next screen allows you to choose which items to display on your ANGEL® 7.3 lessons page and which items to hide.
8. Under the category Search for these file extensions… select which items from the following you would like to appear on your course lessons page:
HTML files (files ending in the extension.htm or .html)
Document files (files ending in the extensions .doc, .pdf, .pps, .ppt, .rtf, .txt, or .xls)
Graphic files (files ending in the extensions .bmp, .gif, .jpg, or .png)
Manage Tab 758
Multimedia files (files ending in the extensions .avi, .mp3, .mpg, .mpeg, .mov, .rm, or .swf)
Other files – in this text box you may enter a comma separated list of file extensions for files to display
Regardless of which file types are selected, all files in the zip archive are imported, however only selected file types are displayed under the Lessons tab.
Graphic and media files are not selected by default as they are commonly used as associated, embedded, or linked files that do not require being displayed as individual items under the Lessons tab.
In the event that you inadvertently add or fail to add a file during the import process, you can easily hide, delete, or add the file following the import process. For information on hiding, deleting, or adding items under the Lessons tab, refer to the sections of this document titled Common Lesson Settings and Associated File Manager.
9. Under the section Search in these folders… select which folders should be displayed as lesson folders in ANGEL® 7.3. For example, if you have an ―Images‖ folder that is referenced by other lessons pages but that should not be displayed, clear this folder.
10. Click the OK button. The Zip Import Wizard screen appears, displaying a list of files, folders and sub-folders included in the zip archive.
11. Select your preference of destination directory under the Add To section.
The default setting of Top-level imports the file contents to the root level of the Lessons tab. Select New Folder and provide a new folder name to import the file contents into a new folder. Select the Existing Folder option (if applicable) and select an existing folder from the drop-down menu to import the file contents into an existing folder.
You may optionally clear the Use relative paths checkbox (not recommended) if you want the resulting ANGEL® 7.3 link items to use absolute URLs to link to the imported content items.
12. Optionally clear the checkbox next to any import items that you do not want an ANGEL® 7.3 link item created for.
For example, if your zip file includes a lesson module with several HTML files, you may prefer the Import Wizard create only a single ANGEL® 7.3 link item to point to the start page for the lesson module (e.g. lesson1_index.html), assuming the start page for the lesson module provides links to navigate to the associated pages.
Regardless of which items are selected, all files and folders listed are accessible in the Associated File Manager, however only those items that have been selected are added to the specified Lessons directory.
13. Optionally rename the titles, in the Title field, for any of the import items.
14. Optionally change the order in which the import items are listed by changing the numeric values in two or more of the Order fields for any of the import items.
Manage Tab 759
15. Optionally change the location of the import item by typing a different folder name in the Folder field for any of the import items.
16. Click the OK button to proceed with the import. An update page displays with the results of the import.
17. Click the OK button and navigate to the Lessons tab to view the imported content.
Depending on the structure of the source course export file, you may need to rearrange some of the imported content. For more information about rearranging course content, refer to the sections of this document titled Rearrange and Move Item.
How to Re-Import a Content Package
The Import Wizard supports the re-importing of previously uploaded content packages (WebCT, Blackboard, IMS, or standard Zip format) without requiring the content package file to be re-uploaded into the course. This can be useful to continue an incomplete import process, or as a means to reset the imported content in the case that the previously imported content has been altered or deleted.
To re-import a previously uploaded content package:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Content Package hyperlink. The Content Package upload screen appears with an option to Re-Import a Package.
The Re-Import a Package option only displays if a content package has been previously uploaded to the course. Previously uploaded content packages are not listed in the Re-Import a Package option if the Remove unused files after import option was used during the initial import process.
4. Select the content package you want to import from the Archive Directory drop-down menu.
5. Click the Re-Import button. An Import Settings screen appears based on the type of content package you chose to re-import.
6. Specify your import settings preferences.
For information on import settings, see the appropriate section above regarding importing WebCT, Blackboard, IMS, or standard Zip format content packages.
7. Click the OK button once. Once the import has completed, an ―Import Complete‖ message appears on the screen.
Manage Tab 760
The import process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on the number of entries in the source data file.
8. Click the OK button and navigate to the Lessons tab to view the imported content.
Depending on the structure of the source course export file, you may need to rearrange some of the imported content. For more information about rearranging course content, refer to the sections of this document titled Rearrange and Move Items.
Calendar and Announcements
The Calendar and Announcements import utility allows course editors to import calendar entries from any tab or comma delimited text file (compatible with WebCT® calendar export files) into the course calendar or announcements section.
To import calendar entries or announcements:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Calendar and Announcements hyperlink. The Calendar and Announcements page appears.
4. Click the Browse button. A Choose file dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Locate and select the delimited text file and click the Open button.
6. Select the appropriate format from the File Format drop down list.
Importing WebCT calendar export files, use the default CSV file format setting.
7. Select either Calendar or Announcements from the Add to drop-down menu to specify the destination for the imported items.
8. Select the appropriate values from the Column Settings drop-down menus only if you are importing a custom-formatted text file. Always use the default values when importing WebCT calendar export files.
9. Click the Import File button once. An Import Complete message appears when the upload process is complete.
The upload process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on your connection speed and the size of the text file.
10. Click the OK button.
Master Course
The Master Course import utility allows course editors to import from any master course that has been made available for import into the course. The Master Course import
Manage Tab 761
process occurs on the server eliminating any need to download a course export for upload to the server.
To import a master course:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Master Course hyperlink. The Master Course import utility appears on the screen.
4. Select the master course you want to import from the list of available master courses listed in the Master Course drop-down menu.
5. Optionally clear the backup course before import checkbox if you do not want to backup the existing course data and settings prior to completing the import.
6. Optionally clear the replace all existing content checkbox if you want to add the imported lesson content to your existing lesson content.
7. Click the Import button. The Import Progress screen appears.
The import process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on the size of the master course.
8. Wait until the import progress screen is no longer active (all clock icons have been replaced with checkmark icons) and then click the OK button.
For more on this topic see “How to Set Up and Use a Master Course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Copy Course
The Copy Course import utility allows course editors to import from any course or group for which they have editing rights. The Copy Course import process occurs on the server eliminating any need to download a course export for upload to the server.
To import a course or group:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Import Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Import Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the Copy Course hyperlink. The Copy Course import utility appears on the screen.
4. Select the course or group you want to import from the list of available courses and groups listed in the Source Course/Group drop-down menu.
Manage Tab 762
5. Optionally clear the backup course before import checkbox if you do not want to backup the existing course data and settings prior to completing the import.
6. Optionally clear the replace all existing content checkbox if you want to add the imported lesson content to your existing lesson content.
7. Click the Import button. The Import Progress screen appears.
The import process may take a few seconds to several minutes depending on the size of the course or group.
8. Wait until the import progress screen is no longer active (all clock icons have been replaced with checkmark icons) and then click the OK button.
For more on this topic see “How to Use Copy Course to Copy Content from One Course to Another” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Export Wizard
The Export Wizard allows course editors to easily export course content, enrollment information, and student activity data for archival purposes. Exported files can be imported into other ANGEL® 7.3 courses, shared with other course editors, and imported into other course environments.
To access the Export Wizard, log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course, click the Manage tab, and click the Export Wizard hyperlink. The Content Export Wizard menu appears.
ANGEL® 7.3 Archive
The ANGEL® 7.3 Archive export utility should be used when exporting course content that is intended to be imported into ANGEL® 7.3.
For more on this topic see “How to archive and Export a Course” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Manage Tab 763
To export an ANGEL® 7.3 course archive:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Export Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Export Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the ANGEL® 7.3 Archive hyperlink. The ANGEL Archive Export screen appears.
4. Optionally clear the User Data, Chat Logs, and/or Activity Logs checkboxes to export course content only (without including user enrollment and log data).
When exporting course content for the purposes of importing into a new ANGEL® 7.3 course (when user data is not needed) consider exporting the course without user enrollment and log data to reduce the size of the export file. When exporting a course for archival purposes, consider including user enrollment and log data to support future restoration of student enrollment and activity reports.
5. Click the Export button. A pop-up window appears stating that the course export is being processed for download. Once the course export is ready for download, a File Download dialog box appears on the screen.
6. Click the Download File button.
7. Click the Save button in the prompt window. A Save File to Disk screen appears.
8. Select the location on your computer where you want the zip file to be downloaded.
9. Click the Done button. The course export file is downloaded to your computer.
IMS PACKAGE
The IMS Package export utility allows course editors to export course content (without student enrollment and activity data) for import into non- ANGEL® 7.3 course environments.
To export course content as an IMS package:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Export Wizard hyperlink (located in the right column). The Content Export Wizard menu appears.
3. Click the IMS Package hyperlink. The IMS Package Export Wizard screen appears stating that the IMS Package import utility creates a zip archive that meets the IMS Content Packaging specification with the following limitations:
None of the item security settings are enforced (i.e.; start dates, password, viewable by)
Quizzes and surveys are not exported, only a page with the quiz or survey directions.
Message board postings are converted into read-only pages.
Manage Tab 764
The content itself has no navigation, but a navigation structure can be added by using a tool such as Microsoft's LRN toolkit.
4. Click the Export button. A pop-up window appears stating that the course export is being processed for download. Once the course export is ready for download, a File Download dialog box appears on the screen.
5. Click the Download File button.
6. Click the Save button in the prompt window. A Save File to Disk screen appears.
7. Select the location on your computer where you want the zip file to be downloaded.
8. Click the Done button. The course export file is downloaded to your computer.
Data Maintenance
Warning! Data deleted with this tool cannot be recovered.
The Data Maintenance utility allows course editors to delete user data including tracking data, instructor notes, chat logs, and quiz, survey and drop box submissions for one or more students.
To delete user data using the Data Maintenance utility:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab. The Management Console page appears.
2. Click the Data Maintenance hyperlink. The Data Maintenance utility appears.
3. Under the category Delete these items… select which items from the following you would like to delete for the selected user(s):
Course Roster Entries
Tracking Data
Instructor Notes
Chat Logs
Quiz, Survey and Drop Box Submissions
Gradebook Grades
Attendance
4. Under the category For these users… select which group of users you would like to delete the selected item(s):
Everyone (includes enrolled users, un-enrolled users, and unauthenticated guests)
Users enrolled in this course
Users not enrolled in this course
Selected users (hold the Ctrl key to select multiple users)
Other (separate multiple valid ANGEL® 7.3 usernames using a comma)
Manage Tab 765
5. Under the category Exclude these users… select the Users with “Course Editors” rights in this course checkbox to exclude the course editor from being deleted.
6. Optionally select the At Any Time or Before This Date option from the If they occurred… category and specify a date/time to limit the date range of items to be deleted. Items created after the specified dates are not deleted.
7. Click the Delete Items button. A dialog box message appears asking whether you are sure that you want to delete selected items.
Data deleted with the Data Maintenance utility cannot be recovered. Avoid accidental deletion of wanted data by ensuring all settings above are correct before clicking the Delete Items button.
8. Click the OK button to delete the selected items for the selected users. A data maintenance report displays the results of the process.
9. Click the OK button.
Date Manager
The Date Manager tool allows instructors the ability to assign new dates to every lesson within their courses as they prepare to teach the course for a new semester.
Setting Course Dates
Course dates allow instructors to establish start and end dates for the course as well as the days the course meets.
To set course dates:
Manage Tab 766
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manage tab.
2. Click the Date Manager hyperlink located under the Data Management section.
3. On the Set Course Dates tab select the Beginning date using the drop-down list for Month, Day and Year or select the calendar icon to view a calendar for date selection. The beginning date is used in conjunction with the ending date to set the time when the course is available and assists with scheduling the content dates.
4. Select the Ending date using the drop-down list for Month, Day and Year or select the calendar icon to view a calendar for date selection.
5. Select the Time in from the drop-down menus. This assists the scheduling of content dates.
6. Select the Duration in hours and minutes. This assists the scheduling of content times.
7. Interval settings determines the days of the week that the course is offered. Select Weekly and the days of the week when the course meets or select Monthly if the course meets on a monthly basis.
8. Select the Set Content Dates tab. A page containing all course content is displayed.
9. Click the calendar icon ( ) under the Edit Dates column. The set dates editor appears with the content item listed.
Manage Tab 767
10. Select the date on the calendar for the item to be visible as well as the time the item should be visible from the Time drop-down list and click the Visible button. The << and >> symbols on the calendar allows you to move backward or forward on the calendar.
11. Select the date on the calendar for the item to be hidden as well as the time the item should be hidden from the Time drop-down list and click the Hidden button.
12. Click the Next> button to move to the next content item or click the <Prev button to return to a previous content item.
13. When all dates and times have been selected for the content items, click the Close button.
14. Click the Save button to save your configurations.
Manage Tab 768
Question Bank Manager
The Keyword Manager provides a central interface to allow the course editor to create, edit, categorize and manage keywords for use in tagging questions in any assessment in the course.
For more on this topic see “Understanding Question Banks: Definition of Question Bank and how to Create a Question Bank” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
How to Add a Keyword to the Keyword Manager
To add a keyword to the Keyword Manager:
4. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
5. Click the Keyword Manager hyperlink.
6. Type the keyword in the keyword field and click the Add Keyword button.
How to Delete a Keyword from the Keyword Manager
To delete a keyword from the Keyword Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Keyword Manager hyperlink.
3. Select the checkbox next to each keyword you want to delete and click the Delete Selected button.
Manage Tab 769
4. Click the OK button to confirm the deletion process.
How to View Questions Associated with a Keyword
To view questions associated with a keyword:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Keyword Manager hyperlink.
3. Click the on the keyword to display the list of associated questions.
How to Import Multiple Keywords into the Keyword Manager
To import multiple keywords into the Keyword Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Keyword Manager hyperlink.
3. Click the Import hyperlink.
4. Click the Browse button to select the keyword file.
Manage Tab 770
Keyword files are typically saved as .txt documents and must have one keyword or phrase per line.
5. Click the Import Keywords button.
6. Click the OK button.
How to Export Keywords from the Keyword Manager
To export keywords from the Keyword Manager:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click the Manager tab.
2. Click the Keyword Manager hyperlink.
3. Click the Export hyperlink.
4. Click the Save button to save the keywords to your workstation as a .txt document.
Learning Outcomes Management 771
Learning Outcome Management (LOM)
Increased pressure to demonstrate and improve student achievement requires systematic assessment of student learning outcomes. ANGEL® 7.3 Learning Outcomes Management (LOM) gives you unprecedented insight into student performance against standards, confidence that course content is aligned to standards and shows you what is working (and what is not working) so you can take action.
The terminology used to describe learning outcomes – standards, learning objectives, criteria, competencies, etc. can be used differently by individual institutions. ANGEL® 7.3‘s infrastructure is flexible enough to support your institution‘s learning outcomes management.
Learning Outcomes Management Terminology and
Approach
Standards are statements of what students should know and be able to do. Standards are managed by a standards administrator within ANGEL® 7.3 and can be manually created or gathered from outside organizations such as accreditation bodies and state/federal agencies. Standards are organized hierarchically and can be mapped to
Learning Outcomes Management 772
content within ANGEL® 7.3. These mappings allow extensive reporting on student and course performance against standards.
Examples of standards created by national sanctioning bodies include:
K-12 standards used in ―No Child Left Behind‖
Accreditation standards such as NCATE or ABET
Professional certifications standards such as the NCLEX nursing exam.
Other standards may be created and sanctioned at the institutional level. Examples of institutional standards might include behavioral or cultural standards.
Within ANGEL® 7.3, standards also have other properties:
Standards are managed at the institution level and may not be edited by instructors.
Standards are ―published‖ to the campus and are then available for mapping to content.
Standards are mapped to content and assessment items in ANGEL® 7.3. Mapping allows the reporting required for Learning Outcomes Management.
Objectives are similar to standards except objectives are created and managed by the instructor within a course.
Objectives allow instructors to design educational outcomes that best fit that course‘s curriculum.
Instructors can use objectives in conjunction with standards to create desired outcomes without being constrained by the hierarchical structure of the standard.
Objectives can be mapped to one or multiple standards.
Content mapped to standards or objectives allows for exactly the same LOM reporting in cases where formal standards do not exist or in cases where more flexible outcomes management is desired. Additionally, if objectives are mapped to standards, any content items mapped to that objective inherit all the standards related to that objective.
Standards and Objectives Mapping
Mapping standards to content is a labor-intensive process under even the best conditions. ANGEL® 7.3‘s standards/objectives mapping routines strive to make that process as simple as possible.
Mapping is performed via the Standards and Objectives tabs added to every content item. Each tab contains three sub-tabs:
Browse Standards: The user can browse all available standards/objectives, or only those in use in the specified course, and select which standard(s) to map to that content item.
Search Standards: The user can search all available standards or only those in use in the specified course.
Mapped Standards: Quick, flat view of all standards mapped to that content item.
Learning Outcomes Management 773
Enabling Standards and Objectives
Standards and objectives are enabled from the Manage tab of your ANGEL® 7.3 course. To enable standards and objectives perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
Learning Outcomes Management 774
To enable standards:
Click the Enable Standards radio button.
To enable objectives:
Click the Enable Objectives radio button.
Click the Save button once standards and objectives have been enabled.
Selecting Standards
Once Standards have been enabled for your course you can select which standard or standards to use for your curriculum.
To select standards for your course perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
Learning Outcomes Management 775
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Standards tab. A list of published standards appears.
4. Open the standard by clicking on the plus sign ( ) next to the name of the standard. This expands the sub-items list identifying the requirements to meet this standard. Additionally, there may be additional sub-items listed which provide further requirements for the student. Continue clicking on the plus sign
( ) as necessary to view the entire list of sub-items in the standards.
5. Once all standards have been selected for your course, click the Save button. You receive a pop-up message that your course was successfully saved.
6. Click the OK button.
Adding Objectives
Objectives do not require standards be added to a course. You can create objectives and map the objectives to your course content. This information can then be used in reports to verify students have met the necessary objective criteria for course completion.
To add objectives to your course perform the following:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab. The Course Objectives opens.
Learning Outcomes Management 776
Adding a New Folder
Folders can be used to organize groups of objectives into similar competencies. Complex competencies may require more that one learning objective; for example, conversational Spanish might be made up of vocabulary knowledge, pronunciation, basic grammar knowledge, understanding spoken words in various dialects, and so on.
To add a folder to a Course Objective perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the Course Objectives title. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Add New Outcome and Add New Folder.
5. Click the Add New Folder hyperlink. A prompt displays asking ―What do you want to name this folder?‖ Type a title for your folder in the prompt and click the OK button.
Adding Outcomes (Objectives)
To add learning outcomes to a course perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the folder in which you want to add an outcome. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Add New Outcome, Add New Folder, Rename, Move up, Move down, and Delete.
Learning Outcomes Management 777
5. Click the Add New Outcome hyperlink. The Add/Edit Outcomes page appears.
6. Type the objective outcome in the text field. Once your objective outcome is complete click the Save button.
Renaming Outcomes Folders
To rename learning outcomes for a course perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the folder in which you want to add an outcome. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Add New Outcome, Add New Folder, Rename, Move up, Move down, and Delete.
Learning Outcomes Management 778
5. Click the Rename hyperlink. The Add/Edit Outcomes prompt appears.
6. Type the new name in the text field.
7. Click the OK button.
8. Once your objective outcome name is complete, click Save.
Only outcome folders can be renamed. Outcomes cannot be renamed. To change the name of an outcome you must delete and re-add it with the correct name.
Editing an objective
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the folder in which you want to add an outcome. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Edit, Move up, Move down, and Delete.
7. Click the Edit hyperlink. The Edit Objectives page appears.
Learning Outcomes Management 779
8. Type the objective outcome in the text field. Once your objective outcome is complete click the Save button.
Move up
To move a learning outcomes or folders up in the hierarchy, perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the folder in which you want to add an outcome. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Add New Outcome, Add New Folder, Rename, Move up, Move down, and Delete.
5. Click the Move up hyperlink. The outcome objective moves up in the list.
6. Once your objective outcome move is complete, click Save.
Move down
To move a learning outcomes or folders down in the hierarchy, perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
Learning Outcomes Management 780
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the folder in which you want to add an outcome. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Add New Outcome, Add New Folder, Rename, Move up, Move down, and Delete.
5. Click the Move down hyperlink. The outcome objective moves down in the list.
6. Once your objective outcome move is complete, click Save.
Delete
To delete learning outcomes, perform the following steps:
1. Log into your ANGEL® 7.3 course and click on the Manage tab.
2. Click the General Course Settings hyperlink in the Course Settings nugget. The Course Settings editor appears.
3. Select the Objectives tab.
4. Click the arrow ( ) next to the folder in which you want to add an outcome. A pop-up window appears containing hyperlinks to Add New Outcome, Add New Folder, Rename, Move up, Move down, and Delete.
5. Click the Delete hyperlink. The prompt ―Delete this outcome?‖ appears.
6. Click OK.
Learning Outcomes Management 781
7. Once your objective outcome deletion is complete, click Save
Learning Outcomes Repository 782
Learning Object Repository (LOR)
The Learning Object Repository (LOR) enables storage, tagging, searching, sharing, reuse, and management of learning objects. The ability to easily reuse learning objects across courses, sections, departments, schools, and campuses reduces the investment
of effort and time. Every instructor has a personal LOR ( ) accessible from the left hand power strip.
LOR Tab
Entering the LOR begins on the LOR tab. This tab displays all repositories to which you have access and a LOR Tip. The upper right-hand corner indicates that you are in the Learning Object Repository and which repository is active. Many of the same tools are available on the LOR tab as in a course or group such as the Edit Page feature and Refresh hyperlink.
Repository Tab
The Repository tab is designed to house the majority of your instructional content. The Repository tab is similar to the Lessons tab in a course. You can create the same type of content in a repository as in a course or group. For additional information concerning content creation, refer to the section of this document titled Lessons Tab.
Learning Outcomes Repository 783
Create a Content Template
To create a new content template:
1. Click the LOR icon on the left power strip.
2. Click the Add Content hyperlink (located on the left side of the toolbar).
3. Click the Content Template hyperlink. The New Content Template editor appears.
For detailed information concerning the editor tabs, see the section of this document titled Common Editor Tabs.
On the Content tab:
Type a title for the content template in the Title field.
On the Access tab:
1. Select the Access Tracking.
2. Select the View Restrictions.
On the Assignment tab:
1. Select the Milestone Settings.
2. Select the Gradebook Settings.
Click the Add Content hyperlink to begin adding one or more lesson items to your content template container.
When adding items to a content template container, use field tokens - designated by surrounding double curly brackets (e.g. {{lesson_title}} or {{lesson_subtitle}} - to specify areas of text that the editor should be prompted to replace when importing the final
Learning Outcomes Repository 784
template. Each field token must be uniquely named (within the template) and can be used in any field within lesson editor pages and within associated files.
For example, to specify a field token for the title field for a page item, type a field token such as {{lesson_title}} or {{page_title}} in the Title field of the page. Once published, the editor will be prompted to provide a value for each field token defined.
Consider reusing common field tokens (e.g. {{lesson_title}}) in multiple locations throughout the template to reduce the number of fields required in the import wizard process. For example, instead of using a token for the lesson title {{lesson_title}} and another token for a lesson quiz {{quiz_title}}, consider eliminating the lesson quiz token and instead use the value for the lesson title as part of the quiz title (i.e. type {{lesson_title}} Quiz in the quiz title field instead of {{quiz_title}}.
Publish a Template
Once you have finished adding lesson items and field tokens to create the content template, you must publish the template to make it available from other courses, groups, and resource libraries.
To publish a content template:
At the root level of the content template, click the Publish hyperlink (located in the toolbar). The Field Tokens page appears with a list of the {{field tokens}} created in the previous steps.
To change the order that the field tokens are presented to the editor, select the token you wish to move and click the Up or Down buttons.
Select the first field token in the list and optionally modify the default label as displayed in the Label field.
The value provided in the Label field only determines the label that will be presented to the editor during the import process. This value has no direct impact on the title of lesson content.
From the Type drop-down menu, select the type of input field you would like for the editor to use when specifying a value for the field token.
Select Custom list and provide individual list choices in the list box that appears if you prefer to limit the selection of choices that the editor can choose from.
Optionally, provide a default value for the field token in the Default text field. The editor will have the opportunity to modify this default value during import process.
If applicable, type directions, in the Directions field, for the editor regarding the purpose of the field and its relation to the content template as a whole.
Complete the same process for each field template listed. Optionally select the Page Break option, for specific field tokens, to specify a natural break for different types of tokens that must be defined. Use of the Page Break option allows you to break up the task of defining large numbers of field tokens across several wizard-type pages.
Learning Outcomes Repository 785
When using the paging option, consider providing all directions for the page on the first field token for the page (leaving all other directions fields empty) to create a wizard-type interface.
Scroll down to the Sharing portion of the page and select the checkbox next to each course, group, and/or library with which you want to share the content template.
Provide a description for the content template in the Description field.
The description is viewable during the import (Add From Template) process by moving the cursor over the title of the template.
When enabled for general search (in the Searchable drop-down menu), the content template search tool will return a list of all tokens that include the search terms in the title or description for the content template.
Optionally modify the Searchable by drop-down option if you want to make the content template available (through the Add From Template Search option) to all editors in the system.
Select a content template category from the Category drop-down menu or click the Other button to create a new category.
Click the OK button to publish the content template.
You may change the publish settings for the content template at any time by clicking the Publish hyperlink located at the root level of the content template.
Publish
The Repository tab contains an additional tool in the toolbar. The Publish hyperlink allows you to push content into a course or group to which you have editor rights.
To publish content:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the LOR icon (located on the left power bar).
2. Click the Repository tab.
3. Click the Publish hyperlink (located on the upper left toolbar). The Publish Selection page appears.
Learning Outcomes Repository 786
4. Select the checkboxes next to the items you want to publish to a course or group.
5. Click the Continue button. The course search page appears.
6. Type a keyword in the Keyword Search, select a semester, campus, school, department, or add Course/Section information and click the Search button. A list of courses in which you are a course editor displays.
7. Click the Copy Content button to copy the selected content into the course. Click the Link Content to link the content from your LOR to the selected course.
Items that require grading such as quizzes, surveys, drop boxes and discussion forums should be copied directly into the course. Responses to graded items go directly to the source course or repository, so linking places responses in the LOR.
Learning Outcomes Repository 787
LOR Manage Tab
The Manage tab contains tools that are pertinent to Learning Object Repositories. Your personal LOR has limited Management Console tools such as Edit Page, Refresh, Repository Access and Data Management.
Repository Access
The Repository Access section allows the instructor the ability to grant course and group access to the LOR.
For more on this topic see “How to Share Content in a Personal LOR with other Users and Courses” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Course and Group Access
To remove access to a LOR:
1. Log into ANGEL® 7.3 and click the LOR icon (located on the left power bar).
2. Click the Manage tab.
3. Click the Course and Group Access hyperlink located under the Repository Access section. The Repository Association Editor appears containing a list of current associations and the ability to add associations from My Courses, Course Search, My Groups, or Group Search.
4. To remove access from courses, select the checkbox next to each course you want to disassociate. Click the Remove Selected button.
Appendix I 788
Appendix I
Inline HTML Editor
When composing messages you can use the inline HTML editor to format your message.
The components of the inline editor from left to right.
Field Name Icon Definition
Collapse Toolbar
Hides the inline editor.
Insert/Edit Macro
Insert or Edit a macro to enhance a message.
Paste
Paste text or picture into the message.
Edit Menu
Click arrow to pull down more toolbar features.
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Paste as plain text
Paste from Word
Find
Replace
Select All
Remove Format
Bold
Add bold text.
Italic
Add italics to text.
Underline
Underline text.
Insert Content Link
Attach ANGEL® 7.3 content such as a survey or quiz to the email.
Insert/Edit Web Link icon
Insert an Internet hyperlink in the message.
Appendix I 789
Field Name Icon Definition
Insert/Edit Image
Insert an image or picture into the message.
Insert Equation icon
Insert spreadsheet equation.
Insert Menu
Insert an additional toolbar feature for the following:
HTML Widget
Insert Equation
Special Character
Universal Keyboard
Line
Page Break
Insert/Remove Numbered List
Insert or remove a numbered list.
Insert/Remove Bulleted List
Insert or remove a bulleted list.
Font
Change type of font.
Arial
Comic Sans MS
Courier New
Tahoma
Times New Roman
Verdana
Size
Change size of text.
xx-small
x-small
small
medium
large
x-large
xx-large
Check Spelling
Check spelling in the message.
Source
Add HTML source code.
Appendix I 790
Additional information concerning the Inline HTML Editor is available in the document titled ANGEL® 7.3 HTML Editor Reference Manual.
Appendix II 791
Appendix II
Merged Roster Manager
The Merged Roster manager is a tool that allows faculty to create courses whose rosters are synchronized with one or more other courses. The tool is most useful in cases where the institution is synchronizing ANGEL® 7.3 with their Student Information System. Merged courses can be useful in a number of ways. Instructors teaching multiple sections of a course can use the tool to create a single merged ANGEL® 7.3 roster for the multiple sections they are teaching. Also, dual listed courses can be presented as a single roster in ANGEL® 7.3. Lastly, a combined lecture course can be created that offers resources across multiple lab sections. In all such cases, the major benefit of the Merged Roster Manager is that any roster changes that happen in the source sections are automatically reflected in the merged course.
Accessing the Merged Roster Manager
The Merged Roster Manager is accessible from the link under the Toolbox section of your personal Home. Access to this tool may be restricted at your institution. Please check with your institution‘s ANGEL® 7.3 administrator if you have questions.
Merged Roster Manager Interface
The Main Menu of the Merged Roster Manager is broken into two sections. The first section allows you to select a previously created merged course in order to delete it or change its settings. The second section allows you to create new merged courses by selecting source courses from a list the courses for which you have editing rights.
Create a New Merged Course
1. Select the Merged Roster Manager link under the Toolbox section of the Personal Home.
Appendix II 792
2. From the Create a Merged Course section, select the checkbox next to each of the courses that you want to use in the new merged course.
3. Click the Continue button to proceed to the Merged Course Settings page.
4. Type the Merged Course Title for the new merged course.
5. Select a course under the Classification Codes drop-down list to determine which course is used to set the merged course classification codes. This is used for access to Learning Object Repositories, Master Courses and Find a Course.
6. If the new merged course is intended to replace the source courses, select the Disable Source Courses option. This option is appropriate if you are creating a new course to replace multiple individual sections.
This option prevents the original source courses from being accessed by non-editors.
Appendix II 793
7. The Section Settings area creates a team name from each of the merged sections keeping students from each individual section on the respective teams. This is useful for assigning specific course content items to members of the original courses.
8. Click the Create Course button to complete the creation of the merged course.
9. Click the Return to Profile button if you are finished creating Merged Rosters.
For more on this topic see “How to merge two (or more) rosters for Multiple sections” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Merged Course Settings
There are a number of things you might want to change after initially creating a merged course. The Merged Roster Manager allows you both to change general information about the merged course as well as what source courses are merged. The editing screen from which these tasks are accomplished is displayed below.
Edit General Course Settings
1. Select the Merged Roster Manager link under the Toolbox section of Home.
2. From the Edit a Merged Course page, select the desired merged course from the drop-down menu and click the Edit button.
Appendix II 794
3. Change the Merged Course Title as desired and optionally select an alternate Master Course. Selecting an alternate Master Course determines which course is used to set the merged course classification codes. This is used for access to Learning Object Repositories, Master Courses and Find a Course.
4. Click the Save Changes button to complete the update.
Add Source Sections to a Merged Course
1. Select the Merged Roster Manager link under the Toolbox section of Home.
2. From the Merged Course Settings section, select the desired merged course and click the Edit button.
3. From the Merged Rosters section, select the course from the Current Sections list that you would like to be added as a source for this merged course.
4. Select the Add button to add the course.
5. Select the Cancel button to exit the Merged Course Settings page.
Remove Source Sections from a Merged Course
1. Select the Merged Roster Manager link under the Toolbox section of the Home page.
2. From the Merged Course Settings section, select the desired merged course and click the Edit button.
Appendix II 795
3. From the Current Sections area, select the checkbox next to each of the source sections you would like to remove.
4. If you want any of the associated enrollments from the selected sources removed from the merged course, make sure the Yes option is selected for the Unenroll Users option.
5. Click the Remove Selected button to remove the selected source sections.
6. Select the Cancel button to exit the Merged Course Settings page.
Appendix III 796
Appendix III
Testing Security
When used for assessment purposes, online testing is more commonly used for low to medium stakes assessments. When testing online for medium or higher stakes assessments, several factors should be considered to help ensure valid test scores and a thorough understanding of course concepts.
Always important in testing, the development of effective test questions is critical in the creation of an effective online assessment. Creating questions that require the application of knowledge are better gauges of a student‘s understanding than questions that can be answered verbatim from a textbook. This becomes very important when distributing tests in the open-book, take-home format that is commonly used when conducting tests online.
Open-ended and essay type questions may also be written to require the student to apply their understanding in a unique manner. Using a few of these question types when creating a test can increase the quality of the assessment and discourage unwanted student collaboration while only somewhat increasing the grading load.
Higher stakes assessments may best be distributed in a proctored environment such as a lab, instead of being distributed in an open-book, take-home format, while high stakes assessments at a distance may be individually proctored at a local library, school, university, or in the work place. In addition to these testing approaches, ANGEL® 7.3 provides several quiz settings, outlined below, which can be used to increase the effectiveness of assessment testing.
User Preview and Feedback
You may use the User Preview and Feedback settings to limit or restrict student feedback until all copies of the test or quiz have been returned. This practice does not eliminate the ability for students to print and distribute copies of their test while the test is still in progress, however it can eliminate the printed copy from disclosing the correct answers or even the score of a test.
Time Limit with Auto Submit
You can use the Time Limit option to restrict the amount of time students have to complete their tests. Select the auto-submit option to force the test to submit when the test has reached the time limit.
User Team
The User Team option allows you to restrict a test (or different copies of a test) to a particular team of students. While commonly used for paper tests in large lecture halls (Test A, Test B, every other seat), this approach also works well for electronic tests in lab and take-home scenarios.
Appendix III 797
Password
Use the Password option to further restrict access to a test. This feature can be useful for proctored testing (only the proctor knows the password), for a student who needs non-proctored access to a test before or after the actual test date, or for higher security in testing labs when staff must proctor students from several different disciplines and sections.
Display Mode
The Single Question – No Backtrack options for Display Mode presents the test to the student one question at a time which forces the test to be completed in a specific order while making it more difficult for the user to print the entire test.
Start Date and End Date
Use the Start Date and End Date to restrict test access to a specific ―window of time.‖ A shorter period of test access can make it more difficult for students to schedule collaboration or distribute copies of the test while the test is still in progress.
Max Questions
Found under the Section Heading Editor, Max Questions allows you to create a test that display a different subset of questions (at random) for each distributed copy of the test. For more information on the Section Heading Editor, see the Using Section Headings to Create Random Versions of a Quiz appendix item in this document.
IP Filter
You can easily restrict quiz or survey access to a specific IP address. In cases where an IP address is included in more than one entry, the most specific entry is applied (e.g. a setting of -*.*.*.*,+207.46.249.*,-207.46.249.5) allowing access to any IP address within the 207.46.249 class C network with the exception of 207.46.249.5 which has been excluded. For additional information on IP Filter, see the Common Quiz and Survey Settings, Advanced Settings section of this document.
Pending Items
In cases where a student reports difficulty submitting a quiz, the Pending Items utility (located under the Utilities menu) is useful for verifying the date and time the student claims to have first received the quiz. A student‘s pending quiz can also easily be ―reset‖ or deleted to allow them to retake a timed out quiz.
For more on this topic see “How to Create a Secure Assessment” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Appendix IV 798
Appendix IV
Content Manager Tokens
A number of tokens are defined for the content manager. These tokens may be used in page text or other context. When used, the content manager automatically replaces each token with the appropriate value.
Drive Tokens
$FD$
The user's floppy drive setting or "A:" if not set
$HD$
The user's hard drive setting or "C:" if not set
$CD$
The user's CD drive setting or "D:" if not set
$DVD$
The user's DVD drive setting or "D:" if not set
User Tokens
$FIRST_NAME$
The first name of the user accessing the system.
$LAST_NAME$
The last name of the user accessing the system.
$USER_ID$
The user ID of the user accessing the system.
$ESC_USER_ID$
The URL encoded user ID of the user accessing the system.
$USER_NAME$
The full name of the user accessing the system.
$ESC_USER_NAME$
The URL encoded full name of the user accessing the system
$USER:FIRSTNAME$
The user id of the user accessing the system
$USER:LASTNAME$
The URL encoded user id of the user accessing the system
$USER:UID$
Appendix IV 799
The user id of the user accessing the system
$USER:USERNAME$
The full name of the user accessing the system
$USER:EMAIL$
The email of the user accessing the system
$USER:FULLNAME$
The full name of the user accessing the system
$USER:ACCOUNTTYPE$
The numerical value for the account type of the user accessing the system
$USER:ACCOUNTRIGHTS$
The numerical value for the account rights of the user accessing the system
Course Tokens
$COURSE_ID$
The section id of the content area being accessed
$SECTION_ID$
The section id of the content area being accessed
$ESC_COURSE_ID$
The URL encoded section id of the content area being accessed
$SECTION:TITLE$
The title of the content area being accessed
$ESC_COURSE_TITLE$
The URL encoded title of the content area being accessed
$COURSE_PATH$
The base path for files associated with the content area being accessed
$SECTION:TYPE$
The type of section of the content area being accessed e.g. course
$SECTION:INSTRUCTORID$
The instructor id for the content area being accessed
$SECTION:INSTRUCTOR$
The instructor name for the content area being accessed
Application Tokens
$ANGEL:NAME$
Application name of the ANGEL® 7.3 environment
Appendix IV 800
$ANGEL:TIMEOUT$ Session timeout value for the application
$ANGEL:NAVBUTTONS$
Value of the APP_NavButtons application setting
$ANGEL:FRAMES$
Value of the APP_Frames application setting
$ANGEL:VROOT$
Value of the APP_VRoot application setting
$ANGEL:UPLOADPATH$
The base path for ANGEL® 7.3 uploaded files
$APP_ID$
The APP_ID for this instance of the component
$ESC_APP_ID$
The URL encoded APP_ID for this instance of the component
$IMAGE_PATH$
The base path for image files used by the component for buttons and icons
$SCRIPT_PATH$
The base path to the script file that instantiated the component
$SCRIPT_NAME$
The relative path to the script file that instantiated the component
$QUERY:settingName$
Value of the specified query string parameter
$POST:settingName$
Value of the specified form element
$SESSIONDATA$
A | delimited string of the following:
1. Hash of all data
2. ts = Time Stamp
3. user = Username of currently logged in user
4. sysrights = System Rights of the user
5. section = Course ID of the current course
6. rights = Course Level Rights of user
7. teams = a comma separated list of the teams the user is a member of
8. app = the APP_ID
9. entry = The entry id for the current item
10. parent = The parent entry id for the current item
Appendix IV 801
11. coursepath = The path to the uploaded area
12. scriptpath = The path to the current executing script, relative to the root of ANGEL® 7.3.
Resource Tokens
$ENTRY_ID$
Entry ID of the current resource object
$ESC_ENTRY_ID$
URL Encoded Entry ID of the current resource object
$ENTRY_TITLE$
Title of the current resource object
$ESC_ENTRY_TITLE$
URL Encoded Title of the current resource object
$ENTRY_PATH$
Path to the associated files folder of the current resource object
$PARENT_ID$
Entry ID of the parent object of the current resource
$ESC_PARENT_ID$
URL Encoded Entry ID of the parent object of the current resource
$PARENT_PATH$
Path to the associated files folder of the parent object of the current resource
Event Tokens
$EVENT_GRADE$
The grade associated with the event.
$EVENT_DATE$
The date associated with the event.
$DATE_SUBMITTED$
The date and time the ANGEL® 7.3 survey/quiz/form was submitted.
$EVENT_TIME$
The time associated with the event.
$EVENT_ENTRY$
The entryID associated with the event.
$EVENT_USER$
The user ID of the user associated with the event.
Appendix IV 802
$EVENT_USER_ACCOUNT$
The account ID of the user associated with the event.
$EVENT_USER_ID$
The user ID of the user associated with the event.
$EVENT_USER_FIRST_NAME$
The first name of the user associated with the event.
$EVENT_USER_LAST_NAME$
The last name of the user associated with the event.
$EVENT_USER_EMAIL$
The email address of the user associated with the event.
$GRADER_ACCOUNT$
The account ID of the grader associated with the event.
$GRADER_ID$
The user ID of the grader associated with the event.
$GRADER_FIRST_NAME$
The first name of the grader associated with the event.
$GRADER_LAST_NAME$
The last name of the grader associated with the event.
$GRADER_EMAIL$
The email address of the grader associated with the event.
$EVENT_SECTION$
The Section ID of the course or group associated with the event.
$EVENT_MIN$
The minimum grade triggers the action.
$EVENT_MAX$
The maximum grade triggers the action.
$SQL_EVENT_USER$ (SQL trigger only)
The SQL escaped event User ID.
$SQL_EVENT_SECTION$ (SQL trigger only)
The SQL escaped event Section ID.
$SQL_EVENT_ENTRY$
The SQL escaped Entry ID.
$VARVAL$ (SETVAR, REPLACEVAR)
Current value of variable
Appendix IV 803
Quiz GRADE/SUBMIT Events
$Q#:RESPONSE$
The user's response to the specified question
$Q#:ANSWER$
The answer key for the specified question
$Q#:SCORE$
The user's score for the specified question
$Q#:POSSIBLE$
The maximum points possible for the specified question
$POINTS:POSSIBLE$
The total points possible for the quiz
$POINTS:MISSED$
The total points the user missed for the quiz
$POINTS:AWARDED$
The total points the user earned for the quiz
$POINTS:UNGRADED$
The total points as yet unscored for the quiz
Survey SUBMIT Events
$Q#:RESPONSE$
The user's response to the specified question
$Q#:OPTIONS$
$FIELD[alternateID]:RESPONSE$
$FIELD[alternateID]:OPTIONS$
Custom Tokens
Any environment variable that starts and ends with a ―$‖ (i.e. $name$) will get replaced at runtime by the Content Manager.
Appendix V 804
Appendix V
Gradebook Formula Tokens
The following tokens can be used in the Formula field in the gradebook Category and Assignment editors.
{CATEGORY:OVERALL:AVERAGE-PERCENTAGE}
Returns the overall category average multiplied by the points possible, divided by the maximum number of points in the category.
{CATEGORY:OVERALL:NUMBER-OF-ASSIGNMENTS}
Overall number of assignments in the category.
{CATEGORY:OVERALL:SUM-OF-ALL-ASSIGNMENT-POINTS-POSSIBLE}
Sum points possible of all assignments in the category.
{CATEGORY:OVERALL:WEIGHT}
Overall weight of the category.
{CATEGORY:USER:PERCENTAGE}
Returns the user‘s percentage average for the category.
{CATEGORY:USER:AVERAGE-ASSIGNMENT-PERCENTAGE}
Returns the user‘s percentage average for the category based on weighting all category assignments equally (Weight All Items Equally).
{CATEGORY:USER:SCORE}
Returns the user‘s score for the category.
{CATEGORY:USER:SUM-OF-ALL-ASSIGNMENT-POINTS-POSSIBLE}
Sum of user‘s points possible based on the number of assignments that have been graded.
{CATEGORY:USER:NUMBER-OF-ASSIGNMENTS}
Number of user‘s assignments (in the category) that have been graded.
Appendix V 805
{CATEGORY:USER:SUM-OF-ALL-ASSIGNMENT-POINTS}
Returns sum of user points earned in the category.
{ASSIGNMENT:OVERALL:POINTS-POSSIBLE}
Returns number of points possible for the assignment.
{ASSIGNMENT:OVERALL:AVERAGE-PERCENTAGE}
Returns the overall class average (in percent) for the assignment.
{ASSIGNMENT:USER:PERCENTAGE}
Returns the user‘s percentage score for the assignment.
{ASSIGNMENT:USER:SCORE}
Returns the user‘s score for the assignment.
{ASSIGNMENT:CATEGORY:OVERALL:AVERAGE-PERCENTAGE}
Overall class average (in percent) for the category the assignment is associated with.
{ASSIGNMENT:CATEGORY:OVERALL:NUMBER-OF-ASSIGNMENTS}
Number of assignments associated with the category the assignment is associated with.
{ASSIGNMENT:CATEGORY:OVERALL:SUM-OF-ALL-ASSIGNMENT-POINTS-
POSSIBLE}
Total points possible for the category the assignment is associated with.
{ASSIGNMENT:CATEGORY:OVERALL:WEIGHT}
Weight for the category the assignment is associated with.
{GRADEBOOK:USER:SCORE}
Returns the user‘s overall score.
{GRADEBOOK:USER:PERCENT}
Returns the user‘s overall percentage.
Appendix V 806
{GRADEBOOK:USER:WEIGHT}
Returns the sum of all users‘ category weights.
{GRADEBOOK:OVERALL:WEIGHT}
Returns the sum of all category weights.
{GRADEBOOK:OVERALL:AVERAGE-PERCENTAGE}
Returns overall gradebook average in percent.
{GRADEBOOK:OVERALL:AVERAGE-SCORE}
Returns overall gradebook average score.
Appendix VI 807
Appendix VI
Defined Environment Variables
More than 300 environment variables have already been defined as part of the standard environment. The script pages throughout the environment reference these variables. If any of these variables are not set, a default system value is used. This allows you to override default functionality without requiring you to specify every variable. The variables have been categorized by functional area below.
Access to the Environment Variables Manager may be limited by your institution.
Calendar
COURSE_CALENDAR_VIEW
Options to display Calendar Events – defaults to MONTH. Other options include DAY, WEEK, and YEAR.
$CALENDAR_MAX_DURATION$
Maximum allowed duration for calendar entries specified in hours.
COURSE_CALENDAR_CATEGORIES
Comma separated list of options to display in the categories list on course calendars.
GROUP_CALENDAR_CATEGORIES
Comma separated list of options to display in the categories list on group calendars.
GROUP_CALENDAR_CATEGORIES
Comma separated list of options to display in the categories list on group calendars.
Content Manager
$ICON_BROWSE_URL$
URL for a link to display under the ICON URL setting. Can be used to implement a browse feature for selecting predetermined icons.
$ICON_BROWSE_ATTRIBUTE$
Advanced attributes for the link generated for the $ICON_BROWSE_URL$.
$LABEL$
Appendix VI 808
Toggle between LABEL and SPAN elements on quizzes, surveys and other form pages. LABEL elements are helpful for ADA accessibility, but introduce some interface issues in some browsers for non-visual impaired users.
$SHOWDIR$
Set to 1 force system to always show directory when navigating using Next and Previous. Set to 0 to skip folders listings that contain no folder text.
$SHOWDIR_NEXT$
Set to 1 force system to always show directory when navigating using Next. Set to 0 to skip folders listings that contain no folder text.
$SHOWDIR_PREVIOUS$
Set to 1 force system to always show directory when navigating using Previous. Set to 0 to skip folders listings that contain no folder text.
$CONTENT_MAX_UPLOAD$
Maximum upload size in bytes.
$THREAD_FRAME_STATIC$
Set to 1 to force threaded view to always be used and disable toggling into single window mode.
$THREAD_FRAME_AREA$
Location of thread view pane. May be TOP, LEFT, RIGHT or BOTTOM.
$THREAD_FRAME_SIZE$
Size in pixels of the thread view pane in message boards.
Lessons/Content Only
CHARSET
Specifies the character set encoding that should be used for course content. This is useful for supporting content developed for foreign language courses.
CONTENT_BANNERHEIGHT
The height in pixels to make the title frame for link and file items.
CONTENT_DISABLEINDEX
Appendix VI 809
If set to 1, disables the Index link in the tool bar.
CONTENT_DISABLENAVIGATION
If set to 1, disables the Next, Previous, Up and Top links in the tool bar.
CONTENT_DISABLE_NOTES
If set to 1, disables the Notes capability.
CONTENT_DISABLEROOTUTILITIES
If set to 1, disables the deletion and utility options generally available from the root menu.
CONTENT_DISABLESEARCH
If set to 1, disables the Search link in the tool bar.
CONTENT_DISABLESUBSCRIBE
If set to 1, disables the sending of email messages when new content is added to a folder or message board to which a user is subscribed.
CONTENT_DISABLETHREADVIEW
If set to 1, disables the full-thread view of the message board postings and instead displays only links for the top-level responses to each posting when viewing the posting.
CONTENT_EDITDEFAULT
Specifies the default course/group rights to use for the Editable By setting when adding new root-level items.
CONTENT_EDITORMENU
Customizes the interface used for content editing options. This setting can take any of the following numerical values:
0 (default) – Edit and Delete buttons are used to the left of each item's title.
1024 – A context menu of text-based links is provided underneath each item's title. In addition to Edit and Delete, links are provided for the Reports and Utilities menu of each item.
2048 – Text links are used in place of the standard button images.
CONTENT_ICONWIDTH
Appendix VI 810
Specifies the width in pixels of icons displayed in directory lists. The default is "24".
CONTENT_ICONHEIGHT
Specifies the height in pixels of icons displayed in directory lists. The default is unspecified so the icons height is proportional to its width.
CONTENT_MAXITEMS
A number between 5 and 100 that specifies the number of items to list on pages such as search results and quiz question lists. The default is "25".
CONTENT_NAVBARFOOTER
If set to 1, indicates that the Next, Previous, Up and Top navigation links should be made available as a page footer.
CONTENT_NOTES
Minimum course rights needed to access the Notes tool.
CONTENT_PREFERENCES
Minimum course rights needed to access the Preferences tool.
CONTENT_PRINT
Minimum course rights needed to access the Print tool.
CONTENT_TRACKINGDEFAULT
Specifies the default tracking setting to use when adding new root-level items. (0-Disabled,1-Students Only,2-All Enrolled Users,3-Authenticated Users,4-Everyone)
Appendix VI 811
CONTENT_VIEWDEFAULT
Specifies the default course/group rights to use for the Viewable By setting when adding new root-level items.\
SCORM_LAUNCH
Controls the launch behavior of SCORM packages. The default value is FRAMESET
Values:
FRAMESET – the package will be launched in the LMS frameset
NEW_WINDOW – the package will be launched in a new browser window
NEW_WINDOW_AFTER_CLICK – a link to a package will be displayed in the frameset which will open the package in a new window. This option is useful to get around pop-up blockers.
NEW_WINDOW_WITHOUT_BROWSER_TOOLBAR – same as NEW_WINDOW but the window will have no toolbar.
This variable can be set at the course or system level. Due to the way Rustici SCORM player works, this variable is evaluated when the package is added to ANGEL. Any SCORM package will launch according to the value that was set at the time of the upload. Any subsequent change to the variable will not affect the launch behavior of already uploaded packages.
TEAMACCESS_DISPLAY
Displays the team access settings to specify special access to a content item, such as a quiz, that has passed the end date. Variable value is 1 to turn on this display.
MIN_VIEWABLE_BY
Specifies the minimum course rights that are displayed in the Viewable By field on content manager editor pages. The default value is 0 (Everyone).
MAX_VIEWABLE_BY
Specifies the maximum course rights that are displayed in the Viewable By field on content manager editor pages. The default value is 64 (Course Administrator).
SUBMISSION_DELETE_RIGHTS
Maximum course rights required to delete quiz, survey, or drop box submissions. The default is 32 (Course Editor). A value of 16 allows Course Assistants to delete submissions. A value of 64 restricts delete access to course/system administrators.
Appendix VI 812
DISCUSSION_FORUM
If set to 0, removes the Add a Discussion Forum link from the Course Lessons‘ Add Content list. Default value is set to 1 for active.
ATTACH_MAX_MB
The maximum course mail attachment size in MB. Default=2.
DROPBOX_MAX_MB
The maximum drop box attachment size in MB. Default = 2.
GRADE_FORM_EMAIL_CHECKED
A value of CHECKED defaults the Send as mail message to user checkbox on the grade forms to be checked.
SCORM_HITS
If set to 1, SCORM item logging is enabled for ANGEL® 7.3 lesson items (Default = 0). When enabled, SCORM item logging data is viewable on all ANGEL® 7.3 lesson items under Reports > Activity Summary.
SCORM_SESSION
If set to 1, SCORM session logging is enabled (Default = 1). SCORM session data is viewable at the root level of the Lessons tab under Reports > Activity Summary.
QUIZ_CONTINUE
Set with a value of NEXT. Upon completion of a quiz item the user is taken to the next content item instead of the main Lessons page.
FORM_CONTINUE
Set with a value of NEXT. Upon completion of a survey item the user is taken to the next content item instead of the main Lessons page.
Other Content Manager Instances
FastPageToolbar
Set to SIMPLE, ALL (default), or custom toolbar, This variable adds the ability to configure what toolbars are available on the HTML Editor. A custom toolbar can be defined by using any of the tokens defined in the ALL toolbar in a comma-
Appendix VI 813
separated list. Also, a "toolbar" query parameter can be passed to the HTML Editor to force a specific toolbar.
FastPageToolbar_Simple
Overrides the default SIMPLE toolbar. The default for SIMPLE is Block, FontFace, FontSize, FontStyle, Link, Image, Color, SupSub, Math, ListFormat, Symbol, Help.
FastPageToolbar_All
Overrides the default ALL toolbar. The default for ALL is Style, Block, FontFace, FontSize, SpellCheck, CleanWord, Undo, Clipboard, Macro, FontStyle, HR, Table, Link, Image, Color, SupSub, Math, Symbol, Greek, Latin, Align, ListFormat, Indent, Toggle, Visible, Help, WYSIWYG.(View Source).
Communicate Settings
INTOUCH_PAGE_courseRights
Specifies an alternate setting for the nugget list for the In Touch page for users with the specified course/group rights.
INTOUCH_PAGE
Specifies an alternate setting for the nugget list for the In Touch page for users with the specified course/group rights.
Default = "1:M:08:O:InTouchMail, 1:M:08:O:InTouchTeams,1:M:08:O:InTouchForums, 2:M:08:O:InTouchVMC,2:M:08:O:InTouchChat, 2:M:08:O:InTouchWB,2:M:08:O:InTouchNews, 2:M:08:O:InTouchLinks"
MAIL_INDIVIDUALS
The minimum course/group rights needed to enable the user to select individuals as mail recipients.
MAIL_INTERNET
The minimum course/group rights needed to enable the user to send mail to other users' Internet email accounts even if the recipient users have not enabled mail forwarding.
Appendix VI 814
MAIL_LEADERS
The minimum course/group rights needed to enable the user to send mail to all course faculty or group leaders.
MAIL_MAX_MB
The maximum electronic mail attachment size in MB. Default = 2.
MAIL_MEMBERS
The minimum course/group rights needed to enable the user to send mail to all course or group members.
MAIL_TEAMS
The minimum course/group rights needed to enable the non-editors to send mail to the teams of which they are a member and for editors to send mail to any team.
MAIL_BCC_DEFAULT
If set to 1, changes the default value for the course mail option ‗Do not disclose recipients‘ to be selected. This option can be set using the Course Mail settings page located on the In Touch page of a section.
MAIL_INTERNET_DEFAULT
If set to 1, changes the default value for the course mail option ‗Send a copy to each recipient's Internet e-mail‘ to be selected. This option can be set using the Course Mail settings page located on the In Touch page of a section.
MAIL_MENTOR_DEFAULT
If set to 1, changes the default value for the course mail option ‗Send a copy to each recipient‘s mentor if known‘ to be selected. This option can be set using the Course Mail settings page located on the In Touch page of a section.
MAIL_REPLY_ALL
Minimum course rights required to Reply to All in Course Mail.
NOANNOUNCE
If set to 1, disables the Announcements feature in a course or group.
NOCHAT
If set to 1, disables the Chat feature in a course or group.
Appendix VI 815
NOFORUMS
If set to 1, disables the In Touch nugget that lists all message boards in the course or group.
NOINTOUCHLINKS
If set to 1, disables the interface for adding custom links to the In Touch page of the course or group.
NOMAIL
If set to 1, disables the Course/Group mail feature in a course or group.
NONEWS
If set to 1, disables the News feature in a course or group.
NOPOLLS
If set to 1, disables the Polls feature in a course or group.
NOTEAMFILES
If set to 1, disables the Team Files nugget in a course or group. This setting is being deprecated in favor of the new team-level setting to toggle file sharing.
NOTOOLLINKS
If set to 1, disables the interface for adding custom links to the Tools page of the course or group.
NOVMC
If set to 1, disables the Virtual Classroom feature in a course or group. The Virtual Classroom feature is only available if the Virtual Emcee add-on is licensed.
SHOW_VMCPLUS
If set to 1, the version 6.2 Virtual Emcee add-on is displayed. 0 displays the old VMC.
NOWB
If set to 1, disables the Whiteboard feature in a course or group.
Appendix VI 816
TEAMFILES_QUOTA
Specifies the disk quota in megabytes for each team defined in the course or group. This setting is being deprecated in favor of the new team-level setting.
Course/Group Manage Settings
ATTENDANCE_CODES
Overrides the default attendance codes by providing a comma-separated list of codes and their respective labels in the form: code1=label1,code2=label2,...
EDITOR_REPORTS_ACCESS
Specifies the minimum course/group rights needed to access course or group reports intended for course instructors and group administrators. The default setting is 16 (Course/Group Assistant).
EDITOR_TOOLS_ACCESS
Specifies the minimum course/group rights needed to access course or group tools intended for course instructors and group administrators. The default setting is 16 (Course/Group Assistant).
SECTION_ACTIVITY_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the course/group activity report. Additionally, the user must have sufficient rights for the EDITOR_REPORTS_ACCESS in order to have access to the link for this feature.
SECTION_ATTENDANCE_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the Attendance Manager. Additionally, the user must have sufficient rights for the EDITOR_TOOLS_ACCESS in order to have access to the link for this feature.
SECTION_GRADES_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the Grade Book. Additionally, the user must have sufficient rights for the EDITOR_TOOLS_ACCESS in order to have access to the link for this feature.
SECTION_LEARNERPROFILE_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the Learner Profile information for all course/group members.
Appendix VI 817
SECTION_MILESTONES_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the Milestones tool for all course/group members.
SECTION_NOTES_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the User Notes feature from the Tools page.
SECTION_ONLINE_ITEMS_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the course/group activity report. Additionally, the user must have sufficient rights for the EDITOR_REPORTS_ACCESS in order to have access to the link for this feature. This environment variable was deprecated in version 6.0
SECTION_WHATSNEW_ACCESS
The minimum course/group rights needed to access the What's New agent located on the Tools tab. This environment variable was deprecated in version 6.0
TOOLS_PAGE_courseRights
Specifies an alternate setting for the nugget list for the Tools page for users with the specified course/group rights.
TOOLS_PAGE
Specifies an alternate setting for the nugget list for the Tools page for users with the specified course/group rights.
Default = "1:M:08:O:EditorReports, 1:M:08:O:EditorTools,1:M:08:O:SectionTools, 2:M:08:O:SectionManagement, 2:M:08:O:SectionSettings,2:M:08:O:ToolLinks"
Course/Group Tabs
For the following items, any reference to "tabid" can be replaced with any of the following to affect the respective standard tab: ABOUT, CALENDAR, CONTENT, INTOUCH, PEOPLE, SYLLABUS and TOOLS. Likewise, if custom tabs are added, the appropriate tabid for a custom tab can be specified to affect its properties.
NOTAB_tabid
Disables the display of the specified tab. For example, NOTAB_TOOLS would prevent the display of the tools tab. This setting is being deprecated and replaced by the TAB_ACCESS_id setting that offers finer control.
Appendix VI 818
START_TAB
The ID of the tab to be selected upon entering the course or group.
START_URL
The URL of the page to be displayed upon entering the course or group (after the Welcome Page). If START_URL is not specified, the URL associated with the specified Start Tab is used.
TAB_ACCESS_tabid
Defines minimum course/group rights to access the specified tab.
TAB_TEXT_tabid
Defines the label text to use for the specified tab.
TAB_URL_tabid
Defines the URL of the page to display when the specified tab is selected. If this settings ID not defined for a tab, the URL points to the default document of the subdirectory of the section folder with the same name as the tab ID ("/ApplicationPath/section/tabid/"). For example, for the tab with an ID of "TOOLS" the default tab URL would point to the relative path "section/tools/".
TABS
A comma separated list of tabids indicating the tabs to display for the course or group.
TABS_courseType
A comma separated list of id=label pairs indicating the tabs to display for the group type as defined to the groups COURSE_TYPE field.
Themes (Style Sheets)
OVERRIDE_SECTION_STYLESHEET
Setting this variable to 1 or any positive number causes the default stylesheet, or the value of the STYLESHEET variable if specified, to be used in favor of a custom style sheet that is specified for a course or group. This is useful if a user wants or needs to use a consistent style sheet. For example, a visually impaired user may always want to use a high contrast style sheet with large fonts.
Appendix VI 819
STYLESHEET
The URL of the CSS style sheet to use in place of the default style sheet. This does not affect courses or groups that have specified a custom style sheet, unless the OVERRIDE_SECTION_STYLESHEET variable is also set.
System Settings
BREADCRUMBS
This variable controls the viewing of breadcrumbs. Set to 0 disables, 1 enables. This can be set as Course Override to allow for instructors to change at the course level, or set to System Override sets the value for the entire system.
CONFIRM_ABANDON
Set to 0 to disable confirmation messages when leaving a form page.
CONTEXT_HELP
Set to 1 to activate context sensitive help mode for course and group content. When activated, users are taken to a search page based on the active tab. Appropriate content items must be created in Help for results to be found.
DF_MODERATOR_RIGHTS
Defines the course rights level for moderators of Discussion Forums (default is 16 - Manager)
NOTABS
Set to 1 to disable the tabs in a course or group.
SECTION_TIMEOUT
This variable is checked only upon entry into a course or group and supersedes the SESSION_TIMEOUT variable (if any).
SESSION_TIMEOUT
This variable is checked on log in and on entry into any course or group (value in minutes). It only increases the session timeout period – for example, if the timeout is already greater than the timeout specified in this variable then no change is made.
Appendix VI 820
SIDEBAR
This variable controls the side bar display in a course or group. Set to 'NONE' to disable, 'INDEX' to display map view, or 'NEW' to display the What‘s New view.
SIDEBAR_ICONS
Set to 1 to use item icons instead of bullets in the map view.
NETMAP
Set to 0 to revert to old version 6.0 course map.
ENFORCE_START_DATE
Course/Group Rights
ENFORCE_END_DATE
Course/Group Rights
WHATS_NEW_HIDDEN_PARENT
Inhibits display of items in what's new if parent item is not visible.
$NOSAVE$
Set to 1 to globally disable the Save Answers feature on quizzes and surveys unless explicitly overridden for a quiz or survey
$EXACTMATCH$
Set to 1 to globally require an exact match for fill-in-the-blank questions unless explicitly overridden at the quiz or question level.
$NOROUNDING$
Set to 1 to globally disable significant digit rounding comparisons for fill-in-the-blank questions unless explicitly overridden at the quiz or question level.
$NOSOUNDSLIKE$
Set to 1 to globally disable sounds-like comparisons for fill-in-the-blank questions unless explicitly overridden at the quiz or question level.
$ONCLICK$
Appendix VI 821
Specify an alternate device-independent JavaScript event to use in place of ONCLICK events throughout the environment. Generally, this would be set to the ONSELECT event on a browser that supports such device-independent events.
LISTICON_CLOSED
The URL of the icon to display for closed nodes.
LISTICON_OPENED
The URL of the icon to display for open nodes.
LISTICON_LEAF
The URL of the icon to display for a bullet on each list item.
NUGICON_nuggetID
The URL of the icon to display in the title bar of the nugget specified by ―nuggetID‖.
NUGBULLET_nuggetID
The URL of the icon to display next to each list item in the nugget specified by ―nuggetID‖. Applies to the MYBOOKMARKS, MYCOURSES and MYGROUPS nuggets.
PLACEHOLDER
Placeholder text to use as a default value for form fields that are initially blank. This setting is only used in some areas of the environment. If set, it can help make the site more accessible to users of older accessibility software that has problems identifying empty form fields.
Appendix VII 822
Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
The following sections describe step-by-step procedures for performing many different kinds of tasks with ANGEL® 7.3. The tutorials are divided into three sections: Global and Home Page Tasks, Content Management Tasks, and Course Management Tasks. The Global and Home Page Tasks section describes procedures that effect how content is either managed throughout the user‘s site or how items can be displayed on the Home page. The other two sections (Content Management and Course Management) describe procedures that are performed within individual course sections.
Global and Home Page Tasks
In the following section are tasks that affect ANGEL settings throughout the user‘s ANGEL site and that are not limited to a specific course. They include tasks on the user Home page or that are accessed using the buttons or links on the left panel.
How to Change Personal Information
ANGEL not only allows you to add and/or edit your personal information, but it also allows you to control who can access specific portions of the information.
To change your personal information:
1. From any part of ANGEL, once you have logged in, click on the Preferences button.
2. Click Personal Information.
Appendix VII 823
This will open the User Profile Editor. Changing the Settings to Advanced will give you more options.
Within each section, and sometimes for individual items, you can designate what groups of users can see that information. The groups are based on Rights; selecting a group specifies the minimum level of Rights needed to see that information.
You can fill in any information that you want. Information that has already been added through your system may vary depending upon your institution. You cannot change your Username. Your institution may further designate other information that cannot be changed.
In the example below, the student is allowing other students to see her email address, but only Course Editors (faculty) can see her home and work phone numbers and her address.
Appendix VII 824
Tip: You can have students use the About Me section to create a small webpage that presents information about them. Because the HTML Editor can be used to format it, they can add pictures and hyperlinks. Some faculty use these as an alternative to having students create a simple introductory webpage.
When finished adding all information, click Save at the bottom of the page.
Appendix VII 825
The User Profile information can be viewed in the Course Roster in the Communicate tab in any course in which that user is a member. Go to Communicate > Course Roster.
Appendix VII 826
Click User Profile beneath the user whose profile you want to view.
The information that you are permitted to see will display.
Note: A student in the same course can only see the email address, as that was how it was set up by ―Salli.‖
Appendix VII 827
Personal information can also be viewed from the People Search on the ANGEL Log On page, if that option is available there. The information that can be obtained will only be information that has been designated for Everyone to see.
On the ANGEL Log On page, click People Search.
On the next screen, add a name in the Name window and click Search.
Appendix VII 828
Salli‘s name appears as Sparrow, Salli. Click on that.
Clicking on the name only displays her name again. Since you have NOT logged on, this is all you are permitted to see.
If Search and Help Links has been added to your ANGEL Home page, you can also access personal information. The information that you can view will be limited by the information supplied by the person and the access levels set by them. From your Home page, click on People Search.
Appendix VII 829
On the next screen, add a name in the Name window and click Search.
Salli‘s name appears. Click on the name.
This time, since you are logged on with instructor rights, you can see the same information as you saw in the Course Roster.
Appendix VII 830
Appendix VII 831
How to Customize the Course Page
You can edit the contents and organization of the Course, Resources, and Communicate pages within ANGEL. This allows you to add different nuggets that are most useful for you and your students in the delivery of your course.
In this example, you are going to reorganize and add components to the Course page. On the Course page, click Edit Page.
The editing screen will appear. Click Add Component.
A pop-up window will appear advising you that the activity is being processed.
Appendix VII 832
Another pop-up window will appear that will allow you to choose the components that you want to add.
Scroll through the components and check any that you want to appear on the Course page. You are going to choose to add the Syllabus, Last Lesson (book marking), and Course Calendar.
Appendix VII 833
You can also designate where the components will be placed:
And how they will appear.
Appendix VII 834
You might want to experiment with different settings to see what works best for your course.
Click Add Selected when you are finished.
The nuggets have now been added.
Appendix VII 835
You can drag and drop the various nuggets to place them where you want them on the page.
Appendix VII 836
Click Save when you have finished.
The new components are now in place. Using Edit Page, you can rearrange the nuggets again until you are satisfied with the course components.
Appendix VII 837
Appendix VII 838
How to See Courses That Are Disabled
Many institutions choose to have courses created in ANGEL in a ―disabled‖ state. There are several reasons to do this. The primary reason is that students cannot see any courses that are disabled, even if they are on the course roster. This allows the instructor to develop the course before students can access it. Some institutions have all course shells uploaded into ANGEL, and then give instructors the choice of using the courses or not. Having them disabled keeps the courses that are not developed into ANGEL from being seen by students.
However, instructors also will not see their disabled courses unless the option to see them has been set within the Course Edit function. If you are not seeing your disabled courses, you will need to set the option to see them.
Log on to ANGEL and hover over the end of the Courses nugget toolbar so that the Edit icon is visible. Click on the Edit icon.
You will see all your courses listed. The checkmark next to each course indicates that you will be able to see the courses listed on the Home page. At the bottom of the page, change Show Disabled courses to Yes and then click Save.
Appendix VII 839
Tip : Note the other options that can be chosen. For example, if you do not want some of your courses to be displayed on your Home page, unclick them and then Save the settings.
The course is now visible on the Home page. Note that it is labeled as Disabled.
For more on this topic see ―How to activate/deactivate a course‖ in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Appendix VII 840
How to Remove Courses from Course List View
If you have courses listed on your ANGEL Home page that you no longer need to access, you can remove them from the list so they are not viewable. This does not actually delete the course; it merely removes the course from your view.
1. Go to your ANGEL Home page.
2. Roll the mouse over the right side of the Courses bar until the editing icons appear.
3. Click on the Edit icon (the pencil).
You will see all your courses listed.
Appendix VII 841
4. Uncheck the box next to the course(s) that you want to delete from your course list.
5. Click Save at the bottom of the page.
The course is no longer listed on the Home page.
Appendix VII 842
If you need to make the course(s) visible again, repeat this procedure and recheck the box next to the course you want to add to the list.
Appendix VII 843
How to Merge Two (or More) Course Rosters for Multiple
Sections
Sometimes it is useful to merge two or more sections of the same course into one course, so that the course rosters from both courses are contained within one course. This can also be useful for courses that are cross-listed and taught by the same instructor. You need to have Course Editor rights to all sections that you want to merge.
Caution: Any content in the courses from which the rosters are merged will NOT be imported into the new course. If you already have content in one of the courses to be merged, create an ANGEL archive of the course contents (Manage > Export Wizard > ANGEL Archive). Once the new course has been created, you will be able to import the content into it (Manage > Import Wizard > Content Package).
1. On your ANGEL Home page, click Merged Roster Manager.
Note: Some institutions may limit access to this procedure. Check with your ANGEL administrator if you do not see the Merged Roster Manager link.
2. The next screen will display all the courses in which you have Course Editor rights. Click the box next to each course you want to merge and then click Continue.
Appendix VII 844
3. Input a title for the merged course. Select the course with the classification code that is to be used by the merged course.
4. Decide whether you want to be able to access the source (original) courses and if you want those courses to be disabled.
Note: By checking the Disable Source courses box, students will not be able to get into the source course, only the merged course.
Note that teams are created from each roster. You can change the name of the teams if desired.
Note : Having the teams automatically created can be very helpful, especially if you will be creating any content items for the different course members or otherwise need to divide them into their teams. For example, within the Gradebook you can elect to see grades for each team separately – a useful feature if you need to enter final grades elsewhere for each course.
5. Click the Create Course button to continue.
Appendix VII 845
6. The next screen will display the progress of the merge roster process. You can then elect to merge more courses or return to the Home page.
The new merged course now displays in the Courses nugget.
Appendix VII 846
Caution: Once courses have been merged, you cannot change the merged course to add more sections. You would have to create a new merged course from all sections.
Appendix VII 847
How to Set Up and Use a Master Course
A Master Course serves as a template for a course or specific group of courses. It is imported into a course shell using the Import Wizard tool. It is developed exactly like any other course and includes the same sections and features as other courses. Access to the course is set up by using filters when the course is created that designate what courses can use the Master Course.
A Master Course has the following uses:
A single course that has multiple sections with many faculty teaching it, to maintain consistency and quality
A course taught by one faculty member every semester, as an alternative to a Copy Course or importing an Archived Course
A template for college, division, or department courses that need to have certain elements included within them.
Note: Once a Master Course has been imported, faculty can add their own content to it.
Tell your System Administrator that you need to have a Master Course set up. Only the System Administrator has rights to create Master Courses. The System Administrator generally needs to know:
The name of the course
The Course Editor for the course; other members can be added after the Master Course shell is created
If you want to specify a PIN (password) for the course. Only those persons who have the PIN would be able to import the Master Course.
What courses need to be able to import the Master Course and how it will be used.
Once the Master Course has been created, you will see it listed among your courses if you are a Course Editor within that Master Course. Before the Master Course can be imported, it needs to be developed with all content completed.
Tip: If a course has already been developed and you want it to be used as a basis for a Master Course, it can be imported into the Master Course using Copy Course. You need to have Course Editor rights to both the Master Course and the course being copied.
Note: You do NOT need to have any editing rights within the Master Course in order to import it into one of your courses. As long as your
Appendix VII 848
course matches the filter criteria set up for the Master Course, you will be able to import it.
To Import a Master Course, enter the Course into which the Master Course will be imported, and go to Manage > Import Wizard.
1. On the following page, click Master Course.
2. You will see any Master Courses associated with the course in the drop-down list. Select the Master Course to import from the list.
.
If the Master Course could only be accessed through use of an assigned PIN, you would enter that instead of choosing a course from the drop-down list.
Appendix VII 849
The final options on that page allow you to:
Convert any Quizzes (the older test/quiz tool in ANGEL) within the Master Course to the newer Assessments tool. If this tool was not used in the Master Course or if you do not choose to have them converted, do not check this option.
Backup the new course before importing. If no content has been added to the new course, this is not necessary.
Replace existing content: if any content has been already added to the new course, this will erase it. Uncheck it if content has been added and you do not want to lose it. Importing the Master Course will then add content to the course, but not delete what is already there.
Note: Check for any duplications in content, especially in the Gradebook, Calendar, and Announcements.
3. Click Import to continue.
4. You will see a progress page as content is being imported. Click Exit Import Wizard when finished.
Appendix VII 850
Note: Importing from a Master Course creates a copy of the Master Course; it does not link the course to the Master Course. If any changes or additions are made to the Master Course, content in any courses that were created from it will not reflect those changes.
Tip: If you anticipate adding additional material to the Master Course and you want any courses created from it to automatically be updated as well, consider creating the content in an LOR (Learning Object Repository) and then linking to that content in the Master Course. All courses created from the Master Course will then also have that link to the LOR and will be updated as the linked content in the LOR is updated. (Be sure that the course also has access rights to the LOR.)
For more information about linking and updating from an LOR, see How to Link or Copy Content from a Learning Object Repository into a Course.
Content Management Tasks
This section addresses those procedures that involve adding content and activities within course sections.
How to Organize Content
One of the best ways to organize content in ANGEL is by using folders and adding content items within the folders. This allows you to organize your content into whatever type of unit is best suited for your course; that is, Modules, Units, Lessons, Weeks, Chapters, and so on.
1. Go to Lessons > Add Content > Folder.
Appendix VII 851
2. Add the settings for the Folder. You can use the Subtitle to add the dates for the unit.
By using Advanced Settings, you will have access to the inline HTML Editor. This allows you to add some text to the folder that you could use to give instructions for the unit. When students click on the folder and open it, they will then be presented with the instructions and information about that unit, as well as any content that pertains.
Appendix VII 852
Tip: There is a token used in the above example ($FIRST_NAME$). When users view that text, they will see their own names instead. There are a variety of tokens that can be used; see the Appendix in the Online Help Manual or in the Instructor Reference Manual for more examples.
The example above will appear like this when the student opens the folder:
3. Add any content items needed to the folder using Add Content. In the above example, you need to add a Discussion Forum, an Assignment Drop Box, and a Quiz.
Appendix VII 853
4. Continue to add and set up all content items.
5. If you want to rearrange the order of the content items, click Rearrange.
Appendix VII 854
6. And on the next screen, use the mouse to drag and drop the items into the desired order.
7. You can use the Section Heading content item to add any additional text between content items. Go to Add Content > Add Section Heading.
8. Add the Settings for the Section Heading and Save it. You can use the Page Text area to add additional text, images, and/or hyperlinks. In this instance, you are only using the title.
Appendix VII 855
After saving, the Section Heading is visible.
Note: You may need to use the Rearrange option again to place the Section Heading where you want it.
Appendix VII 856
If you have other content items that do not pertain to any one particular module, you may want to create a folder for those on the main Lessons page. For example, if you have a project that is to be done over several weeks, you could create a folder for that and place it outside any of the unit folders.
Appendix VII 857
How to Edit a Syllabus
Once a Syllabus has been created or uploaded into ANGEL, it can be edited. Exactly how it is edited will depend upon the format used for the Syllabus. A Syllabus can be created by using the Syllabus template; by uploading a Syllabus created as an HTML page, a Word .doc, or other format; by creating it using the Create a Page option; or by linking to an external web page. Editing the Syllabus will depend upon how the Syllabus was created.
Editing a Syllabus Using the Syllabus Template
1. Go to the Syllabus nugget, usually found within the Resources section, roll the mouse over the end of the Syllabus bar until the Edit icon (pencil) appears and click it.
2. On the following screen, click Syllabus Editor.
3. Make any needed changes.
Appendix VII 858
4. Click Save at the bottom of the page to finish.
Editing a Syllabus that was Uploaded as an HTML file :
1. Follow step 1 above. On the following screen, click Syllabus Files.
Appendix VII 859
Note: Because the syllabus selected in this course is an uploaded file, the Syllabus Editor button does not display.
2. The Syllabus file will be displayed on the next page. Click edit.
Note: There may be more than one file listed here if the syllabus file had any images or other documents linked within it, so be sure that you select the correct file.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the window that will appear and click HTML Editor.
Note: The text in the window is in HTML code. Selecting the HTML Editor will allow you to edit any text using the more user-friendly format.
Appendix VII 860
4. Make any changes that need to be made.
5. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Editor.
6. You will return to the Syllabus files page. Click Exit Syllabus Files to finish.
Appendix VII 861
Editing a Syllabus Uploaded as a Document
While it is not preferable, a Syllabus could have been uploaded as a document file. If a Syllabus in this format needs to be changed, it has to be changed within the word processing program in which it was created. For example, if it is a .docx file, it has to be changed within Microsoft Word 2007.
1. Open the Word Processing program (for example, Microsoft Word), and then open the Syllabus file.
2. Make any changes, and save the file.
Note: When saving the file, do NOT change the file name. You want the file name to be the same as the name of the file already uploaded into ANGEL.
3. If you do not have the original file, you can download it from ANGEL. Go to the Syllabus Files (see Step 5). Click Download and then Save it to your computer so that you can edit it as in the previous steps.
Appendix VII 862
4. Once the file has been edited and saved, return to the Syllabus nugget in your ANGEL course and click Edit as illustrated in step 1. On the next screen, click Syllabus Files (Step 5).
5. Click delete beneath the Syllabus file. (You want to delete this file so that you can then upload the edited file that has the same name.)
6. The next page will say, ―Are you sure you want to delete this file?‖ Click OK.
Caution: This will completely delete the Syllabus from your course, so ensure that you DO have the edited Syllabus file ready to be uploaded.
7. Once it has been deleted, you will be returned to the Syllabus Files page. Click Add Content.
Appendix VII 863
8. Click Upload Files.
9. Click Browse to locate the edited file on your computer.
10. Locate the file on your computer and either double-click it, or highlight it and click Open.
11. Click Upload File.
12. The next page will tell you that the upload was successful. Click Exit Syllabus Files to finish.
Appendix VII 864
Appendix VII 865
How to Upload Files for Course Use
There are several ways to upload files to be used in course content. Exactly which procedure to use will depend upon how the files are to be displayed and how they are associated with other content items.
Files Used as Content Items in Lessons
If a file is to be used within Lessons as a specific content item; i.e. it is displayed as a content item when students go to the Lessons section, then you would use the Add Content > Upload file procedure.
Go to the section in Lessons where the file is to appear, and click Add Content. In this instance, you will add a file to a folder. When students open the folder, they will be able to access the file.
Select File
Click Browse to find the file to upload.
Appendix VII 866
Find the file, highlight it, and click the Open button.
Tip: When deciding upon a file format to use, consider the size of the file and the ability of students to open specific file formats. In this instance, a PowerPoint file was converted to a PDF format to both reduce the file size and utilize a format that all students can access. The most user-friendly file formats to use will be PDF, RTF, and HTML formats.
Appendix VII 867
The path to the file will now appear in the field adjacent to the Browse button. Complete the information by adding a Title for the file, then click the Upload File button
Note: If you do not add a title in the Title window, then the ―title‖ will be the file name i.e. that is the text that will appear in the module. For example, if you did not add the title to the file you uploaded here, it would appear as ―powerpoint.pdf‖ which may not be a very meaningful name for students.
.
The next screen will show that the file upload was successful. Click OK to continue.
The file is now in place within the module folder.
Appendix VII 868
Uploading Files Linked Within an HTML (Web Page) Document
Very often HTML pages contain images and links to other documents. When uploading the web page as a content item, you also need to upload all documents and images that are linked within that web page. One of the easiest ways to do this is by using the ―Drag and Drop‖ option when uploading the web page.
To begin, follow steps 1 and 2 above.
On the next screen, choose the Drag-n- Drop button.
If you have never used this feature before, you will be prompted to install it. Follow the prompts. When you are finished, the page should display as below:
Appendix VII 869
Locate ALL the files that you need to upload and drag them onto the Drag-n-Drop window.
Note: As the files are being copied over, you may see a progress window.
Appendix VII 870
Click the OK button.
The following screen will ask you to name the content item/web page and to select the web page file from the group of files that were uploaded. This is the page that will display in the folder.
Appendix VII 871
Note: The Drag-n-Drop feature can ONLY be used when there is a single page to be displayed as a content item within Lessons that has files linked within it. If you wanted to upload multiple pages that are to be displayed as content items, you need to either upload them separately or you can compress them as a single zip file, use Manage > Import Wizard > Content Package to upload the zip file, and then extract all files during that process.
Click OK to continue.
The page is now listed within the folder contents:
Appendix VII 872
Clicking on the link will display the page.
Note: In this example, there was a document in pdf format that was linked to the original page where it says ―Print version‖. When you did the ―Drag-N-Drop‖, you also uploaded this document file. If that file had not been uploaded with the rest of the files, there would be a ―file not found‖ error when the student clicked on that link.
Below is a small segment of the web page. The image displayed is one of the image files that was uploaded.
Appendix VII 873
Appendix VII 874
How to Share Content Within a Learning Object Repository with
Other Courses and Users
One of the advantages of using a LOR (Learning Object Repository) is that content within a LOR can be shared with other courses and users. This requires settings within the LOR to make the content available to others.
Click on the LOR button.
Open the LOR that contains the content to be shared with others and go to the Manage tab.
Click on Course and Group Access
Appendix VII 875
In the Add Associations From: column, select Course Search
The Course Search options will appear.
You can search for a course by using a keyword, such as the Instructor‘s name or part or all of the title or Course ID, or you can apply as many of the criteria that might apply to select the course. Note that you can search by term, location, school, department, etc.
The terms used here will be those that are set up by your institution, and may differ from the terms used in the example. If no criteria are set, you can also click the Search button and all courses within ANGEL will appear. In this example, you just used the search criteria ―All‖ in the Term selector.
Check the box next to all courses that you want to have access to your LOR and then click the Add Selected button.
Appendix VII 876
The courses have now been added to the access list.
Going into the last course on the above list, you see that the course can now access the LOR
Appendix VII 877
Note: Even though specific courses can access an LOR, the course editors for the courses cannot make any changes to the content items linked within the LOR UNLESS they also have editing rights within the LOR.
Appendix VII 878
How to Link or Copy Content from a Learning Object Repository
into a Course
The purpose of a Learning Object Repository (LOR) is to house content that is sharable, portable, and reusable. All Faculty have their own personal LOR; and LORs can be also be created for specific courses, departments, divisions, etc. so that users can share content items.
Using an LOR to store content is a good choice when you are teaching several sections of the same course and / or are teaching the same content for more than one semester, especially if you will be editing or adding to the content. By linking to the content in an LOR, courses will always have the most current content without having to go into each course and make the changes
If you have large files, such as video or audio files, that are used by more than one course, you can save valuable file space by having all courses link to those files in an LOR.
If you need to make changes to the content items within the courses, then using an LOR may not be as good a choice, since it will not allow you to edit the content items linked from it except within the LOR.
Open your personal LOR; If you have never used your personal LOR, use Repository button to create the LOR.
If your LOR has already been created, you can also access it from your Home page.
Appendix VII 879
:
. Note: Curriculum, department, division or institutional level LORs are not automatically created by the system. Check with your ANGEL administrator if you wish to create a curriculum, department, division or institutional level LOR. The same procedure illustrated here will apply to these LORs as well.
.Click Add Content.
You are going to add a folder, and then add a file to the folder.
Tip: By adding a folder, and then linking to that folder within a course, the folder contents will be updated within the course every time that new items are added to the folder.
Appendix VII 880
Apply settings to the Folder, and save.
The next screen allows us to upload content into the folder. Click Add Content > Add a Content Item.
In this example, you uploaded a document.
Appendix VII 881
For more on this topic see “How to Upload Files for Course Use.”
For more on this topic see “How to Share Content in a Personal LOR with other Users and Courses”.
Close the Repository and open the course that is to be linked to the content in the LOR. Click the Lessons tab.
Click Add Content in the location where you want the content to be added. In this case, you are going to add a Module folder, so you will add it to the ―main‖ Lessons page.
On the Add Content screen, scroll down to the More Options section and click Import from Learning Object Repository.
In the top section, use the drop-down list to highlight the Repository that you want to link to
Appendix VII 882
Then click the Browse button
The content items within that Repository will be displayed. Click the box next to any item that you want to use in your course, then click the ―Link to Items‖ button.
Note: Linking to the item will allow the content to be automatically updated within the course every time it is updated in the LOR, including the addition of new content items if they are added to the folder in the LOR.
Appendix VII 883
The next screen will show that the items have been imported. Click ―Done‖ to finish.
Returning to the Lessons page, you will see the new folder has been added. The small arrow in the lower corner of the folder icon indicates that this is a link. If any changes need to be made within this folder, they can only be done within the folder in the LOR.
Appendix VII 884
Opening the folder, you see the file that was within the folder in the LOR is also within this folder.
If you return to the LOR and add another document to the folder
It will also be added to the folder in the course:
Appendix VII 885
If you add an Assessment, then you also need to add it as an Assignment to the Gradebook within the course.
If this is not done, all submissions and grades will only appear in the LOR and will not be recorded within the course. In this example, you have already added an Assessment to the LOR. When it was created, you added it as an Assignment. It now appears in the Course also.
Note: Because this is linked to this actual Assessment within the LOR, you cannot make any changes to the settings within the course. All settings have to be changed within the LOR.
Appendix VII 886
To make this a Gradebook Assignment, go to the Gradebook (Manage > Gradebook) within the course.
On the following screen, go to Import Assignments
Appendix VII 887
Select the Repository from the drop-down list and then click Select
All Assessments available within the Repository will appear. Check the box next to the correct Assessment, choose the Category, and then click Import
Appendix VII 888
The list of Assignments will appear with the new Assignment in place.
Caution: If Drop box Assignments and Discussion Forums are LINKED to an LOR, all submissions will post to the LOR and not within the course. Therefore, unless there is a specific reason to do so, you need to COPY those items and not link them.
Items that are COPIED and not LINKED will not update if they are updated in the LOR.
Appendix VII 889
How to Copy Content Items from One Course to Another
You can copy individual content items from one course to another. You need to have Course Editor rights in both courses to have access to the content. This procedure only copies items found in Lessons.
Note: If you need to copy an entire course, which would include Announcements, Calendar items, Gradebook, etc, then you need to use a different option, such as importing from a Master Course, using Copy Course, or importing from an Archive..
In the Course where you want to place the content, go to Lessons and the location where the content is to be copied TO. In this instance, you will copy the Module 1 Folder and all its contents from one course to another.
Click Add Content
Select ―Import from Course or Group‖
Appendix VII 890
Select the course from which the content items will be taken from the drop-down list on the next screen, and then click ―Browse‖
All of the content items in the course will appear. Clicking on the link on any folder will also expand its contents and allow you to choose individual items within that folder.
For example, clicking on the Module 1 link above will expand that folder to reveal its contents. Clicking the box next to any item will select it to be copied. You can select more than one item.
Note: While you can click on individual items WITHIN a folder and only copy those, you cannot choose individual items within ONE folder and then copy another folder in its entirety at the same time. You can only copy items at the same level at one time.
Appendix VII 891
You will copy Modules 1, 2, and 3 by clicking the box next to each one. Click ―Copy Items‖ to continue.
Note that there are some additional options that can be checked for Quizzes and Assessments.
Appendix VII 892
When all items have been copied, the following screen will appear to show that the process was successful. In this example, it states that 20 items have been copied (―imported‖); this refers to all of the content items contained within the folders. Click ―Done‖ to return to the Lessons section. (―Continue‖ will return to the ―Import menu‖ screen and would allow you to import more items, if necessary).
The folders have now been added.
Apply any settings needed to content items so that they apply to this course.
Note: You can also EXPORT content items from one course into another course by selecting ―Export Item‖ from the Utilities link of any content item. However, while this would allow you to export a folder and all its contents in one step, you can only export one content item at a time (i.e. one folder, or any of its individual contents).. Using the above procedure allows you to copy as many items as needed at one time.
Note: You can copy items from an LOR using a similar procedure, except you would select ―Import from Learning Object Repository‖..
Appendix VII 893
Appendix VII 894
How to Upload Images in a Content Item
Images can easily be uploaded and appear within any content item using the inline HTML Editor. The inline HTML Editor is available anywhere that text can be added, including emails, discussion forum postings, content item descriptions, assessment questions, and other areas.
In this demonstration, you will upload an image into directions for an Assignment Drop box. The procedure is the same that would be used anywhere the inline HTML Editor is available.
Click ―Add Content‖ wherever the content item is to be added. In this example, you are adding content to the ―Module 1‖ Folder.
Click the content item type that you want to add. In this example, you are adding a Drop box.
Add a title to the Drop box and the go to the inline HTML Editor section. In this example, it is used to format the ―Directions.‖
Note: You may need to be in the Advanced view to bring up the inline HTML Editor for some content items. For example, the editor is only visible in the Advanced view when creating a Folder.
Add any text and format it as needed.
Appendix VII 895
Place the cursor where you want to embed the image, and then click on the ―image‖
icon.
The following pop-up window will appear. Click the ―Browse server‖ button to continue.
Note: You must disable any pop-up blocking software.
Another pop-up window will appear. Click ―Browse‖ to find the image file you want to upload.
Appendix VII 896
Locate the file and double-click on it to select it, or click on it and the click the ―Open‖ button.
The path to the image file will now be in the ―Browse‖ field. Click ―Upload File‖ to upload it.
Appendix VII 897
The file will be listed in the larger window. Click on it to select it.
Appendix VII 898
The first pop-up window appears with the image in the ―Preview‖ window. You could also add text beneath the picture within that window. Note that you have added a very short title in the ―Alternative text‖ field: this text would appear if someone was using a screen reader or otherwise could not view the image.Click ―OK‖ to continue.
The picture is in place below the text within the Directions section.
Appendix VII 899
Continue with any other settings needed for the assignment, and then click ―Save‖
This is how the assignment will appear to the student:
Tip: When selecting pictures to embed, keep the picture dimensions (height and width) and file size in mind. Most digital cameras come with some type of imaging software that will allow you to edit photos and also resize them. In this example, the original photo, which was 3488 x 2688
Appendix VII 900
pixels and almost 5 MB in size, was reduced to 300 x 225 pixels and 12.4 KB. This will greatly reduce the time the picture will take to load, and will also fit within the screen better.
Tip: For more information on using the inline HTML Editor, see the HTML Editor Reference Manual in the Guides section of the online Help.
Appendix VII 901
How to Add Images to a Content Item: Creating an Image
Gallery
Most content items in ANGEL can access the inline HTML Editor. Using the Editor is one of the easiest ways to add an image to the content item. The Editor is generally available in the Content tab in the content item settings, but is also available wherever you can add text, such as in a Discussion Forum posting, in the Calendar, in an Assessment question, or an email message. Students also can access the HTML editor when making Discussion Forum postings, sending emails, or creating pages in Team files.
In this example, you will add some images to a folder. This will have the effect of a photo gallery so that when the folder is opened, the pictures will display. The procedure for adding images is the same wherever the HTML editor is used.
Create the folder by going to Lessons > Add content > Folder
Check ―Advanced Settings‖ so that the HTML Editor appears in the Page Text section below the ―Subtitle‖.
Add a title to the Folder, then click in the Page Text section and begin adding text:
Appendix VII 902
In this example, you want to embed the pictures within some table cells so that the pictures will be in columns and rows. Click on the Table icon to add a table
.
The following pop-up window appears so that you can set the table format. You are going to make a table of 2 columns and 3 rows. If you need to add or delete a column or row later, it can be edited. You‘re also going to create the table to be 85 percent in width
Appendix VII 903
and you want it to be centered on the page. It also has cell spacing and cell padding set to 3 (this will allow more spacing between table cells). Click ―OK‖ when all details have been added.
The table is now in place in the Page Text. To put a picture in one of the table cells, click in one of the cells and then on the ―Insert/Edit Image icon as shown here.
A pop-up window will appear. Click the ―Browse server‖ button.
Appendix VII 904
Caution: Be sure that any pop-up blocking software has been disabled so that pop-ups are allowed within ANGEL.
Another pop-up window will open. Click the ―Browse‖ button to upload the picture file from your computer.
Appendix VII 905
Browse to find the file you need, select it, and click the ―Open‖ button
You will return to the pop-up window. Click ―Upload file‖ to continue.
Appendix VII 906
You will see the file that you uploaded in the window. Click on it to select it.
Appendix VII 907
Note: As other files are uploaded, they will also be listed in this window.
The original pop-up window will display with the picture and details listed. Click ―OK‖ to add the picture to the table.
Note: It is good web practice to add descriptive text in the ―alternative text‖ field for accommodation purposes. This text would appear if someone was using a screen-reader and was unable to see the image.
Appendix VII 908
Add other pictures using the same procedure, putting a different picture in each table cell. When you are finished, all cells will have pictures. Below is the completed gallery
Appendix VII 909
How to Upload a Web Page and Its Contents
While ANGEL allows users to create web pages using the HTML Editor, you can also upload existing web pages and all images and other files linked to them .In this example, you will upload a web page that has several images embedded within it.
Go to the location within Lessons where the web page needs to appear, and select Add Content > File
In order to have the web page appear with all associated images, all of the files, including the image files and the web (html) file, need to be uploaded. On the following screen, add a title for the file and then click Drag-N-Drop,
Note: You could browse and upload each file separately; however, choosing Drag-N-Drop allows for all files to be uploaded at the same time.
Appendix VII 910
Locate all of the files to be uploaded and drag them onto the Drag-N-Drop window where indicated.
Note: The first time that you use Drag-N-Drop, you will be prompted to install it.
Once all the files have been uploaded, click OK
Appendix VII 911
On the following page, it asks for the ―Default‖ file. This is the web page file that is to appear as the content item. It will have either an htm or html file extension.
Click OK to finish.
Appendix VII 912
It will now appear as a content item.
When clicked, it will display with all images intact.
Appendix VII 913
Understanding the Difference Between Assessments and
Quizzes
The addition of Assessments brought some significant improvements to the online testing abilities in ANGEL.
Changes in Settings:
No change in Content , Access, Automate, and Assignment sections.
―Delivery‖ Section in Quizzes is renamed ―Interaction‖ in Assessments
Delivery Settings:
Quiz:
―Take Quiz‖: choice of ―Enabled‖ and ―Disabled.
Assessments:
Can set specific dates and times for ―Date Enabled‖ and ―Date Disabled‖
Significance: ―Enabled‖ refers to when the assessment is available to be taken, while ―disabled‖ means that the assessment can no longer be taken. This is different from the ―Start date‖ and ―End date‖, which refer to when the Assessment content item is visible to students. Allowing the assessment to remain visible after it is disabled allows students access to review feedback.
Appendix VII 914
In Assessments, what used to be a manual process (changing Enabled to Disabled) can now be done automatically.
Display Mode:
Quiz :
You can choose to have questions display all at once, single question at a time, or single question with no backtrack. Within this section, you can also check whether questions are to be randomly scrambled and/or answer choices are to be randomly scrambled.
Assessments:
You can choose to have questions display all at once, one question set at a time, or one question at a time. (A Question set, something new in Assessments, allows for the grouping of questions with different configurations and settings. They are somewhat analogous to ―Section Headings‖ in Quizzes, but have more options). Note that you can also create ―question titles‖ in Assessments, and have the option to have these displayed with questions.
Question Set Defaults:
Quiz: Not available
Assessment: Options that can be applied to each Question Set. Some of these options are only available with specific question display choices.
Appendix VII 915
For more on this topic see “Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Creating an Assessment – Content/Access/Interaction Settings”
Submission settings
Quiz: Found in Submission section. Sets the number of times students can take the Quiz and the validation options. It also allows for some ―Save‘ options and Anonymous submissions.
Assessment: Submission settings remain in the Interaction section
New options are available:
Mastery: Students can retake assessment until attains specified score. Can set the maximum number of tries in ―Attempts allowed‖
―Save‖ button allows for students to save their work and return later. There is no longer a need for an ―Auto-save, as all answers are automatically saved.
Appendix VII 916
Time settings
Quiz: Remain in Delivery section
Assessments: Remain in Interaction Section. Same options as with Quiz, but now can choose between ―Unlimited‖ and set times.
Review
Found in the Review section for both Quizzes and Assessments
Quiz: Labeled ―Review settings‖
You can choose what is displayed when Quiz is submitted:
Full Review (determined by Feedback settings)
Summary only (Points possible, Points earned, Score)
Appendix VII 917
Disabled (results not displayed).
―Full Review options‖ determine what displays if Full Review is selected.
Assessment: Labeled ―Results Review‖
As in Quizzes, you can choose what is displayed with same options. However, a new section (Review Availability) gives the option to select WHEN the review is available, including allowing the selected review to be available after the Assessment has been disabled. It also allows for the review to be disabled after a set time period.
―Feedback options‖ are identical to the ―Full Review options‖ in Quizzes.
Item Analysis
This feature was available in Quizzes, but was not as detailed as is available in Assessment.
In both formats, it is accessible through the Reports lin for the Quiz or Assessment
Quiz: Each question is listed with the number of answers responses and points received.
Appendix VII 918
Assessment:Each question is listed with more detailed information about the responses (Note: this example was divided into two sections so that more detail could be displayed)
Note: Questions can be edited and regraded from this screen in Assessments.
New Features in Assessments
Question sets
Questions are added into Question sets. You can have one or more Question Set; each can have a different configuration and settings. They are somewhat similar to the
Appendix VII 919
Section Headings in Quizzes, but offer more options. For example, each Question set can draw questions from a different Question Bank or Question Pool.
For more on this topic see “How to Use Question Sets” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Question Banks
A powerful new feature in Assessments is the creation of Question Banks. A Question Bank is a database of questions. When creating an Assessment, questions can be drawn from Question Banks based on keywords, difficulty level, standards and objectives, type of question, and/or specific text. As new questions are developed, they can be added to a Question Bank.
For more on this topic see “How to Use Question Banks: Definition of Question Bank and how to Create a Question Bank”
Question Pools
A Question Pool is a group of questions randomly drawn from one or more Question Bank based on set criteria including keywords, difficulty level, type of question, standards and objectives, and/or specific text.
For more on this topic see “How to use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment with Question Pools”
At a glance
This feature allows you to view a ―snapshot‖ of your assessment and settings. It is accessed when you click on the Assessment link.
Appendix VII 920
Below are the different sections that display on the At A Glance screen
The top section gives some statistics of the assessments completed to date, including a graphical depiction of recent results by user.
:
The top right column of the page shows how many of each type of question is used, as well as the percentage of each type.
Appendix VII 921
The rest of the screen gives a complete picture of all settings associated with that assessment.
Appendix VII 922
Features in Quizzes and Not Assessments
Quizzes have several features that are not found in Assessments
Section Headings:
Adding a Section Heading allows you to choose a set number of questions from all questions that are added after the Section Heading and before the next Section Heading. The question results will appear on the item analysis; questions can be deleted or changed and the Quiz regarded based on these changes. These differ from Question Pools in that they cannot be chosen based on keywords, objectives, standards, level of difficulty, and type of question. Therefore, they need to be manually selected and added.
All other features found in a Section Heading are also found within Question Sets in Assessments.
Appendix VII 923
Email a Quiz:
Selecting Utilities > Email Quiz allows the Quiz to be emailed and completed by specified users.
Appendix VII 924
Export Submissions and Grade Data:
Selecting Utilities > Export Submissions and Grade Data allows for Quiz information to be downloaded in CSV, PRN, or TXT format.
Appendix VII 925
Add to Pool:
Choosing the Add to Pool option (Utilities > Add to Pool) allows the instructor to assign a single keyword to all questions within the Quiz which will then allow those questions to be added to a Question Pool.
Tip: When converting a Quiz to an Assessment,(another option in Utilities) use the Add to Pool option to assign a keyword to all questions in the Pool first. When the Quiz is subsequently converted to an Assessment, it will automatically be added as to the Question Bank. Otherwise, each question would need to be individually added to a Question Bank.
Appendix VII 926
Appendix VII 927
Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings; Creating an
Assessment’s Content, Access, and Interaction Settings
To create a quiz, exam, or test, you create an Assessment. An Assessment can consist of a variety of question types including multiple choice, multiple choice with more than one answer, true/false, matching, ordering, fill-in-the-blank, short answer, essay, and off-line. There are many options that can be applied to an Assessment, making it very customizable. Understanding these settings will help you in creating an Assessment that is specific to the outcomes that you want to achieve.
For more on this topic see “How to Create a Secure Assessment” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Go to the location in Lessons where you want to add the Assessment. In this demonstration, you are adding an Assessment to Module 1. Click Add Content.
Click ―Assessment‖
Select Settings: Advanced
Appendix VII 928
Add a Title, and a Subtitle, if needed. Put any directions for the Assessment in the Description window.
Note: The text in the Description will appear when students click on the Assessment link. They will not have to begin the Assessment to see the text.
Tip: Whatever text is added to the Title field will be the label used to identify that assignment in the Gradebook. For that reason, it is a good idea to keep the title short and descriptive. Putting any dates associated with the assignment into the Subtitle field will still make that information available without adding to the title size.
Go to the Access tab. User Tracking is useful if you want a detailed report on student activity within this Assessment. In this example, you have set it to ―Students Only‖. You can also designate whether the Assessment is to be taken by the entire class or only by specific teams.
Tip: Consider assigning a password if the test is to be administered in a testing center or by a proctor. Give the password to the testing center or proctor to be given to the student when properly identified.
For more on this topic see “How to set Team Access rights for Lesson Content” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Appendix VII 929
Note: Checking the ―Do not allow users to view this item‖ box will prevent anyone other than Course Editors to see the Assessment. It will override ANY other settings, including ―Start Date‖ and ―End Date‖.
Set the Start and End dates if you do not want the Assessment link to be visible until a specific date and time. When specified, the item will be hidden until the Start Date/Time and will be hidden again after the End Date/Time.
Note: These settings will NOT affect when the test is actually available to be taken, they only make the Assessment link visible. The ―Enable/Disable‖ settings are what determine when the test is available to be taken.
Caution: Remember that the boxes next to the Start/End Dates need to be checked in order to set the dates.
Appendix VII 930
Tip: Setting the End date to a date and time AFTER the exam is no longer available will allow students to see their scores as well as any information allowed as part of the Review.
In the Browser security section, select the level of security that you need for the Assessment. ―None‖ means that no special measures will be applied. ―Medium‖ will disable the right mouse click when taking the exam to prevent copying or printing or using the ―back‖ button. ―High‖ involves the Secure ANGEL browser and can only be used in lab settings with the browser installed.
Caution: No online test can be totally ―secure‖. If needing a high-stakes assessment, consider requiring a testing center or proctor for test administration.
Note: An IP Filter can be used to designate specific IP addresses, limiting students to only taking the test from those locations.
Go to the Interaction tab. Set the Date Enabled and Date Disabled, checking the box for each.
Date Enabled refers to the date and time the Assessment is available for students to take.
Date Disabled refers to the date and time when the test can no longer be taken.
Note: If there is no Date Enabled and/or Date Disabled set, the test will be available to take during the Start and End Dates already set.
Decide how you want the questions to be presented.
Appendix VII 931
―All at once‖ will display all of the questions at one time, similar to seeing and taking a paper test.
―Question set at a time‖ would display each question set separately.
Note: When configuring the Assessment, you can create different Question sets of questions. Each Question set can have different settings such as different time limits, different titles, and randomization and display options.
Question at a time would display each question separately.
For more on this topic see “How to Create a Secure Assessment” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Some Question Set default options can be set next. These allow for some randomization of question options within a Question Set, as well as some options that are only available when the ―Question at a time‖ option is chosen.
Appendix VII 932
―Randomize the order in which questions are delivered‖ would change the order of questions within a question set.
Tip: If an Assessment was covering several different topics and wanted to have randomly ordered questions by topic, create a Question set for each topic and then select the Randomize order of questions option.
―Randomize the order of each question‘s answer choices‖ would reorder the answer choices primarily for multiple choice questions.
Caution: Sometimes the order of answer choices should not be reordered, due to the nature of the choices. For example, you would not want an answer choice of ―All of the above‖ to appear anywhere except as the last answer choice. There is an option that can be selected within each question to prevent randomizing the question choices for that particular question.
―Don‘t allow backtrack‖ only applies with the ―Display Settings of Question set at a time‖ or ―Question at a time ―options. It means that once a set of questions has been submitted, or each question has been submitted, students cannot go back and change their answers.
―Display feedback after each question‖ only applies with the ―Display Setting of Question at a Time‖. It means that after each question has been submitted, any feedback for that question will display.
―Correct answer must be selected before next question‖ is presented is another option that is only relevant when questions are displayed one at a time
Note: These settings are applied to all Question Sets. Further options can be set for individual Question Sets once the Assessment settings have been saved.
Submission Settings include:
Appendix VII 933
―Mastery settings‖: This would allow students to retake the Assessment as many times as it is available until they reach a certain percentage grade.
―Attempts Allowed‖: Choose how many times students can retake an Assessment. The options range from 1 to 10 times to Unlimited.
Choose the Validation option needed.
―Do not allow‖: Means that students cannot leave any questions unanswered. A pop-up window will display and will not allow students to submit the Assessment without answering all questions.
―Allow, but issue warning‖: Means that if students leave a question unanswered, they will receive a warning. A pop-up window will display advising them that the question has not been answered and giving them the option to answer it or go forward.
―Allow, without warning‖: Means that students will not be advised of any unanswered questions and will be allowed to submit the Assessment.
Click the ―Save‖ option if you want to allow students to save their work and return later. If a time limit has been set, they will need to return to complete the Assessment within that time limit. (See Step 15).
Anonymous Mode should only be checked if you do not need to know who submitted which test. If this is selected, scores cannot be recorded in the Gradebook.
―Time Limit ―allows you to set the window of time available for students to take the test once they have begun. If you do not want to set a time limit, then check the ―Unlimited‖ option.
―Time Warning‖, if selected, will display a pop-up window to advise students of the time remaining, according to the minutes selected here. You also have a choice of selecting ―No warning‖
Caution: Remind students to take the time limit into consideration when beginning their Assessments. They need to begin the Assessment and allow enough time to finish BEFORE the Disabled date and time is reached.
If the ―Automatically submit assessment when time expires‖ box is checked, it means that as soon as the allotted time for taking the test has finished, the test will automatically be submitted, no matter what other settings have been selected.
Caution: If this option is chosen, warn students that ―the clock starts ticking‖ as soon as they begin the Assessment, no matter what else they might do. When the time is up, the test will be gone! If students ―wander away‖ from the test and then return, they will not be able to answer more questions if the time period is up.
Appendix VII 934
Appendix VII 935
Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings; Review and
Assignment Settings
Within an Assessment, you can designate what kind of feedback the students will receive upon completion of the Assessment, and can even change this feedback based on set parameters. The Assignments tab is used to set up the Assessment as an assignment in the Gradebook.
Within the settings for an Assessment, select the Review tab.
View Submission History: Select what you would like students to see at the time that they submit their Assessments or according the Review Availability settings that follow. These options will remain open for students until the set End Date and time, or until the Review options are changed. The options are: Full review, List only, and Disabled.
Full review: Students will see all feedback as set in Feedback Options (below)
List only: Students will see their score, points possible, and points awarded only.‖
Disabled: Students will not receive any feedback or score information.
Go to the Review Availability section. This allows you to specify when you want students to view the option selected in ―View Submission History‖.
Specify when the Review is active with ―Review Begins‖. The default is ―User submission‖. You can also have the review begin a set number of days after the
Appendix VII 936
Assessment is disabled (so that it is not viewed until the Assessment can no longer be taken), or on a specific date.
If the box in front of the ―Days‖ text is left blank, the Review will be active according to the designation in the drop-down list. In the example below, ―User submission‖ is highlighted, so that the specified review will be available as soon as the Assessment is submitted.
You can also specify how long the Review will remain available to students by inputting the number of days when the Review will end.
If the Assessment contains manually graded questions, such as short answer or essay questions, clicking the ―Restrict review until all questions are graded‖ will not allow the review to be available until after all questions have been graded.
Finally, you have the option to have any feedback associated with the Assessment to either display after a Question set has been completed or after the entire Assessment has been completed.
Note: The ability to see feedback after completion of a Question Set is only available if the question display mode is set to ―Question Set at a Time‖
Feedback Options allow you to designate exactly what will be displayed in the Review if the Full review option is chosen in Step 2 above.
Appendix VII 937
I
Caution: Be aware that choosing ―Answer key‖ and ―Question text‖ will give students a complete copy of the Assessment that they could copy and share. If this is a high-stakes Assessment that will be used again, these may not be good options to select.
Go to the Assignments tab. Selecting one of the options in the Milestones section will create a Milestone and also put a Due Date and Assigned date on the Calendar. If this Assessment will be automatically graded, Item completion can be selected for the Milestone.
Selecting a Milestone option will allow you to select both Assigned and Due dates for the
Assessment:
Tip: Using the Milestone feature is a good way to have assigned and due
Appendix VII 938
dates automatically appear on the calendar.
To connect the Assessment to the Gradebook, go to the Gradebook Settings section, and use the drop-down menu to select ―New Assignment‖
Continue completing the rest of the sections, giving the Assessment a title, selecting a Category, assigning points, and determining a calculation method.
Note: When selecting a Calculation Type, the default will be ―First submission‖.
If you are allowing students to take the Assessment multiple times, change this to either ―Maximum score‖, ―Last submission‖, or ―Average score‖.
Appendix VII 939
Even though you may be manually grading some or all questions, (if the Assessment contains essay or short-answer questions), do not change to “Manual” unless you intend to input the grades within the Gradebook rather than adding them within the Assessment.
Click ―Save‖ when you have finished with all settings.
The Assessment is now in place.
Appendix VII 940
How to Use Question Sets
Assessments use Question Sets to group questions. These groupings allow instructors to configure different options for each set of questions An Assessment might consist of one or more Question Set, depending upon the needs of the test or exam.
Create and Save an Assessment. Once it has been saved, the Assessment Editor will display so that you can create Questions Sets and add questions. You can return to the Assessment Editor at any time by clicking on the Assessment in Lessons.
For more on this topic see “Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
.
Select Configure to apply options for a Question Set, if needed.
The next screen will open in the General section. Add a Title for the Question Set (the default is ―Questions‖). You have the option of having the Title display to the students taking the Assessment. The ―Heading Text‖ window allows you to put in information pertaining to the questions in the set. Because it gives you the option of using the HTML Editor, you can add hyperlinks, images, and formatting to the text that you add.
Tip You could use the Heading Text in a variety of ways:
Give directions for the questions within the set
Provide a scenario or case study for the questions within the set
Add a diagram or map or other illustration referred to in the questions
Appendix VII 941
The Interaction tab provides other settings for the individual Question Set.
―Use Assessment Settings‖: if checked, the settings will use those already configured in the Assessment settings.
―Question Set Display Mode‖: This is determined by the Assessment settings and cannot be changed in the Question Set configuration.
―Question Set Display Options‖: These can be changed only if ―Use Assessment Settings‖ is NOT checked. These allow for randomization of questions within the Question Set as well as randomizing the answer choices.
―Time Limit‖: This can be set as long as the Question set display mode is set to ―Question set at a time‖ and a time limit has been set for the overall Assessment. This would assign a specific time limit in which the Question set would need to be completed. You can also have a time limit warning display and can have the Question set automatically submitted when the allotted time is up.
Click Save when finished.
Add a new Question Set by clicking ―Add Question Set‖.
Appendix VII 942
A pop-up window will appear. Add a title for the next Question Set. Leaving the box next to ―Edit Question Set settings upon save‖ will allow you to configure the Question Set as described in Steps 3 and 4 Click ―Save‖ to continue.
Continue to add all Question Sets needed for the Assessment. You do not need to create more than one Question Set.
Click Add Questions to add questions within each Question Set. You can use Questions and Question Pools to add questions, or you can create individual questions.
For more information about adding questions from a Question Bank or Question Pool, see:
“How to Use Question Banks: Definition of Question Bank and how to Create a Question Bank”
How to use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment from a Question Bank”
“How to use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment with Question Pools”
Appendix VII 943
You can add the following types of questions:
Multiple Choice
True or False
Multiple Select (Multiple Choice question in which more than one choice is selected)
Ordering (Gives a list of items to be sequenced in proper order)
Matching
Fill in the Blank
Short Answer
Essay
Offline Item (A question that is not answered within the test itself; for example, a question that is answered orally)
Algorithmic (Questions generated automatically based on mathematical formulas and variables)
All types of questions can be graded automatically except for Short Answer, Essay, and Offline Item.
Questions can also be added through copying and pasting questions from a text file that follows a specific format
Appendix VII 944
Once the questions have been added, they will be listed in the Assessment Editor within their respective Question Sets.
There are options that are associated with questions in the Assessment Editor.
Checking ―Drag and Drop‖ allows you to change the order of questions by dragging them into place with the mouse.
You can delete or change the point value of a question or several questions by checking the box next to the question(s), selecting the desired action, and then clicking ―Go‖
Appendix VII 945
To see how the questions will display, click ―Preview‖
The Assessment will display based on the assigned settings. In this example, the Assessment was set up to display one question set at a time:
Appendix VII 946
Note: To take the Assessment the same way that a student would, preview the course as a student and access the Assessment..
Appendix VII 947
How to Use Question Banks: Definition of Question Bank and
Creating a Question Bank
Definition of Question Banks:
Question Banks are databases of questions that can be shared between Courses, LORs and Master Courses. Question Banks are searchable, so that questions meeting specific criteria can be drawn from them to create Assessments.
Creating a Question Bank:
As you add questions to an Assessment, you have the option to have each question added to the Question Bank.
Questions in the Question Bank are grouped within their respective Question Sets, which appear as folders with the same names as the Question Sets.
Appendix VII 948
Tip: Creating Assessment Banks within an LOR will, in effect, create ―Master‖ Question Banks of questions that can be shared with all courses in which you have Course editor rights.
Questions can also be added to a Question Bank within the Question Bank Manager itself.
Adding Questions to a Question Bank Within the Question Bank
Open a course or LOR with the Question Bank where you want to add the questions. Go to Manage > Question Bank Manager. (In this example, you are adding questions to a Question Bank within an LOR.)
First you will add a folder for the questions that will be created. Click on the small triangle underneath the Course / LOR name.
Appendix VII 949
In the window that then opens, select ―Add subfolder‖
Another window will open asking for a folder name. Input a name and then click ―Save‖
Tip: When creating an Assessment from a Question Bank, one search option is to search by folder. Therefore, it is a good idea to label the folder to indicate the subject matter covered by the questions it houses.
Appendix VII 950
You will see the folder now listed. Click on the small triangle beneath the folder to being adding questions.
Click the ―Add question‖ option.
Note: The Edit options would also allow the creation of a subfolder for further organization. You could also rename or delete the folder.
The ―Add Question‖ screen will appear.
Appendix VII 951
Create all questions as you would for an Assessment. The questions will automatically be saved in the Question Bank.
Note: As you create questions, you can designate a keyword and a difficulty level which can be used to limit questions to be pulled from a Question Bank. Because this question was already created within the Question Bank Manager, the option to save question to the Question Bank does not appear.
Returning to the Question Bank Manager, you can see that questions have been added to the ―Creating Tests‖ Folder by first clicking on the ―+‖ next to the ―Creating Tests‖ Folder
All questions that have been created will appear beneath the folder:
Appendix VII 952
Note : Clicking on the small triangle beneath each question will bring up an edit menu that will allow you to edit or delete the question. When a question is deleted from a Question Bank, it is permanently deleted, unless it has been added to another Question Bank or an Assessment.
Tip: You can add multiple questions from a test bank by using the Import Questions option.
Appendix VII 953
How to Use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment from a
Question Bank
Once a Question Bank has been created, you can create an Assessment from questions in the Question Bank. If an Assessment that is created from a Question Bank is ever deleted, the questions will still remain within the Question Bank.
Note: This is one significant difference between tests created using ―Quiz‖ and tests created using ―Assessments‖. Once a quiz has been deleted, all questions within the quiz are also deleted, unless the quiz has been duplicated elsewhere. Questions within an Assessment that are derived from a Question Bank will not be deleted if the Assessment itself is deleted.
In this example, you will be creating an Assessment in a course from a Question Bank created in an LOR.
Open the course in which the Assessment will be created, and go to Lessons > Add Content. In this example, you are adding the Assessment into the Module 1 Folder.)
Select ―Assessment‖ in the next screen.
Appendix VII 954
Continue with the setting up the Assessment, choosing the options that you need.
Once the Assessment has been created, the Assessment Editor, which allows you to create Question sets and Questions, will appear. Click the ―Configure ―option if you want to apply any settings to the Question set, such as a title or specific options for that set. This would be especially important if the Assessment will contain more than one Question Set with different settings for each set.
Appendix VII 955
Once the Question Set is configured, or if you do not need to configure the Question set, click the ―Add‖ Question option.
To add questions from a Question Bank, you have two choices: you can browse and choose questions from the available Question Banks, or you can search and add them according to specific criteria.
Using the “Browse” Option
Click ―Browse Question Banks‖ in the ―Select Questions from other Sources‖ section in the lower part of the Add Questions screen.
Appendix VII 956
This will open up a screen that will display all of the Question Banks in which you have access. This includes Question Banks in all Courses, Groups, and Master Courses in which you have Course Editor Rights.
It will also include LORs that are either associated with the course or in which you have Course Editor rights.
Note: The same LOR is listed twice in this example. You have editing rights to the LOR ―DEMO ANGEL 1‖ (under ―My Repositories‖) and the course has access to the same LOR (under ―Course Repositories‖), because of the way the LOR was set up. If someone was a course editor for this course, but was not an editor for that LOR, the LOR would only be listed once, under ―Course Repositories‖. The criteria set within the LOR determines the courses that will have access to it.
For this example, you will choose the Question Banks in the DEMO ANGEL 1 Course Repository by checking the box next to it. (Choosing the same Repository in ―My Repositories‖ would give the same results). You could choose more than one Bank.
Click the ―+‖ next to the Question Bank to expand it and see the folders and subfolders within it.
Appendix VII 957
Check the box next to the Question Bank you want to use. This will copy ALL of the Questions in that Question Bank into the Assessment.
Clicking the ―Configure Copy Options‖ link allows for the standards, keywords, and difficulty level associated with each question to also be copied. Checking ―Automatically accept changes made to these questions when the master sources change‖ will allow for the question to be updated if the question is ever changed within the source bank; i.e. the DEMO ANGEL 1 Repository. Click ―Done‖ to continue.
Note: Clicking on the ―+‖ next to the Question Bank would expand it and allow you to choose specific questions from that Bank instead. Those would then be the only questions copied to the Assessment.
On the next screen, you will see all questions from that bank have been added.
Appendix VII 958
Using the “Search” Option
The other option for adding questions from a Question Bank is to use the Search Option. This will select questions from all Questions Banks, or selected Question Banks, using specific criteria, including Keywords, Question Bank Folders, Difficulty Level, Type of Question, and text.
From the ―Add Question‖ screen, choose ―Search Question Bank‖
The following screen will display. You could add a search term here, but click ―Advanced Search‖ to access the different criteria for searching.
Appendix VII 959
The choices that you can use for the advanced search include:
Limit Results by Keyword:
Select a keyword by clicking ―Choose keyword‖. This will bring up a list of all keywords associated with questions within all the Question Banks that the course can access and will allow you to click on the one(s) that you need.
The ―Match any keywords‖ will select all questions that contain any of the keywords selected. Limiting it to ―Match ALL Keywords‖ would select only questions that contain every keyword selected
The following screen appears:
Appendix VII 960
Select the course or LOR that contains the Question Bank you want to use, and then the ―Select‖ button (Note that you can also select all of the Question Banks or more than one):
Appendix VII 961
Then select the Keywords for the questions you want to use and the ―Add Selected‖ button:
And finally click the ―Save‖ button at the bottom:
Limit by Question Type:
Check the boxes next to the type(s) of questions that you want to appear on the Assessment.
Note : Selecting a keyword and then a question type will limit the questions selected to only those questions that contain the selected keyword and ALSO are of the selected question type(s).
Appendix VII 962
Choose Question Bank Filters:
Limits the search to specific Question Banks indicated by the Folders selected. Click ―Choose Folders‖ to select the specific folders you wish to have the questions taken from.
This works much like it does in ―Browse‖; it will allow access to all of the Question Banks so that you can choose the specific Banks to include in the questions:
Note: Since you have already designated the questions to be selected using the Keywords, you did not need to select a folder/ Question Bank here. It is demonstrated simply to illustrate the procedure if a search by Keywords was not used.
If you wanted to select questions from a question bank with no other search criteria applied (such as Question type or Level of difficulty), you would use the Browse Question Bank search option.
Appendix VII 963
When you return, you will see the folder listed, with the name of the Question Bank from which it came beneath it.
Limit by difficulty level:
This feature allows you to specify the difficulty of the questions selected. As with Keywords, the difficulty level needs to have been set within each question to enable this feature.
Appendix VII 964
You can also filter by Standards or Objectives, if they have been mapped to questions. That would narrow questions to those that are mapped to the specific standards or objectives selected. Use the ―Choose Standards‖ or ―Choose objectives‖ links to select the desired Standard(s) or Objective(s)
You can also search for questions containing specific text by inputting it in the field next to the search button.
Click the ―Search button to continue.
All questions matching the criteria are now added to the screen. You can further select the questions you want to use from the question list by checking the box next to each one, or you can select all of them at one time by checking the ―Select all on this page‖ box and then the ―Save‖ button. In this example, you selected all of them.
Appendix VII 965
Note: The ―Select all on this page‖ option ONLY selects the questions on that one page. If there were more than one page of questions, you would need to navigate to each page and then repeat the ―Select all on this page‖ option, again using the ―Save‖ button to save the results. When there are more pages, there will be links to the other pages on the screen.
The questions are now added to the Question Set.
Appendix VII 966
Appendix VII 967
How to Use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment with
Question Pools
A Question Pool is a group of questions selected from one or more Question Banks. They are selected based on specific criteria and are used to create Assessments with randomly chosen questions pulled from the pool. Each pool is created during the ―Add question‖ process: it does not exist independent of the Assessment in which it was created.
The pool of questions can be selected based on keywords, difficulty level, question type, standards, and searchable text.
Open the course in which the Assessment will be created, and go to Lessons > Add Content. (In this example, you are adding the Assessment into the Module 1 Folder.)
Select ―Assessment‖ in the next screen.
Continue with setting up the Assessment, choosing the options that you need.
For more information about setting up an Assessment, see ―Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Creating an Assessment –
Appendix VII 968
Content/Access/ Interaction Settings” and “Assessments: Understanding
Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings‖
Once the Assessment has been created, the Assessment Editor, which allows you to create Question sets and Questions, will appear. Click the ―Configure ―option if you want to apply any settings to the Question set, such as a title or specific options for that set. This would be especially important if the Assessment will contain more than one Question Set with different settings for each set.
Once the Question Set is configured, or if you do not need to configure the Question set, click the ―Add‖ Question option.
Appendix VII 969
On the next screen, select ―Question Pool‖ in the ―Select Questions from other Sources‖ sections
At the top of the next screen, input the number of questions that you want to be selected for each individual test from the pool of questions.
Note: No matter how many questions are in the pool, each student will only be presented with a test with the number of pool questions selected here. The questions will be randomly drawn from the pool for each student, so that each student will see a different set of questions.
Add the total point value for the pool questions. In this example, you will have 5 questions drawn from the pool for each test; each question will be worth 1 point so the total value of the pool questions will be 5 points.
In the lower section of the screen, choose the criteria that will select the questions for the Pool.
‗Limit results by keyword‖ will only select those questions containing the keywords designated.
―Match any keywords‖ will select questions that have one or more of the keywords selected‘
―Match ALL keywords‖ will only select those questions that contain all of the chosen keywords.
Appendix VII 970
Click ―Choose Keywords‖:
The following screen will appear.
Only select a course if you want to limit the keyword terms to questions in the Questions Banks in a specific course or courses. You are not going to limit this to a course, so you will skip that section and go to the Keywords section.
Select each keyword, and then the ―Add Selected‖ button. You can select more than one by using the Control key and then clicking on the selected keywords
Appendix VII 971
To finish, click the ―Save‖ button at the bottom.
Limit by Question Type: Check the boxes next to the type(s) of questions that you want to appear on the Assessment.
Appendix VII 972
Note : Selecting a keyword and then a question type will limit the questions selected to only those questions that contain the selected keyword and ALSO are of the selected question type(s).
Choose Question Bank Filters:
Limits the search to specific Question Banks indicated by the Folders selected. Click ―Choose Folders‖ to select the specific folders you wish to have the questions taken from.
This works much like it does in ―Browse‖; it will allow access to all of the Question Banks so that you can choose the specific Banks to include in the questions:
Note: Since you have already designated the questions to be selected using the Keywords, you did not need to select a folder/ Question Bank here. It is demonstrated simply to illustrate the procedure if a search by Keywords was not used.
Appendix VII 973
If you wanted to select questions from a question bank with no other search criteria applied (such as Question type or Level of difficulty), you would use the Browse Question Bank search option.
When you return, you will see the folder listed, with the name of the Question Bank from which it came beneath it.
Limit by difficulty level:This feature allows you to specify the difficulty of the questions selected. As with Keywords, the difficulty level needs to have been set within each question to enable this feature.
You can filter by Standards or Objectives, if they have been mapped to questions. That would narrow questions to those that are mapped to the specific standards or objectives selected. Use the ―Choose Standards‖ or ―Choose objectives‖ links to select the desired Standard(s) or Objective(s)
Appendix VII 974
You can also search for questions containing specific text by inputting it in the field next to the search button.
Click the ―Search button to continue
.
All questions that meet the criteria set will display. You can edit or delete any of the questions, or ―Select all‖ to choose all of them.
Click the ―Save‖ button at the bottom to add this Question Pool to the Assessment being created.
Appendix VII 975
The Question Pool has now been added to the Assessment. It will appear as a single item on the Assessment (―Question Pool‖) with the total point value of the pool.
To view a sample test, click ―Preview‖.
Appendix VII 976
The preview will only contain the number of questions to be randomly drawn from the pool (in this case, 5 questions)
Appendix VII 977
.
Tip: To take the test as a student would, change to Student View and then migrate to the Assessment. The Assessment would need to be enabled to take it.
Appendix VII 978
How to Create a Secure Assessment
The Assessment component in ANGEL has options for creating a more secure test environment. These options can be selected at the time the Assessment is created within the ―Settings‖ environment. They can also be changed at any time by returning to Settings within the Assessment.
NOTE: Just as in the classroom, no online test can be made completely secure. However there are options that can make it more difficult for students to share test questions or to look up answers while taking the test.
TIP: To discourage academic dishonesty when giving a high-stakes exam, consider having online users use a test center or proctor. Essay and short answer questions also encourage originality.
Create the test item by going to Lessons > Add Content > Assessment. Select the Advanced settings to be able to access the options that are needed.
Go to the ―Access‖ tab, after completing any needed instructions and information in the ―Content‖ section. Set ―Tracking‖ to ―Students Only‖. This will allow you to track all student activity pertaining to this test.
TIP: Adding a password is recommended if the student will be taking the test in a testing center or will have a proctor deliver the test. Give the password to the testing center or the proctor to be released to the student at the time of the test upon the student supplying proper identification.
Appendix VII 979
Team Access should be set to ―All Teams‖ unless you need to set different parameters to students in select teams. Set the ―Start‖ and ―End‖ dates and times.
NOTE: ―Start Date‖ indicates the date and time when the Assessment will be VISIBLE to students.
―End Date‖ is the date and time when the Assessment will be HIDDEN from students.
The Start and End Dates do NOT determine when the test is actually available to be taken, only when the Assessment link is VISIBLE. It is the ―Enable‖ and ―Disable‖ options that determine when the test itself is ―open‖. These options will be explained in a later section.
CAUTION: When setting the Start and End dates and times, ensure that the box next to each one is ―checked‖ or the settings will not be saved.
Select the security level for the test. For an online test, the ―Medium‖ setting will offer the most security. The ―High‖ setting can only be used in computer lab settings where the ―Secure ANGEL browser‖ can be installed on each computer. The IP Filter could be used in controlled settings to limit test-taking to only those computers with specific IP addresses.
Appendix VII 980
NOTE: While the ―Medium‖ setting does prevent using the right mouse button for copying, printing, highlighting, etc., it is not 100% secure.
Go to the ―Interaction‖ tab. Set the ―Enabled‖ time and date and the ―Disabled‖ time and date.
NOTE: ―Date Enabled‖ indicates the date and time that students are able to access and take the test. ―Date Disabled‖ is the date and time when the test is closed and students will no longer be able to take the test.
This is different from the ―Start Date‖ and ―End Date‖: these indicate when the Assessment link itself is visible and do not govern when the test is actually ―open‖ for students to access.
TIP: For a more secure test, make the time that the ―window‖ is open for students to take the test to be short, perhaps only a few hours. The longer the test is available, the more time students would have to share information about it.
Appendix VII 981
TIP: Remind students that they need to begin the test to allow enough time to finish it before the date and time when the test is disabled.
CAUTION: When selecting the ―Date Enabled‖ and ―Date Disabled‖ dates and times, ensure that you check the boxes next to each of them, or the dates and times will not be saved.
In the ―Display mode‖ section, choose the ―Question at a time‖ option. This will only display questions one at a time and would make it more difficult for students to copy or otherwise record each question because of the time that this would take.
Selecting the ―Question at a time‖ option will open up other options. For a more secure test, select the ―Randomize the order in which questions are delivered‖, ―Randomize the order of each question‘s answer options‖ and ―Don‘t allow backtrack‖. The other two options would more likely make the test less secure.
NOTE: Randomizing the order of questions would ensure that each student has a different test, at least as far as the question order. Randomizing the order of answer options would increase this difference.
CAUTION: If you choose to randomize the order of answer options,
Appendix VII 982
ensure that it is appropriate for your test answer options. If you have answers such as ―only A and B‖ or ―All of the above‖, this option will not work. If you do select this option, you can edit individual questions to not allow this randomization.
NOTE: Not allowing students to backtrack, i.e. go back and change answers or answer questions they hadn‘t answered before, prevents students looking up answers and going back to change them, or even getting help and changing them. (There have been instances of students calling up fellow students and asking them to look up answers while they went on and answered the questions they knew; then going back and answering the other ones with the help of their classmate. This would prevent that.)
CAUTION: When using the ―No backtrack‖ option, it is important to let students know that they won‘t be able to go back and change their answers
TIP: For an even more secure test, have questions randomly drawn from a Question Bank using a Question Pool. This allows you to designate a specific number of questions to be randomly selected, thus creating a different set of questions for each student.
See ‗How to use Question Banks: Creating an Assessment from a Question Bank‖ and "How to use Question Pools: Creating an Assessment from a Question Pool‖.
In the ―Submission settings‖ section, you have options as to how many times the test can be taken and how unanswered questions will be handled.
For a secure test, leave the ―Master settings‖ blank and set the ―Attempts allowed‖ to ―1‖.
With the questions being delivered one at a time and no ability to go back and change previous answers, setting the ―Validation‖ to ―Allow but issue warning‖ will activate a pop-up window advising students if they did not answer the question and giving them the opportunity to answer or go on to the next question. The ―Do not allow‖ option will not let them go to the next question until they have answered the current questions.
TIP: Using either the ―Allow but issue warning‖ or ―Do not allow‖ options can safeguard against students accidentally submitting the test before all questions are answered. The pop-up window will appear reminding them that they have not yet answered all questions and will prompt them to answer the unanswered one.
Appendix VII 983
Adding a ―Save‖ button would allow the student to save all answers and potentially leave the test and return later. Because all answers are automatically saved, leave this unchecked.
―Anonymous mode‖ should be unchecked for a secure test.
In the ―Time Settings‖ section, you set the time limit for the test and also set other options.
NOTE: Keeping the time limit fair, but not generous, will prevent students from having more time to look up answers and / or consult with classmates. Having the test automatically submit when the time is up will add to this. Putting in a time warning is up to the instructor; students probably appreciate the heads up!
CAUTION: Warn students that once they begin the test, ―the clock starts ticking‖. Even if they stop taking the test and close ANGEL, the clock will continue to run. Once the time limit has been reached, the test will be submitted even if they have not completed it. (If they have left ANGEL, as soon as they try to resume the test, it will submit.)
Go to the ―Review‖ tab. This section governs the type of feedback information that will be available to students once the test has been submitted.
Appendix VII 984
For a secure test, choose ―List only‖ as the ―View Submission History‖ option. You could also choose ―Disabled‖. ―List only‖ will give the score for the test, including the number of points earned out of the number of points possible. ―Disabled‖ will not provide any feedback.
NOTE: If choosing ―Disabled because you do not want them to see their grades, you might also want to check ―Hide assignment in Gradebook‖ when setting up the assignment as a Gradebook assignment..
―Review Availability‖ gives you the option to allow the students to see additional information about their tests at a time specified by you. Set the date on which you want students to begin to review their tests, and the date at which the review will no longer be available.
NOTE: For a more secure test, do not allow the Review to occur until AFTER the test has closed to all students and keep the Review availability short.
―Feedback Options‖ allow you to specify exactly what information will be available to students during the review. Check all options that apply.
CAUTION: If this is a test that you intend to use for future classes, be careful what feedback you allow students to view. If they can view the questions and the answers, they can potentially copy the entire test and share with other students.
TIP: If you don‘t want students to be able to see their own tests, but do want to be able to give them feedback, consider some alternatives:
Use a course wiki, blog, or discussion forum to give the entire class general feedback about the questions that were missed most often
Have a Live Office session and give individual students specific feedback about their tests
Email students with specific information about their test results
Appendix VII 985
Go to the ―Assignments‖ tab and put in all settings needed for the test to be recorded in the Gradebook and then ―Save‖ the settings.
TIP: Create a Practice test with the same settings as the ―real‖ test so that students will be familiar with the testing environment and will understand the limitations that have been set. This is particularly important when questions are delivered one at a time with no backtrack so that students realize they cannot skip questions with the intention of going back and answering them later.
For more on this topic see:
“Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings
“Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings”
Appendix VII 986
How to Create a Pass/Fail Exam
You can create an exam that has a ―Pass / Fail‖ outcome by designating the percentage score that needs to be attained for a ―Pass‖. The Grade that the student sees will then either be a ―P‖ or an ―F‖ or whatever other label you would like to display on the Gradebook.
Set up the Assessment in the course and add questions.
For more on this topic see:
“Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings
“Assessments: Understanding Options and Settings: Review and Assignment Settings”
When setting up the Assignment section for this Assessment, set the Display Setting to Letter Grade.
Caution: This method will ONLY work if you have not set up any other criteria for Letter Grades within the course.
Go to the Gradebook in the Manage section.
In the Gradebook, go to Grading Scale in the Gradebook Management section.
On the next page, input the label that you want to have display in the Gradebook for a Passing grade and then input the minimum percentage for a passing grade. Click Add New to proceed.
Appendix VII 987
You can then add the label for the ―Failing‖ score, and set the minimum score as 0. Then click << Back to Main Menu
Tip: The label does not have to be a letter. It could be a + and – or any other single-character text.
When students view their grades for any assignment set up to display as a Letter Grade, they will see either a P or an F
Appendix VII 988
How Students Can Reenter an Exam
When students take an Assessment, they can be given the option to save their answers and return later to complete it. Some examples are a ―take-home‖ type of exam with essay questions that do not have to be answered at one sitting, or an untimed open-book exam.
To allow students to save and return at a later time to complete an Assessment, the Save option has to be selected in the Settings. This is located within the Interaction section within the Submission settings. Check the ―Show Save‖ button to activate it.
Caution: If using this option, you may not want to also check the ―Automatically submit assessment when .time expires‖ option. If the student did NOT return within the time limit, it would mean the assessment would automatically be submitted as soon as they started to re-enter the assessment.
When students take the Exam, they will see the ―Save and return later‖ button at the bottom of the questions. If the exam is set to deliver questions one at a time, or one question set at a time, the button will appear on each screen of questions.
Appendix VII 989
Caution: Warn students NOT to click the Submit button until they have completed the entire exam. The Submit button does just that: it submits the exam for grading. Once it has been submitted, it cannot be reopened again for students to resume.
A pop-up window will appear advising students that their exams are being saved but not submitted, and giving an option to cancel the action. Click OK to save.
When students are ready to re-enter the exam, they open the exam and will see the option to resume the exam:
Appendix VII 990
Appendix VII 991
How to Grade an Essay or Short Answer Question
ANGEL allows you to grade essay and short answer questions using a ―blind‖ approach, using the ―Grade by Question‖ option. This allows you to grade essay (and short answer) questions without knowing which student submitted them.
When you log into your course and check the ―tasks‖ menu, you can see if you have any questions to be graded. In this case, you see you have 3 ungraded items.
Clicking on the + next to the Ungraded Items expands the item and shows what needs to be graded
.
To Grade by question, go to the Assessment, and click on Utilities. Since you need to grade Exam 1, you will go there
Appendix VII 992
.
In Utilities, click Grade by Question
The following screen shows what question needs to be graded and how many responses have been submitted. Click on the response number.
Scrolling down the next page, you can see all of the responses submitted for that question. You also that the option of selecting the number of responses to display at one time, having the student name appear in the response, and/or having answer text appear at the top.
Appendix VII 993
Input the score for each, as well as any comments. Notice that the HTML Editor is available to be used if you want to apply any formatting, add images, or hyperlinks.
The scores will then be added to each student‘s scores for that Assessment.
Appendix VII 994
How to Increase the Maximum File Size for Drop Box
Submissions
By default, ANGEL does not allow students to submit files any larger than 2 MB. Sometimes this size is too small, especially if students are submitting files with images or PowerPoint presentations. This setting can be changed within a course by creating an Environmental Variable.
Caution: Your school may have limitations on the maximum file sizes allowed for submissions. Before changing these settings, it is VERY important to check with your ANGEL administrator to ensure that you do not exceed these limits and that you are adhering to policies already established. Your administrator may also prefer to change the file size allocation globally, rather than have Instructors do so at the Course level.
Go to the Manage tab in your ANGEL course and click ―Environmental Variables‖ in the Course Settings section.
Appendix VII 995
On the next screen, click ―Add a variable‖
For the Variable name, type ―DROP BOX_MAX_MB‖
In the ―Variable Value‖ box, type in the new file size (in MB). Do not exceed the limits set by your school policy. Click ―Save‖
The new value is now established. In this example, students will be able to submit files that are 5 MB or less in size.
Appendix VII 996
TIP: Consider alternatives to large file-size assignments when possible.
Have students save files as ―PDF‖ files. There are several free programs available on the Internet that will convert presentations and documents to PDF format. Microsoft Office 2007 also has the ability to save as PDF.
If the assignment is a PowerPoint presentation, have students use smaller-sized graphics and few, if any, animations. PowerPoint presentations with sound, animations, transitions, and larger graphics, especially digital photographs, greatly increase the file size.
If using digital photographs, have students use digital editing programs, often packaged with digital cameras, to reduce the file size.
Use a file compression program to create ―zip‖ files.
Appendix VII 997
How to Grade a Drop Box Assignment
A Drop Box Assignment can either be submitted by inputting text into the ―Message‖ window, or by uploading a document file. Once submitted, the assignment can be graded within the Drop box and the grade will go to the Gradebook if it has been set up as an assignment. The instructor can download an attachment, make comments on it, save it, and then upload it again for the student to read.
Set up the Drop box, including setting it up as a Gradebook assignment. During the setup, decide if you want students to input their answers as text in the ―Message‖ window, as a document file, or if either would be acceptable. In the ―Submissions‖ section of ―Settings‖ you can disable either feature.
Tip: If the assignment is lengthy, it is a good idea to disable the ―Message‖ window. Otherwise students could copy and paste their entire text into that window with the end result being a large, unformatted, hard-to-read document! Even though the HTML Editor is available to format the text, most students will probably not use that feature. The Message window is best used for short assignments.
For this assignment, you are disabling the Message Box and only allowing Attachments. Students can only submit one time, but they can submit more than one document at that one time.
Tip: Advise students of the file types that are acceptable for submission. Students may have a variety of word processing programs and could submit file types that cannot be read by their instructor.
Include any special instructions, such as how you would like the assignment to be titled, in the Directions. Save all settings.
Appendix VII 998
Student submissions can be graded in two different areas of the Drop box. Each one works the same, so it is up to the instructor to decide which to use.
When you click on the Assignment Drop box link in Lessons, you will see the student submissions at the bottom. Click on the submission title to continue.
The following screen will appear. Click on the document title to download and view it.
OR Go to the Utilities link for that Drop box.
Appendix VII 999
On the next screen, click ―View, Grade, Delete Submissions‖
You will see all students who have submitted the assignment. Click the ―Grade‖ button next to one of the student names to continue.
The screen will be the same as the one accessed using the other method.
Appendix VII 1000
Click on the file to download it and open it in your word processor.
Add comments to the document. Using a different color will help differentiate the instructor comments from the student writing.
Tip: Another method would be to use the ―Track changes‖ option in the word processing program to illustrate any corrections in the document.
Appendix VII 1001
Save the document. Use a different file name to differentiate it from the originally submitted file.
Return to the Drop box and click ―Attachments‖ to upload the corrected document
A pop-up window will appear. Click the ―Browse‖ button to find the file to upload.
Appendix VII 1002
Locate the file, click it, and then click the ―Open‖ button
.
The Pop-up window will reappear. Click the ―Upload File‖ button to upload the file.
Appendix VII 1003
The uploaded file will appear in the ―Uploaded Files‖ window. Click ―Finished‖ to continue.
Appendix VII 1004
The corrected file will now appear below the ―Attachments‖ button.
You can also enter any other comments into the Comments window. Enter the Grade in the Grade box.
Click ―OK‖ at the bottom to finish.
Appendix VII 1005
The Assignment now has a grade when viewing grades in ―Utilities‖. This grade will also appear in the Gradebook if it has been set up as an assignment for the Gradebook.
Students will see their grades when they return to the drop box or views their grades. If they click on the link within the comments, they will be able to see the corrected copy uploaded by the instructor.
Appendix VII 1006
How to Grade Drop Box Submissions Offline
The drop box tool in ANGEL has a ―batch download‖ option that allows you to download all submissions from a specific assignment drop box, grade them offline, and then reupload all grades with any comments and/or attachments back into the ANGEL course.
Go to the Utilities link for the specific drop box and select Download Submissions.
Select Download Submissions on the next page.
Appendix VII 1007
On the following page, select whether you just want to download any ungraded submissions, or all of the submissions. In this example, none have been graded yet so either option can be chosen.
Click Download to continue.
Firefox: You will be prompted to either Open the file or Save it to Disk. Choose Save to Disk
Internet Explorer: Choose Save
Appendix VII 1008
Windows XP
Locate the folder where you want to save the zipped files and then click Save
Tip: Create a folder within the folder where you have all your course files located and download the zipped files into that folder.
Go to the location where the zipped files were saved and click on the folder.
Appendix VII 1009
The folder will open and you will see several files and folders. Click Extract All Files in the Windows File and Folder Tasks
The ―Extraction Wizard‖ window will appear. Click Next to continue.
Appendix VII 1010
The next screen will ask for a location for the files that will be extracted. The default will place them in a folder in the same location as the original compressed (―zipped‖) folder. Click Next to continue.
Once the process has finished, click Finish
Appendix VII 1011
You will see folders with each student‘s name on them, plus some other files. Click the Grade file to continue.
Vista
Locate the folder where the file has been saved and click on the folder.
Appendix VII 1012
All files will appear when you click on the folder name. Click Extract all files.
On the next screen, you can accept the default location for the extracted files or you can migrate to a new location. Click Extract to continue.
Appendix VII 1013
All of the folders and files will appear, similar to step 11.
Click the Grade file to continue.
Appendix VII 1014
The rest of the procedure will apply to either operating system (Windows XP or Vista). The following screen will appear once the Grade file is clicked.
On the left are each student‘s submission. Across the top is the form that will be used to insert each student‘s grade. The bottom right is where the files will appear once each submission is selected.
Click on one of the student submissions. You are going to click on Salli Sparrow‘s name.
Appendix VII 1015
Her document will now appear in the lower right section. The ―about.html‖ file is empty; it would have data in it if the drop box submissions used the text box instead of uploading a file as an attachment. Clicking on the Word document will open it for reading and grading.
Appendix VII 1016
The document will open up in Word or whatever program is being used to read the documents.
You can make any comments directly on the paper for uploading back into ANGEL so that the student can read them.
Appendix VII 1017
If you did add comments to the paper for the student to read, you need to save the document. Go to File > Save or click the ―File‖ option to save your work.
Tip: Because both the student file and the corrected file would have the same file name, you could select ―Save As‖ instead and save the file with a different name to avoid any confusion. An easy protocol would be to add your initials at the end of the original file name..
To add a grade for the assignment, go to the top of the Grade page and find the student‘s name.
Appendix VII 1018
Enter a grade. You can add any additional comments in the large window.
If you had made comments on the student paper, you will need to upload the saved copy. If so, click Browse to continue.
Locate the file to be uploaded and click Open.
Note: Unless you specifically saved it elsewhere, it will be located in the folder with the student‘s name on it.
Appendix VII 1019
Checking the box next to the student‘s name will add it to all submissions to be uploaded when the grades are submitted.
Grade the other papers in the same manner. When finished, click the Submit button at the bottom of the form. Be sure that you have an internet connection before continuing. Note that you can also check to have the grades emailed to the students.
Note: You do not have to grade all of the papers at one time. Only grades that have the box checked next to the student name will be submitted. You can return later to grade the others.
The grades are now displaying within the course.
Appendix VII 1020
Appendix VII 1021
How to Integrate PowerPoint Presentations
Integrate PowerPoint presentations so that they launch directly from your course and do not require students to download the presentation and run it locally.
Preparing Your PowerPoint Presentation
Saving your PowerPoint presentation as a Web Page is the best way to include it as a lesson item within ANGEL. This demonstration is using Windows XP.
Within PowerPoint, select File > Save As and save your Power Point presentation as a Web Page. Make certain to note where you‘ve saved the file.
Note: PowerPoint‘s animations and triggered actions do not always translate into HTML perfectly. If you rely on these advanced PowerPoint options, you may want to save as a PowerPoint Show. As a PowerPoint Show, your students will have to download this file before playing it, but it will perfectly render more complicated slides.
PowerPoint will save your presentation so that you have a single HTML file that launches the slide show, and folder of data files in support of the slide show. In our case the file name is class-slides.htm, and the folder of supporting files is named class-slides_files.
Appendix VII 1022
Tip: Remember or write down the name of the HTML file that will launch your slide show (in this case class-slides.htm). You‘ll need this file name in Step 9 below.
Create Zip File from saved PowerPoint HTML files. You do this by first selecting both the FOLDER and the FILE (use Ctrl + Left Click to select multiple folders/files) and then right-clicking your mouse. You‘ll see a menu appear where you then choose Send To > Compressed (zipped) Folder.
Windows will then compress the file and you‘ll see the new file appear within your folder. It‘s this new compressed file that you‘ll upload into ANGEL.
Appendix VII 1023
You‘re now ready to upload your presentation to your ANGEL course.
Uploading Your Presentation to ANGEL
Next you‘ll upload your presentation to ANGEL using the File tool on the Lessons Add content page.
Go to your Lessons tab and click ―Add Content‖.
Click on the File content type.
Appendix VII 1024
Click the ―Browse‖ button and select the file created in Step 3 above and click Open in the Choose file window.
Title and upload the file by entering a title and clicking the Upload File button. Leave the File Type setting to ―AutoDetect‖.
After your file uploads, you‘ll see the ―Upload Results‖ page with a File Upload Successful message.
Appendix VII 1025
Select Default File. In the Default File pull down, select the name of the HTML file that will launch your presentation – in this case it‘s class-slides.htm.
Click Extract Files.
Appendix VII 1026
Caution: If you mistakenly press ―OK‖ instead of ―Extract Files‖ your presentation will be loaded as a compressed file and your students will be forced to download the file before accessing it.
After you press Extract Files, the presentation will automatically load in a two pane model, with a list of the slides on the left and the actual slides on the right. You may browse your presentation from here.
Note that the HTML version of your presentation has four different presentation and control options listed in the gray bar along the bottom of the presentation:
Outline – hides or displays the outline for the presentation
Expand / Collapse Outline – expands or collapses the presentation outline.
Slide controls – allows users to navigate through the slide show
Slide show option – presents the slide show in a new full screen window.
Appendix VII 1027
How to Set Up and Use Games: Crossword Puzzles
Games can be an effective way to do a formative assessment of student learning, as an alternative to online testing. You can create two kinds of games in ANGEL: a crossword puzzle and a ―quiz show‖. Both types of games can be scored and be Gradebook assignments. To set up a game, you first add the game and then designate the type of game to be used and create the game.
Go to the location where you want to add the game within Lessons. In this example, you will go to Module 2.
Click Add Content.
Select Game as the Content Item to create
Appendix VII 1028
On the next screen, select Advanced settings to access more options and add a title. You can use the Page text window to add any specific directions for the game.
Appendix VII 1029
Within the Access section, you can put in a start and end date and add any other settings needed. Start date indicates when the game will be visible to students; end date indicates when it will no longer be visible.
Use the Automate section only if there are some specific actions to be used with the game. In the Assignments section, designating an assigned date and due date will add the dates with the assignment to the Course Calendar.
Appendix VII 1030
If this is to be a Gradebook assignment: i.e. the score will automatically be recorded in the Gradebook upon submission, then input the Assignment information.
When finished with all settings, click Save
The Game is now in place. To set up the game questions, click on the Game link.
Appendix VII 1031
Setting up a Crossword Puzzle:
Specify the type of game that you want to set up. In this instance, you are setting up a Crossword puzzle.
Add the puzzle questions/descriptions and then the correct answers. Click the Add Question button if you want to add additional questions
When all questions and answers have been entered, click Save
Appendix VII 1032
After a moment, the completed Crossword Puzzle will load and display. To input an answer, click in one of the boxes on the puzzle
When one of the boxes is clicked, the question will appear and the student can type in the answer.
If the student clicks the hint button...
...the first letter of the answer will appear.
Appendix VII 1033
Note: Advise students that they will lose points every time they use Hints
Once the answer has been submitted, students click the Submit button.
All boxes are completed using this procedure. If any answers are incorrect, students retry that answer, and can also use the Hint button.
Appendix VII 1034
Here is a completed puzzle:
Click Submit to score the puzzle.
Appendix VII 1035
Students will then see their final score that will be submitted into the Gradebook. Clicking the Continue button will exit this puzzle.
Appendix VII 1036
How to Set Up and Use Games: Quiz Shows
You can create two types of games in ANGEL; a crossword puzzle and a quiz show. The quiz show is based on a popular TV show; students score by answering questions and earning specified dollar amounts based on the difficulty of the question. The more difficult the question, the higher the score that is earned.
Go to Lessons > Add Content > Game.
Add and set up the game.
For more on this topic see “How to Set up and Use Games: Crossword Puzzles” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Once the Game has been added, you can set up the Quiz Show options. Click the Quiz Show link; select Quiz Show as the Game type.
Appendix VII 1037
Next, set up from 1 to 4 Question Categories. Each question will be associated with a particular category. (Users will be given questions based on the Category chosen).
Enter each question, assign a value in terms of dollars (Set value) and assign the category from the drop-down list.
In the last column (Create answers), click the Edit button
Appendix VII 1038
A pop-up window will appear. Add the Answer and click Done. If there are more than one acceptable answers, add each on a separate line.
Continue adding all questions. You can use the Add Question button if more questions are needed. Click Save when all have been added.
Appendix VII 1039
The completed Quiz Show will appear.
Appendix VII 1040
How to Set Up Teams Within a Single Discussion Forum
Discussion forums can be difficult to facilitate if there are many students discussing the same topic on the same Discussion Forum. One solution could be to divide the students into teams and then create a Discussion Forum for each team. However, ANGEL allows you to create a single Discussion Forum and assign it to teams. While each team then only sees the posts belonging to the members of that team, the Instructor can view the postings from each team separately.
1. Create the teams and assign members to them. You can either use the Random Team Generator or you can add them manually and specifically assign members to each.
For more on this topic see “How to Create Teams” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
2. Create the Discussion Forum. Go to Lessons > Add Content > Discussion Forum.
Appendix VII 1041
3. Add the Discussion Forum title and any other information needed within the Content tab. Directions for the Forum can be added as the text.
4. Go to the Access tab. Use the Drop-down list in Team access to change to Selected Teams and then check the box next to the teams that are to be included within this Discussion Forum.
5. Go to the Post Permissions tab. Check the Read / New Post / Reply boxes ONLY for the teams to be included.
Appendix VII 1042
6. Go to the Interaction tab. Change Mode to Private Team Journal.
7. Continue setting up the Discussion Forum with all needed settings. Click Save to finish.
8. To see postings from a specific team, open the Discussion Forum and then select the Team from the drop-down list at the top of the page.
Appendix VII 1043
Appendix VII 1044
How to Create an RSS Feed
You can create a folder in ANGEL that can be read by an RSS Reader. This means that if the student has set up an RSS Reader and then subscribes to folder within the ANGEL course, they will be able to access new content as it is added to that folder through an RSS Reader. I-Tunes, Google Reader, and Internet Explorer 7 RSS Feed are all examples of RSS Readers. The type of folder that is set up is called an RSS Feeder (i.e. it ―feeds‖ the content to the RSS Reader). The content items that are added are often referred to as ―Podcasts‖, although this term generally applies to audio or video files. The content in the RSS Feed can be in any format that can be viewed on a computer.
Note: A popular use of RSS Feeds is to download content to a portable media device. However, the content used by these devices have to be in an specific format in order to be accessible (generally MP3, MP4, QuickTime). There are a number of programs available for both PC and Mac users that can convert content so they can be viewed on a portable media device.
Go to Lessons > Add Content
Select Course Syndication Folder
Appendix VII 1045
Set up folder as for any folder, including any specific settings needed.
On the next screen, choose Add Content to add any items to the folder. As new items are added, they will be listed on the RSS Reader used by the student.
Appendix VII 1046
Choose the appropriate content item being added. In this instance, you will be adding a document called Chapter 1.
Note: You can add OR link to any content item. In many institutions, audio and/or video files are often stored on a separate server and linked within an RSS Feed folder.
Browse and Upload the file (or add the link)
The new content is now in the RSS Feed folder.
Appendix VII 1047
For more on this topic see “How to Subscribe to an RSS Feed” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Appendix VII 1048
How to Subscribe to a Course RSS Feed
Once an RSS Feed folder has been created within a course, students can ―subscribe‖ to it and any new content added to the folder will appear in the RSS Reader used by the student. Here you will show how to set up an RSS Reader using Internet Explorer and also by using ITunes.
Select the RSS Feed folder in Lessons.
To subscribe to an RSS Reader in Internet Explorer 7, click RSS Feeds
On the next screen, click Subscribe to this feed
Appendix VII 1049
A pop-up window will appear. Check that all information is correct, and then click Subscribe
This will add the folder and its contents to the Common Feed list that can be viewed using the Favorites link in Internet Explorer.
To see any content that has been added to the folder, click the Favorites icon on the Internet Explorer tool bar.
Next, click the Feeds icon
Appendix VII 1050
The Chapter Notes folder will be listed:
Click on the folder; and the content items will be listed.
The file can then be opened or saved.
Appendix VII 1051
You can also add content to iTunes. For this example, you have made a recording of the ―Chapter 1 Notes‖ and ―Chapter 2 Notes‖ and have uploaded them to the Chapter Notes folder.
To use iTunes as the RSS Reader, you will first need to download and install iTunes in your computer. In the example, that has already been done. Click the Add to iTunes link.
To view any new contents, open iTunes and click on the Podcasts menu item.
Appendix VII 1052
Click on the arrow at the beginning of the folder name to expand the list of items available. In this example, there are both audio files and a PDF file available.
Appendix VII 1053
How to Set Up the Gradebook: Preferences and Grading Scale
Points- vs. Percentage-Based System
When setting up the Gradebook, you must first decide how all of the grades will be calculated for a final grade. ANGEL allows you to use either a points-based or percentage-based system. The way in which each calculates the final grade is very different, so understanding this difference is important. The system (―mode‖) to be used is selected within the Gradebook ―Preferences‖.
Points-Based System
In a points-based system, every assignment is given a point value. The final grade is determined by adding up all the points awarded in the assignments and dividing that by the total points possible. ―Weighting‖ of assignments is done purely through the point value of each; i.e. an assignment of 20 points will be worth twice as much as an assignment of 10 points.
Example: The total points possible in an English Composition course are 1000 points. Student ―A‖ earns 875 points. The final grade is 875 out of 1000. It can also be expressed as a percent: 87.5%.
Percentage-Based System
A percentage-based system groups all assignments into ―Categories‖ and then assigns a percentage-value to each category. The sum of all the categories will be 100%. For example, categories could be set up as follows:
Quizzes = 20%
Discussions = 30%
Research Paper = 20%
Midterm = 10%
Final = 20%
While each assignment is given a point value, the final grade is based on the weight of the category, not the total points possible. For example, even if the total number of points in Quizzes added up to 500 and the Discussion points only add up to 100, the Discussions category still contributes 10% more than the Quizzes category towards the final grade.
―Weighting‖ of individual assignments within a Category can be done through points awarded. An assignment worth 20 points (within a Category) will be worth twice as much as an assignment worth 10 points within the same Category.
Note: No matter which system you use, all assignments need to be linked to a Category. With a points- based system, you could create just one category and then have all assignments linked to it.
Appendix VII 1054
Caution: Remember that Categories cannot be graded; only assignments. All Categories need to have assignments linked to them, even if it is only one assignment. For example, a Midterm Category needs to have the Midterm assignment linked to it or it cannot be graded.
Setting up Gradebook Preferences:
The first step in setting up the Gradebook is to set up preferences. This is where the points-based or percentage-based determination is made, as well as other default settings.
Go to Manage > Gradebook > Preferences
Note: The first time you open the Gradebook within a course, you will be presented with the Gradebook Wizard. You can click the ―Skip Wizard‖ button to bypass the Wizard and access the Preferences section.
Set the default for how you want the grades to appear in the Gradebook. Note the choices available. All grades entered will appear in this format, unless you override the default when setting up individual assignments. In this example, the grade for each
Appendix VII 1055
assignment would display as points earned with percentage value in parenthesis. For example, a graded score of 10 out of 10 points possible would display as 10 (100).
Note: The grade range for Letter Grades has to be set in the ―Grading Scale‖ section of Gradebook Management. This is described later in this document.
Note: The Display format set here is NOT dependent upon what type of system is used (Points-based vs Percentage-based), and vice-versa. Any of these formats could be used as a default format; for example, a Points-based system could still display grades in Percent if that is what is preferred. It does NOT change the mode.
The next section allows for some options to be selected.
―Treat ungraded Items as Zero‖ will enter a 0 as a grade for all assignments that have not been graded.
Caution: This option will place a ―0‖ in ALL assignments that do not yet have a grade, including those assignments that have no grade because they are not yet due. It works well at the end of a term when all assignments have been completed and you want to enter a ―0‖ for any assignments that were not done by individual students.
Appendix VII 1056
―Limit Course Assistants by Team‖ only allows persons with ―Course Assistant‖ rights to see grades (and enter grades) for students with the same team membership as they have.
Tip: This is a good option when you have TA‘s, GA‘s, or Preceptors and you only want them to have access to their own students‘ grades. Give them Course Assistant Rights and then create teams for each Course Assistant and their respective students.
―Exclude Instructors from Averages‖ will display a class average that does not include any instructor submissions.
Note – Instructors will appear in the Gradebook and do have the option of ―testing out‖ any of the assignments. Using this option will prevent these ―test grades‖ from being included within the class averages.
―Gradebook Mode‖ allows for the selection of either a Points-based or Percentage-based modality, as discussed previously. In this example, the Percentage-based mode is selected.
Caution: While the mode selected here CAN be changed later, even after grades have been entered, it does have an impact on how grades are calculated. Ensure that you understand the differences between the two modes before making any changes.
The next section in Preferences contains options for the Final Grade display.
Check ―Display Overall Average‖ if you want students to see a running tally of their course average. It can be kept ―unchecked‖ and changed later when you wish them to see their final grade.
―Overall Display Format‖ is similar to the ―Default Display setting‖ set earlier. However, it only applies to the Final grade and allows for a different setting.
Click ―Save‖ to save all preferences set.
Setting Up Grading Scale (Letter Grade Scale)
A good ―next step‖ would be to set up the scale designating the Letter Grade criteria, especially if you will be displaying letter grades in the Gradebook.
In the Main Menu screen of the Gradebook, go to ―Grading Scale‖ in the ―Gradebook Management ―section.
Appendix VII 1057
On the next screen, input the first ―Letter‖ and the minimum percent required to achieve that grade. Click ―Add New‖ to go to the next letter grade.
Tip: If you want the grade to ―round up‖ to the next whole number, put the minimum percent as .5 LESS than the minimum (in this example, an ―A‖ is actually a 90%. Entering it as 89.5% will ensure that anyone with a score between 89.5% and 89.9% would still be entered as an ―A‖.)
Continue adding all other Letter values in the same manner. Use the Edit/Delete buttons to make any changes. Note that there is no ―Save‖ button. When you are finished, click the ―Back to Main Menu‖ link.
Appendix VII 1058
Tip: The Grading Scale is not limited to ―ABC‖-type grades. You can put in any labels that are applicable. For example, you could have Pass/Fail designations by using ―P‖ and ―F‖ for labels and adding the minimum percent required for each.
Appendix VII 1059
How to Set Up the Gradebook: Categories and Assignments
Differences between Categories and Assignments
In the ANGEL Gradebook, ―Assignment‖ refers to any graded item. Assignments can be added manually within the Gradebook, as part of the setup process when a content item is added to Lessons, or through an automated Agent. All Assignments have to be associated with a Category.
A ―Category‖ is a group of one or more Assignments that are weighted together. In a Points-based grading system, there may only be one category with all Assignments linked to it. In a Percentage-based system, there may be several categories with a specific percentage-weight assigned to each category.
For more on this topic see “How to set up the Gradebook: Preferences and Grading Scale” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Only Assignments can be graded; Categories cannot.
Setting Up Categories
The first step is to determine what categories are needed and how they will be weighted.
If a Points-based mode is selected, no weights are needed and only one Category is necessary (although you can create more than one).
If a Percentage-based mode is being used, calculate what percentage each category will contribute to the final grade. Example:
Quizzes 20%
Discussions 30%
Research Paper 20%
Midterm 10%
Final 20%
Total 100%
In the above example, there would be five categories: Quizzes, Discussions, Research Paper, Midterm, and Final.
There are several ways to create categories. They can be created during the process of creating an Assignment when setting up a content item in Lessons. They can be created when using the Gradebook Wizard. Finally, they can be created within the Gradebook.
Setting Up Categories while Creating Assignments in Lessons
Go to Assignments > Gradebook Settings when setting up a content item. Ensure that you are in ―Advanced‖ settings view.
Appendix VII 1060
Select ―New Assignment‖ from the Drop-down list.
Enter a title for the Assignment. Note that in ―Category‖, the only option is ―Default‖, which means that no categories have been set up for this course. Click the ―Other‖ button to add a category.
Complete the information indicated in the pop-up window and then click ―Add‖.
Appendix VII 1061
Note: This example illustrates a Percentage-based system with a weight of 20 (meaning 20%) entered. For a Points-based system, leave “Weight” blank, and check the “auto calculate” box.
The ―extra credit‖ box is only checked if this category has been designated an ―extra credit‖ category.
Complete the rest of the information to set up the Assignment, and then click ―Save‖. (This process will be discussed in more detail later in this document).
Note: There are more options available for Categories within the Gradebook Manager. These options can be designated later.
Setting Up Categories when Using the Gradebook Wizard
The Gradebook Wizard will appear the first time the Gradebook is entered within a new course and can be used to initially set up the Gradebook.
Go to Manage > Gradebook. The Gradebook Wizard will appear.
Note: If the Gradebook Wizard no longer appears, you can reactivate it by deleting all categories set up. Generally this is not a good idea, but good to know if someone has been testing it out but not really setting up the categories and assignments needed and wants to start over again.
In the first example here, a Points-based system is selected:
Appendix VII 1062
Some categories have already been pre-listed. These can be changed by overwriting them. Notice that in the Points-based system, weights are not designated.
Here you are changing the ―Homework‖ category to ―Discussion‖. The ―Calculation‖ options allow you to designate how many assignments within the Category will be counted. In this example, you will drop the Assignments with the lowest grades.
The next example will illustrate a Category within a Percentage-based system. It has already been selected. Note that now there is a ―Weight‖ column.
Appendix VII 1063
Continue with the rest of the Wizard to set up Assignments and other options.
Tip: There is a tutorial illustrating how to use the Gradebook Wizard at the top of the first screen of the Gradebook Wizard.
Setting Up Categories within the Gradebook
This can be used either instead of the Gradebook Wizard or to add new categories when the Gradebook Wizard is no longer available.
Open the Gradebook (Manage > Gradebook) and go to Categories within the Gradebook Management section.
You will first demonstrate using a Percentage-based system. Note that there is one category (Default) already listed. It has ―0‖ weight.
Caution: Any assignments associated with this ―Default‖ category will NOT be included in any calculations towards a final grade. If no categories are created, all assignments will automatically be assigned to this ―Default‖ category and will not create a final grade. This category can be deleted or edited.
At the bottom of the Category section, click the ―Add new‖ button.
Appendix VII 1064
The Category Editor section will open beneath the row of buttons. Enter a title for the Category you are creating.
.
In the next section, you will put in the calculation information. In this example, you have decided to drop the Assignments with the lowest 3 grades within this Category.
The ―Weight‖ is 30 and will ultimately be worth 30% of the final grade, once the other Categories are added. You can leave the description blank, or else add some descriptive information.
The Advanced view offers more options, such as a ―Release Date and Time‖, if you do not want students to view the Category until a specific date/time; an option to change the way the Category will display; the ability to add a formula; and the option to not display the Category average..
When finished, click the ―Save‖ button.
Appendix VII 1065
When using a Points-based system, there is no ―Weight‖ designation and you cannot use a formula (in Advanced view).
Tip: With all of these methods available, which is the best to use? It‘s often most efficient to create the categories when setting up the assignment as part of the content item set up and then go to the Gradebook and create any other categories that might not be associated with a content item (i.e. categories with assignments that are completed outside of the ANGEL environment).
You may also need to go to the Gradebook to add any options to a Category that cannot be done when creating a content item, such as the ability to drop the lowest assignment grades in a category.
Setting Up Assignments
As with Categories, there are several ways to set up Assignments. The method used will depend upon how the Assignment is graded. Drop box assignments, Quizzes and Assessments, and Discussion Forums can all be set up and graded as content items. Grades are generally entered through the Utilities options, or they are automatically graded, such as with multiple choice quizzes and assessments.
The Gradebook Wizard can also be used to create Assignments for content items that weren‘t already created during the item set up.
Appendix VII 1066
Assignments that are completed outside of the ANGEL environment can be manually added and graded through the Gradebook Manager.
Setting Up Assignments Within a Content Item
Continue with the creation of an Assignment as already described in Steps 1 – 5 above. Input the number of points to be awarded and determine which grade will displayed in the Gradebook and count towards the final grade.
First Submission- the first grade entered.
Average Score- if more than one grade is given (more than one submission) the average will be counted
Maximum Score – the highest score attained if more than one submission and grading
Last submission- if assignment submitted several times, the grade for the last entry
Manual- will be graded in the Gradebook and not through the content item
Caution: If students are allowed to have more than one submission or take an assessment more than once, be sure that Calculation Type is set to either Maximum Score , Last Submission, or Average Score. Otherwise, only their first effort will ―count‖ in the Gradebook.
Note: Even though a Drop box Assignment and a Discussion Forum cannot be ―automatically‖ graded, they are not considered to be ―manually‖ graded in this context. Select one of the other options, (usually First Submission, unless the student can submit more than one time), instead.
Select how you want the grade to display in the Gradebook (the default value for the display format is set up in Gradebook > Preferences), and then click ―Save‖. Only check the ―hide gradebook assignment from students‖ if you do not want them to see their grades until you are ready to release the Gradebook grade for this content item..
Appendix VII 1067
Tip: You might want to hide a grade when the assignment is something like a research paper where you may not have all the grades completed at the same time and you do not want students to see their grades until all of the papers have been graded. You can ―unhide‖ them when you are ready.
Setting Up Assignments Within the Gradebook
This method is used when the Assignment has to be manually graded (i.e. outside of ANGEL) and cannot be graded via a content item in Lessons. This might be for things like awarding credit for attending a performance, or for adding grades for tests not given online.
Note: While Drop box assignments and Essay questions cannot be automatically graded, they are still created within their content items setup and are not considered to be ―manually graded‖ assignments in this context. Therefore they would NOT be set up using this method.
Go to Manage > Gradebook > Assignments in the Gradebook Management section.
At the bottom of the next screen, click ―Add new
Appendix VII 1068
‖
The Assignment Editor will appear beneath the ―Add New‖ button. Input a title for the Assignment.
Tip: Keep the title short as this will be the label for the Assignment in the Gradebook. Long titles will be truncated and could be more difficult to recognize.
Continue completing the fields. Select the appropriate category for the Assignment. Note that the Calculation Method must be ―Manual‖, since this is not associated with any content items and is graded outside of ANGEL. (For the purpose of this illustration, this assignment is an in-class presentation for a blended / hybrid course).
Appendix VII 1069
Note: Categories need to be set up before Assignments can be created and assigned to them..
Setting Up Assignments Within the Categories Menu
Manual assignments can also be created within the Categories section, and can be done at the same time a Category is created.
Go to Manage > Gradebook > Categories
On the next screen, click the box next to the Category associated with the Assignment you are creating, then click the ―Show tasks‖ button. Note that the Category is bolded once it is selected.
This will open up a number of tasks that are associated with Categories.
Click the ―Add Assignments‖ link.
Appendix VII 1070
This will open a screen that is the same as the one in the ―Assignments‖ section discussed previously. Complete the steps as already described in steps 25 and 26.
Appendix VII 1071
How to Rearrange Categories and Assignments in the
Gradebook
Assignments and Categories are arranged within the Gradebook in the order in which they were created. This sometimes causes the assignments or categories to appear in a different order than what is wanted. For example, if Quiz 3 was created after Quiz 5, it will appear in the Gradebook in that order, which could cause some confusion for students viewing their grades. This order can be changed within the Gradebook Management section.
Rearranging Categories
Go to Manage > Gradebook > Categories.
In this example, you will move the Category ―Quizzes‖ up so that it appears above ―Midterm‖.
Check the box next to the Category to be moved.
Appendix VII 1072
Click the ―Show Tasks‖ button
The ― [Category_Name] Tasks‖ section will appear below the Categories. Click the ―Move Up― or ―Move Down‖ link to move the category into the desired location. In this instance, you will use the ―Move Up‖ link.
Appendix VII 1073
Note: You may need to click the ―Move Up‖ or ―Move Down‖ link more than once, depending upon where you want to place the category that is being moved.
Click the ―Done‖ button when finished.
In this example, the Quiz category has now been moved above the Midterm Category.
Appendix VII 1074
Rearranging Assignments:
Go to Manage > Gradebook > Categories (see Step 1)
Note: Assignments can only be rearranged within their own categories. For example, if you had a ―Discussion‖ category and a ―Quiz‖ category, you could not move the assignment ―Discussion 1‖ so that it would appear next to assignment ―Quiz 1‖ if they belonged to different categories.
Click the box next to the Category that contains the Assignments that need to be rearranged. In this example, you will be rearranging the order of some quizzes within the ―Quizzes‖ category.
Click the ―Show Tasks‖ button.
Appendix VII 1075
The ― [Category_Name] Tasks‖ section will appear below the Categories. Click the ―Reorder Assignments‖ link.
The ―Reorder Assignments‖ screen will appear. Select the assignment that you want to move, and then use the ―Top‖ ―Up‖ ―Down‖ and/or ―Bottom‖ buttons to move the assignment into the correct position. In this example, you are moving ―Quiz2 ‖ so that it will appear before ―Quiz3‖ or ―Quiz4‖, so you will click the ―Up‖ button twice.
Appendix VII 1076
Note: The buttons will move the selected assignment as follows:
―Top‖ moves it to the top of the list of assignments
―Up‖ moves it up one place
―Down‖ moves it down one place
―Bottom‖ moves it to the bottom of the list
Click the ―Save‖ button when everything has been rearranged as needed.
This will bring you back to the main menu screen for the Gradebook. To check the results, click ―Assignments‖
Appendix VII 1077
The Quizzes are now listed in their correct order
.
The Gradebook view also shows the Quizzes in the correct order.
Appendix VII 1078
How to Create an Extra Credit Assignment
ANGEL allows you to create extra credit assignments using two different methods. Which one you use will depend upon how you want the extra credit to be applied. You can either create an extra credit CATEGORY or an extra credit ASSIGNMENT. You can have both extra credit assignments and extra credit categories, as long as you do not put an extra credit assignment in an extra credit category
Note: This is an ―either-or‖ proposition. You cannot designate a single ASSIGNMENT as an extra credit within an extra credit CATEGORY. All assignments within an extra credit category are automatically calculated as extra credit.
Creating an Extra Credit Category
This option would be most useful if you wanted to add extra credit to the total grade. The weight assigned to this category would increase the grade accordingly. [Example: If the Gradebook were using a percentage-based mode, the weight were ―2‖ and the student were awarded full credit for that category, it would increase the final grade by 2% (that is, final grade is 80%; receiving the full amount of extra credit from a category with a weight of ―2‖ would increase the grade to 82%).]
Exactly how the grade is computed depends upon the type of grading system used: Percentage-based or Points-based.
For more on this topic see “How to set up the Gradebook: Preferences and Grading Scale” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Go to Manage > Gradebook
On the following screen, select ―Categories‖ under the ―Gradebook Management‖ section.
Appendix VII 1079
On the next screen, select the ―Add New‖ button to add a new category.
Add a title and a weight (if applicable). The example below is illustrating a percentage-based system.
Note: In a Percentage-based system, the amount added will add that many more percentage-points to the final grade.
If using a Points-based system, you will not see the ―Weight‖ option; the weight will be determined by the point value of the assignments associated with that category.
Appendix VII 1080
Check the box next to ―Extra Credit‖
And then click the ―Save‖ button.
Appendix VII 1081
With both the Percentage-based and Points-based system, the Category will now be listed with all the other categories.
Percentage-based system:
With the Percentage-based system, the weight is listed with no ―Percent Overall‖ value indicated, but with a weight of ―2‖.
Looking closer at the ―Weight‖ and ―Percent Overall‖ columns above, you can see that the overall percent is computed WITHOUT the ―2‖ weight for the Extra Credit
Appendix VII 1082
Assignment, so that it will count as an ―extra‖ 2%. (Note the values in the ―Weight‖ column actually add up to ―102‖). A student who earned an 88% before adding in the extra credit and then receiving full credit for the assignments associated with the extra credit category would receive a grade of 90%. (If the student did not get full credit, the grade would reflect the credit they did receive)
Points-based System:
With the Points-based system, the Weight for the extra credit assignment is listed as ―0‖ because no assignments have been added to it. Once an assignment has been added, the weight will reflect the total point value of all extra credit assignments associated with that extra credit category.
In the example below, an Extra Credit assignment has now been added with a value of 20 points. However, it is not computed into the actual ―Weight‖ value. If it had been, the total weight would be 565 instead of 545.
Appendix VII 1083
Using this example, if a student had received a score of 480 points (before adding in extra credit points), their grade would be 480 / 545. If they then received 15 points (out of the potential 20 points) from the assignments in the extra credit category, the grade would be 495 / 545 (i.e. the points earned increase to 495, but total points stay the same). Expressing this as a percent; the grade would have increased from 88% to 91%.
Add the assignments to be associated with the extra credit category, designating the extra credit category when prompted.
For more on this topic see “How to set up the Gradebook: Categories and Assignments” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Caution: When creating the assignments that are associated with an extra credit category, do NOT check the ―Extra credit‖ box within the assignment settings.
Creating an Extra Credit Assignment
As noted previously, you can either:
Create an extra credit category and place all extra credit assignments within that category
OR
You can designate any assignment as an extra credit assignment. An extra credit assignment will add the extra credits to the total of the category in which it is assigned.
Tip: If using a Points-based system, all points are cumulative so that using either an extra credit category or an extra credit assignment will have the same effect.
One very simple way to assign extra points to any assignment is to assign more points to the assignment than originally designated. For example, an assignment worth 20 points could be assigned extra points to deserving individual students by awarding 25 points (5 points more than designated) instead.
To create an extra credit assignment that will be graded manually (i.e. not through ANGEL, as in an assignment drop box, discussion forum, or quiz/exam), go to Manage > Gradebook
Select ―Assignments‖ in the Gradebook Management section:
Appendix VII 1084
Click the ―Add New‖ button:
Create a title, select the appropriate category, assign points, and check the Extra Credit box. Click ―Save‖ to finish.
Appendix VII 1085
For Assignments that are graded through an ANGEL content item, create the Assignment through the ―Assignments‖ tab in the settings for that item. The Category selected CANNOT be an ―Extra Credit‖ Category.
For more on this topic see “How to set up the Gradebook: Categories and Assignments” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
When creating this type of assignment, you CANNOT designate it as Extra Credit within the settings. You will need to edit the assignment in the Gradebook once it has been created. Once the assignment has been created, follow steps 11 and 12 above to begin editing it.
Check the box next to the Assignment that you want to designate as Extra Credit and then click the ―Edit Selected‖button.
Appendix VII 1086
On the following screen, check the ―Extra Credit‖ button, and then the ―Save‖ button to finish.
The extra credit assignment will raise the total grade within the category to which it is assigned. In a Percentage-based system, it will NOT affect the overall weight of the category towards the final grade. Therefore, it may either have a greater or lesser effect on the final grade as using an Extra Credit Category.
Appendix VII 1087
How Students Can See Their Grades
ANGEL allows students to see their grades in a variety of ways. The instructor can decide what tools might work best for the course. Students can only see their own grades, not anyone else‘s.
Using the Grades Nugget
The Grades nugget appears on the Course page by default. It displays a graphical depiction of the student grade per category as compared with the class average.
As an instructor, you will see the combined averages of all student grades. Go to the Course page to see the Grades nugget. The nugget will appear in its collapsed state. Click the ―expand‖ icon by hovering the mouse over the end of the toolbar to make the icons appear.
Note that now all Category averages appear. Only one of the Categories has any grades entered for it at this point. Students see only their own grades, compared with the class average.
Note: Remind students to click the ―Refresh‖ link; otherwise they will not see the most current results.
By clicking on one of the grade bars, the student can view the specific assignment grade(s).
Appendix VII 1088
Doing so will bring up the Reports console with the ―Learner Profile‖ and ―Gradebook Grades‖ already selected as the default.
Select the appropriate report view. ―Table‖ view will display a table with each assignment and the associated grade and the class average. ―Chart‖ view displays a bar graph with the same information. In this instance, the student is selecting ―Table‖ view
Click ―Run‖ to continue.
The student‘s grade(s) will now appear.
If the Assignment title is a clickable link, clicking on it will return the student to the Assignment within Lessons where the submission, instructor attachment (if any), grade, and instructor comments will be viewable.
Appendix VII 1089
Using the Reports Console
Students can go directly to the Reports Console to see their grades using the Reports tab.
Go to the Reports tab
Keep the ―Learner Profile‖ Category selected, and change Report to ―Gradebook Grades‖
Follow steps 6 through 9 above.
Using Course Tools
Course Tools is an optional nugget that can be added to the Course page or the Resources page. It shows all grades in a different format than on the Reports console.
Go to the page where you want to add the Course Tools nugget and click Edit Page. In this example, you are putting it on the Resources page.
Appendix VII 1090
On the next screen in the Add Components window, highlight Course Tools and then click the Add Component button.
Course Tools will now appear with the other nuggets on that page.
Appendix VII 1091
Click the Save button to continue.
Note: When you return to the Resources page, you will NOT see the Course Tools nugget as an instructor or course editor. Only students see that nugget.
When students go to the Resources page, the Course Tools will be available.
Notice that there are a number of options that are available. Click ―My Grades.‖
Appendix VII 1092
The student will see all grades and comments.
Appendix VII 1093
How to Create a Survey
Within ANGEL, you can create surveys using a variety of options. ANGEL surveys could be used for everything from simple course feedback to complete end-of-semester student evaluations. The results from the survey can be reviewed using the Response Summary report option.
Go to location where you want to place the survey within Lessons, and click Add Content. In this example, you are going to add it as a top-level content item that is not within any of the modules.
On the following page, click Survey
Set up the survey as for any other content item: add a title, any specific instructions, and the access settings that are needed.
Appendix VII 1094
One setting that may be different from what is usually chosen is in the Submission section. Check the box next to Make submissions anonymous to keep users from being identified with their answers.
Save all settings when you are finished.
After you save the settings, you will be able to add the questions for the survey. Click Add Question to continue.
These are the types of questions that can be added:
Section Heading
Text Box
Text Area
Checkbox
Check List
Drop-down List
Option List
Appendix VII 1095
Likert Scale
Copy Questions
Import Questions
Section Heading Editor will allow you to add some information about the questions that follow.
In the completed survey, it will appear look like:
As you enter each question, you will be returned to the original page so that you can add more questions. Note that there is an Edit and a Delete button next to the question.
The next question you will add is a Text box question. This will allow users to type their answers into a single-line answer box. Add the question by typing in the Question window
Appendix VII 1096
In the completed survey, it will appear look like:
A Text Area question is similar to the Text box question, except that users have a larger window in which to type their response.
Appendix VII 1097
In the completed survey, it will appear look like
A Checkbox question displays a checkbox next to a label. The user would check the box as directed.
In the completed survey, it will appear look like:
A Check List question allows you to ask a question and then display a series of choices. Users check the choice that applies. Type the question in the question box.
In the Choices section, click Add to add the first choice
Appendix VII 1098
In the pop-up window that appears, type in the first answer choice, and then click OK
Continue adding all answer choices. You can use the Up/Down options to rearrange any answers.
The Unselected /selected section beneath the answers allows you to have one of the choices preselected in the user view. To preselect an answer, highlight it and then use the drop-down list to choose Selected. If none of the choices is to be preselected, then leave them unselected.
+ next to the answer choice indicates it has been preselected
– indicates that it has not been preselected. If a choice IS preselected, there will be a check in the box next to the choice when the user views that question; however, the user can change to a different choice.
Users can select more than one choice.
Click Save to continue
Appendix VII 1099
In the example below, none of the choices were preselected:
The Drop-down list question is similar to the Check list, except that users see a drop-down list of choices rather than a checklist. Setting it up is identical to setting up a checklist. Users highlight their answer choice; only one may be selected.
An option list is also similar to a check list and is set up the same way. Only ONE answer may be selected.
Appendix VII 1100
The Likert Scale question is very similar to an option list and allows you to create a question that asks users to select an answer by ranking. It differs from the Option list in the way that the results are formatted.
Copy Question would allow you to copy a question from another survey within the same course, similar to the Copy Question in Assessments.
Import Question allows you to import questions from a text document by copying and pasting. The document has to be in a specific format as noted on that screen. You can specify the type of question within the document. You can paste in as many questions as you need all at one time. The Import Question page has full instructions as to how to format the document, including the format to be used to designate the type of question. A sample format is displayed for you in the Import Questions window:
Appendix VII 1101
When all questions have been added, you can view the completed survey by clicking Preview.
The survey will display. While you can answer any of the questions, none of the responses will be saved and therefore will not be included within the Response Summary.
When users take the survey, the results can be viewed by clicking Reports:
Appendix VII 1102
And then click on Response Summary on the next page
The Responses will be displayed differently depending upon the type of question. If the question required the user to type in their answer, you will see the number of responses (valid – meaning they were completed). Click on the Responses link:
All of the responses will be listed. Since only one person has taken this survey so far, only one response is listed. Click Done to return to the Response summary page.
Appendix VII 1103
If the questions required the user to use a check box, drop-down list, or option list, the number of responses for each option will be listed.
If the question was a Likert scale question, the number of responses for each option will be listed, as above, as well as an average of the ratings.
For more on this topic see “How to post a grade for a survey using an automated Agent” in Appendix VII: ANGEL Step-by-Step
Appendix VII 1104
How to Create Teams
There are many ways that ANGEL takes advantage of the ability to create teams. Every content item can be configured so that they are only open to certain teams or allow for customized settings for specific teams. Emails, Announcements, and Calendar items can be limited to a particular team or teams. Teams can also be utilized for group projects, with chat rooms and discussion forums limited to team members. Teams can share files and can display a project to other course members.
For more information on customizing settings for specific teams, see “How to set Team Access Rights for Lesson Content.”
For more information about sharing files among team members, see “How to Share and Edit Files between Multiple Users.”
Teams can either be creating through randomly generating the teams and members, or by adding a team and directly assigning members to that team.
Randomly Generating Teams and Members
Enter the course in which you want to create teams. Go to Manage > Teams
On the next screen, select ―Random Team Generator‖
Appendix VII 1105
On the following screen, you will set the criteria for the teams to be generated. In the first section, you will assign the Root Name for the team names. All team names will contain that name followed by a consecutively-assigned numeric designation. In this case, the team name will begin with the name ―Group‖
The next designation is ―Criteria‖. This will determine how many members will comprise each team. You can either specify the number of teams to be created, or denote the maximum and /or minimum number of team members to be assigned to each team. In the example below, each team has to have at least 2 members, but no more than 3 members.
The following section, User Pool, sets the criteria for the membership for the teams. Membership is designated by user rights; the default is to assign all students. You can add other course users with different rights, depending upon the need.
Appendix VII 1106
Note: Teams can also be created as sub-teams of already created teams. There is an option to draw team members from the entire roster or only a specific team.
Caution: When the teams are generated, they can only draw membership from users who are already on the course roster. If additional users are enrolled into the course after the teams have been created, they will either have to be manually added to a team, or the ―Rebalance Generated Teams‖ option can be used to assign them.
Click the Next button to continue after all criteria have been set.
Appendix VII 1107
The ―Adjustment‖ page will display with the team members assigned to each team. You can adjust the membership by clicking on a specific name, using the Move option to select another team from the drop-down list and then clicking the Move button.
When all adjustments are made, click ―Generate Teams‖
The following screen will be a display of all teams and assigned members. Click ―Continue‖ to finish.
Appendix VII 1108
Tip: Save this screen as a PDF or HTML document and then upload to Lessons so that students can see their team assignment and their fellow team members.
You will be returned to the Team Editor screen where all teams will be listed.
Note: If you need to apply any settings to the teams created, such as enabling file sharing, you will need to edit the team by going to the Teams Editor page and selecting the ―settings‖ option for that team. You can also add or remove members, rename the team, or delete the team from this page.
Creating Teams and Assigning Team Members Manually
If you want to create specific teams and add specific members to the teams, you can do this using the Teams Editor ―Add a Team‖ option.
Go to Manage > Teams (Step 1)
Appendix VII 1109
On the Teams Editor screen, click ―Add a Team‖
The New Teams – Team Settings page will open.
Note: You can return to this page to add or change any options for the team by clicking the ―settings‖ option beneath the team name from the Teams Editor page.
Name the team and add any other values. If the team has a homepage, you can input the URL for that page. If the team has created a project, input the URL in the Project URL field. ―Hidden‖ will hide the team from student view. Disabling the team will prevent members from any team-associated access.
Note: When a URL is added as a Project URL, a new section will appear in the ―Communicate‖ section called Team Projects. This will allow anyone not on the team to view the URL, which generally is some type of presentation.
Appendix VII 1110
Tip: If you had a single student who needed to have different settings for an assignment (for example, a student has to take a test on different date or needs different accommodation settings), create a team consisting of that one person and set ―Hidden‖ to ―Yes‖ so that the team is not visible to other students. You can then go to the assignment and customize settings for that student-team. For more information on customizing settings for specific teams, see ―How to set Team Access Rights for Lesson Content‖.
If you want the team to be able to share files, then select the ―Enabled‖ option for File Sharing and designate the maximum file size for the team file area. Click Save when all settings have been entered.
Reference: For more information about sharing files among team members, see “How to Share and Edit Files between Multiple Users”
Appendix VII 1111
The next screen will allow you to add members to the new team. Check all members to be included within the group, and then click ―Add Selected‖. Note that other team memberships are displayed for each user.
The new team members now have the ―already a member‖ icon next to their names. Also note that the ―Red‖ team has now been added to their team list. Click Done to finish.
Note: If the class had so many members that there was more than one page of users, there would be a link to the other pages at the bottom. You can only add members one page at a time, so you would select all users on the first screen, click ―Add Selected‖, then go to the next screen of names, select the users, and again click ―Add Selected‖. You would not click ―Done‖ until all members were selected on all screens.
Appendix VII 1112
The new team has now been added.
Appendix VII 1113
How to Set Up Team Projects
When creating a Team, you can set up a section for team members to share files. If they are developing a Team Project to be viewed by other members of the course, you can also create a nugget to display these.
See “How to Create Teams” to learn how to add teams to the course.
Enabling file-sharing is done during the Team set up or can be done later by going to Manage > Teams
Note: When adding teams using the Random Team Generator, you will not have the option to enable file sharing. Once the teams have been created, you will need to enable it using this procedure.
On the next screen, click on the settings for the team in which you want to allow file sharing.
Appendix VII 1114
Go to the Team Tools section and change ―File Sharing‖ to Enabled. Also put in the maximum amount of file space for the team. This may be set by your institution‘s policy; check with your System Administrator. This may also be set when adding a team using the Teams Editor > Add a Team option.
Note: If teams are creating PowerPoints, caution them as to their file restrictions as Power Points with large pictures, animations, sounds, and so on can become quite large. Helping them to convert the Power Points to pdf files or having them upload the Power Points as web pages can greatly reduce their size.
Click Save to finish.
Appendix VII 1115
This will display the Team File Sharing nugget that in the Communicate section of the course.
Note: Students will only see the link to the file sharing area of the team(s) in which they are members.
Note: The Team Files nugget can be added to other sections of the course, including the Course page and the Resources page through the ―Edit Page‖ feature
Appendix VII 1116
When team members click on the Files link, they will first be able to click Add content
Then they will be able to create a folder, create a web page, and/or upload files.
Appendix VII 1117
If students are creating a presentation to be viewed by the rest of the class members, you can add a Team Projects nugget. To add the individual student projects, you will need the URL to that team‘s project. If the team has created a website, you would use that URL.
If the file that the team wants to use for the Team Project is in their file sharing area, you can determine that URL by going into their team file area by clicking on their team name. The file(s) will be listed there.
In this example, the team has uploaded a Power Point file that has been converted to a PDF.
Note: Microsoft Office 2007 has a utility that will allow the user to save a Power Point as a pdf. In addition, there are a number of free programs that can be downloaded that will save documents and Power Points as pdf files.
Do a right mouse-click on the file name (if using a Mac, click and hold). Depending upon the browser you are using, either select ―Copy shortcut‖ (Internet Explorer) or ―Copy Link Location‖ (Firefox) from the drop-down menu. This will copy the link so you can paste it later.
Click Exit Team Files.
Appendix VII 1118
Go to Manage > Teams.
Go to the settings link of the Team from which you copied the URL above.
Click in the Project URL field and do a Paste. That will add the URL that you copied earlier.
Save your settings by clicking the Save button.
Appendix VII 1119
Returning to the Communicate section of the course, you can see that the Team Projects nugget has now been added and the Team A Project is listed.
Clicking on Team A Project will open the file for others to view. If the team project was a website that was housed elsewhere, it would link to that website
Appendix VII 1120
How to Rebalance Teams
Teams that have been created with the Random Team Generator can be reconfigured using the Rebalance Generated Team option. This may be necessary if new members need to be added to already-created teams, if members need to be deleted from teams, or if the membership needs to be redistributed for other reasons.
Note: The Rebalance Generated Teams option can ONLY be used with teams that were created using the Random Team Generator.
Go to Manage > Teams
.
Click Rebalance Generated Teams
On the next screen, select the team to be rebalanced from the drop-down list, and then click the Next button.
Appendix VII 1121
On the following screen, you will make any changes to the teams. In the first example, you will add a new user to a team. In the Unassigned User column, highlight the name of the user that you want to add to a team.
Tip: If you had more than one user to select and move to the SAME team, you could hold down the control key while selecting each member.
Going to the bottom of the Unassigned Users column, select the team to which the user(s) will be assigned from the drop-down list.
Appendix VII 1122
Once the Team has been selected, the user will immediately be moved to that team.
You can also move a user from one team to another. Highlight the user that you want to move.
Appendix VII 1123
At the bottom of the column, choose the team to which the user will be moved.
Once the team is selected, the user will be moved into that team.
When all changes have been made, click the Generate Teams button at the bottom of the page.
Appendix VII 1124
The next screen will display the new team configurations. Click Continue to finish.
Tip: Save this screen as a PDF or HTML document and then upload to Lessons so that students can see the new team assignments and their fellow team members.
Tip: If you need a copy of a group of teams with members at any time in the future, you can use the Rebalance Generated Teams option, as long as the teams were created with the Random Team Generator. Follow steps 1-3 above. On the Adjustment Change page that will open after step 3, without making any changes or corrections, click on the Generate Teams button. The team memberships will not change, but you will have all the teams from that group displayed with members as in the example below.
Appendix VII 1125
Appendix VII 1126
How to Set Team Access Rights for Lesson Content
By creating Teams, you can control access and settings for Lesson content items. You can both restrict content items to one or more teams, or you can change settings within a content item for different teams. A team can consist of one or more members and you can have as many different configurations of teams as you need. Course members can belong to more than one team.
Some examples:
One student needs to take a test at a different time than the rest of the class or needs to have different test settings for accommodation purposes. You can create a team for that one person and then create the individualized settings.
A cross-listed course contains students at both the graduate and undergraduate level. You could create 2 Teams, with one for undergraduate students and one for graduate students, and then restrict some assignments and content to one team or the other.
Students are divided into groups to create group projects and need access to different content. Create a different team for each group and then limit content items according to their needs.
Restricting a Content Item to One or More Teams
This can be done when setting up the content item, or by accessing the content item settings after it has been created. In this example, the content item has already been created. The procedure is basically the same for any type of content item.
Go to the Settings link of the content item you want to have restricted to a team. In this example, you are using a folder of documents for Team A.
Select ―Advanced‖ view. Go to the ―Access‖ tab, and then to ―Team Access.‖
Use the drop-down list to select ―Selected Teams.‖
You will then be able to check the Team that you wish to have access to this content item. In this case, you will check ―Team A‖.
Appendix VII 1127
Click ―Save‖ to finish.
Note: This example used a Folder as the content item. By default, all settings will automatically cascade down into any NEW content item added to the folder as well as content already within the folder, so that those items will also be restricted to the Team specified.
Creating Different Settings for Different Teams
This option is most often used with tests and exams. It will allow different settings for different teams, such as a different date and time, or longer time period to take the test.
Follow steps 1-4 above. For this example, you will use an Assessment.
Instead of checking the box next to the Team, click on the Team name. In this example, you are going to change the settings for Team A, so you click ―Team A‖
Appendix VII 1128
This will bring us to the screen that will allow us to customize the settings for this Team. In this case, you will set a different date and time for the test to be taken by first checking the Advanced Settings and then changing the ―Delivery Start Date‖ and the ―Delivery End Date‖ and checking the boxes next to them.
Click ―Save‖ to finish.
Appendix VII 1129
The new settings will now allow those persons in Team A a different date and time in which to take the test.
In order for everyone else in the course to take the test, they need to be members of another team and that team also needs to be ―checked‖ in the ―Selected Teams‖ designation. By default, their settings will be the settings originally designated for that test, since they have not been customized. In this example, the rest of the students are members of ―Team B‖.
Tip: Create a team and make all students a member of that team. Then when needing to customize settings for a different team, you won‘t have to create more teams for the students not in the team that needs the custom settings
You can indicate a priority for students who are members of both teams. In this example, all students are members of Team B. Only a few students are members of both Team A and Team B. When customizing the settings for Team A, there is an option to indicate ―Priority‖ in the Advanced Settings. Giving Team A a priority of ―1‖ means that anyone who is a member of Team A (no matter what other teams they are members of) will have the settings customized for Team A.
Appendix VII 1130
Click ―Save‖ to finish.
Appendix VII 1131
How to Automate Sending an Email to Students Who Have Not
Logged onto a Course within a Specified Time Period
Using Automated Agents, you can create an agent that will send an email to all students who have not logged onto a course within a time period that you specify. You can also have the email automatically sent to yourself so that you know which students were included.
Go to the Automate tab within the course and click ―Add New Agent‖
Name the Agent something descriptive.
Select the ―Scheduled Agent ― type. This procedure will be set to check Log-ons according to a specific schedule
Choosing this type of Agent opens up some scheduling options. In this instance, you will have the agent run every Monday night at 11:55 pm. Note that agents can be scheduled to run daily, weekly, and monthly, as well as ―on demand‖ (manually activated), or on a specific date and time
Appendix VII 1132
.
Tip: Consider your own course requirements when deciding on a schedule. In this case, the course has assignments due every Tuesday morning at 8 am. The instructor is interested in knowing who has not accessed the course since the previous Monday evening.
The criteria selected to this point are summarized at the bottom of the screen. Click the ―Next‖ button to continue.
On the next screen, you can further delineate which users are to be included within the search criteria. You want to include all users, so will not make any more specific changes to the User Selection section.
Appendix VII 1133
In the following section, designate the conditions that apply to this agent. In this case, you are monitoring ―Last Logon‖.
Choosing that option opens up more options to further delineate the users to which this agent will apply:
Appendix VII 1134
In this instance, you want to target all users who have not logged in 7 days. There are other time frames that could have been chosen, depending upon the desired result.
At the bottom of the screen, all of the criteria that have been set up are summarized. You could add more criteria to select more users, but this is all that you need for this agent. Click ―Next‖ to continue.
Now that you have established the users that need to be targeted for this agent, you need to specify what action you want to occur once the agent runs.
In this instance, you want the students who have not logged onto the course within the past 7 days to receive an email reminding them of the class requirements and also requesting further information from them about their absence from the course.
Therefore, the action you want is ―Email (External)‖: i.e. the agent will send an email to the Internet address of all students who have not logged onto the course within 7 days.
Appendix VII 1135
Tip: Students who have not logged on within the past 7 days are not likely to be monitoring their emails sent within ANGEL. Therefore it is more probable that they would see the email if it is sent to the external email account associated with them in ANGEL.
Since ―Email (External)‖ was selected, you need to tell the system what email address(es) to send the email(s) to and also create the email message to be sent. In doing this, you use several ―tokens‖. The system will substitute the actual data for the ―token‖
In the example above, the email will be sent to the instructor (the ―To‖ recipient) so that the instructor knows who received the email.
In the Bcc field, you are using the token ―$USER:EMAIL‖. When the agent is run, it will substitute the external email addresses for all students that meet the criteria in place of the token. By using the Bcc field (Blind copy), the students who receive the email will not know who else is receiving the email, thereby complying with FERPA regulations.
You will create the email that all of the students who meet the criteria will receive. In the body of the email, you are using another token to personalize the email: $FIRST_NAME$. When each student reads this email, they will see their own name in place of the token.
Appendix VII 1136
The bottom of the screen summarizes all of the criteria set. You could add another action at this point. You are not going to do that. Click ―Next.‖
The final screen allows you to look at everything that has been set up and edit as needed. Click ―Save‖ if everything looks the way it should.
Appendix VII 1137
Caution: Editing the ―Agent Type‖ will completely negate all settings and require you to start from the beginning.
Once you have ―saved‖ the agent, you will return to the Agent Console screen where you can see that this agent is now set to run on Monday at 11:55 PM. Once the agent has run, you will be able to see when it last ran and whether or not there were any errors. Since you had just created this agent and it has never run before, there is an ―N/A‖ listed for both ―Last Status‖ and ―Last Run‖
Appendix VII 1138
How to Release Content to Students
Within the settings for any content item, you can specify when the content will be released for students to access. You can also preview and ensure that students are not seeing any content that you do not want them to access.
You control the release of content items using the settings for that content item. In this example, you will set a folder and its contents to be released on a specific date. This is done in the settings for that content. If the content has already been created, click on Settings for that content. Otherwise it can be set when the content item is created.
Go to the content item and click Settings
Go to the Access tab and select Advanced settings
Go to the View Restrictions section. Setting a Start Date and time will release the content on that date and time. If you want the content item to also stop being accessible at a specific time and date, you can set that as well in the End Date settings.
Note: Be sure that you check the box next to the date and time. If this is not checked, the date and time will not be set.
Click Save when all settings have been inputted.
Appendix VII 1139
The content item will now not be released until the Start date and time.
Note: When working with folders, all settings within the folder cascade to any content items ADDED to the folder after the settings have. However, if settings to the folder are made AFTER the folder contains content items, the new settings will not cascade to the items within the folder unless the specific ―cascade‖ settings are applied (in the Access tab, Advanced View)
Note: There are several other ways to release content to students.
You can restrict content by Team (See ―How to Set Team Access Rights for Lesson Content‖)
You can have content released based upon an action taken by a student, using an Agent (See ―How to Conditionally Release Content Using an Agent.)
Appendix VII 1140
How to Release Content Conditionally by Using an Agent
Releasing Content by Using the “Unlock” Action
Using an automated Agent, you can release course content based on specific criteria. For example, you could release new content based upon a Drop box or Assessment grade. This content could be remedial in nature, based upon an unsatisfactory score, or could open the next module of content based if the student achieves an acceptable score. Another example would be to release content after students have taken a pretest or survey.
There are two different ways that content could be released using an Agent. One way would be to have the content only viewable by students that are members of a specific team. The Agent would enroll students into that team as members after they meet the set criteria.
A second method would be to ―unlock‖ the content for students meeting the criteria.
To begin, you need to create a password for the content to be released. Go to the ―settings‖ option for the content. In this example, you will be releasing the content in the folder ―Module 3‖
In the Access section, add a Password. The characters that you enter will appear as asterisks.
Note: Beginning the Password with a ―!‖ will hide the content item from the students‘ view.
Click the Save button when you have finished adjusting any other settings.
Appendix VII 1141
The folder will appear with a small ―padlock‖ icon on the side when you are in Course Editor view.
In Student view, the Module does not appear.
Appendix VII 1142
If you had not used a ! as the first character in the Password, the student view would be similar to the Course Editor view:
Only the password will unlock the Module. In Course Editor view, when you roll the mouse over the padlock icon, the password will appear.
Go to the Automate tab.
Click Add New Agent.
Supply a name for the Agent that will help you identify it easily, and the choose the Content Agent as the Agent type.
Appendix VII 1143
Click the Select Content to Monitor link that will appear when ―Content Agent‖ has been selected
Select the type of content that will be monitored; i.e. what type of content item is going to trigger the Agent to activate. In this example, it is going to be an Assessment (students will have to meet or exceed a specific grade on the Assessment for the content in Module 3 to be available to them)
Appendix VII 1144
Select Specific Assessment to designate the Assessment that will be used for this Agent. In this example, it is Exam 1 (which is the only Assessment set up in this course at this point). Then click Add and then Close Window
Then click Close Window
Appendix VII 1145
You will need to indicate WHEN the agent is to run. Because the specific action will occur based on the grade that the student receives, the choice here is ―graded‖.
Because the ―graded‖ is chosen, more options will appear, so that you can set the criteria for the content to be available. In this instance, you want the Module to appear if the student receives a grade of 80% or more.
The summary for everything that has been set up so far for the agent will now appear at the bottom of the screen. Click Next to continue.
The next screen allows you to select which users would be included within the agent. In this instance, you want all users to be included, so you will not make any changes in this section.
Appendix VII 1146
A summary of the agent will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. Click Next to continue.
On the following page, you will designate the action that is to occur if a user scores a grade between 80 and 100% on Exam 1. You want Module 3 to be viewable by the student; which means you need the password-protected Module 3 folder to be ―unlocked‖. Therefore, the action is ―Unlock‖.
Appendix VII 1147
Next you have to designate which users are to have access to the content (i.e. have the content ―unlocked‖). Select ―Event originator‖ as the user. This means that any person that triggers the ―event‖ (the ―event‖ being achieving a score of 80% or better) is to be included (i.e. it isn‘t just limited to users on a particular team).
Appendix VII 1148
Finish this section by putting supplying the password that will ―unlock‖ the Module.
Tip: If you forget what the password is, remember that you only have to roll the mouse over the padlock icon for the content item and the password will appear!
The summary appears at the bottom of the page. Click Save to complete the procedure.
Appendix VII 1149
Note: You could add more than one password if you had several content items to be released based on the action set.
The final page allows for any changes to be made. Click Save to activate the Agent.
The Agent has now been added to the Agents console
Tip: This same procedure could be used to open remedial content by setting different grade criteria and unlocking other content items.
Appendix VII 1150
How to Post a Grade for a Survey by Using an Automated Agent
Sometimes instructors want to give students a specific grade for completing a survey. Since surveys are not ―graded‖ the same as an Assessment; i.e. there are no ―correct‖ or ―incorrect‖ answers so the student does not receive a score that will be automatically recorded in the Gradebook, this can pose a problem. There are some manual solutions; for example, the instructor can check the ―Reports‖ for the survey to see who has completed it and then record a grade in the Gradebook. However, you can create an Agent that will automatically submit a grade to the Gradebook for every student who submits the survey.
Create the Survey Assignment
Create the Survey: (Lessons > Add Content > Survey), completing all sections in ―Settings‖ as needed except for the Assignments section.
Ensure that you are in ―Advanced‖ Settings view.
Go to the ―Assignment‖ section. You will be working with the Gradebook Settings.
Using the drop-down menu for ―Assignment‖, select ―New Assignment‖
Add a title, select the correct category for the assignment, and designate the point value for the assignment. This is the grade that each student submitting the survey will receive. Set Calculation Type to ―Manual‖
Appendix VII 1151
TIP: Keep the title for the Assignment short, since this will be the label that will display in your Gradebook. It will make this assignment easier to identify since longer titles will be truncated in the Gradebook view.
Save your settings.
Create the Automated Agent
Go to the ―Automate‖ tab to access the Agents console.
Click ―Add New Agent‖ to begin the process.
The first step is to name the Agent
Appendix VII 1152
Select ―Content Agent‖ as the Agent type.
Note: ―Content Agents‖ will work on content items in Lessons. These are items that are viewed or reviewed, (i.e. files, folders, and all content within them), taken (i.e. surveys or tests), and/ or require a submission (i.e. drop box, discussion post, survey, tests).
Notice that new choices will now display beneath the selected Agent. Click ―Select content to monitor‖ to designate the content item that will be used for this Agent.
Appendix VII 1153
A new window will appear. First select the ―Lesson Type‖ from the drop-down list. In this case, the item is a survey.
Tip: Notice all of the different content items that could be selected, including items that are not normally graded within the content item, such as files and folders. This same procedure could be used to assign a grade for viewing a file, link, webpage, etc.
Select ―Specific survey‖, click on the survey to be graded (in this case, there is only one to select from), and then click ―Add‖. .
Appendix VII 1154
Click ―Close Window‖ to continue the process.
Now that the survey has been selected, you need to indicate at what point the Agent will run. In this case, you need the Agent to run when the survey has been submitted; (i.e. students will receive the grade when they submit the survey).
Appendix VII 1155
The summary at the bottom displays the criteria that have been set up at this point of the process. Click ―Next‖ to continue.
The next screen defines to whom the Agent will apply. In this case, you want it to apply to all users and do not need to designate any specific criteria. Therefore, do not make any changes on this screen.
Note: There are a several ways that user criteria can be set up. Users could be restricted to specific users, or users with only student rights (for example), or only users on specific teams. Because you have already set up the only condition needed, (survey submission),and it pertains to all users, you do not need to define that further.
Appendix VII 1156
The bottom of this screen summarizes the criteria selected at this point. Click ―Next‖ to continue.
Note: There is an option to define more than one user criteria (―Add Another User Selection‖). This is not necessary in this case, but might apply to other situations.
On the next screen, designate the action to be taken when the Agent is run. The action type needed is ―Grade Assignment‖.
Appendix VII 1157
Selecting this action opens up other criteria that need to be designated. First , select the survey that is to be graded.
Tip: The Assignments displayed here are those that have already been set up, either by creating Assignments in the Gradebook itself, or when creating the content item. If you had not set up the Assignment when creating the survey, you could have set it up as a new Assignment in the Gradebook.
Next, fill in the other information about the Assignment. The point-value for the survey was already designated when setting up the survey. ―Grade For‖ ..―Event Originator‖ means that each student who triggers the Agent (―Event‖), i.e. by submitting the survey, will receive the grade. Click ―Add‖ to continue.
Appendix VII 1158
Finally, complete the other information about the Assignment. The choices here indicate that everyone who submits the survey will receive the full points as well as the comment. The ―locked‖ box was checked to prevent any grades from being over-written.
Click the ―Next‖ box to continue to the final section. Note that there is a summary of all criteria selected.
On the following screen, you will be able to review all settings and edit any as needed. Click ―Save‖ to complete the process.
Appendix VII 1159
Caution: If Agent type is edited, the entire process will need to be redone, as the other Agent types require a different set of criteria.
Returning to the Agent Console, you can see that the Agent is now ready to run when students submit their surveys. To check the results, try taking the survey and then check the grade in the Gradebook.
Note: The grades will NOT display in the results for that survey (Utilties > ―View, Grade, Delete Submissions‖: see example). They will ONLY appear in the Gradebook.
Appendix VII 1160
Course Management Tasks
This section contains procedures to help you in the management and maintenance of a course, and includes such things as grading, setting up calendar items, using course mail, adding announcements, and creating course back up.
Understanding Course Rights
Within any course or group, there are several access levels with rights that can be customized. Using different levels, the Course Editor or Administrator can limit access to specific content items as well as allow certain levels to perform specific functions. Some of the limitations are set by the system, and others can be changed by the Editor.
Course rights are set when users are enrolled into a course. The following rights can be assigned: these are listed from the lowest to highest access levels:
Authenticated Guest
Student
Team Leader
Mentor
Course Assistant
Course Editor
How You Can Limit Access in a Course
You limit access for different access levels by using specific settings within different sections of the course
Content items
Within the Access settings of all Content Items, you can specify who can view the item in the Viewable by field
Appendix VII 1161
You can limit access to different sections in Manage > Tab Settings. This allows you to designate the minimum rights needed to have access to the sections.
. Go to Manage > Tab settings
Appendix VII 1162
On the next page, use the drop-down list for each tab setting to designate the MINIMUM rights needed to access that section.
In this example, anyone can view the Home (Course) page; the minimum rights for the rest of the sections are either Students (Calendar, Lessons, Resources, Communicate, Report), Course/Group Editors (Automate) or Course/Group Assistants (Manage)
You can further limit the rights of any particular user by editing their permissions.
Go to Manage > Roster
Appendix VII 1163
Click the Edit box next to the user whose permissions you want to change.
On the next page, click the Permissions Tab
Appendix VII 1164
The next screen will allow you to change some settings. It will not allow you to give any permissions that are not within the access rights for the level of the user. Click the Save button at the bottom of the page when you are finished.
Authenticated Guest
An ―Authenticated Guest‖ is someone who has authenticated through the ANGEL system (i.e. has a user account in the ANGEL site) and either was enrolled into the course and assigned that right, or entered the course through the Search tool (Find course). This level has very limited access rights. They cannot view any student or
Appendix VII 1165
instructor tools and can only view content items that are made viewable to either ―Everyone‖ or ―Authenticated Guests‖.
You might use Authenticated Guest rights for someone that needed to see certain portions of the course, but was not a student in the course.
For example, it could be used to show the course to someone from another institution. You could allow them to see some of the content items, but not allow them to view any discussion forums or any other sections where student names might be revealed.
Note: If you want the course to be accessible to either anonymous (unauthenticated) or authenticated guests, you need to set guest access to either Anonymous or Authenticated Guest in Manage > General Course Settings > Access.
Student
Most of the enrollees in the course will have Student rights. Students normally have access to the Course, Calendar (if used), Lessons, Communicate, and Reports sections. They only have access to their own grades.
Team Leader
This designation would have the same access rights as Students. You can restrict any content items to this access level and above by designating Team Leader as the minimum Viewable By level in a content item setting. A Team Leader would not have any editing rights or access to grading.
Mentor
This level also has the same access rights as Student and might be used for a Librarian or Preceptor who does not need grading or editing privileges. As with the Team Leader,
Appendix VII 1166
you could restrict certain content items to be accessible only to this level and above by designating Mentor as the minimum Viewable By level in a content item setting.
Course Assistant
This access level would be reserved for Teaching / Graduate Assistants or other course members who need to be able to grade and/or take attendance. It does not allow for editing of content. They normally have access to the Manage tab as well as the other tabs available to Students. Within a content item, they have access to the Reports and the Utilities options.
If the Course Assistant only has responsibility for a specific group of students and not the entire class, you can restrict them to only grading that group.
Create a team with the group and the assigned Course Assistant as members.
See “How to Create Teams” for more information.
Go to Manage > Gradebook > Preferences
Appendix VII 1167
On the next page, check the box next to the Limit Course Assistants by Team option, then click Save.
Course Editor
This level has the full access rights and can also set the access rights for other course users. Users with these rights have full editing rights within the course and can create Agents. As with the other levels, some content items could be restricted by limiting it to users at this level. This is the level that is typically assigned to course faculty.
Appendix VII 1168
How to Customize Tabs
There are several options that can be used to change the way that the tabs display. You can choose which tab should be active when a user enters the course, you can rename a tab, and you can delete a tab from a user‘s view if it is not being used in your course.
Caution: If you change the display of the tabs, you need to advise the users within the course that these changes have been made to avoid any confusion, especially if these changes only pertain to your course(s). Users may be accustomed to the normal tab display and will need to know where they can find components within the course. They may also be confused if they are referring to tutorials that use the default names.
The default Student view of a course contains only 5 tabs: Course, Calendar, Lessons, Resources, Communicate, and Report
The Course page is like the course ―Home Page‖. By default, it contains the following nuggets: Activity at a Glance, Course Announcements, and Grades:
See “How to Customize the Course Page” to learn how add, delete and rearrange components (called ―nuggets‖) on this and the Resource and Communication pages.
The Calendar Page contains the Course Calendar:
Appendix VII 1169
The Lessons Page is where the course content, activities, and assessments are placed.
The Resources Page contains the Syllabus, links to Wikipedia and Google Search, Course Resources, and Institutional Resources. This page can be edited to have nuggets both added and deleted, as well as rearranged.
Appendix VII 1170
The Communicate page contains the Course Mail, Course Roster, and Course News and Announcements nuggets. It also can be edited and customized.
The Report tab opens the Reports Console. This allows students access to their grades, reports pertaining to their activity within the course, and also their milestone completions.
To customize the tabs, enter the course and go to Manage > Tab Settings.
Appendix VII 1171
The first option on the Tab Settings page is to determine what page will display when users enter the course. This is the Course page by default, but can be changed by using the drop-down list to specify a different page. In this example, you will leave the opening page to be the Course page. You do not need to designate anything in the ―Start URL‖ field.
Beneath the Start Tab Settings section, each tab is listed followed by a Label. The ―Tab ID‖ is the name that the ANGEL database used to denote each tab. The Label is the ―name‖ that displays for each tab. This can be changed for any of the tabs by putting a different name in the text box associated with the tab to be changed. The Content tab is identified with the Label ―Lessons‖:
Appendix VII 1172
For this example, you will change that name to ―Course Content‖ .
The Viewable By column determines what Rights users need to have to access each of the pages. To change a tab so that students will not see it, you can either change the Viewable By to ―Disabled‖ or to a level higher than Student. In this example, you will delete the Calendar from student view because it isn‘t being used in this course by changing the Viewable By setting to Course/Group Assistants.
Appendix VII 1173
Caution: Be very careful in designating any tab setting as ―Disabled‖, since that setting will remove it from everyone‘s view – including the Course Editors! If you should happen to disable the ―Manage‖ (Tools) tab, you would be unable (as Course Editor) to access the Manage page. (If you happen to disable any other tabs, you can still change them again by going back to the Tab Settings editor in Manage – but you could not do this if you no longer had access to the Manage tab.)
The URL fields are only used if you are specifying a different location for any of the tabs, in which case you would input the URL for that location.Click Save to continue.
Appendix VII 1174
The student view now does not have a calendar and the Lessons tab is changed:
Appendix VII 1175
How to Create a FAQ (Frequently-Asked Questions) Section in a
Course
One user-friendly way to supply information about a course and answer questions that you anticipate students will have is to create an FAQ section. This involves first adding a new tab called FAQs, creating the webpage for the section, and then linking the webpage to the new section so that when the student clicks on that tab, the webpage of information will appear.
Tip: Only ONE page can be linked to a new Section. If you need to have multiple pages, consider creating a webpage as a ―menu‖ for the other pages and then linking to those pages within that page.
Adding a New Tab:
Enter the course to which you want to add the FAQ section and go to Manage > Environmental Variables.
On the next page, click Add a Variable.
Appendix VII 1176
The Add Variable page will appear. Enter TABS as the Variable Name.
For Variable Value, carefully add the following exactly as it is written here: HOME=Course,CALENDAR=Calendar,FAQ=FAQs,CONTENT=Lessons, RESOURCES=Resources,INTOUCH=Communicate,REPORTS=Report, AGENTS=Automate,TOOLS=Manage
Note: In this example, FAQ=FAQs is the tab to be added. The tab name will be FAQs. You can name it something different later in the Tab Settings link within the Manage section. This will put the FAQ section between the Calendar and the Lessons sections. If you want it in a different location, then type the new tab information in the location where you want it to appear.
Appendix VII 1177
Click Save when you have finished.
When you return to the Course Environmental Variables page, click Exit Course Variables to continue.
Appendix VII 1178
Create the Web Page for the FAQ Section
You will be creating the webpage within ANGEL using the HTML Editor. However, you can create the webpage using other Web Editing software and then upload it to the course in the same location where you will create the webpage.
Remaining in the Manage section, click Course Files Manager
Appendix VII 1179
Click Add Content
On the next page, click ―Create a Folder‖ so that the page and any files linked to the page can be organized within one folder and can be easily located later.
Appendix VII 1180
Name the folder and then click OK
The folder is now created. Click on it to add content to it.
Appendix VII 1181
Click Add Content
Click ―Create a Page‖
Note: If you had already created a webpage to upload, you would choose ―Upload Files instead. If the webpage has links to other documents and/or any images, be sure to also upload those either using Drag-n-Drop or Upload Files.
On the next page, name the file.
Note: The file name needs to have an ―.html‖ extension on it to identify it as a webpage. When naming a file, keep the file name short with no spaces. If you want to use several words for the file name, separate them with a _ rather than a space.
Appendix VII 1182
Scroll to the bottom of the File Contents window and click HTML Editor.
The HTML Editor toolbar will appear at the top of the window. You can use the toolbar to format your page, much like a Word Processor.
Appendix VII 1183
When you have finished developing the page, click OK at the bottom of the window.
The page has now been created.
Appendix VII 1184
Linking the FAQ Page to the FAQ Section
The final step in the procedure is to have the FAQ page that you either created in ANGEL or uploaded into ANGEL appear when the FAQs tab is clicked
Within the FAQs folder, as shown in step 18, do a right mouse click on the faq.html file name. (With a Mac, click and hold). A menu will appear on the side.
If using Internet Explorer, click Copy Shortcut
If using Firefox: Click ―Copy link Location
Appendix VII 1185
‖
Click ―Exit Course Files‖
Staying within the Manage section, click Tab Settings
Appendix VII 1186
At the ―FAQ‖ section, paste the link location in the URL column (use Edit/paste from the browser menu, or do a CTRL-V ). This will add the file location for the new tab.
Note: If you wanted to rename the FAQs section, you could to that by replacing FAQs with the new name within the Label column.
Click Save to finish.
Appendix VII 1187
When the FAQs tab is selected, the new page appears.
Tip: An FAQ page could also be created and placed in an LOR and then linked from that LOR, either as a document within the Lessons tab or by created an FAQ tab as described above and then linking to the document in the LOR.
Appendix VII 1188
How to Check Student Activity Within a Course
There are two main reports that can be used to check student activity within a course. One of the reports generates data about a specific user while the other one collects data pertaining to a group of students.
Go to the Reports tab. This will open the Reports Console.
Select the Category of Report from the drop-down list. There are two different types of reports that might be chosen. You will demonstrate each one. The first one you might select is the Learner Profile.
Note: The Learner Profile category will generate a report about a specific user.
Appendix VII 1189
If you want to find out how many times a specific student has logged on, select the Logons option in the Reports column.
In the User column, select the student whose logons you are checking.
Appendix VII 1190
The Configure Report allows you to select the start date from which the report will begin checking. Note that there are many choices, or you can use the calendar to select a specific date.
The Ending Before list will allow you to specify the range needed for the report. In this case, you will leave the End at ―Now‖
Appendix VII 1191
Report View allows you to specify how the report will be formatted. A chart will give a bar graph of logons, Table will show all dates within the range specified with the number of logons by that student per date. Drill Down gives the most detailed information, as you will see.
Click Run to display the report.
The Report will now display. From this Report, you can see that the student first accessed the course on 1/14.
Appendix VII 1192
Clicking on the + beside each date that has logons listed will open up the Activity record for that date. In the example below, the + has already been clicked.
Note: Clicking any of the Activities that are links (as in Assignment 1 above) will return you to that activity.
The other report that can show logon activity is the WhoDunIt Report. In the Report Category, choose WhoDunIt from the drop-down list.
Appendix VII 1193
Choose Last Logon
Since this report is run for a group of Users, the selections for Users is different.
Appendix VII 1194
The next options allow you to configure the parameters for the report. First select whether you want to know which users either Have or Have Not logged on since a specified period of time. In this case, you are looking at users who have NOT logged on since last month.
Next, specify the time period that you need. In this case you will see who has not logged on in the past 21 days.
Last, specify the format for the report. Chart will display a bar graph; Table will display the names in a table format with the number of days since their last logon. Click Run to run the report.
In this instance, it has been 26 days since one student logged on, and two other students have never logged on (No Data).
The WhoDunIt report also allows for you to send a mail message to all users within the report. Choose Send Mail.
The Compose Mail screen will display. Note that all user names to whom the report is being sent are in the BCC: (―blind copy‖) section. Therefore, they will not see the other students that will receive this mail message.
Complete the mail message, including a subject and the message.
Appendix VII 1195
Since these students have not been logging in, it makes sense to have a copy of the message go to their external email account. Then click Send to finish.
Tip: The message illustrates the use of a ―token‖ – by inputting $FIRST_NAME$ , when each student receives the mail message, the ―$FIRST_NAME$ will be replaced with that student‘s name. (i.e. Ross Hart‘s message will begin with ―Dear Ross‖). This is a simple way to personalize the message.
Appendix VII 1196
How to Add or Remove a Student from a Course
Students can be added or removed from a course using the Rosters tool in the Manage tab. This document presumes that the student is already in the ANGEL database (that is, the student already has an ANGEL account). (The ability to add a student account to the ANGEL database may be restricted to those with system administrator rights in many institutions, so that procedure will not be demonstrated here).
Open the course and go to Manage > Roster.
This will open the Roster Editor. Click Add a User at the top of the screen.
Appendix VII 1197
Note: A common error here is to try to enter the name in the Roster Search window. However, this will ONLY search the names already in the course, so cannot be used to find students not currently in the course.
On the next page, type in the student‘s name or User ID (if known) in the Account Search window, and then click Search. You can search by last name, first name, part of a name, or user name to find the student.
Find the student‘s name from the results obtained, and then click the Select button.
On the next page, you will designate the rights needed by the user, as well as the title. In this case, you will give him Student rights, which is the default value.
For more information on the different types of rights, see “Understanding Course Rights.”
Select a title for the user. The default is ―Student‖. The title will display next to the user‘s name in the Roster and will also be displayed underneath the course name on the user‘s home page. The title does NOT determine any rights or permissions.
Appendix VII 1198
Note: If none of the Titles listed is appropriate for the user being added, you can use the Other button to create a new title. The title created will be limited to this course.
Select the other options required. ―Hidden‖ will keep the user‘s name from displaying on the Course Roster nugget. It will appear ―grayed out‖ on the Roster Editor.
―Disabled‖ will disable the user‘s access into the course, but will keep all associated data intact. The name will appear in red on the Roster Editor. Note that you can also assign the user to a group or several groups, and you also have the option to send an email advising the user of their being added to the course.
Click Save when you are finished.
Appendix VII 1199
The user has now been added to the course and will appear on the Roster.
Appendix VII 1200
To delete a user, again go to Manage > Roster to access the Roster Editor. Click the Delete box next to the user name to be deleted.
Note: When you delete a student, you will no longer be able to access any grades for the student or any other data associated with that student in the course. If the student should later be added back into the course, all data associated with them, including grades and submissions, will be accessible. Deleting students ONLY deletes them from the course, it does NOT delete their user accounts. The data associated with a student would only be completely deleted if the student‘s user account in ANGEL was deleted.
Tip: If you are unsure of whether or not to delete users from a course, consider disabling their access instead (using the Edit box). This keeps students within the course so that you will still see their grades and any reports associated with them, but does not allow the students to get into the course.
The next screen will ask you to confirm the deletion and also allows you the option of sending the student an email. Click Delete again to continue.
Appendix VII 1201
If you wanted to delete several students, you could check the boxes next to each of their names and then click the Delete Selected button at the bottom of the page.
Appendix VII 1202
How to Post an Announcement
Announcements are a very good way to convey important information to students that they will see as soon as they enter a course. Typically, the Announcement nugget is found on the Course page, as well as the Communicate page. Announcements can be targeted to be viewed by everyone who enters the course, by a specific team, or by a specific User. When creating (or editing) an Announcement, you can specify a date range during which the Announcement is visible.
Go to Communicate > Announcements
Note: You can also add an announcement by going to the Edit icon on the Course Announcement nugget on the Course page..
The Announcement Editor page will appear. Click Add Announcement.
Appendix VII 1203
Type your message in the window. The inline HTML Editor allows you to format your message.
Select the date range in which you want the Announcement to be viewable.
Note: The default is for Announcements to be viewable for one week.
Tip: Because a Start Date and End Date can be specified, you can create announcements in advance and schedule them to appear when needed. For example, you could schedule Announcements reminding students of specific assignment due dates or online test dates.
All announcements are ordered by the Start Date and time so you can change the order of announcements by changing the Start Date and time.
Specify who will be able to view the Announcement in the User dropdown menu. You can select ―Everyone‖, a specific Team, or an Individual User.
Click Save to post the Announcement.
Appendix VII 1204
The Announcement will be visible on the Course page during the Start and End Dates selected.
Appendix VII 1205
How to Add Assignment Dates to the Calendar
You can easily add both ―Assigned‖ dates and ―Due‖ dates to the calendar using the Milestones option within the settings for any activity. This means that they can be added to the calendar during the process of adding any new activity.
In this example, you will add an ―Assigned‖ date and a ―Due‖ date to a Discussion Forum. In the settings for the activity, go to the Assignments tab.
Note: This could be done either when first setting up the activity or using the Settings link once the activity has been created.
In the Milestones section, first select a ―Task Type‖. A Milestone can be marked as completed either manually (i.e. the instructor will manually mark the Milestone as being completed within the Milestone option in Reports) or as ―item completion‖ (i.e. as soon as the user submits the assignment, the Milestone will be marked as completed).
Leaving the Task Type as ―None‖ will not open the calendar option.
The Date Assigned and Date Due sections will open once the Task Type is selected. Put in the date that this assignment was assigned and check the box next to it. Do the same for the Date Due.
Note: Both dates do NOT have to be assigned. For example, if you do not want an ―Assigned‖ date to appear on the calendar, do not put in a date
Appendix VII 1206
and do not check the associated box.
Add any other settings needed for that activity and click Save.
The dates are now on the calendar.
Appendix VII 1207
When users move the mouse over any of the items on the calendar, they will see the rest of the information when in grid mode as above.
If they change the calendar format to List View
Appendix VII 1208
They will see all the dates and information at once.
If you need to add more information to the calendar postings, you will need to edit the posting. In the Grid view, the menu to select Edit will appear when you hover the mouse over the date item:
In List view, click the Edit link for that calendar item.
Appendix VII 1209
How to Link to Content Items from a Calendar Event
One of the more common events listed on a course calendar is the due date for a specific activity. However, you can also link the event on the calendar directly to the content item associated with it, using the inline HTML Editor.
In this example, you will link a Discussion forum assignment in the calendar directly to that forum within Lessons so that when users click on the event in the calendar, they can access a link that takes them to the Discussion Forum. To begin, click on the event on the calendar.
Note: This same procedure could be done when adding any event to the Calendar using the Add link within the Calendar.
Access the Edit link by hovering the mouse over the calendar event. Click the Edit link.
Go to the Notes section of the Edit Events page
Appendix VII 1210
Type in any text that explains the assignment, including the text that will hyperlink to the actual assignment.
Highlight the text that will be linked to the content item.
Click on the folder/hyperlink icon on the HTML Editor toolbar.
Note: The folder/hyperlink icon will link to items within the course.
Appendix VII 1211
A pop-up window will appear. Click on the Map tab.
This will display all of the tabs within the course. The Expand all link to display all of the items within the Lessons tab.
Appendix VII 1212
Click the content item associated with the Calendar event. In this example, you want to link to the Discussion Module 1 Discussion Forum, so you will click on that link.
The selected text is now linked to that content item.
Add any other settings needed and then click Save at the bottom of the Edit Settings page.
Appendix VII 1213
When users view the event in the calendar and roll the mouse over the event, the information now appears.
Clicking on the hyperlinked text (Discussion Module 1)…
Appendix VII 1214
…opens up that content item in Lessons.
Tip: Because you can link to anything within the course using the HTML Editor, you could put your entire schedule on the calendar as an alternative for students to access their course content.
If the user was viewing the calendar in the List view, it would appear as below.
Appendix VII 1215
How to Set Up Live Chat
Live Chat allows ANGEL users within a class to hold a ―live‖ (real-time) discussion. The ANGEL Live Chat nugget also includes access to a Whiteboard and Desktop Sharing. You can add an unlimited number of Live Chat ―rooms‖. Each instance can be configured for different teams.
Tip: If you had different groups working on Group Projects, you could create a Live Chat room for each group and give them another option for communicating with each other. If you also chose the option to log the Live Chat, users will have a transcript of the chat to refer to later.
Go to Communicate > Live Chat
―Hover‖ the mouse over the end of the Live Chat toolbar so that the ―Edit‖ and other icons appear. Click the Edit icon (looks like a pencil)
On the following page, click Add a Live Chat
Input all information on the next page.
Title: Identifies the Chat
Description: Optional; could use to describe the function for the chat
Tracking: ―On‖ will create a log of each chat session that can be reviewed later by all members of that Chat
Team: Allows to specify team to use Chat. Selecting ALL will make it available to all users
Viewable by: The minimum rights needed to view this Chat (usually set at Students)
Appendix VII 1216
Start Date / End Date: Setting either or both will make it available (and/or unavailable) at the dates and times set. Setting neither will make it continuously available.
Click Save to save it.
The Live Chats Editor page will display, showing the newly-created Chat. Click Exit Live Chats Editor to continue.
The Live Chat now appears on the Communicate Page
Appendix VII 1217
Appendix VII 1218
How to Set Mail Privileges Within a Course
The default privileges within Mail allow all users full access to emailing anyone within the course. However, the instructor can limit these privileges according the different course rights.
To set mail privileges within a course:
Within the course, go to Communicate. In the Course Mail nugget toolbar, hover over the end so that the Edit icon appears and then click it..
Note: The Edit button is only available to Course Editors.
The following page allows you to designate the user rights for each option.
Appendix VII 1219
The Default Minimum rights is for everyone to have each option. To select a different level, use the drop-down list next to each option.
For more information on Course Rights, see “Understanding Course Rights”
Send to Internet E-mail: Allows users to forward mail messages to the Internet E-mail address stored in ANGEL for mail recipients. Those who have this right will have the option to select whether a copy should go to the recipient‘s Internet e-mail account when composing the mail message.
Note: While mail messages within ANGEL can be sent to the Internet e-mail address associated with users within ANGEL, no e-mail messages from the Internet can be sent to ANGEL mail. Also mail messages from ANGEL can ONLY be sent to the e-mail addresses already associated with users within ANGEL.
Send to All Faculty/Leaders: Permits users to send mail to anyone with Course Editor rights within a course.
Send to All Student/Members: Permits users to send mail to anyone with Students rights within a course.
Send to Teams: Permits users to send mail to a Team, which would include all members of that team.
Send to Individuals: Permits users to send mail to any individual, including all students and faculty.
Reply to All: Permits users to use the ―Reply to All‖ option when replying to a mail message.
Appendix VII 1220
In Message options: Checking Send a Copy to Each Recipient’s Internet E-mail will automatically send a copy of every mail message sent within the course to the recipient‘s Internet E-mail account.
Appendix VII 1221
How to Create Folders in Course Mail
The default folders in Course Mail include Inbox, Trash, Draft, and Sent. You can set up additional folders and move mail into those folders. This might be done to place mail into logical groups. For example, you might want all mail associated with a particular course project to be kept in one place.
To create folders in course mail:
Within any of your courses, go to Communicate > View Inbox
On the next page, click the small triangle on the side of My Folders.
Select New from the drop-down list.
Appendix VII 1222
A pop-up window will appear.
Input the name of the folder and then click Save.
Tip: When naming folders, remember that the folders will display in ALL your courses so you want to be sure you can distinguish between the different courses. In this example, you named the folder ―Team A‖ so that all of Team A‘s mail will go there. If you had a Team A in another course and wanted to also keep all that team‘s mail separated into a folder, you would need to have a designation so that you wouldn‘t confuse the two.
Appendix VII 1223
The new folder appears beneath the My Folder label. It will appear in the Course Mail for all courses belonging to the user who created it.
When new mail arrives, it will automatically be placed into the Inbox.
To move the mail into a different folder, click the box next to the mail, and then select Send to Folder in the Actions drop-down list.
Appendix VII 1224
Click Go.
A pop-up window will appear so that you can designate where the mail is to be moved. Note that you have a choice of moving the mail or copying it. If you choose the copy option, the original will remain in the inbox with a copy going into the designated folder. Click Continue to finish.
The following screen shows that the Mail is no longer in the Inbox but has been moved to the Team A folder.
Appendix VII 1225
Appendix VII 1226
How to Share and Edit Files Among Multiple Users
Files can be shared and edited between several persons. How to best accomplish this will depend upon the Rights of the persons needing to share the files. If everyone involved has Course Editor Rights, the answer is simple: everyone can edit anything anywhere within the course!
However, if the need is for students to be able to share and edit files, or a mix of students and faculty, a different approach is needed. Student Rights do not allow for the sharing and editing of course files. One way to accomplish this would be to use the file-sharing capabilities of Teams.
Go to Manage > Teams
This will open the Teams Editor: click ―Add a Team‖
Note: The assumption here is that the members of the Team are already selected, which is why the ―Random Team Generator‖ was not used.
Appendix VII 1227
The New Team screen will appear. Give the team a name; The rest of the options in the General Settings section are optional.
In the Team Tools section, change ―File Sharing‖ to ―Enabled‖.
In the Quota field, put in the maximum file size for the total files to be shared. This size will be based on the types of files being shared, the number of files, and your institutional policy.
Click Save to continue.
The next screen will allow you to add members to the Team. Check next to each person that you want to include in the Team, then click ―Add Selected‖
Appendix VII 1228
Click the Done button to continue.
Note: In this example, there were very few students in the course. If this was a much larger course, there could be more than one screen of names. You can only add one screen of names at a time; use the ―Add Selected‘ button to choose the names on the screen, then go to the next screen and again use the ―Add Selected‖ button to choose the next set of names. Click the ―Done‖ button when ALL team members have been added.
Appendix VII 1229
Note: Any course editors for the course do not need to be selected as Team members; they will be able to access the Team Files even without being a member of the team.
The Teams Editor screen now shows that Team A has been created and has 6 members.
Go to the ―Communicate‖ section to see the Team Files nugget.
Appendix VII 1230
To add files, click the Team Files link. On the next screen, click Add Content.
All team members can now upload files, add folders, or create a file (using the HTML editor) similar to what can be done with files and folders in Lessons.
Appendix VII 1231
Because all team members have access to this area, they can easily share and edit any files within.
Tip: Establish a protocol as to how files will be named and renamed, if edited, to be able to track who has contributed.
Tip: Another option for sharing files among non-editors would be to create a Group and give all Group members, including students, editing rights. Anything created within a Group can be imported into a course, as long as the Course Editor has editing rights to both the Course and the Group.
Tip: Two other ways that Students can share files:
In a Drop box, setting Review mode to Peer Review
Allowing students to attach files to a Discussion Forum post..
Appendix VII 1232
How to Use the HTML Editor: Changing Fonts and Colors
The HTML Editor works very much like a Word Processor and is a WYSIWYG-type editor (What You See Is What You Get). You can change fonts, add bolding or italicize, align text, and add colors. In this example, you will use the Create a Page option to demonstrate the HTML Editor. You can also use it by editing an already-created page.
Go to the Course and the location where you want to add a page and click Add Content. On the following page, click Page.
You will then be able to add the settings and the page text. Add a title for the page.
In the Page Text window, add your text.
Appendix VII 1233
The first thing you will do is to center the title. Highlight the text to be centered, and then
click the icon.
Next you will Bold the same text by keeping it highlighted and clicking the B icon. You can also italicize and underline text by using their respective icons.
Caution: Use ―underline‖ sparingly, if at all. On the web, underlined text generally indicates a hyperlink. If you underline text that is not a hyperlink, you may confuse your users.
Appendix VII 1234
To change the color of the text, you continue to keep the text highlighted, and click the Text Color box.
A drop-down ―palette‖ of colors will appear. Select the text color that you want; here you are selecting a dark purple color.
Tip: Keep a good contrast between the background color and the text color, i.e. if the background is light, choose a dark text. This will make the text much easier to read and will also enable anyone with a color deficiency to be able to read the text. (While someone who is unable to see blue may not see the text color you intended, they would still be able to read it)
You can change the font by keeping the text highlighted and clicking the Font button.
Appendix VII 1235
A drop-down list of all available fonts will appear. The appearance of each one is illustrated. Here you are choosing Arial.
Note: You may wonder why the choice of fonts is so limited, unlike what you may see in other programs. When users view web pages, they can only view the fonts that they already have installed in their computers. If the font specified is not installed in their computers, the text will revert to a default font, often Times New Roman. Best practice is to choose a common font that the vast majority of users will already have installed. The fonts in the HTML Editor are the most commonly found fonts.
Tip: A sans-serif font is an easier to read when viewed on a computer screen. Sans-serif fonts include Arial, Tahoma, Comic Sans, and Verdana. A serif font is easier to read in print, especially when there is a lot of text. Common serif fonts are Times New Roman and Courier New.
Appendix VII 1236
The final change will be to make the size of the text larger. Click the Size button.
A drop-down list will appear of the sizes available. You will select Medium.
This is how the text appears after these changes:
Appendix VII 1237
How to Backup a Course
When Backups Should Be Done
Schools may have different policies as to when backups are to be done and when (or if) backups for all courses are done on the system level. However, even if system backups are routinely done, they cannot meet the needs for each course, unless backups were scheduled 24/7!! Therefore, it is up to each instructor to determine when to do a backup for their individual course(s) and to do their own backups.
Some circumstances when backups might be warranted:
Before adding new content to a course or deleting any content
Note: This would ensure that a backup was available in case any content is accidentally deleted during the addition of new content.
After adding new content to a course
Note: This would ensure that a backup contains the latest version of the course.
After adding grades
Note: This would ensure that the backup contains the latest grades. If data was lost for any reason, reconstructing and regarding could be difficult.
ANYTIME that data that you do not want to lose has been added! You might want to routinely backup your course once a week
Backing Up a Course
Go to Manage > Backup/Restore
Appendix VII 1238
Click the ―Backup Now‖ button to begin the process.
The next screen will show the process as it is running.
Appendix VII 1239
When the process has completed, the ―clocks‖ will be replaced with green circles with ―checks‖ in them. Click the ―OK‖ button to continue.
The next screen will show that the backup was successful. There are now more options available: ―Restore Backup‖ and ―Download Backup‖. These options are added to this screen after a backup has been done for the first time.
You may want to save the backup to another location, such as the hard drive on a computer, a flash/thumb drive, or a CD. Should anything compromise the data on the server, you would still have an intact backup.
To save the backup to another location, click the ―Download Backup‖ button.
Appendix VII 1240
Note: You may wonder exactly how large the backup file is, since you need to ensure you have enough file space to save it. In the above example, it says it is 3886671 bytes with is the same as about 3887 KB or approximately 3.9 MB (1000 bytes = 1 KB; 1000 KB = 1 MB). If you had a flash drive that held 1GB (1000 MB = 1 GB), you could download about 250 copies of this backup file!
Doing so will open up a pop-up window asking whether you want to ―Open‖ or ―Save‖ (or Cancel) the backup file. Click the ―Save‖ button.
This option will require you to designate where you want the file to be saved. It will also allow you to rename the file if you wish. In this case, you are saving it in the course folder on the ―C‖ drive. Once it is saved, it could be burned to a CD or DVD. It could also have been saved directly to a removable storage
Appendix VII 1241
Note: If you are using FireFox as a browser, it will default to saving the file to your desktop, unless you have changed the settings to download it elsewhere..
Disk
.
Note: The backup file can only be used to RESTORE a course to the way that it was when the backup was created. You cannot make changes to any content within the backup file.
Appendix VII 1242
How to Activate/Deactivate a Course
By default, many institutions create their course shells in a ―Disabled‖ state. Students cannot view any of their courses when they are ―disabled‖. This allows the course designer / faculty to develop the course without students accessing it until it is ready. Once the course is ready for students to access it, it must be ―enabled‖ or activated.
Check the course listing in ―Courses‖ on your Home page in ANGEL to see if the course is ―Disabled‖. It will appear beneath the course title.
In 7.3 the default setting is that all disabled courses do not appear on the course list unless the Course settings are changed to see them. If your institution has not changed this default, you may not be able to see your disabled courses. See “How to See Your Disabled Courses” to change the settings.
Open the course; go to the ―Manage‖ tab and click ―General Course Settings‖
Appendix VII 1243
Select the Access tab
Note that Member Access is set to ―Editors Only‖. Using the drop-down list, change to ―All Members‖ and then click ―Save‖
Appendix VII 1244
NOTE: The ―Editors Only‖ setting for ―Member Access‖ signifies that only Course Editors can access the course. This is what designates the course as ―Disabled‖
Changing the setting to All Members will make the course visible to anyone enrolled in the course on their Home page.
TIP: ―Guest Access‖: ―None‖ means that only people listed on the roster can view this course.‖
―Search Engines‖ set to ―No‖ means that this course will not display in a ―Find a Course‖ search.
Both of these settings restrict the access to this course.
If the Guest Access was set to ―Authenticated‖ or ―Anonymous‖ it could allow others into the course. They would be able to view any content item NOT set to be viewed by ―Students Only‖.
They would be able to find the course via a ―Find a course‖ search if that option was set to ―Yes‖ or via a direct URL link to the course.
Returning to the Home page, note that now the ―Disabled‖ has disappeared from the course listing, indicating that students can access the course.
Appendix VII 1245
TIP: If you get calls from students at the beginning of the semester telling you that they cannot find your course, the first thing to check is whether or not the course is still ―disabled‖!
TIP: Reverse this procedure to prevent students from accessing the course once the course is over.
Appendix VII 1246
How to Archive and Export a Course
By archiving a course, you have a complete copy of the course with all student data within it. Should it ever need to be restored, it can be restored from the archived copy that has been saved.
Archiving a Course
Go to Manage .> Export Wizard
Select the ―ANGEL Archive‖ on the next page.
Appendix VII 1247
The next screen will allow you to choose the data that you wish to archive. To preserve all data (grades, student assignment submissions, discussion postings, etc) in the course, leave everything checked.
Click the ―Export‖ button at the bottom of the screen to continue.
The next screen will show the progress of the export process.
Appendix VII 1248
Note: The sections that are still processing have a ―clock‖ icon that will change to a ―checkmark‖ when it is complete. See ―Lessons\Content‖ and ―Standard Associations‖ in the above illustration.
Once all sections have been archived, the ―Download‖ and ―Done‖ buttons will be available. Click the ―Download‖ button to save the archive to another location. This might be into a folder on your computer‘s hard drive or to removable storage media, such as a ―thumb‖ drive.
Note: Once the file has been downloaded to a folder on your computer, it could also be written to a CD or DVD.
Appendix VII 1249
This option will require you to designate where you want the file to be saved. It will also allow you to rename the file if you wish. In this case, you are saving it in the course folder on the ―C‖ drive. Note that the file name ends with ―zip‖.
The archive has now been created. It can be used to restore a course with all data intact or to populate a new course.
Appendix VII 1250
How to Populate Course Content into a New Course Shell
There are several ways to add course content from a previously-developed course into a new course shell.
Caution: Whenever importing content into a course, always ensure that you are in the correct course. All of these procedures could overwrite content already within a course. Note the options available for overwriting content and choose them with care.
Copy Course:
A very simple method is to use the Copy Course option within the Import Wizard. This can be done as long as the instructor has course editing rights to both the course being copied TO and the course being copied FROM. It will copy ALL content from one course into another WITHOUT any student data.
Refer to the ―How to Copy Content from One Course to Another‖ tutorial for the ―Copy Course‖ option
Importing a Saved Archive File
Tip: This procedure is useful if the instructor does not have course editing rights to the course with the content to be used but does have access to the archive file, or when a course is no longer available on the ANGEL server and a downloaded archive is available.
Enter the course that you want to import content. Go to Manage > Import Wizard
Appendix VII 1251
Click ―Content Package‖
Note: This same option is used to import a test bank from many exam programs, such as ExamView® and import content other course management systems such as BlackBoard™
On the following screen, click the ―Browse‖ button to find the file to be imported.
Appendix VII 1252
Find the file to be imported and then click the ―Open‖ button in the pop-up window.
Note: Note that in this example, there are 2 files available. The other file has a ―bak‖ extension, which indicates that it is a downloaded backup of the course. The file with the ―zip‖ extension is the file that you archived. However, a current and complete backup file could also be used to populate a course using this same procedure.
Click the ―Upload File‖ button.
Appendix VII 1253
Caution: You would only check the ―overwrite existing files‖ option if the course contained content that you want to have deleted when the new content is uploaded.
A pop-up window will appear that shows that the file is being uploaded. The process could take several minutes if the file is very large.
Once the file has finished uploading, a screen will appear showing that the upload was successful. Click the ―OK‖ button to continue.
Appendix VII 1254
The following screen will allow you to designate the portions of the course content to be imported.
Note: The archive file that you have uploaded may contain student records, grades, emails, submissions, discussion forum postings, etc, depending upon the options selected when the archive was created. Uncheck the ―User Data‖ column so that they will not be imported into the new course. All assignments will remain, but will not contain any student submissions.
You may also want to uncheck Calendar Items and Announcements if you do not want these in the new course.
Click the ―Import Data‖ button at the bottom of the list when finished.
Appendix VII 1255
The next screen will show the progress of the import. When all icons have changed to green circles with checks, the process has finished.
Once it has finished, click the ―OK‖ button.
The process is now complete.
Appendix VII 1256
Importing Content from a Master Course
Creating a Master Course is advisable for courses that are being taught frequently. It allows you to create a complete course as the ―Master‖ and then import it directly into a new course. It never contains any student data. This is might be preferable to continually copying courses over into new courses semester after semester which could potentially lead to some degradation of links and data.
Master Courses are also a good solution for a course that has many sections that are taught by different faculty. A core group of faculty could develop the Master Course and then make it available to all faculty teaching that course. Once the Master Course has been imported into a course shell, faculty can edit content within that course.
Create and develop the Master Course. Once a Master Course has been added, it can be developed as any other course.
Note: Follow your school policy and procedure for having the Master Course shell created. This is often the responsibility of the ANGEL Administrator or someone else with System Administration rights. See ―How to Set Up and Use a Master Course‖ for more information.
To import the Master Course that has been developed, open the new course to be populated and go to Manage > Import Wizard
Appendix VII 1257
On the next screen, click ―Master Course‖
On the following screen, select the Master Course that you want to have imported. The drop-down list will list any Master Course available to be imported to this course.
Appendix VII 1258
Some Master Courses will require a PIN to allow them to be selected and then imported. If a PIN is required, you would enter it first in the field beneath the ―Available Master Courses‖ list.
Uncheck any of the options that do not apply and then click ―Import‖.
TIP: If this is an empty course, you would not need to check the ―backup course before import‖ option or the ―replace all existing content‖ option, since they would not apply.
The ―migrate Quizzes to Assessments‖ option might be preferable if the course being copied from used the Quiz format and you wished to change to the newer and more feature-rich ―Assessments‖ format.
Appendix VII 1259
CAUTION: If you choose to ―replace all existing content‖, it means that any content already added to the course will be overwritten. Leave it unchecked to preserve that content, if any.
If you chose the ―Migrate quizzes to Assessments‖ option, you will see a pop-up window asking if you want to backup any quizzes before migrating them to assessments.
TIP: Creating a backup before changing formats is generally a very good idea!
The screen that follows will show the progress of the copy course process. The time this takes could vary according to the amount of content being copied. Click ―OK‖ when it has finished.
The content has now been imported into the new course.
Tip No matter what method is used to import content, it is a good idea to ensure that the import was successful and that there has been no duplication of content, especially in the Gradebook, Calendar, and/or Announcements.
Appendix VII 1260
How to Use the Copy Course Wizard to Copy Content from One
Course to Another
Using the Copy Course wizard in ANGEL allows you to copy all course content from one course to another. This includes all items in Lessons, Calendar postings, Announcements, the course Syllabus, and the Gradebook. Student data, including the course roster, discussion postings, quiz and drop box submissions, grades, and mail are NOT copied during this procedure. The procedure can also be used to copy content from an LOR or Master Course. You need to have Course Editor rights for both the course that is being copied FROM and the course into which the content is being copied.
NOTE: This procedure is used when you need to copy everything from one course, LOR, or Master Course to another, excluding student data. It is an ―all or nothing‖ process. If you only need to copy certain content items from one course to another, use the ―Import from Course or Group‖ or ―Import from Learning Object Repository‖ options in Lessons
TIP: The Copy Course procedure is useful when teaching more than one section of the same course. Develop one section as completely as possible, and then copy it to the other section(s). It can also be used to copy a course from one semester to the next.
Open the course that is to receive the copied content. This is usually an empty course shell.
Go to the ―Manage‖ tab and click ―Import Wizard‖ in the Data Management section
CAUTION: Ensure that you are in the correct course. Accidently copying your EMPTY course over the course that you wanted to copy FROM could erase everything in that course, leaving you with two empty courses!
Appendix VII 1261
Click ―Copy Course‖
From the drop-down list on the following screen, choose the course that you want to copy the content FROM.
NOTE: You must have course editor rights in the course that you are copying FROM, or you will not see the course listed.
Appendix VII 1262
Uncheck any of the options that do not apply and then click ―Import‖.
TIP: If this is an empty course, you would not need to check the ―backup course before import‖ option or the ―replace all existing content‖ option, since they would not apply.
The ―migrate Quizzes to Assessments‖ option might be preferable if the course being copied from used the Quiz format and you wished to change to the newer and more feature-rich ―Assessments‖ format.
CAUTION: If you choose to ―replace all existing content‖, it means that any content already added to the course will be overwritten. Leave it unchecked to preserve that content, if any.
If you chose the ―Migrate quizzes to Assessments‖ option, you will see a pop-up window asking if you want to backup any quizzes before migrating them to assessments.
TIP: Creating a backup before changing formats is generally a very good idea!
Appendix VII 1263
The screen that follows will show the progress of the copy course process. The time this takes could vary according to the amount of content being copied. Click ―OK‖ when it has finished.
